No.

2B308-309EN

OPERATION MANUAL
FOR
INTERVENTIONAL ANGIOGRAPHY SYSTEM

MODEL INFX-8000V/B, INFX-8000V/Y,

INFX-8000V/P
(2B308-309EN)

IMPORTANT!
Read and understand this manual before operating
the equipment. After reading, keep this manual in an
easily accessible place.

 CANON MEDICAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION 2020

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Issued: 2020-01
Introduction

This operation manual describes the operating procedures for Alphenix

INFX-8000V/B, INFX-8000V/Y, INFX-8000V/P (*1) interventional
angiography systems. To ensure safe and correct operation of the system,
read the operation manual carefully and obtain a good understanding of the
system before starting operation. For details, contact your service
representative.

*1) The supplemental symbols (alphanumeric characters after the slash)

appended to the end of the model name differ depending on whether the
system is to be used in the USA, in Canada, or in other countries. For
details, refer to "How to Use This Operation Manual".

Trademarks
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.

Alphenix is a trademark of Canon Medical Systems Corporation.

This manual may include trademarks and registered trademarks of other companies.

Note that the ™ mark and the  mark may or may not be used in this manual.

IMPORTANT!

1. No part of this manual may be copied or reprinted, in whole or in part,

without prior written permission.

2. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice
and without legal obligation.

3. The contents of this manual are correct to the best of our knowledge.
Please inform us of any ambiguous or erroneous descriptions, missing
information, etc.

No. 2B308-309EN
Intellectual Property

1. Availability of This Software and Related Documents Is

Restricted
The software used for this system includes software owned by Canon
Medical Systems Corporation and licensed to Canon Medical Systems
Corporation by a Licensor.

(1) The software and related documents must be used only for this system.

(2) The intellectual property of this software and related documents is not
assigned to you.

(3) You must not copy the software or documents, nor modify the software in
whole or in part.

(4) You must not recompile or reassemble the software.

(5) You must not assign, disclose, transfer, or sublicense the software or
documents to a third party.

(6) The software is subject to the U.S. and Japanese Export Administration
Laws and Regulations and you must not export or re-export the software in
whole or in part unless properly authorized by the U.S. or Japanese
government.

(7) The information in the documents, or programs in the software are subject to
change without notice.

(8) The licensor shall have no liability for any express or implied warranties or
any indirect, incidental, special, punitive, or consequential damages related
to the software and related documents.

2. Agreement for Microsoft Software

Read the end-user license agreement for Microsoft software on the following
pages.

No. 2B308-309EN
3
 Last updated November 2018

MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS

WINDOWS 10 IOT ENTERPRISE & MOBILE (ALL EDITIONS)

IF YOU LIVE IN (OR IF YOUR PRINCIPAL PLACE OF BUSINESS IS IN) THE UNITED
STATES, PLEASE READ THE BINDING ARBITRATION CLAUSE AND CLASS ACTION
WAIVER IN SECTION 8. IT AFFECTS HOW DISPUTES ARE RESOLVED.

Thank you for choosing Microsoft!

Depending on how you obtained the Windows software, this is a license agreement between
(i) you and the device manufacturer or software installer that distributes the software with your
device; or (ii) you and Microsoft Corporation (or, based on where you live or if a business where
your principal place of business is located, one of its affiliates) if you acquired the software from
a retailer. Microsoft is the device manufacturer for devices produced by Microsoft or one of its
affiliates, and Microsoft is the retailer if you acquired the software directly from Microsoft.

This agreement describes your rights and the conditions upon which you may use the Windows
software. You should review the entire agreement, including any supplemental license terms
that accompany the software and any linked terms, because all of the terms are important and
together create this agreement that applies to you. You can review linked terms by pasting the
(aka.ms/) link into a browser window.

By accepting this agreement or using the software, you agree to all of these terms, and
consent to the transmission of certain information during activation and during your use
of the software as per the privacy statement described in Section 3. If you do not accept
and comply with these terms, you may not use the software or its features. You may
contact the device manufacturer or installer, or your retailer if you purchased the software
directly, to determine its return policy and return the software or device for a refund or credit
under that policy. You must comply with that policy, which might require you to return the
software with the entire device on which the software is installed for a refund or credit, if any.

1. Overview.

a. Applicability. This agreement applies to the Windows software that is preinstalled

on your device, or acquired from a retailer and installed by you, the media on which
you received the software (if any), any fonts, icons, images or sound files included
with the software, and also any Microsoft updates, upgrades, supplements or
services for the software, unless other terms come with them. It also applies to
Windows apps developed by Microsoft that provide functionality such as mail,
calendar, contacts, music and news that are included with and are a part of
Windows. If this agreement contains terms regarding a feature or service not
available on your device, then those terms do not apply.

b. Additional terms. Depending on your device’s capabilities, how it is configured,

and how you use it, additional Microsoft and third party terms may apply to your use
of certain features, services and apps.

(i) Some Windows apps provide an access point to, or rely on, online services,
and the use of those services is sometimes governed by separate terms and
privacy policies, such as the Microsoft Services Agreement at (aka.ms/msa).
You can view these terms and policies by looking at the service terms of use
or the app’s settings, as applicable; please read them. The services may not
be available in all regions.

(ii) The manufacturer or installer may also preinstall apps, which will be subject
to separate license terms.

No. 2B308-309EN
4
 (iii) The software may include third party software such as Adobe Flash Player
that is licensed under its own terms. You agree that your use of Adobe Flash
Player is governed by the license terms for Adobe Systems Incorporated at
(aka.ms/adobeflash). Adobe and Flash are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.

(iv) The software may include third party programs that are licensed to you under
this agreement, or under their own terms. License terms, notices and
acknowledgements, if any, for the third party program can be view at
(aka.ms/thirdpartynotices).

2. Installation and Use Rights.

a. License. The software license is permanently assigned to the device with which
you acquired the software. You many only use the software on that device.

b. Device. In this agreement, “device” means a physical hardware system) with an

internal storage device capable of running the software. A hardware partition or
blade is considered to be a device.

c. Restrictions. The manufacturer or installer and Microsoft reserve all rights (such as
rights under intellectual property laws) not expressly granted in this agreement. For
example, this license does not give you any right to, and you may not:

(i) use or virtualize features of the software separately;

(ii) publish, copy (other than the permitted backup copy), rent, lease, or lend the
software;

(iii) transfer the software;

(iv) work around any technical restrictions or limitations in the software;

(v) use the software as server software, for commercial hosting, make the
software available for simultaneous use by multiple users over a network,
install the software on a server and allow users to access it remotely, or
install the software on a device for use only by remote users;

(vi) reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the software, or attempt to do

so, except and only to the extent that the foregoing restriction is (a) permitted
by applicable law; (b) permitted by licensing terms governing the use of open
source components that may be included with the software; or (c) required to
debug changes to any libraries licensed under the GNU Lesser General
Public License which are included with and linked to by the software; and

(vii) when using Internet-based features you may not use those features in any
way that could interfere with anyone else’s use of them, or to try to gain
access to or use any service, data, account, or network, in an unauthorized
manner.

No. 2B308-309EN
5
d. Multi use scenarios.

(i) Multiple versions. If when acquiring the software, you were provided with
multiple versions (such as 32-bit and 64-bit versions), you may install and
activate only one of those versions at a time.

(ii) Multiple or pooled connections. Hardware or software you use to multiplex

or pool connections, or reduce the number of devices or users that access or
use the software, does not reduce the number of licenses you need. You may
only use such hardware or software if you have a license for each instance of
the software you are using.

(iii) Device connections. You may allow up to 20 other devices to access the
software installed on the licensed device for the purpose of using the
following software features: file services, print services, Internet information
services, and Internet connection sharing and telephony services on the
licensed device. The 20 connection limit applies to devices that access the
software indirectly through “multiplexing” or other software or hardware that
pools connections. You may allow any number of devices to access the
software on the licensed device to synchronize data between devices. This
section does not mean, however, that you have the right to install the
software, or use the primary function of the software (other than the features
listed in this section), on any of these other devices.

(iv) Remote access. Users may access the licensed device from another device
using remote access technologies, but only on devices separately licensed to
run the same or higher edition of this software.

(v) Remote assistance. You may use remote assistance technologies to share
an active session without obtaining any additional licenses for the software.
Remote assistance allows one user to connect directly to another user’s
computer, usually to correct problems.

(vi) POS application. If the software is installed on a retail point of service device,
you may use the software with a point of service application (“POS
Application”). A POS Application is a software application which provides only
the following functions: (i) process sales and service transactions, scan and
track inventory, record and/or transmit customer information, and perform
related management functions, and/or (ii) provide information directly and
indirectly to customers about available products and services. You may use
other programs with the software as long as the other programs: (i) directly
support the manufacturer’s specific use for the device, or (ii) provide system
utilities, resource management, or anti-virus or similar protection. For
clarification purposes, an automated teller machine (“ATM”) is not a retail
point of service device.

(vii) Cloud Computing Devices. If your device uses Internet browsing

functionality to connect to and access cloud hosted applications: (i) no
desktop functions may run locally on the device, and (ii) any files that result
from the use of the desktop functions may not be permanently stored on the
system. “Desktop functions,” as used in this agreement, means a consumer
or business task or process performed by a computer or computing device.
This includes but is not limited to email, word processing, spreadsheets,
database, scheduling, network or internet browsing and personal finance.

(viii) Desktop Functions. If your system performs desktop functions, then you
must ensure that they: (i) are only used to support the application, and
(ii) operate only when used with the application.

No. 2B308-309EN
6
 e. Windows 10 IoT Enterprise Features for Development and Testing Only

(i) Windows 10 Containers. You may only use Windows 10 Containers for
commercial purposes and activities with Microsoft Azure IoT Edge. You may
use any number of virtual operating system environments instantiated as
Windows 10 Containers by the Microsoft Azure IoT Edge Runtime on the
device.

(ii) Device Health Attestation. You may only implement Device Health
Attestation in a commercial use if you execute a Microsoft Windows IoT Core
Services Agreement at:
https://azure.microsoft.com/en-us/services/windows-10-iot-core/.

f. Specific Use. The manufacturer designed the licensed device for a specific use.
You may only use the software for that use.

3. Privacy; Consent to Use of Data. Your privacy is important to us. Some of the software
features send or receive information when using those features. Many of these features
can be switched off in the user interface, or you can choose not to use them. By accepting
this agreement and using the software you agree that Microsoft may collect, use, and
disclose the information as described in the Microsoft Privacy Statement available at
(aka.ms/privacy), and as may be described in the user interface associated with the
software features.

4. Authorized Software and Activation. You are authorized to use this software only if you
are properly licensed and the software has been properly activated with a genuine
product key or by other authorized method. When you connect to the Internet while using
the software, the software will automatically contact Microsoft or its affiliate to confirm the
software is genuine and the license is associated with the licensed device. You can also
activate the software manually by Internet or telephone. In either case, transmission of
certain information will occur, and Internet, telephone and SMS service charges may
apply. During activation (or reactivation that may be triggered by changes to your device’s
components), the software may determine that the installed instance of the software is
counterfeit, improperly licensed or includes unauthorized changes. If activation fails the
software will attempt to repair itself by replacing any tampered Microsoft software with
genuine Microsoft software. You may also receive reminders to obtain a proper license for
the software. Successful activation does not confirm that the software is genuine or
properly licensed. You may not bypass or circumvent activation. To help determine if your
software is genuine and whether you are properly licensed, see (aka.ms/genuine). Certain
updates, support, and other services might only be offered to users of genuine Microsoft
software.

5. Updates. You may obtain updates only from Microsoft or authorized sources, and
Microsoft may need to update your system to provide you with those updates. The
software periodically checks for system and app updates, and may download and install
them for you. To the extent automatic updates are enabled on your device, by accepting
this agreement, you agree to receive these types of automatic updates without any
additional notice.

6. Geographic and Export Restrictions. If your software is restricted for use in a particular
geographic region, then you may activate the software only in that region. You must also
comply with all domestic and international export laws and regulations that apply to the
software, which include restrictions on destinations, end users, and end use. For further
information on geographic and export restrictions, visit (aka.ms/georestrict) and
(aka.ms/exporting).

No. 2B308-309EN
7
7. Support and Refund Procedures. For the software generally, contact the device
manufacturer or installer for support options. Refer to the support number provided with
the software. For updates and supplements obtained directly from Microsoft, Microsoft
may provide limited support services for properly licensed software as described at
(aka.ms/mssupport). If you are seeking a refund, contact the manufacturer or installer to
determine its refund policies. You must comply with those policies, which might require
you to return the software with the entire device on which the software is installed for a
refund.

8. Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver if You Live in (or if a Business Your
Principal Place of Business is in) the United States.

We hope we never have a dispute, but if we do, you and we agree to try for 60 days to
resolve it informally. If we can’t, you and we agree to binding individual arbitration
before the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”) under the Federal Arbitration
Act (“FAA”), and not to sue in court in front of a judge or jury. Instead, a neutral
arbitrator will decide and the arbitrator’s decision will be final except for a limited right of
appeal under the FAA. Class action lawsuits, class-wide arbitrations, private
attorney-general actions, and any other proceeding where someone acts in a
representative capacity aren’t allowed. Nor is combining individual proceedings
without the consent of all parties. “We,” “our,” and “us” includes Microsoft, the device
manufacturer, and software installer.

a. Disputes covered—everything except IP. The term “dispute” is as broad as it can

be. It includes any claim or controversy between you and the manufacturer or
installer, or you and Microsoft, concerning the software, its price, or this agreement,
under any legal theory including contract, warranty, tort, statute, or regulation,
except disputes relating to the enforcement or validity of your, your licensors’,
our, or our licensors’ intellectual property rights.

b. Mail a Notice of Dispute first. If you have a dispute and our customer service
representatives can’t resolve it, send a Notice of Dispute by U.S. Mail to the
manufacturer or installer, ATTN: LEGAL DEPARTMENT. If your dispute is with
Microsoft, mail it to Microsoft Corporation, ATTN: LCA ARBITRATION, One
Microsoft Way, Redmond, WA 98052-6399. Tell us your name, address, how to
contact you, what the problem is, and what you want. A form is available at
(aka.ms/disputeform). We’ll do the same if we have a dispute with you. After
60 days, you or we may start an arbitration if the dispute is unresolved.

c. Small claims court option. Instead of mailing a Notice of Dispute, and if you meet
the court’s requirements, you may sue us in small claims court in your county of
residence (or if a business your principal place of business) or our principal place of
business–King County, Washington USA if your dispute is with Microsoft. We hope
you’ll mail a Notice of Dispute and give us 60 days to try to work it out, but you don’t
have to before going to small claims court.

d. Arbitration procedure. The AAA will conduct any arbitration under its Commercial
Arbitration Rules (or if you are an individual and use the software for personal or
household use, or if the value of the dispute is $75,000 USD or less whether or not
you are an individual or how you use the software, its Consumer Arbitration Rules).
For more information, see (aka.ms/adr) or call 1-800-778-7879. To start an
arbitration, submit the form available at (aka.ms/arbitration) to the AAA; mail a copy
to the manufacturer or installer (or to Microsoft if your dispute is with Microsoft). In a
dispute involving $25,000 USD or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. Any in-person
hearing will take place in your county of residence (of if a business your principal
place of business) or our principal place of business—King County, Washington if
your dispute is with Microsoft. You choose. The arbitrator may award the same
damages to you individually as a court could. The arbitrator may award declaratory
or injunctive relief only to you individually to satisfy your individual claim.

No. 2B308-309EN
8
 e. Arbitration fees and payments.

(i) Disputes involving $75,000 USD or less. The manufacturer or installer (or
Microsoft if your dispute is with Microsoft) will promptly reimburse your filing
fees and pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. If you reject our
last written settlement offer made before the arbitrator was appointed, your
dispute goes all the way to an arbitrator’s decision (called an “award”), and
the arbitrator awards you more than this last written offer, the manufacturer or
installer (or Microsoft if your dispute is with Microsoft) will: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000 USD; (2) pay your reasonable attorney’s fees, if any;
and (3) reimburse any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs)
that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and
pursuing your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator will determine the amounts
unless you and we agree on them.

(ii) Disputes involving more than $75,000 USD. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.

(iii) Disputes involving any amount. If you start an arbitration we won’t seek our
AAA or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or your filing fees we reimbursed,
unless the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or brought for an improper
purpose. If we start an arbitration we will pay all filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s
fees and expenses. We won’t seek our attorney’s fees or expenses from you
in any arbitration. Fees and expenses are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.

f. Must file within one year. You and we must file in small claims court or arbitration
any claim or dispute (except intellectual property disputes — see Section 8.a.)
within one year from when it first could be filed. Otherwise, it’s permanently barred.

g. Severability. If the class action waiver is found to be illegal or unenforceable as to

all or some parts of a dispute, those parts won’t be arbitrated but will proceed in
court, with the rest proceeding in arbitration. If any other provision of Section 8 is
found to be illegal or unenforceable, that provision will be severed but the rest of
Section 8 still applies.

h. Conflict with AAA rules. This agreement governs if it conflicts with the AAA’s
Commercial Arbitration Rules or Consumer Arbitration Rules.

i. Microsoft as party or third-party beneficiary. If Microsoft is the device

manufacturer or if you acquired the software from a retailer, Microsoft is a party to
this agreement. Otherwise, Microsoft is not a party but is a third-party beneficiary of
your agreement with the manufacturer or installer to resolve disputes through
informal negotiation and arbitration.

9. Governing Law. The laws of the state or country where you live (or if a business where
your principal place of business is located) govern all claims and disputes concerning the
software, its price, or this agreement, including breach of contract claims and claims
under state consumer protection laws, unfair competition laws, implied warranty laws, for
unjust enrichment, and in tort, regardless of conflict of law principles. In the United States,
the FAA governs all provisions relating to arbitration.

10. Consumer Rights, Regional Variations. This agreement describes certain legal rights.
You may have other rights, including consumer rights, under the laws of your state or
country. You may also have rights with respect to the party from which you acquired the
software. This agreement does not change those other rights if the laws of your state or
country do not permit it to do so. For example, if you acquired the software in one of the
below regions, or mandatory country law applies, then the following provisions apply to
you:

No. 2B308-309EN
9
 a. Australia. References to “Limited Warranty” are references to the express warranty
provided by Microsoft or the manufacturer or installer. This warranty is given in
addition to other rights and remedies you may have under law, including your rights
and remedies in accordance with the statutory guarantees under the Australian
Consumer Law.

In this section, “goods” refers to the software for which Microsoft or the
manufacturer or installer provides the express warranty. Our goods come with
guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are
entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any
other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the
goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the
failure does not amount to a major failure.

b. Canada. You may stop receiving updates on your device by turning off Internet
access. If and when you re-connect to the Internet, the software will resume
checking for and installing updates.

c. European Union. The academic use restriction in Section 10.d(i) below does not
apply in the jurisdictions listed on this site: (aka.ms/academicuse).

d. Germany and Austria.

(i) Warranty. The properly licensed software will perform substantially as

described in any Microsoft materials that accompany the software. However,
the manufacturer or installer, and Microsoft, give no contractual guarantee in
relation to the licensed software.

(ii) Limitation of Liability. In case of intentional conduct, gross negligence,

claims based on the Product Liability Act, as well as, in case of death or
personal or physical injury, the manufacturer or installer, or Microsoft is liable
according to the statutory law.

Subject to the preceding sentence, the manufacturer or installer, or Microsoft will

only be liable for slight negligence if the manufacturer or installer or Microsoft is in
breach of such material contractual obligations, the fulfillment of which facilitate the
due performance of this agreement, the breach of which would endanger the
purpose of this agreement and the compliance with which a party may constantly
trust in (so-called "cardinal obligations"). In other cases of slight negligence, the
manufacturer or installer or Microsoft will not be liable for slight negligence.

e. Other regions. See (aka.ms/variations) for a current list of regional variations

11. Additional Notices.

a. Networks, data and Internet usage. Some features of the software and services
accessed through the software may require your device to access the Internet. Your
access and usage (including charges) may be subject to the terms of your cellular
or internet provider agreement. Certain features of the software may help you
access the Internet more efficiently, but the software’s usage calculations may be
different from your service provider’s measurements. You are always responsible
for (i) understanding and complying with the terms of your own plans and
agreements, and (ii) any issues arising from using or accessing networks, including
public/open networks. You may use the software to connect to networks, and to
share access information about those networks, only if you have permission to do
so.

No. 2B308-309EN
10
 b. H.264/AVC and MPEG-4 visual standards and VC-1 video standards. The
software may include H.264/MPEG-4 AVC and/or VC-1 decoding technology.
MPEG LA, L.L.C. requires this notice:

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC, THE VC-1, AND THE MPEG-4
PART 2 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSES FOR THE PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE ABOVE STANDARDS (“VIDEO STANDARDS”)
AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC, VC-1, AND MPEG-4 PART 2 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE SUCH VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE WWW.MPEGLA.COM

c. Malware protection. Microsoft cares about protecting your device from malware.
The software will turn on malware protection if other protection is not installed or
has expired. To do so, other antimalware software will be disabled or may have to
be removed.

12. Entire Agreement. This agreement (together with the printed paper license terms or
other terms accompanying any software supplements, updates, and services that are
provided by the manufacturer or installer, or Microsoft, and that you use), and the terms
contained in web links listed in this agreement, are the entire agreement for the software
and any such supplements, updates, and services (unless the manufacturer or installer,
or Microsoft, provides other terms with such supplements, updates, or services). You can
review this agreement after your software is running by going to (aka.ms/useterms) or
going to Settings - System - About within the software. You can also review the terms at
any of the links in this agreement by typing the URLs into a browser address bar, and you
agree to do so. You agree that you will read the terms before using the software or
services, including any linked terms. You understand that by using the software and
services, you ratify this agreement and the linked terms. There are also informational links
in this agreement. The links containing notices and binding terms are:

 Windows 10 Privacy Statement (aka.ms/privacy)

 Microsoft Services Agreement (aka.ms/msa)

 Adobe Flash Player License Terms (aka.ms/adobeflash)

No. 2B308-309EN
11
 ***********************************************************************

NO WARRANTY

THE SOFTWARE ON YOUR DEVICE (INCLUDING THE APPS) IS LICENSED “AS IS.” TO
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY YOUR LOCAL LAWS, YOU BEAR THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO THE SOFTWARE’S QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE. SHOULD IT PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL SERVICING OR REPAIR. NEITHER
THE DEVICE MANUFACTURER NOR MICROSOFT GIVES ANY EXPRESS WARRANTIES,
GUARANTEES, OR CONDITIONS FOR THE SOFTWARE. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED
UNDER YOUR LOCAL LAWS, THE MANUFACTURER AND MICROSOFT EXCLUDE ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, INCLUDING THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY,
QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. YOU MAY
HAVE ADDITIONAL CONSUMER RIGHTS OR STATUTORY GUARANTEES UNDER LOCAL
LAWS THAT THESE TERMS CANNOT CHANGE.

IF YOUR LOCAL LAWS IMPOSE A WARRANTY, GUARANTEE, OR CONDITION EVEN

THOUGH THIS AGREEMENT DOES NOT, ITS TERM IS LIMITED TO 90 DAYS FROM WHEN
THE FIRST USER ACQUIRES THE SOFTWARE. IF THE MANUFACTURER OR MICROSOFT
BREACHES SUCH A WARRANTY, GUARANTEE, OR CONDITION, YOUR SOLE REMEDY,
AT THE MANUFACTURER’S OR MICROSOFT’S ELECTION, IS (I) REPAIR OR
REPLACEMENT OF THE SOFTWARE AT NO CHARGE, OR (II) RETURN OF THE
SOFTWARE (OR AT ITS ELECTION THE DEVICE ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE WAS
INSTALLED) FOR A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT PAID, IF ANY. THESE ARE YOUR ONLY
REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF A WARRANTY, GUARANTEE, OR CONDITION YOUR LOCAL
LAWS IMPOSE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY YOUR LOCAL LAWS, IF YOU HAVE ANY BASIS
FOR RECOVERING DAMAGES, YOU CAN RECOVER FROM THE MANUFACTURER OR
MICROSOFT ONLY DIRECT DAMAGES UP TO THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE
SOFTWARE (OR UP TO $50 USD IF YOU ACQUIRED THE SOFTWARE FOR NO CHARGE).
YOU WILL NOT, AND WAIVE ANY RIGHT TO, SEEK TO RECOVER ANY OTHER DAMAGES
OR REMEDY, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS AND DIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL,
INDIRECT, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, UNDER ANY PART OF THIS AGREEMENT OR
UNDER ANY THEORY. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO (I) ANYTHING RELATED TO THIS
AGREEMENT, THE SOFTWARE (INCLUDING THE APPS), THE DEVICE, SERVICES,
CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE DATA,
CONTENT (INCLUDING CODE) ON THIRD PARTY INTERNET SITES OR THIRD PARTY
PROGRAMS, AND (II) CLAIMS FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, GUARANTEE,
OR CONDITION; STRICT LIABILITY, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHER TORT; VIOLATION OF A
STATUTE OR REGULATION; UNJUST ENRICHMENT; OR UNDER ANY OTHER THEORY.

THE DAMAGE EXCLUSIONS AND REMEDY LIMITATIONS IN THIS AGREEMENT APPLY

EVEN IF YOU HAVE NO REMEDY (THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED “AS IS”), IF REPAIR,
REPLACEMENT, OR A REFUND (IF REQUIRED BY YOUR LOCAL LAW) DOES NOT FULLY
COMPENSATE YOU FOR ANY LOSSES, IF THE MANUFACTURER OR MICROSOFT KNEW
OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN ABOUT THE POSSIBILITY OF THE DAMAGES, OR IF THE
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

Check with your device manufacturer to determine if your device is covered by a warranty.

No. 2B308-309EN
12
 How to Use This Operation Manual
1. Scope of This Operation Manual
This manual describes the operating procedures for the interventional
angiography system INFX-8000V/B, INFX-8000V/Y, INFX-8000V/P.
For the procedures for advanced image acquisition, image processing of
acquired images, image file storage, image printout, and presetting of
various system functions, refer to the reference manual provided with the
system.
For the operating procedures for optional units and units manufactured by
companies other than Canon Medical Systems (such as the TV monitor and
the monitor suspension unit), refer to the operation manual supplied with
each applicable unit.
INFX-8000V/B, INFX-8000V/Y, INFX-8000V/P systems are configured
according to the purpose of diagnosis, as shown in the following table.

Configuration Single-plane system (*1) (SP system)

Angiography system for cardiac vessels
This system is referred to as the "SP cardiac system" in this manual.
Cardiac The model names with supplemental symbols are:
configuration INFX-8000V/B1, /B2, /BD, and /BE for the USA
INFX-8000V/P1, /P2, /PD, and /PE for Canada
INFX-8000V/Y1, /Y2, /YD, and /YE for countries other than the USA and Canada
Angiography system for vessels in the head, abdomen, and lower extremities
This system is referred to as the "SP vascular system" in this manual.
The model names with supplemental symbols are:
Vascular
INFX-8000V/B3, /B4, /B5, /B6, /BF, /BG, /BH, /BJ, /BR, /BS, /BV, and /BW for the USA
configuration
INFX-8000V/P3, /P4, /P5, /P6, /PF, /PG, /PH, /PJ, /PR, /PS, /PV, and /PW for Canada
INFX-8000V/Y3, /Y4, /Y5, /Y6, /YF, /YG, /YH, /YJ, /YR, /YS, /YV, and /YW for countries
other than the USA and Canada

Configuration Biplane system (*2) (BP system)

Angiography system for cardiac vessels
This system is referred to as the "BP cardiac system" in this manual.
Cardiac The model names with supplemental symbols are:
configuration INFX-8000V/B7, /B8, /BK, and /BL for the USA
INFX-8000V/P7, /P8, /PK, and /PL for Canada
INFX-8000V/Y7, /Y8, /YK, and /YL for countries other than the USA and Canada
Angiography system for vessels in the head, abdomen, and lower extremities
This system is referred to as the "BP vascular system" in this manual.
The model names with supplemental symbols are:
Vascular
INFX-8000V/B9, /BA, /BB, /BC, /BM, /BN, /BP, /BQ, /BT, /BU, /BX, and /BY for the USA
configuration
INFX-8000V/P9, /PA, /PB, /PC, /PM, /PN, /PP, /PQ, /PT, /PU, /PX, and /PY for Canada
INFX-8000V/Y9, /YA, /YB, /YC, /YM, /YN, /YP, /YQ, /YT, /YU, /YX, and /YY for countries
other than the USA and Canada

*1: System incorporating a floor-mounted C-arm support unit

*2: System incorporating a floor-mounted C-arm support unit and a ceiling-
suspended Ω-arm support unit

No. 2B308-309EN
13
2. Outline of Each Section of This Operation Manual

Section Contents
1 Intended purpose of the system
2 System components and optional units
3 System operating requirements (environmental/power
requirements)
4 Name and functions of each section of the system
5 Safety mechanisms of the system
6 Mounting accessories/options for the system
7 Pre-operational checks and post-operational checks
8 Turning the power of the system ON/OFF
9 Operating units installed in the examination room (support unit,
catheterization table, etc.)
10 Making an appointment, starting a study, and completing a study
11 Fluoroscopy/Radiography
12 Image playback
13 Image processing during a study
14 Archiving the acquired image data
15 Image processing after a study
16 Printing the acquired images
17 Moving/storing the system
18 System maintenance (inspection, cleaning, disinfection, etc.)
19 Specifications of the system and system components
20 Technical data required by the following standards
IEC 60601-2-43
IEC 60601-1-3
IEC 60601-1-2
DHHS 21CFR § 1020
21 Error messages and corrective actions

No. 2B308-309EN
14
3. Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in this operation manual.

Abbreviation Meaning
ABC Automatic brightness control
EP Electrophysiological
FOV Field of view
The FOV can be changed by switching the input surface size
of the X-ray flat panel detector (FPD).
FPD X-ray flat panel detector
FPS (f/s) Frames per second
Unit of acquisition rate for radiography and unit of pulse rate
for fluoroscopy
Note that the unit used in this system is f/s.
IVR Interventional radiology
LIH Last image hold
Used to display the last image of a fluoroscopy session as a
still image.
MIH Map Image Hold
A map image displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor
immediately after fluoroscopy is completed.
PCI Percutaneous coronary intervention
PPS Pairs per second
Unit of acquisition rate for biplane radiography and unit of
pulse rate for biplane fluoroscopy. The rate for a single
plane of the F-side or L-side is displayed.
Note that the unit used in this system is f/s, the same as for
the rate for a single plane of the F-side or L-side.
RAID Redundant array of independent disks
An array of hard disks is used to guard against data loss and
to increase the file saving and reading speeds.
Image files are stored in the RAID.
SEC Super Exposure Control
Automatic X-ray condition setting function
ROI Region of interest
SID Source-to-image distance
Distance from the X-ray source to the FPD input surface
SSD Source-to-skin distance
Distance from the X-ray source to the patient surface

No. 2B308-309EN
15
4. Documents for Service Engineers

The technical documents provided for use by service engineers are listed in
the table below.

Name of document Description

Installation manual Describes the installation procedures for
the system (units in the system
configuration), including connection,
operational checks, and adjustment.
Installation quality check sheet Used to record the data at the time of
installation.
Preventive maintenance Specifies the items to be checked during
manual the periodic inspection, the inspection
intervals, and the inspection procedures.
Service manual Describes the procedures for repairing the
system when the system malfunctions.

No. 2B308-309EN
16
 Table of Contents

Intellectual Property ...................................................................................................... 3

How to Use This Operation Manual ................................................................. 13
Safety Precautions ....................................................................................................... 25
Important Information ................................................................................................ 49
Cybersecurity and This Product ........................................................................ 52
Radiation Protection ................................................................................................... 64
Required Actions in the Event of Power Failure.................................... 66

1. Intended Use ....................................................................................... 67

1.1 Indications for Use................................................................................... 68

1.2 Intended Use ................................................................................................ 68

1.3 Patient Population.................................................................................... 69

1.4 User Profile.................................................................................................... 69

1.5 Operating Principle ................................................................................. 69
1.6 Features ........................................................................................................... 70

1.7 Clinical Benefits......................................................................................... 70

2. Composition ........................................................................................ 71
2.1 Outline............................................................................................................... 72

2.2 System Components .............................................................................. 76

2.3 Optional Units.............................................................................................. 82

2.4 Compatible Units ...................................................................................... 88

3. Operating Requirements .................................................... 91

3.1 Power Requirements .............................................................................. 92

No. 2B308-309EN
17
3.2 Environmental Requirements.......................................................... 93

3.3 Installation Conditions ......................................................................... 94

3.4 Classification & Safety Requirements ...................................... 95

3.5 Energy Conservation Measures .................................................... 96

4. Names and Functions of the Parts

of the System ..................................................................................... 97
4.1 System Console (System Monitor) .............................................. 98

4.2 Main Console ............................................................................................. 112

4.3 Tableside Console ................................................................................. 117

4.4 Satellite Console (Option) ................................................................ 122
4.5 Fluoroscopic Monitor .......................................................................... 127
4.6 Reference Monitor.................................................................................. 133

4.7 X-ray Tube Support Unit .................................................................... 135

4.8 Catheterization Table ........................................................................... 144

4.9 Tabletop Control Console (Option) ........................................... 168

5. Safety Devices ................................................................................ 171

5.1 Emergency Stop ...................................................................................... 172

5.2 System Shutdown in Emergencies ........................................... 174

5.3 Interlocks ...................................................................................................... 175

5.4 Interference Warning Function..................................................... 181

5.5 Catheterization Table Manual Operation in

Emergencies............................................................................................... 183

5.6 Error Reset/Reduced Operation .................................................. 184

5.7 Backup Fluoroscopy ............................................................................ 186

No. 2B308-309EN
18
5.8 System Reset ............................................................................................. 187

5.9 Quick Switching to Patient Mode and Shutdown

Mode ................................................................................................................. 190

5.10 Disabling X-ray Exposure ................................................................. 191

5.11 Starting an Emergency Study ("Start Study")

From the Examination Room ......................................................... 193

5.12 Detecting Abnormalities in the FPD Cooling

Systems ......................................................................................................... 194

5.13 Protecting the Personal Information of Patients............. 194

5.14 Interlock by the UPS ............................................................................. 194

6. Installation of Accessories
and Optional Units .................................................................... 195
6.1 Installing the Tableside Console................................................. 196

6.2 Installing the Satellite Console (Option)................................ 200

6.3 Mounting the Sterile Caps................................................................ 203
6.4 Connecting the Cables ....................................................................... 206

6.5 Installing the Tabletop Mat and Arm Supports................. 208

6.6 Installing and Adjusting the Drip Infusion Stand ........... 209

6.7 Installing the Armrest (One Arm) ................................................ 210

6.8 Installing the Armrests (Both Arms: Option).................... 211

6.9 Installing the Arm Holder (Option) ............................................. 212

6.10 Installing the Arm Cover (Option) .............................................. 215

6.11 Installing the Leg Securing Band (Option) .......................... 216

6.12 Installing/Removing the Tabletop Control Switch

(Option) .......................................................................................................... 218
6.13 Installing the Tabletop Mat (XBTM-001A: Option) ........ 219

No. 2B308-309EN
19
6.14 Mounting the Patient Immobilization Band
(CAT-880B)................................................................................................... 220

6.15 Mounting the Drape Holder (CAT-880B) ................................ 222

6.16 Mounting the Accessory Tabletop Rail

(CAT-880B)................................................................................................... 223
6.17 Mounting the Tabletop Control Console ............................... 225

6.18 Installing the Tablet Console ......................................................... 228

6.19 Other Catheterization Table Optional Units ........................ 229

6.20 Installing/Removing the Detachable Spacer ...................... 229

7. Daily Checks...................................................................................... 231

7.1 Checks Before Operation ................................................................. 232
7.2 Checks After Operation...................................................................... 236

8. Turning the System Power ON/OFF ................. 237

8.1 Turning the System Power ON ..................................................... 238
8.2 Turning the System Power OFF
(System Shutdown) ............................................................................... 240

9. Operating Procedures for Units

in the Examination Room ................................................ 243
9.1 Operating Procedures for the Support Unit........................ 247

9.2 Operating Procedures for the Catheterization

Table ................................................................................................................. 264
9.3 Auto-Positioning ..................................................................................... 275
9.4 Auto-Angle/Auto-Mapping Functions...................................... 310

9.5 Switching the System (Biplane System) ............................... 316

9.6 Operating the Large Screen Monitor (Option)................... 317

No. 2B308-309EN
20
9.7 Operating the Tablet Console (Option) .................................. 318

10. Study Appointment .................................................................. 345

10.1 Patient Mode Selection....................................................................... 346

10.2 Appointment for a New Study ....................................................... 347

10.3 Start Study ................................................................................................... 348

10.4 Finish Study................................................................................................ 350

10.5 Urgent Patient Acceptance.............................................................. 352

10.6 Repeat Study Appointment ............................................................. 355

10.7 Image Link.................................................................................................... 359

10.8 Correcting/Canceling the Appointment ................................. 360

10.9 Data Retrieval From the HIS/RIS.................................................. 361
10.10 Transferring the Data to the HIS/RIS ........................................ 362

10.11 RDS/RDSR Transfer .............................................................................. 363

11. Fluoroscopy/Radiography
(Acquisition Mode) ................................................................... 367
11.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode ............................................................ 370

11.2 Selecting the Acquisition Program

(Switching the Study Protocol) .................................................... 371

11.3 Fluoroscopy................................................................................................ 373

11.4 DA / One-Shot Radiography ........................................................... 379

11.5 Digital Subtraction Angiography (DSA) ................................. 388

11.6 Various Settings for Fluoroscopy and Radiography ... 403

11.7 FPD Calibration ........................................................................................ 419

12. Image Playback ............................................................................. 421

No. 2B308-309EN
21
12.1 Selecting Map Image/Dynamic Image ..................................... 423

12.2 Dynamic Image Playback.................................................................. 427

12.3 Switching Between Menus on the Reference
Monitor and Selecting Functions................................................ 430

13. Image Processing During a Study

(Exam Mode)...................................................................................... 431

14. Image File Management

(Directory Mode) .......................................................................... 433

15. Image Processing After Completion

of a Study (Review Mode) ............................................... 435

16. Printing (Printing Mode) .................................................... 437

17. Moving and Storage ................................................................ 439

17.1 Moving ............................................................................................................ 440

17.2 Storage ........................................................................................................... 440

18. System Maintenance.............................................................. 441

18.1 Daily Checks............................................................................................... 443

18.2 Periodic Inspection ............................................................................... 443

18.3 Periodically Replaced Parts............................................................ 456

18.4 Cleaning ......................................................................................................... 460

18.5 Disinfection ................................................................................................. 462

18.6 Sterilization ................................................................................................. 464

18.7 Disposal of the System ...................................................................... 464

No. 2B308-309EN
22
18.8 Periodic Inspection Based on Requirements
in the USA
(Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act) ................................ 465

19. Specifications .................................................................................. 467

19.1 Electrical Safety ....................................................................................... 468

19.2 Support Unit ............................................................................................... 469

19.3 Catheterization Table ........................................................................... 471

19.4 X-ray Beam Limiting Device ........................................................... 472

19.5 X-ray Tube Assembly........................................................................... 473

19.6 X-ray Flat Panel Detector (FPD) ................................................... 474

19.7 Monitor Suspension Unit .................................................................. 477
19.8 TV Monitors (for Image Display) .................................................. 478

19.9 X-ray High-Voltage Generator (XTP-8100XG) .................... 480

19.10 Digital Radiography System (DFP-8000C/A2) ................... 482

19.11 Power Requirements ............................................................................ 511

19.12 Weights of the Accessories and Options ............................. 513

19.13 Materials Used in Patient Contact Sections ....................... 514

19.14 Applicable Standards (IEC) ............................................................. 515

20. Technical Data ................................................................................ 517

20.1 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-2-43 ...................... 518

20.2 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-2 ......................... 555

20.3 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-3 ......................... 560

20.4 Technical Data Required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020 ......... 562

20.5 Information Sources Related to Pediatric Imaging ....... 570

No. 2B308-309EN
23
21. System Message Display................................................. 571
21.1 Message Display Section.................................................................. 572

21.2 Message Types ......................................................................................... 573

21.3 Corrective Actions ................................................................................. 574

No. 2B308-309EN
24
Safety Precautions

1. Meaning of Signal Words

In this manual, the signal words DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION,

and NOTICE are used to indicate safety and other important instructions.
The signal words and their meanings are defined as follows. Please
understand their meanings clearly before reading this manual.

Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

may result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in property damage.

In addition to the above, the signal word NOTE is used to indicate other
important information.

NOTE Indicates reference information that enables more efficient use of the
equipment.

2. Meaning of Safety Symbols

Symbol Name Meaning

Safety alert symbol Indicates the possibility of injury.

Read the related precautions in the operation manual.

Emergency stop Indicates a switch that can be used to immediately stop

operation of the equipment in an emergency.

Ionizing radiation Indicates the presence of hazardous ionizing radiation.

Refer to Indicates that the user should refer to the operation

documentation manual.

No. 2B308-309EN
25
3. Safety Precautions
Observe the following safety precautions to ensure the safety of patients and
operators. In addition to the following precautions, the precautions specific
to each operation are described in the corresponding sections of this manual.
Be sure to observe these specific precautions as well.

DANGER: This system is not explosion-proof. Do not use flammable or explosive

gases near this system. An explosion may occur.

WARNING: 1. Minimize the X-ray exposure of the patient.

• In order to reduce the exposure dose to regions that are not applicable,
limit the X-ray exposure field to the applicable region using the beam
limiting device.

• Place the FPD as close to the patient as possible.

• Long-time fluoroscopy (in particular, for the same region) should be

minimized.

• With typical operating conditions (patient thickness = 20 cm, PID =

10 cm), note that the surface dose rate (including back-scattered
radiation) during fluoroscopy (normal mode, pulsed fluoroscopy,
15 P/S) is approximately 20 mGy/min.
In the following cases, the exposure dose will be larger.

1) When the patient thickness is greater

2) When the arm is being angulated

3) When the FPD is moving away from the patient

In general cases, it is considered that temporary hair loss may occur at

a dose of 3 Gy and erythema may occur at a dose of 6 Gy. (For the
above "20 mGy/min" case, the dose will be 3 Gy for 150 minutes.)

• Carefully observe the cumulative fluoroscopic time displayed on the

fluoroscopic monitor. If fluoroscopy is to be performed for a long time,
select Low-rate fluoroscopy mode and change the X-ray beam
direction, etc. so that the exposure to the same region is reduced.

• In HLC (high-level control) fluoroscopy, the maximum patient incident

dose rate is 175 mGy/min. The exposure dose is larger than in normal
fluoroscopy.
Minimize the total HLC fluoroscopic time.

2. Minimize the X-ray exposure of personnel engaged in clinical treatment

(physicians, radiological technologists, nurses, etc.) by taking
adequate X-ray protective measures such as ensuring that X-ray
protective aprons or X-ray protective plates are used. For the
protective equipment that can be used with this system, contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
26
WARNING: 3. If a serious failure occurs, it may be impossible to restore the system
using the Reset button or by turning the power OFF and then ON again.
In this case, catheterization procedures cannot be continued. It is
recommended that another system with which fluoroscopy can be
performed (such as a surgical C-arm support unit) or another room for
catheterization procedures/IVR be kept available.

4. Take special care to prevent incorrect X-ray exposure. When setting

the system to the standby status with the power ON, use the X-ray
exposure disable button to prevent incorrect X-ray exposure.

5. If 90% or more of the total heat storage capacity of the X-ray tube
anode is used, stop X-ray generation. If the X-ray tube assembly is
used under extreme conditions, the service life of the X-ray tube
assembly will be reduced.
If fluoroscopy is performed continuously in this status, when the heat
storage capacity reaches the maximum level, X-ray generation is
forcibly stopped. The heat storage capacity of the X-ray tube anode
can be checked on the system monitor or fluoroscopic monitor.

6. Do not allow metal objects, such as paper clips or staples, or liquids,

such as coffee, to enter the system. Doing so may result in a short
circuit or smoke generation. If any foreign substance enters the
system, turn the power OFF and contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative for inspection.

7. Special care must be taken to prevent interference between persons in

the examination room and the units used in combination. If
interference occurs, the concerned person may be injured. Special
care must also be taken to prevent interference between units used in
combination. If interference occurs, the concerned units may be
damaged and, in addition, persons near the units may be injured.

• Take special care to prevent the support unit from interfering with the
patient and other persons in the examination room.

• For biplane systems, be extremely careful to prevent persons from

being caught between the C-arm and the Ω-arm.

• The space between the C-arm and the Ω-arm is narrow if the system is
installed in a small examination room even when the Ω-arm is retracted
to the park position. Be extremely careful to prevent persons from
being caught between the C-arm and the Ω-arm.

• Take special care to prevent the support unit and the catheterization
table from interfering with peripheral units or devices such as contrast
medium injectors, monitors, and monitor suspension units. In
particular, the lower section of the tabletop of the catheterization table
is obstructed from view and therefore great care is required.

• Take care to prevent interference between the support unit and the
catheterization table. In particular, pay special attention to the objects
that are mounted to the catheterization table, such as the tabletop, the
armrest, etc.

No. 2B308-309EN
27
WARNING: 8. When using map images, confirm that the images created from the
images acquired during the previous study are no longer displayed on
the reference monitor. If the images are identified incorrectly,
misdiagnosis will result.
The related information for the displayed image can be checked in the
Examination Date display field of the Image Related Information display
area on the reference monitor.

9. When the image related information is edited, special care is required

to select the correct data for editing and to enter correct data.
Otherwise, misdiagnosis may result.

10. When rearrangement of image data is performed, special care is

required to modify the data correctly. If the data for another patient or
another study is assigned, misdiagnosis may result.

11. If smoke is generated from the system, be careful not to breathe the
smoke or expose your eyes to it.
The gases generated may include components that can irritate the
mucous lining. If you feel irritation to your eyes or throat, immediately
wash them. If you still feel irritation, consult a physician.

12. If a liquid such as coolant leaks from the system, immediately contact
your Canon Medical Systems representative without touching the
liquid. Touching such liquids may cause skin irritation.
If such a liquid comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected
area with soap and rinse it with copious amounts of water. If the skin
irritation continues even after washing, consult a physician.
13. If the main unit of an implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable
cardiac defibrillator is continuously exposed to a pulsed X-ray beam, it
may malfunction.

If it is necessary to continuously expose the implantation site to a

pulsed X-ray beam, refer to the operation manual for the implantable
cardiac pacemaker or implantable cardiac defibrillator or consult the
vendor regarding the required countermeasures. Be sure to implement
the countermeasures appropriately.

In fluoroscopic or radiographic examinations involving continuous

exposure to a pulsed X-ray beam (e.g., multiple radiographic exposures
within a few seconds, pulsed fluoroscopy, DA, DSA, or CINE), the
C-MOS circuits in the implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable
cardiac defibrillator may malfunction, causing oversensing. As a
result, pacing pulse output may be suppressed temporarily or a
defibrillation pulse may be triggered inappropriately.

No. 2B308-309EN
28
WARNING: 14. The use of radiowave-emitting devices such as cell phones near this
equipment may interfere with its operation. Do not bring devices which
generate radio waves, such as cell phones, transceivers, and radio-
controlled toys, into the room where the equipment is installed, and do
not place such devices near the equipment. If devices which generate
radio waves are brought near the equipment, instruct the user to
immediately turn OFF the radiowave-emitting device.

In addition, this equipment may not operate normally if equipment

emitting high-level electromagnetic radiation such as laser surgical
units, microwave ablation systems, microwave thermal therapy
systems, radiofrequency ablation systems, etc. are used in a room next
to the scan room. Therefore, install this equipment at a location as far
away from such equipment as possible.

Even if such equipment complies with EMC requirements and ensures

safety, images may be degraded by noise, interfering with image
analysis, or the system may not operate normally due to
electromagnetic interference when such equipment is used within the
movement range of the system.

15. Portable RF communications equipment (including peripheral items

such as antenna cables and external antennas) should be used no
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to any part of this medical system,
including the cables. Otherwise, degradation of system performance
may result.

16. Do not use cables and parts other than those provided with this
system. If other cables or parts are used, the emission performance or
immunity performance may be adversely affected, causing the system
to malfunction.

17. If an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is used in combination, do not

connect units other than the Alphenix system to the UPS. If another
unit is also connected to the UPS, the Alphenix system may not
function normally.
For the operating procedures for the UPS, refer to the operation
manual of the UPS.

WARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead
compounds, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer, and phthalates, which are known to the State of California to
cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.
For more information go to www.p65warnings.ca.gov.

No. 2B308-309EN
29
CAUTION: 1. Only the standard units and optional units specified in this operation
manual can be used in combination with this system.
If units other than those specified are used in combination, fire,
electric shock, failure, or malfunction may result.

2. Confirm that the GND cable of the system is connected to the

grounding terminal in accordance with all applicable legal
requirements for medically used electrical systems. If grounding is
not performed properly, an electric shock may occur.

3. If this equipment is connected to a network for which any of the

following conditions is true, the system can be infected with malware
(malicious software, such as a computer virus or worm, that harms
computers). The user must establish security measures to prevent the
equipment from being infected.

• Security control is not established for the network.

• There is a risk of malware invasion in the network.

• Equipment for which any of the following conditions is true is

connected to the network.

(a) The security of the equipment is not controlled by the user.

(b) The equipment can be accessed by persons not authorized by the

user.

(c) The equipment is capable of wireless communication.

4. The following instructions must be observed in order to prevent this

equipment from being infected with malware (malicious software, such
as a computer virus or worm, that harms computers).
If the equipment is infected with malware, the data stored in the
equipment may be lost, tampered with, or accessed by unauthorized
persons; the equipment may operate incorrectly; or the equipment
may become a source of malware infection.

• Do not connect this equipment to a network for which security control

is not established.

• Do not connect this equipment to the Internet.

• When an external storage media (such as a floppy disk or MO) is to be

used, confirm in advance that the media is not infected with malware.

• Do not perform any other actions that may result in infection.

5. The security software McAfee Embedded Control (MEC) by McAfee,

Inc. has been installed in this equipment. MEC is whitelist-type
security software. MEC prevents execution of malware by only
allowing activation of executable files registered in the whitelist for the
equipment. However, even with MEC installed, it is possible for the
equipment to be infected with malware. The user must establish
security measures to prevent equipment from being infected.

No. 2B308-309EN
30
CAUTION: 6. To ensure that the required security level is maintained, be sure to
observe the following points.
Failure to do so may lead to security issues such as unauthorized
operation, data deletion, data falsification, or data leakage.

(a) Perform appropriate access control for the area where the system
is installed so that the system cannot be operated by unauthorized
persons.
When registering users in this system, pay careful attention to
user management by assigning rights appropriate to their
positions.

(b) Use a login password that is difficult to guess or crack. In

addition, manage the password so that it is not leaked to third
parties (refer to subsection 9.4.2 "User management/authority
management" of the reference manual.

(c) This system collects access logs for the purpose of identifying
persons who have accessed data. These access logs are
extremely useful for investigating unauthorized operation.
Pay careful attention to prevent unauthorized system operation by
storing the access logs properly and performing periodic checks
to detect unauthorized use.

(d) Assign a system administrator and instruct the system

administrator to always pay careful attention to risk control (such
as system settings and network security control) in order to
maintain the required security level.

(e) When data that contains personal information such as patient

names is transferred from the system to external storage media
(such as CD or DVD), be sure to manage the media appropriately
to prevent leakage of personal information.

7. The system security functions are disabled at the time of shipment.

To use the security functions, contact your service representative
(refer to subsection 9.4 "System Security Functions" of the reference
manual).

8. If the system is not being used (for example, while you are away from
the system), be sure not to leave information displayed on the screen.
Use the screen locking function or log off from the system.
To use this function, it is necessary to enable the security functions.

9. Before using the system, be sure to perform the pre-operation checks.

10. If any system abnormality is found or system malfunction occurs, turn

OFF the power of the system, post a sign reading "DO NOT USE" on
the system, and contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative for inspection and repair.

No. 2B308-309EN
31
CAUTION: 11. Before using the system, be sure that you fully understand the
features of the FPD.

(a) As a basic characteristic of the FPD, the brightness in some small

sections on images may differ from that in another sections. Keep
this in mind when performing image interpretation. Failure to keep
this characteristic in mind may lead to incorrect diagnosis.

Since the sections showing differences in brightness vary

depending on the FPD, it is important to be familiar with the
characteristics of the individual FPD used.

(b) As a basic characteristics of the FPD, the last fluoroscopic/

radiographic image displayed may appear on images as an
after-image. Do not use images with an after-image for diagnosis.
If images with an after-image are used, incorrect diagnosis may
result.

If an after-image is seen on images, perform fluoroscopy/

radiography again.

(c) Before starting the first study of the day or before resuming a
study when several hours has elapsed after the system power was
turned OFF, turn the system power ON and then wait at least
30 minutes.

If a study is started before sufficient time has elapsed after turning

ON the power, artifacts may occur on images, possibly resulting in
incorrect diagnosis. If any artifacts occur, wait until the artifacts
disappear before starting the study.

12. To minimize X-ray exposure to the patient, ensure that the SSD
(source-to-skin distance) is as great as possible when performing
fluoroscopy/radiography.

13. If objects (even those that may be required for examination) are placed
within the X-ray beam, adverse effects such as scattered radiation will
result.

14. Be extremely careful when transferring the patient to or from the

stretcher or catheterization table. During transfer, hold the patient
securely and avoid contact with the support unit, peripheral units, and
other units mounted on the catheterization table (such as armrests or
arm supports).
If the patient comes into contact with these units, personal injury or an
accident may result.

15. To ensure that the patient does not fall from the catheterization table,
closely observe the patient at all times.

16. Do not place any objects on units such as the support unit or monitor
suspension unit, which are near the patient. If such objects fall off,
they may hit the patient.

17. When the support unit is near the patient, operate the support unit at
the low speed.

No. 2B308-309EN
32
CAUTION: 18. The tableside console or control switches of the units used in
combination must be installed at the specified locations. If the
switches are placed at locations other than those specified, such as
on the floor or on the catheterization table, incorrect operation or
damage to the switches may result.
For the mounting procedures, refer to section 6 "Installation of
Accessories and Optional Units".

19. To ensure that objects that are mounted on the catheterization table
(such as the tableside console) do not fall, use both hands when
attaching, removing, or moving them.

20. Do not remove the cover of any section of the system.

If a cover is removed, an electric shock may result or image/patient
data may be lost due to system malfunctions.

21. Do not install any application software in Alphenix systems. If other

applications are installed, system operation may be adversely
affected, possibly resulting in the loss of image/patient data due to
system malfunctions.

22. Do not turn OFF the power of the system inadvertently while a study is
being performed.
Normal images may not be acquired or image/patient data may be lost.

23. When radiography is performed using the injector interlock, confirm

that the injector is operable before performing radiography.

24. Before starting image acquisition, confirm that the free space on the
RAID is sufficient.

25. If study protocols registered for urgent cases are deleted, be sure to
register the substitute study protocols. If the study protocols are
changed, notify the system operators of all changed contents. If a
study for an urgent case is started while the operator is unaware of the
changed contents, the study may be adversely affected.

26. If acquisition programs in study protocols registered for urgent cases

are changed/deleted, notify the system operators of all changed
contents. If study for an urgent case is started while the operator is
unaware of the changed contents, the study may be adversely
affected.

27. If a new study protocol with high-level-control fluoroscopy mode (HLC

mode) is created, manage the study protocol as follows.
In systems for the USA, do not select HLC mode when registering a
study protocol.

• Do not register the new study protocol at the top of the list. Be sure to
register it in the second place or lower. If it is registered at the top,
the study protocol with HLC mode may be selected unintentionally.

• Use the study protocol name so that it is possible to identify that HLC
mode is selected for the study protocol.

Example) "Coronary HLC"

No. 2B308-309EN
33
CAUTION: 28. If imaging devices other than those included in the standard
configuration or optional units of the system are used, be sure to
supply power for these devices from a medical isolation transformer.
If power is supplied from another source, the system leakage current
may exceed the allowable value, resulting in electric shock.

29. If a magnetic shielding kit is mounted, the patient incident dose will
increase by approximately 20% compared with when it is not mounted.

30. Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform preventive

maintenance.
If preventive maintenance is performed by users or any other persons
who are qualified for preventive maintenance, special care must be
taken to ensure safety. Before performing preventive maintenance of
the system, carefully read the maintenance and inspection manual
provided with the Canon Medical Systems Alphenix system and fully
understand the contents of the work and the precautions to be
observed to ensure safety.

31. Do not place any objects in front of the power distribution board as
doing so may block access to the circuit breaker.

32. If any of the following problems occur, contact your service

representative to arrange for inspection. There is a possibility of
network failure.

• Failure to export a file from the Alphenix system to the server.

• Failure to import a file from the server to the Alphenix system.

• Failure to receive the patient information or study information when

starting a study, resulting in inability to perform the study.

33. If a UPS is used in combination, confirm that the UPS is fully charged
before turning ON the power of the Alphenix system. If the UPS charge
is low, the Alphenix system may not operate properly if a power outage
occurs.
For the operating procedures for the UPS, refer to the operation
manual of the UPS.

NOTICE: 1. Use the system within the operating environmental conditions specified in
subsection 3.2 "Environmental Requirements". In addition, observe the
storage conditions specified in item (1) "Environmental conditions for
storage" of subsection 17.2 when the system is not going to be used for a
long time. If the system is used or stored in an environment outside the
specified conditions, a system malfunction may occur.

2. Do not place any objects on the water-cooling unit. The cooling capability
may be reduced and overheating may occur, disabling system operation. If
a heavy component is placed on the top of the water-cooling unit, the system
may be damaged.

3. Do not use the system in an environment where abrupt temperature changes

can occur. Abrupt temperature changes can produce condensation within
the system, which may cause corrosion or a malfunction in the system.

No. 2B308-309EN
34
NOTICE: 4. When the X-ray tube assembly is discharged, X-ray output may be stopped
temporarily. In this case, the images may be affected.

5. Be sure to use the X-ray tube assembly specified in this operation manual. If
an X-ray tube assembly other than that specified is used, the leakage X-rays
may increase or the optimal X-ray field may not be obtained.

6. If a stretcher is moved close to the catheterization table when the patient is

transferred to or from the table, take great care to prevent the stretcher from
interfering with the tableside console or peripheral units such as contrast
medium injectors.

7. Setting/changing of parameters in Acquisition mode must be performed by

an operator who is familiar with the system operation. If the parameters are
set inappropriately, the system may not operate normally.

8. Do not remove a CD-R or DVD±R from the system while image data from
the CD-R or DVD±R is being transferred to another recording media or the
image data from another media is being recorded on the CD-R or DVD±R. If
a CD-R or DVD±R is removed while such processing is in progress, the data
may be damaged.

9. Periodic replacement of the hard disk is required because it may become

defective due to deterioration with age, resulting in loss of image data and
patient data.
For the replacement interval, refer to subsection 18.3 "Periodically Replaced
Parts".

10. To prevent loss of data recorded in the RAID, routinely back up the image
data for each patient on films, CD-Rs, etc. Do not continue accumulating
image data on the hard disk of the image processor.
This system uses an SSD (solid state drive) to store image data. Due to the
characteristics of SSDs, data stored in the SSD may be lost if power is not
supplied for a long time. Be sure to back up the stored data if the system will
be without power for a long time.

11. Be extremely careful not to allow the coolant circulator of the FPD to fall.
The coolant circulator has a high center of gravity and may fall easily.

No. 2B308-309EN
35
4. Description of Warning Labels

In order to use the system safely, warning labels have been attached to the
system main unit as shown below. Before using the system, check the
mounting positions and contents of the warning labels.

NOTE: If this operation manual is supplied because of upgrade of the installed

product, the shape of the warning label specified in this operation manual
and the shape of the warning label attached to the installed product may
differ as follows.

Label in the operation manual (example) Label on the installed product (example)

No. 2B308-309EN
36
(1) Floor-mounted C-arm support unit CAS-880A

(1.1) Floor rotation base touch sensor used with CAS-880A

The figure below shows the floor rotation base touch sensor used with
CAS-880A.
For the warning label attached to CAS-880A with the optional optical sensor,
refer to "(1.2) Optical sensor (option) used with CAS-880A".

No. 2B308-309EN
37
No. 2B308-309EN
38
No. 2B308-309EN
39
(1.2) Optical sensor (option) used with CAS-880A

No. 2B308-309EN
40
No. 2B308-309EN
41
No. 2B308-309EN
42
(2) Catheterization table CAT-850B

No. 2B308-309EN
43
When the optional extension table kit (XBET-001A) is used, the following
warning label is attached to the extension table (2 locations).

No. 2B308-309EN
44
(3) Catheterization table CAT-880B

No. 2B308-309EN
45
(4) Tableside console

This label indicates that this operation manual must be referred to in order to
perform operation safely and correctly.

(5) Table operating box (for the CAT-880B)

This label indicates that this operation manual must be referred to in order to
perform operation safely and correctly.

No. 2B308-309EN
46
(6) Wireless footswitch (option)

* Note that the shape of the wireless footswitch differs depending on the
model. The location where the label is attached and the shape of the
wireless footswitch may not be as shown in the figure above. Check the
footswitch actually used at the site.

(7) Power ON switch box

No. 2B308-309EN
47
(8) Switch box

No. 2B308-309EN
48
Important Information
1. To ensure safe and correct operation of each system, read the operation
manual carefully and obtain a good understanding of the system before
starting operation. For details, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.

2. The responsibility for maintenance and management of the product after

delivery resides with the customer who has purchased the product.

3. The warranty does not cover the following items, even during the warranty
period:

(1) Damage or loss due to misuse or abuse.

(2) Damage or loss caused by Acts of God such as fires, earthquakes,

floods, lightning, etc.

(3) Damage or loss caused by failure to meet the specified conditions for
this equipment, such as inadequate power supply, improper installation,
or unacceptable environmental conditions.

(4) Damage or loss due to mobile use in a vehicle which is not authorized
by Canon Medical Systems.

(5) Damage or loss due to use outside the territory in which the equipment
was originally sold.

(6) Damage or loss involving equipment purchased from a source other

than Canon Medical Systems or its authorized distributors or agents.

(7) Damage or loss resulting from infection by malware (malicious

software, such as a computer virus or worm, that harms computers).

(8) As a basic characteristics of the FPD, the following phenomena may

occur.
However, these phenomena are not system abnormalities and are not
covered by the warranty.

• In FPDs, the output level of some pixels may differ from that of the
surrounding pixels. Therefore, some pixels may show differences in
brightness compared with the surrounding pixels.
• The sensitivity at the margins of the FPD input screen may be low
sometimes. In this case, there is a possibility of images being
adversely affected because the brightness may be low or artifacts
may occur at these margins.
• When radiography or fluoroscopy is performed for target objects with
large differences in X-ray absorption, the acquired image may be
seen on subsequent images as an after-image.

(9) The warranty of the tabletop mat does not cover the following.

• Changes in the characteristics over time due to use (such as

changes in hardness).
• For the tabletop mat (XBTM-001A): Changes in characteristics over
time due to use (such as changes in hardness) as well as
depressions of less than 2 cm caused by repeated use.

4. This equipment shall not be used by persons other than fully qualified and
certified medical personnel.

No. 2B308-309EN
49
5. Although operation is performed only by the persons described above,
Canon Medical Systems will not be held responsible for diagnostic results or
any secondary damage resulting from the data obtained through operation of
the equipment.

6. Do not make changes or modifications to the software or hardware of this

product.

7. In no event shall Canon Medical Systems be liable for problems, damage, or

loss caused by relocation, modification, or repair performed by personnel
other than those designated by Canon Medical Systems.

8. The purpose of this equipment is to provide doctors with data for clinical
diagnosis.

The responsibility for diagnostic procedures lies with the physicians involved.
Canon Medical Systems shall not be liable for the results of diagnostic
procedures.

9. Important data must be backed up on external recording media such as

clinical records, notebooks, DVD, or magnetic tapes.

10. Canon Medical Systems shall not be liable for loss of data stored in the
memory of this equipment caused by operator error or accidents.

11. Canon Medical Systems will not be held responsible for any infections of
physicians, engineers, nurses, or patients caused by the equipment.

Proper disinfection of the equipment is the responsibility of the user.

12. This manual contains warnings regarding foreseeable potential dangers. Be

alert at all times to dangers other than those indicated.

13. Canon Medical Systems shall not be liable for damage or loss that results
from negligence or from ignoring the precautions and operating instructions
contained in this operation manual.

14. On the occasion of change of the administrator or manager for this

equipment, be sure to hand over this operation manual.

15. Canon Medical Systems shall not be liable for damage resulting from use in
combination with units other than the standard components, optional units,
and standard units used in combination described in this manual.

16. This equipment shall be connected to a network only if security measures

against infection by malware (malicious software, such as a computer virus
or worm, that harms computers) have been established for the network.

17. This equipment shall be connected to a network with an environment

specified by Canon Medical Systems. Consult your Canon Medical Systems
representative for details.

18. Canon Medical Systems shall not be liable for the following events resulting
from infection by malware (malicious software, such as a computer virus or
worm, that harms computers).

• Deletion, tampering, or leakage of data (including clinical data) stored in

this product
• Accidents due to malfunction of this product
• Infection of other products via this product or damages resulting from such
infection
• Any other events resulting from infection with malware

No. 2B308-309EN
50
19. The following problems may occur in this product in the event of a network
failure. For details, contact your service representative.

a. Failure to export an image to the server.

If this problem occurs, the image is saved in the system. However, when
the data storage capacity of the system is reached, the oldest images
saved in the system are overwritten (deleted).

b. Failure to receive an MWM notification, resulting in inability to start the

study
To start the study, enter the patient information and study information
manually or issue an emergency ID.

c. Failure to transfer RDSR information via the network

Because the dose data is not saved, the cumulative dose is not available
for reference, which may lead to excessive exposure dose.

d. Failure to import an image from the server

If the image cannot be obtained from other save destinations such as
external storage media, it may be necessary to acquire the image again,
resulting in additional exposure dose.

No. 2B308-309EN
51
Cybersecurity and This Product

1. Introduction

Cybersecurity (or "security") refers to protection against cyberattacks. To

protect against such attacks, proper security measures such as security
management for the operation of the product and guidelines for connecting
the product to the Internet or peripheral devices must be followed. Attacks
come in the form of malicious software (malware) such as computer viruses
or worms. Cyberattacks can cause data falsification, leakage of information
(including patient data), product malfunction, infection of other
products/devices, and more.

It is recommended that risk management (the analysis and prioritization of

security and safety risks) be performed by each medical institution. Proper
application of risk management aids in determining the security measures,
security management methods, and operating conditions required for
protection against cyberattacks.

By implementing these methods and security measures, a high level of

security can be maintained.

Activation of the security functions of this product is necessary for them to be

effective. For a description of the security functions of this product, refer to
subsection 9.4 "System Security Functions" of the reference manual. For
assistance in activating the security functions or for information regarding the
security settings contact your CMSC service representative.

2. Installation and Operation Conditions

To protect this product from cyberattacks, several conditions must be

satisfied. Failure to do so increases the risk of malware infection, data
deletion, data falsification, data leakage, and product malfunction. If this
product becomes infected, malware may be transferred from this product to
others.

(1) Security protection for the LAN or VLAN (virtual local area network) to
which this product is connected must be in place.

(2) The network should be administered in a way that ensures that this
product can only be used by authorized persons. The network should
not normally be connected to WAN.

(3) Physical security protection (locks and entry control) should be used so
that only authorized persons may enter the area in which the product is
installed.

(4) Security protection should be implemented for removable media on

which X-ray images, patient data, reports and logs are saved. Data
stored on the media should be completely deleted and the media
should be rendered inoperable before disposal.

(5) The monitor of this product should be oriented in a way that only
authorized persons may view it.

No. 2B308-309EN
52
3. Security Measures for Use of This Product

For protection against cyberattacks and malware, the following security

measures must be implemented and maintained.

(1) When connecting this product to a network, observe the following:

• Security control is established

• No risk of malware attacks
• All connected equipment has user-controlled security
• All connected equipment has access limited to authorized persons

(2) When connecting this product to a network, observe the following:

• Prevent unauthorized access to the product or unintended

communication by using an external firewall device or a system for
detecting/preventing hacking.
• Prevent unauthorized access to the product or unintended
communication by performing communication route/port control for
the network device to which this product is connected.
• Do not connect this product to the Internet.
• Do not connect this product to a network that can be directly
accessed from the Internet.
• When removable storage media (such as a CD or DVD) is used,
confirm in advance that it is not infected with malware.
• If any executable files (extension .exe) exist in the media, do not
execute the files.
• Do not perform any other actions that may result in infection (e.g.,
use of media not properly controlled by the user).
• Perform physical entry control (locking of the area where this product
is installed, etc.) so that the product can be used only by an
authorized person.
• Perform user management and user authority management
appropriately so each user only has the required level of
permissions/functions to perform their task.
• Use a login password that is difficult to guess or crack. In addition,
manage the password so that it is not leaked to third parties.
• Assign a cybersecurity administrator. The cybersecurity
administrator should continue to pay careful attention to risk control
(system setting, network security control, and other controls) to
maintain the required security level.
• Prevent leakage of patient information by carefully managing
removable media (such as CDs or DVDs) and printouts that contain
patient information.
• When this product is not being used (including when the user
temporarily leaves the room), be sure to lock the screen of the
monitor or log off from the system to prevent unauthorized operation,
data falsification, or leakage of information by third parties.

No. 2B308-309EN
53
4. Attack Surface

For cybersecurity, it is important to understand the points of entry for

cyberattacks on this product (attack surface).

The dashed lines in the following figure indicate the trust boundary of this
product. To ensure security, only trusted information (data) should be
allowed to cross the boundary. The circles on the boundary indicate the
attack surface.

Figure 1 Schematic representation of system interconnection

No. 2B308-309EN
54
 Table 1 Input source/output destination of data

Connected to Protocol Description

PACS/DICOM server DICOM Connection to the PACS/DICOM server for the
following purposes.
• Archive/retrieval of patient information and X-ray
images
• DICOM Storage
• DICOM Query/Retrieve
• DICOM Worklist
CD/DVD Windows standard • Backup/restoration of the system configuration
file system
• Used to update software
DICOM • Archive/retrieval of X-ray images including patient
information
Imager DICOM Print • Output of DICOM images to the imager
Angio Workstation TCP/IP • Sharing of various information items including
study information and patient information
DICOM
System-specific • Archive/retrieval of X-ray images
communication
I/F

5. Patient Information Handled by This Product

This product records patients’ personal information (PI) and personal health
information (PHI). This information is unencrypted. To prevent leakage of
information or data falsification, carefully manage the data so that only an
authorized person can access it. Once the information is no longer needed,
delete the data appropriately.

Patient information (PI, PHI)

• Patient data
• Study data
• Diagnostic information, measurement information
• Images
• User account information
• Facility information

User information as defined in the local user management of the system is

also saved.

No. 2B308-309EN
55
 6. Network Security

Carefully read and understand these network-related product characteristics

before use. To change the settings, contact your CMSC service
representative.

6.1 Network Requirements

• Minimum throughput: Response time of up to 50 ms

• Wired network for transfer of image files with a large minimum size:
100 Mbps or higher recommended
• TCP/IP network
• Network architecture: TCP/IP
• Ethernet IEEE 802.3ab 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T
• Internet Protocol version: IPv4
• Independent LAN connection (prevention of the increase of leakage
current)
• This product cannot be a member of the Microsoft Windows domain

6.2 Network Security

It is strongly recommended that this product be operated in a safe network

environment protected from unauthorized access. The methods of
protection include firewall protection, DMZ (demilitarized zone / perimeter
network), and VLAN (virtual local area network).

NOTE: 1. When installing a physical firewall, install it between the HUB (connecting
DFP-8000C and the Angio Workstation) and the network in the facility.

2. Apply the same packet filtering rules to the firewall as for the network in the
facility to the Angio Workstation.

(1) Inbound firewall

An internal firewall prevents unauthorized external access.

No. 2B308-309EN
56
 6.3 Security of Wireless Communication Devices

This product does not support wireless communication.

6.4 Security of DICOM Connection

• Except for DICOM ping/verification and query/retrieval initiated by a

remote DICOM device, a communication session is always started locally
by the system.

• The internal firewall of this product handles the ports used in the DICOM
data flow defined in the system as exceptions.

• Settings must be performed in order to connect trusted devices.

6.5 File sharing in the network

Files are shared with the Angio Workstation through the file sharing system
of this product. Files can also be shared with other systems if necessary.

7. Data Security

This product can encrypt data. If data encryption is enabled, the encryption
key must be managed carefully.

7.1 System Disk Encryption

The entire system disk can be encrypted to prevent the leakage of personal
information stored in the system disk. To prevent personal information
leakage due to theft, system disk encryption is recommended for products
that will be put into storage, moved to another location, or disposed of.
In system disk encryption, software-based encryption is used to prevent
startup and access to the system disk, and therefore the personal
information stored in the system is protected. The encryption of data in
system disk includes: patient data, images, log files, user environment
settings, user settings, etc.
For details about the encryption procedure, contact your CMSC service
representative. The user-defined password must be set by the system
administrator. The recovery key is produced by the system before the start
of the encryption process. The key can be used to unlock the encrypted disk
in the event of a forgotten password. The security of the system depends on
the management of the recovery key and the user-defined encryption
password. If the encryption password or recovery key is leaked (or lost),
data cannot be protected.

NOTICE: Do not encrypt system disks that are currently in use.

This system is likely to be used for emergencies. If the current system disks
are encrypted, the system will not be usable in an emergency.

NOTE: In addition to system disks, drives in which personal information is stored

can also be encrypted. The drives can be encrypted to protect data in the
case that the system disks are stolen.
When countermeasures for the theft of systems disks are in place, such as
controlling entry to the room in which the system is installed, this precaution
is not required.
For further details, contact your CMSC service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
57
 (1) Encryption password and recovery key
The encryption password and recovery key should be securely
managed by the system administrator. If the recovery key is lost,
patient data saved in the system will be inaccessible. If both the
encryption password and the recovery key are lost, CMSC cannot
restore the data.

(2) Unlocking the encrypted system

If system disk encryption is enabled, the system must be unlocked to
start it up. The following two methods can be used.

(a) The user enters the encryption password.

(b) The user enters the recovery key.

(3) If the encryption password is lost

If the encryption password is lost, the recovery key can be used to
unlock the patient information.

(4) Changing the encryption password and recovery key

For changing the encryption password and recovery key, contact your
CMSC service representative.

7.2 Backup

Backup data saved using the backup function is stored in the specified
media in unencrypted form.

Patient information is not included in the backup data. Be sure to protect the
media on which the backup is stored to ensure the security of the data.
Once the backup data is no longer needed for recovery, render it unreadable.

If the backup data is to be stored for a long time, copying the backup data to
a USB storage media with a security function (such as a hardware-encrypted
USB drive with a keypad) is recommended.

NOTE: For restoration of the data in the event of system trouble, restoration files
can be stored in the backup disk. Encrypting the disk, or storing it in a
secured (locked) room, is recommended. For information about encryption,
refer to 7.1 "System Disk Encryption" of this section.
For further details, contact your service representative.

7.3 Patient Archive Solution

This product supports multiple internal and external save destinations for
X-ray images and patient information.

• Local archive: Stored locally on this product

Temporary archive location used until the images are stored in external
archives such as the DICOM/PACS server

• DICOM storage: Stored on the DICOM/PACS server

Permanent archive destination

7.4 Protecting the Security of Data in the Local Archive

A security assurance procedure for X-ray images temporarily stored in the

local archive must be established.

No. 2B308-309EN
58
7.5 Protecting the Security of Data on a Remote Archive or on the DICOM/PACS
Server

A permanent archiving procedure must be established. Consult with the

server administrator to establish a procedure for protecting the data archived
on DICOM/PACS.

7.6 Information Saved on Removable Media

(1) Removable media that can be used with this product

This product features a CD/DVD drive.

CDs/DVDs can be used for the following purposes:

• Import/export of X-ray images including patient data
• Backup and restoration of site-specific system data
• Export of audit log
• Update of system and application software

(2) Data saved on removable media

Data saved on CDs/DVDs is not encrypted. Since the exported X-ray

images contain patient information, use extreme care when managing
CDs/DVDs.

• When saving X-ray image data on a CD/DVD, it is recommended

that the data be de-identified. Refer to subsection 5.5 "Archiving the
Data to a CD-R/DVD±R" of the reference manual for details about
the de-identification function. De-identification reduces the risk of
patient information leakage if the media is lost.
• Appropriately manage removable media so as not to lose it.

(3) Deletion of data saved on removable media

This product does not have a function to safely delete the data saved
on removable media. In accordance with the regulations and
guidelines applicable to the handling of patient information, use an
appropriate tool and procedures to delete the data saved on removable
media.

No. 2B308-309EN
59
 8. Product Security

The privacy and security of this product must be set up and maintained to
ensure continued protection.

8.1 Protection from Malicious Software

To defend this product from malware (malicious software including computer

viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and DoS attacks), protection must be set up
at various levels. For the most effective protection, cooperation between
Canon Medical Systems and the customer is necessary.
This product uses the McAfee Embedded Control / Windows Device Guard
whitelist function to execute trusted software only.

NOTE: McAfee Embedded Control keeps a record of any event in which malicious
software attacks the system and the execution of the software is prevented
by the system. Periodically checking the record logs output by McAfee
Embedded Control is recommended. An account with service engineer
privilege for this product is required to check the logs.
For how to check the logs, contact your CMSC service representative.

8.2 Inability to Access Microsoft Windows

To access the desktop and file system of the Microsoft Windows operating
system of this product, service engineer privileges for this product are
required. For access to the operating system, contact your CMSC service
representative. Regardless of account privileges, users do not have access
to web browsers or the mail user agent.
Except for application-related files that are loaded via the application itself,
installing software and adding files cannot be performed via the Internet.

8.3 Disabled Microsoft Windows Functions

The following Microsoft Windows functions are disabled:

• Microsoft Windows desktop service

• Remote desktop connection
• Remote assistance
• Microsoft Windows autoplay function

8.4 Disabled Microsoft Windows Services

Only services required for this product are enabled. All other services are
disabled.

8.5 Automatic Logoff (ALOF)

Screen Locking

This product features a screen locking function. The screen locking function
is disabled during examinations.
For details, refer to subsection 9.4.5 "Screen locking" of the reference
manual.
Setting the screen locking function to an appropriate time limit is
recommended to prevent data falsification by third parties, data leakage
(including patient information), etc.

No. 2B308-309EN
60
8.6 Microsoft Windows User and Password

This product is likely to be used in emergencies and therefore logging on the

operating system is automatically performed. Manually logging on to
Microsoft Windows is not required.
For security assurance, this product ships with a system-specific password.
The password should only be changed when the system administrator wants
to change the default password to a new password for security reasons. As
with all the other passwords, it should be handled carefully so that it can be
provided to the service personnel when necessary.
To access Microsoft Windows functions, log in with an account that has
service privileges for this system.

8.7 Firewall

Refer to 6 "Network Security" of this section.

8.8 Audit control (AUDT)

This function audits the system's operation. The following events are
recorded as logs:

• User management
a) Creation, change, activation, deactivation, and deletion of accounts
• Login
a) User login
b) Failed login
c) Emergency user login
d) Logout
• Start of an examination
• Image observation event in Review mode
• Image import/export (including external media)
• Image deletion
• Transfer and MPPS transfer of the modality work list
• Setting changes (change of the system setting, change of the DICOM list,
etc.)

8.9 Authentication (AUTH) / Personal Authentication (PAUT)

This function determines whether the users are authorized and authenticates
authorized users. This product supports user authentication. It can be used
to check whether the user is authorized to use this product. If the user name
and password are not authenticated, the user is denied access unless there
is an emergency.

For details, refer to subsections 9.4.1 "User certification" and 9.4.2 "User
management/Authorization management" of the reference manual.

8.10 Emergency Access (EMRG)

This function allows the user to log in to the system software as an

emergency user in the case of an emergency such as when dealing with an
emergency patient. For details, refer to subsection 9.4.4 "Emergency user"
of the reference manual.

No. 2B308-309EN
61
8.11 De-identification (DIDT) of Personal Health Information (PHI)

This function de-identifies patient identifying information.

When X-ray images are exported to a CD or DVD, patient identification

information can be de-identified.

8.12 Data Backup and Restoration in the Event of a Disaster (DTBK)

This function keeps system settings information and restores the system in
the event of a disaster etc. For details, contact your CMSC service
representative.

8.13 Integrity and authenticity (IGAU) of personal health information (PHI)

The study data saved by this product is stored on a system disk in the
RAID-1 array. The image data is stored in the image disk in the RAID-1
array. Because the data is stored on two separate hard disks, it is possible
to recover data from single-fault conditions of the disks. Only authenticated
users can access data saved in the system.

8.14 Malware Detection/Protection (MLDP)

McAfee Embedded Control (MEC), a whitelist-based security software

program, is installed on this system. MEC allows only executable files that
are registered to its whitelist to be run and therefore prevents the execution
of malware. For details concerning security software programs, contact your
CMSC service representative. MEC is security software which uses a
whitelist system.

8.15 Physical Lock (PLOK)

Each port must be physically blocked (closed) so that unauthorized third

parties cannot access the LAN or USB ports. Which LAN and USB ports
should be blocked depends on the customer operation and the physical
environment in which this product is installed. Customers are responsible for
providing their own physical blocks.

• Port blockers that require special jigs for mounting and removal are
recommended.
• USB port blocker/LAN port blocker
Lindy:
https://lindy.com/en/
https://www.lindy.com.au/usb-port-blocker-4-pack-key-pink
Panduit:
https://www.panduit.com/
Kensington:
https://www.kensington.com/

No. 2B308-309EN
62
9. Security Monitoring (Daily Checks)

It is necessary for the user to prevent unauthorized use of this product. This
product collects access records that identify users who access data. These
access records are useful for investigating unauthorized operation.
Regularly check the access records to monitor unauthorized use of the
product.
The collected access records will be overwritten when the log reaches a
certain size. It is important to proactively backup the access records to an
external storage media such as a DVD. How often the data will need to be
backed up depends on the frequency of system usage. Monitor the usage
conditions and manage access record backups carefully. For details, refer
to subsection 9.4.3 "Audit trail" of the reference manual.

10. Product Software Change Control

A description of the support information for the operating system of this

product and our policy on security updates.

10.1 Operating System of This Product

The operating system is based on Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise

2019 LTSC. Support of this operating system by Microsoft will end in
January 2029 (as of November 2019).

10.2 Security Updates

CMSC is constantly checking for vulnerabilities in product security. These

vulnerabilities include those in application software, third-party components,
and the operating system.
Vulnerabilities announced by vendors of the operating system or third-party
components are evaluated based on usage and settings in this product.
If any action is deemed necessary, CMSC will provide security updates or
patches for the product.
Our product security incident response team (PSIRT) evaluates software
vulnerabilities using the common vulnerability scoring system (CVSS). If the
CVSS basic score exceeds the acceptable level, the PSIRT evaluates the
potential impact on the product and the severity of secondary damage that
could be caused by an attack. The typical attack scenario assumes active
attacks that exploit system vulnerabilities. Based on the evaluation, the
CVSS environmental score is calculated. If the CVSS environmental score
exceeds a certain level, the PSIRT identifies the affected products and
versions.
For security vulnerabilities evaluated and determined by CMSC as "posing
no safety risks", vulnerability information is posted on our website.

• Canon Medical Systems cybersecurity vulnerability handling process

URL: https://mfl.ssl.cdn.sdlmedia.com/636602083720739123HF.pdf
• Security-related software updates
URL: https://jp.medical.canon/service-support/securityinformation
11. Security Life Cycle

After termination of the operating system support by Microsoft, security

patches and software updates may be unavailable. For security support
after termination of Microsoft support, contact your CMSC service
representative.

Note that only matters regarding cybersecurity are supported during the
security life cycle, and that the security life cycle is independent from the
general period of support for this product.

No. 2B308-309EN
63
Radiation Protection

1. Significant zone of occupancy

The area expected to be entered by physicians, radiological technologists,

and nurses during normal X-ray angiography is referred to as the significant
zone of occupancy. Note that this area excludes that which may be entered
in emergencies or when using special techniques. For this system, the
shaded sections (up to a height of 2000 mm from the floor) in the figure
below indicate the significant zone of occupancy.

Single-plane system (SP Cardiac/Vascular system)

300 600 Significant zone

of occupancy

600
400
400
600
500 600
Significant zone
of occupancy
(Unit: mm)

No. 2B308-309EN
64
Biplane system (BP Cardiac/Vascular system)

INFX-8000V/B, 8000V/Y, 8000V/P BP Cardiac system

300 600

Significant zone
of occupancy

600
400
400
600
Significant zone
of occupancy
500 600

(Unit: mm)

INFX-8000V/B, 8000V/Y, 8000V/P BP Vascular system

Significant zone
of occupancy
300 600

600
400
400
600

Significant zone
of occupancy
500 600

(Unit: mm)

No. 2B308-309EN
65
Required Actions in the Event of Power
Failure

If the system power is turned OFF due to a power failure, reboot the system
by performing the standard system power ON procedures after the power is
recovered.

<1> Press the Power ON button .

<2> After approximately 6 minutes, startup of the system is completed. The

Patient mode screen is displayed on the system console monitor.

Power ON switch box System console

Patient mode screen (example of display)

NOTE: 1. If a power failure occurs while image acquisition or data transfer is in

progress, image acquisition or data transfer may not be completed normally.
Therefore, check the acquired images or transferred data. If the check
reveals that a process is not completed normally, acquire images or transfer
data again.

2. The power requirements of the system are extremely high; therefore, the
system cannot be used with a standalone power generator.

3. If the system is shut down or the power supply to the system is interrupted
due to a power failure during an examination and the system is then started
up again, the discontinued examination is resumed automatically.

No. 2B308-309EN
66
1. Intended Use
Contents 1.1 Indications for Use
1.2 Intended Use
1.3 Patient Population
1.4 User Profile
1.5 Operating Principle
1.6 Features
1.7 Clinical benefits

No. 2B308-309EN
67
1.1 Indications for Use
Alphenix INFX-8000V/B, 8000V/Y, 8000V/P is a digital radiography/
fluoroscopy system used in a diagnostic and interventional angiography
configuration. The system is indicated for use in diagnostic and
angiographic procedures for blood vessels in the heart, brain, abdomen and
lower extremities.

1.2 Intended Use

INFX-8000V/B, 8000V/Y, 8000V/P systems are diagnostic X-ray systems
designed for multidirectional observation of the flow of contrast medium
injected into the blood vessels of a patient.
Two system types, single-plane (SP) and biplane (BP), are available.

The SP system uses one support unit in combination and performs

fluoroscopy/radiography of the target region from one direction.
The BP system uses two support units in combination and performs
fluoroscopy/radiography of the target region from two directions.

In addition, two types are available for both the SP and BP systems
according to the intended examination: for selective angiography
(catheterization) of the heart (cardiac configuration) and for selective
angiography (catheterization) of the head, abdomen, and lower extremities
(vascular configuration).
For details, refer to the table below.

• SP Cardiac system This system is designed for selective cardiac angiography (with
catheterization).
• BP Cardiac system
This system is intended for use in interventional procedures for cardiac
vessels, such as PCI, and also for use in EP (electrophysiological) studies.

• SP Vascular system This system is designed for selective angiography (with catheterization) of
the head, abdomen, and lower extremities.
• BP Vascular system
This system is intended for use in interventional procedures, such as
embolization, for blood vessels in the head, abdomen, and lower extremities.

NOTICE: Federal law restricts this device to sale, distribution, and use by or on the
order of a physician.
The INFX-8000V/B system is limited by law to investigational use for
indications not specified in this section.
This caution is only for the U.S.A.

No. 2B308-309EN
68
1.3 Patient Population
Intended patients : Not specified

Mass of intended patients : The allowable maximum mass of the patient

differs depending on the catheterization table
used in combination. Refer to subsection 3.4
"Classification & Safety Requirements".

1.4 User Profile

Intended operators : Radiological technologists or physicians who
have undergone the following training.

Operators who enter

patient information : Radiological technologists, physicians, nurses,
or other medical staff who have undergone the
following training.

Persons who have access

to the system : Medical staff specified above, service engineers,
attendants, and cleaning personnel

Training : Before using the system, all operators must

undergo sufficient training as described in this
operation manual. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative for training.

1.5 Operating Principle

High-voltage output from a X-ray generator, which is provided for this system,
is supplied to an X-ray tube assembly to generate X-rays, and the generated
X-rays pass through the patient. At this time, the generated X-rays are
collimated to the desired exposure field size using a X-ray beam limiting
device. After scattered radiation is reduced by an X-ray grid, the X-rays that
have passed through the patient are converted into electrical signals by an
X-ray detector using the X-ray scintillation effect, and these electrical signals
are then sent to a digital radiography as digital image signals. The digital
radiography performs digital image processing and records the processed
images. At the same time, it displays the images on the System monitor and
the Fluoroscopic or Reference monitor. The digital radiography also
supports network data transfer.

No. 2B308-309EN
69
1.6 Features
(1) A tube support that allows positioning for radiography to be performed by
simple operation is used in combination. The auto positioning and auto
angle functions, which are described in (2) below, are provided for the tube
support, making possible to automatically reproduce the radiographic
position.

(2) The auto positioning function for automatically reproducing the preset
radiographic position, the auto angle function for automatically reproducing
the radiographic position used for image acquisition, and the auto map
function for automatically retrieving images acquired at an angle close to the
current radiographic position are provided.

In addition, the sequential navigation function is provided and the

radiographic techniques and radiographic positions preset for the target
routine study are reproduced sequentially during radiography using this
function.

(3) Various functions such as pulsed fluoroscopy, various dose settings, pulse
rate setting, beam hardening filters, and virtual collimation using an LIH
image are provided. The exposure dose can be reduced by using such
functions in combination.

(4) The acquired images can be analyzed, output to films, and stored in a media
(background processing) during examination. These processes can be
performed simultaneously, significantly reducing the time required for
examination.

(5) DICOM Print, Storage, Storage Commitment, Q&R, MWM, and MPPS can
be used.

(6) Various types of image processing, DPRF (dynamic pattern recognition filter),
ADCF (advanced digital compensation filter), and SNRF (super noise
reduction filter) are provided, reducing persistence and noise in images.

(7) Various safety functions, data storage to RAID, reduced operation mode in
the case of system failure, and interlocks and touch sensors for preventing
accidents are provided.

1.7 Clinical Benefits

This system is for use in diagnostic, angiographic, and interventional
(intravascular therapy) procedures for blood vessels in the heart, brain,
abdomen, and lower extremities.

No. 2B308-309EN
70
2. Composition
Contents 2.1 Outline
2.2 System Components
2.3 Optional Units
2.4 Compatible Units

No. 2B308-309EN
71
2.1 Outline
INFX-8000V/B, 8000V/Y, 8000V/P systems consist of standard and optional
units. The system configuration differs according to the diagnostic purpose.
The figures below show a configuration example.

2.1.1 Single-plane system

(1) Control room

Control room

Fluoroscopic monitor and reference monitor

The fluoroscopic monitor displays fluoroscopic and radiographic images.

The reference monitor displays the reference images required for the studies.
These monitors are also installed in the examination room.

Main console

The main console enables control of operations in the examination room

from the control room.

System console

The system console is used to perform study-related operations such as

registration and retrieval of patient/study information, support of various
studies, file manipulation, and image processing.

The system console consists of a keyboard, system monitor, and mouse.

No. 2B308-309EN
72
(2) Examination room
The following figure shows the configuration of the single-plane system.

In the examination room

No. 2B308-309EN
73
2.1.2 Biplane system
(1) Control room
System monitor Power ON Fluoroscopic monitor 2 (F side/L side)
(System console) switch box Reference monitor 2 (F side/L side)

Keyboard Mouse Main console

Control room

Fluoroscopic monitors

The following two fluoroscopic monitors are included in the configuration.

The frontal fluoroscopic monitor displays fluoroscopic/radiographic images

from the C-arm support unit.

The lateral fluoroscopic monitor displays fluoroscopic/radiographic images

from the Ω-arm support unit.

The fluoroscopic monitors are also installed in the examination room.

Reference monitors

The two reference monitors (reference monitor 1 and reference monitor 2)

are included in the configuration. The monitors display reference images
required for the studies.

The reference monitors are also installed in the examination room.

Main console

The main console enables control of operations in the examination room

from the control room.

System console

The system console is used to perform study-related operations such as

registration and retrieval of patient/study information, support of various
studies, file manipulation, and image processing.

The system console consists of a keyboard, system monitor, and mouse.

No. 2B308-309EN
74
(2) Examination room
The following figure shows the configuration of the biplane system.

In the examination room

No. 2B308-309EN
75
2.2 System Components
2.2.1 Single-plane system

(1) System components

The table below lists the system components for each system model.
 indicates that the unit is provided as the standard, while  indicates that a
choice of units is available.

SP SP
Unit Model name (*1) Cardiac Vascular
system system
Floor-mounted C-arm support unit CAS-880A/B2  
Diagnostic X-ray beam limiting device BLA-900C 
BLA-900A 
BLA-900A/R1 
BLA-900C/R1  
X-ray tube assembly DSRX-T7444GDS 
DSRX-T7345GFS 
DSRX-T7445GFS (*2) 
Rotating-anode high-speed starter ST-7008  
Cable kit TLA-7008  
Water-cooled heat exchanger HEX-125  
Heat exchanger hose HEH-10040  
High-voltage cable HCM-150LCS/8V  
X-ray tube assembly mounting kit XGTM-048C/B1 
XGTM-028N/B1 
XGTM-028A/B1 
FPD mounting kit XGFM-088B/B1 (*3) 
XGFM-088C/B1 (*4) 
XGFM-128B/B1 (*3) 
XGFM-128C/B1 (*4) 
XGFM-168A/E1 
XGFM-168B/B1 (*5) 
X-ray flat panel detector 8-inch FPD TFP-800A/A1 (Water-cooled FPD) 
(FPD) TFP-800A/B1 (Air-cooled FPD) 
TFP-800A/C1 (Water-cooled FPD) 
TFP-800A/C2 (Air-cooled FPD) 
12-inch FPD TFP-1200A (Water-cooled FPD) 
TFP-1200A/B1 (Air-cooled FPD) 
TFP-1200A/C1 (Water-cooled FPD) 
TFP-1200A/C2 (Air-cooled FPD) 
TFP-1200C/A1 (Water-cooled FPD) 
TFP-1200C/A2 (Air-cooled FPD) 
12×16-inch TFP-1216A/A1 (Water-cooled FPD) 
FPD TFP-1216A/C1 (Water-cooled FPD) 

No. 2B308-309EN
76
 SP SP
Unit Model name (*1) Cardiac Vascular
system system
Tableside console XGCP-880BA/B1  
Tilting table I/F kit for CAS-880A XGTT-880A  
Catheterization table CAT-850B/B1  
CAT-880B/B1  
Tilting table I/F kit for CAS-880A XGTT-880A  
Footswitch XBFS-850S  
XBFS-880S  
XBFS-880S/A1  
Digital radiography system DFP-8000C/A2  
Keyboard kit XIDF-KBD802/EN  
TV Monitor ML19193 or equivalent  
(for examination room/control room, for
backup of the large-screen monitor) CL19196 or equivalent  
System monitor (LCD) CDL2013A-1A or equivalent  
Main console C (*6) XIDF-MCC80S  
Power ON switch box XIDF-PON801  
Fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room XIDF-FS801S  
X-ray high-voltage generator XTP-8100XG  
Monitor suspension IDI1000F-2WCA  
IDI1000F-3WCA  
IDI1000F-4WCA  
IDI1000F-6WCA  
MSF-04A/B1  
MSF-06A/B1  
Ceiling rail for monitor suspension unit XGMR-011A  
XGMR-012A  

*1) The auxiliary model number (/**) appended to the model name of some
units is omitted in the text of the operation and reference manuals.
*2) Can be used in combination with the 12-inch FPD.
*3) For Water-cooled FPD
*4) For Air-cooled FPD
*5) Intended for X-ray flat panel detector TFP-1216A/C1.
*6) Referred to as the "main console" in the operation and reference
manuals.

No. 2B308-309EN
77
(2) Main unit components
The table below shows the components constituting the main unit.

Main unit Component Quantity

C-arm support unit C-arm support unit main body 1
• CAS-880A Control cabinet 1
Connection cables 1 set
Catheterization table Catheterization table main body 1
• CAT-850B/B1 Tabletop mat 1
Drip infusion stand 1
Arm support (acrylic) : XBAS-001A 1
Armrest (CFRP) : XBAR-001A 1
Catheterization table Catheterization table main body 1
• CAT-880B/B1 Table operation box 1
Drip infusion stand 1
Tabletop mat 1
Patient immobilization band 2
Digital radiography system System cabinet 1
• DFP-8000C/A2 Console control box 1
Console PC 1
System transformer
Keyboard kit Keyboard 1
• XIDF-KBD802/EN Mouse 1
X-ray high-voltage generator Power cabinet 1
• XTP-8100XG Connecting cables 1 set

No. 2B308-309EN
78
 2.2.2 Biplane system

(1) System components

The table below lists the system components for each system model.
 indicates that the unit is provided as the standard, while  indicates that a
choice of units is available.
BP Cardiac system BP Vascular system
Unit Model name (*1) CAS-880A CAS-820B CAS-880A CAS-820B
combined combined combined combined
Floor-mounted C-arm support unit CAS-880A/B2  
Ceiling-suspended Ω-arm support unit CAS-820B/B1  
Diagnostic X-ray beam limiting device BLA-900C  
BLA-900A  
BLA-900A/R1  
BLA-900C/R1    
X-ray tube assembly DSRX-T7444GDS  
DSRX-T7345GFS 
DSRX-T7445GFS (*2)  
Rotating-anode high-speed starter ST-7008    
Cable kit TLA-7008    
Water-cooled heat exchanger HEX-125    
Heat exchanger hose HEH-10040    
High-voltage cable HCM-150LCS/8V  
HCM-150LCS/30  
X-ray tube assembly mounting kit XGTM-048C/B1 
XGTM-028N/B1 
XGTM-042C/B1 
XGTM-028A/B1 
XGTM-032N/B1 
FPD mounting kit XGFM-088B/B1 (*3) 
XGFM-088C/B1 (*4) 
XGFM-082B/B1 (*3) 
XGFM-082C/B1 (*4) 
XGFM-128B/B1 (*3) 
XGFM-128C/B1 (*4) 
XGFM-122B/B1 (*3) 
XGFM-122C/B1 (*4) 
XGFM-168A/E1 
XGFM-168B/B1 (*5) 
X-ray flat panel detector 8-inch FPD TFP-800A/A1  
(FPD) (*6) (Water-cooled FPD)
TFP-800A/B1  
(Air-cooled FPD)
TFP-800A/C1  
(Water-cooled FPD)
TFP-800A/C2  
(Air-cooled FPD)
12-inch FPD TFP-1200C/A1  
(Water-cooled FPD)
TFP-1200C/A2  
(Air-cooled FPD)

No. 2B308-309EN
79
 BP Cardiac system BP Vascular system
Unit Model name (*1) CAS-880A CAS-820B CAS-880A CAS-820B
combined combined combined combined
X-ray flat panel detector 12-inch FPD TFP-1200A  
(FPD) (*6) (Water-cooled FPD)
TFP-1200A/B1  
(Air-cooled FPD)
TFP-1200A/C1  
(Water-cooled FPD)
TFP-1200A/C2  
(Air-cooled FPD) (*7)
X-ray flat panel detector 12×16-inch TFP-1216A/A1 
(FPD) (*7) FPD (Water-cooled FPD)
TFP-1216A/C1 
(Water-cooled FPD)
Tableside console XGCP-882BA/B1 
Catheterization table CAT-850B/B1 
CAT-880B/B1 
Tilting table I/F kit for biplane XGTT-880A 
Footswitch XBFS-850B 
XBFS-880B 
Digital radiography system DFP-8000C/A2 
Keyboard kit XIDF-KBD802EN 
TV monitor ML19193 or equivalent 
(for examination room/control room) CL19196 or equivalent 
System monitor CDL2013A-1A or 
equivalent
Main console C (*8) XIDF-MCC80B 
Power ON switch box XIDF-PON801 
Fluoroscopy footswitch XIDF-FS801B 
X-ray high-voltage generator XTP-8100XG  (*9)
Monitor suspension unit IDI1000F-2WCA 
IDI1000F-3WCA 
IDI1000F-4WCA 
IDI1000F-6WCA 
MSF-08A/B1 
MSF-04A/B1 
MSF-06A/B1 
MSF-56A/B1 
Biplane system kit XIDF-BPS801/C1 

*1) The auxiliary model number (/**) appended to the model name of some
units is omitted in the text of the operation and reference manuals.
*2) Can be used in combination with the 12-inch FPD.
*3) For water-cooled FPD
*4) For air-cooled FPD
*5) Intended for X-ray flat panel detector TFP-1200A/C1.
*6) Combination of a water-cooled FPD and air-cooled FPD is not possible.
*7) Combination with the 12×16-inch FPD is not possible.
*8) Referred to as the "main console" in the operation and reference
manuals.
*9) Two units are used in combination.

No. 2B308-309EN
80
(2) Main unit components
The table below shows the components constituting the main unit.

Main unit Component Quantity

Support unit C-arm support unit main body 1
• CAS-880A/B2 Ω-arm support unit main body 1
• CAS-820B/B1 Control cabinet 1
Connection cables 1 set
Catheterization table Catheterization table main body 1
• CAT-850B/B1 Tabletop mat 1
Drip infusion stand 1
Arm support (acrylic) : XBAS-001A 1
Armrest (CFRP) : XBAR-001A 1
Catheterization table Catheterization table main body 1
• CAT-880B/B1 Table operation box 1
Drip infusion stand 1
Tabletop mat 1
Patient immobilization band 2
Digital radiography System cabinet 1
system Console control box 1
• DFP-8000C/A2
Console PC 1
System transformer 1
Keyboard kit Keyboard 1
• XIDF-KBD802/EN Mouse 1
X-ray high-voltage Power cabinet 1
generator
• XTP-8100XG Connecting cables 1 set

No. 2B308-309EN
81
2.3 Optional Units
The optional units are listed in the table below.

2.3.1 Single-plane system

SP Cardiac SP Vascular
Optional unit Model name
system system
Satellite console XGCP-880AA/B1  
Tableside console XGCP-880BA/TA  
(for use in combination with a tablet console) (*1)
Satellite console XGCP-880AA/TA  
(for use in combination with a tablet console) (*2)
Base plate (for the CAS-880A,  1400 mm) XGBP-880A  
Base plate (for the CAS-880A,  750 mm) XGBP-880B  
Tabletop control switch XBFG-001A/B1  
Tabletop control console (for the CAT-850B) XBFG-850B/B1  
Footswitch (additional) (*3) XBFS-850S  
XBFS-880S  
XBFS-880S/A1  
Wireless footswitch (*4) (*5) XBFS-880WS  
Wireless footswitch kit (*5) (for CAT-850B) XBFM-850A  
Wireless footswitch kit (*5) (for CAT-880B) XBFM-880A  
Armrest (for one arm) (for the CAT-880B) XBAR-001A  
Armrest (for both arms) XBAR110A  
Handgrip (for the CAT-850B) XBHG-001A/B1  
Handgrip (for the CAT-880B) XBHG-002A/B1  
Arm cover XBAC-001A  
Accessory tabletop rail (for the CAT-880B) XBAM-001A  
Drape holder (for the CAT-880B) XBDB-001A  
Base plate (for the CAT-850B/CAT-880B) XBBP250B  
XBBP-870B  
Extension rails XBER-001A  
Extension table XBET-001A  
Head-end table control switch kit XBHR-001A  
(for the CAT-850B)
Tabletop mat (low-rebound, thickness = 5 cm) XBTM-001A  
(for the CAT-850B)
Tableside tablet console XACP-001BA/C1  
Satellite tablet console XACP-001AA/C1  
Tableside tablet console (with switch box) XACP-002BA/C1  
Satellite tablet console (with switch box) XACP-002AA/C1  
Step-up transformer cabinet XSDT-100C  
System cabinet CAB-100B  
Side cover CABS-100B  
Corner cover CABC-100B  
TV Monitor (for examination room) SMD-19102-TC  

No. 2B308-309EN
82
 SP Cardiac SP Vascular
Optional unit Model name
system system
TV Monitor (for control room) SMD-19102-TD  
TV monitor (for control room or examination room) ML19193 or  
CL19196
Kit for adding the reference monitor XIDF-REF801/A2  
Stepping DSA support kit XBSD-850B  
Stepping DSA kit XIDF-STP801  
Rotational DSA kit XIDF-ROT801  
3D angiography kit XIDF-3DI801  
Low-contrast imaging kit XIDF-LCI801  
3D Roadmap kit XIDF-3DP802/A1  
Security kit for DoD XIDF-SEC802  
Microphone kit XIDF-MIC802  
Ext. signal display kit XIDF-ESD801  
XIDF-ESD801/A1  
Ext. signal display monitor (Color LCD monitor) CDL2013A-1A or  
equivalent
Additional reference monitor XIDF-REF801/C1  
Area dose meter ion chamber XJDC-009A (*6) 
XJDC-016A (*7) 
Area dose meter XJDK-001A/V8  
Review console XIDF-RVC801  
SNRF kit XIDF-SNR801  
Spot fluoroscopy kit XIDF-SFL801  
Large-screen monitor (for digital output) XMEZ-LMM021/A2  
Large-screen monitor (for digital output) XMEZ-LMM021/A3  
Digital encoder 1 (for adding a DVI input channel) XMEZ-LMMENC/D1  
(*8)
Digital encoder 2 (for adding two DVI input XMEZ-LMMENC/D2  
channels) (*8)
Additional panel PC (*8) XMEZ-PNLPC  
Stand for additional panel PC (*8) XMEZ-LMMSTD  
Large monitor accessory kit 2 (for digital output) XIDF-LMA802/C1  
(*9)
Large monitor accessory kit 2 (for digital output, XIDF-LMA802/CS  
with stand) (*9)
Monitor suspension for flat panel (for large monitor) MSF-56A/B1  
Lateral rails for flat panel monitor suspension XGMR-MSF021/B1  
AD converter kit XMEZ-PDC001  
Magnetic shielding kit XGPA-800A 
XGPA-1200A 
XGPA-1216A 
Support column rotation lock kit (for CAS-880A) XGSL-880A  
Longitudinal sensor unit (for CAT-850B) XBLS-850B  
Basic kit for clinical analysis application XIDF-QCA850/A1  

No. 2B308-309EN
83
 SP Cardiac SP Vascular
Optional unit Model name
system system
QCA kit XIDF-QCA851/A1  
QVA kit XIDF-QCA852/A1  
LVA kit XIDF-QCA853/A1  
RVA kit XIDF-QCA855/A1  
3D QCA kit XIDF-QCA856/A1  
Stent enhancer kit XIDF-QCA857/A1  
Chiller/HEX rack RAC-100C  
Large-screen monitor rack RAC-100L  
UPS connection kit XABT-UPS804  
Optical sensor floor cover XGFC-880A/H1  

*1) Use the following optional units in combination.

• XACP-002BA/C1: Tableside tablet console (with switch box)
• XGCP-880AA/B1: Satellite console
*2) Use the following optional unit in combination.
• XACP-002AA/C1: Satellite tablet console (with switch box)
*3) The additional footswitch should be of the same type as that used in the
standard configuration.
*4) It can be used independently or in combination with the standard
footswitch XBFS-880S or XBFS-880S/A1.
*5) The wireless footswitch and the wireless footswitch kit are for the USA,
Canada, the EU, Turkey, and Australia only.
*6) For X-ray beam limiting device BLA-900C and BLA-900C/R1
*7) For X-ray beam limiting device BLA-900A and BLA-900A/R1
*8) Dedicated option for XMEZ-LMM021/A2
*9) This kit is used to mount two backup monitors.

No. 2B308-309EN
84
2.3.2 Biplane system

BP Cardiac BP Vascular
Optional unit Model name
system system
Satellite console XGCP-882AA/B1  
Tableside console XGCP-882BA/TA  
(for use in combination with a tablet console) (*1)
Base plate (for the CAS-880A,  1400 mm) XGBP-880A  
Base plate (for the CAS-880A,  750 mm) XGBP-880B  
Footswitch (additional) (*2) XBFS-850B  
XBFS-880B  
XBFS-1000M  
Wireless footswitch (*3) (*4) XBFS-880WB  
XBFS-1000WM  
Wireless footswitch kit (*4) (for CAT-850B) XBFM-850A  
Wireless footswitch kit (*4) (for CAT-880B) XBFM-880A  
Armrest (for one arm) (for the CAT-880B) XBAR-001A  
Armrest (for both arms) XBAR110A  
Handgrip (for the CAT-850B) XBHG-001A/B1  
Handgrip (for the CAT-880B) XBHG-002A/B1  
Arm cover XBAC-001A  
Accessory tabletop rail (for the CAT-880B) XBAM-001A  
Drape holder (for the CAT-880B) XBDB-001A  
Tabletop control console (for the CAT-850B) XBFG-850B/B1  
Base plate (for the CAT-850B/CAT-880B) XBBP250B  
Extension rails XBER-001A  
Extension table XBET-001A  
Head-end table control switch kit XBHR-001A  
(for the CAT-850B)
Tabletop mat (low-rebound, thickness = 5 cm) XBTM-001A  
(for the CAT-850B)
Tableside tablet console XACP-001BA/C1  
Satellite tablet console XACP-001AA/C1  
Tableside tablet console (with switch box) XACP-002BA/C1  
Satellite tablet console (with switch box) XACP-002AA/C1  
Step-up transformer cabinet XSDT-100C  
System cabinet CAB-100B  
Side cover CABS-100B  
Corner cover CABC-100B  
TV monitor (for control room or examination room) ML19193 or  
CL19196
Stepping DSA support kit XBSD-850B  
Stepping DSA kit XIDF-STP801  
Rotational DSA kit XIDF-ROT801  
3D angiography kit XIDF-3DI801  
Low-contrast imaging kit XIDF-LCI801 

No. 2B308-309EN
85
 BP Cardiac BP Vascular
Optional unit Model name
system system
3D Roadmap kit XIDF-3DP802/A1  
Security kit for DoD XIDF-SEC802  
Microphone kit XIDF-MIC802  
Ext. signal display kit XIDF-ESD801  
XIDF-ESD801/A1  
Ext. signal display monitor (Color LCD monitor) CDL2013A-1A or  
equivalent
Area dose meter ion chamber XJDC-009A (*5) 
XJDC-016A (*6) 
Area dose meter XJDK-002A/V8  
Additional reference monitor 2 XIDF-REF802/C1  
XIDF-REF802/DV  
Biplane system kit 3 XIDF-BPS803/C1 
Biplane system kit 4 XIDF-BPS804/C1 
Review console XIDF-RVC801  
SNRF kit XIDF-SNR801  
Spot fluoroscopy kit XIDF-SFL801  
Large-screen monitor (for digital output) XMEZ-LMM021/A2  
Large-screen monitor (for digital output) XMEZ-LMM021/A3  
Digital encoder 1 (for adding a DVI input channel) XMEZ-LMMENC/D1  
(*7)
Digital encoder 2 (for adding two DVI input XMEZ-LMMENC/D2  
channels) (*7)
Additional panel PC (*7) XMEZ-PNLPC  
Stand for additional panel PC (*7) XMEZ-LMMSTD  
Large monitor accessory kit 2 (for digital output) XIDF-LMA802/C1 (*8)  
Large monitor accessory kit 2 (for digital output, XIDF-LMA802/CS (*8)  
with stand)
Monitor suspension for flat panel (for large monitor) MSF-56A/B1  
Lateral rails for flat panel monitor suspension XGMR-MSF021/B1  
AD converter kit XMEZ-PDC001  
Magnetic shielding kit XGPA-800A 
XGPA-1200A 
XGPA-1216A 
Cable outlet opposite side kit XGCO-820A/B1  
Support column rotation lock kit (for CAS-880A) XGSL-880A  
Longitudinal sensor unit (for CAT-850B) XBLS-850B  
Basic kit for clinical analysis application XIDF-QCA850/A1  
QCA kit XIDF-QCA851/A1  
QVA kit XIDF-QCA852/A1  
LVA kit XIDF-QCA853/A1  
LVA-BP kit XIDF-QCA854/A1  
RVA kit XIDF-QCA855/A1  

No. 2B308-309EN
86
 BP Cardiac BP Vascular
Optional unit Model name
system system
3D QCA kit XIDF-QCA856/A1  
Stent enhancer kit XIDF-QCA857/A1  
Chiller/HEX rack RAC-100C  
Large-screen monitor rack RAC-100L  
UPS connection kit XABT-UPS804  
Optical sensor floor cover XGFC-880A/H1  

*1) Use the following optional units in combination.

• XACP-002BA/C1: Tableside tablet console (with switch box)
• XGCP-882AA/B1: Satellite console
*2) The additional footswitch should be of the same type as that used in the
standard configuration.
*3) It can be used independently or in combination with the standard
footswitch XBFS-880S or XBFS-880S/A1.
*4) The wireless footswitch and the wireless footswitch kit are for the USA,
Canada, the EU, and Turkey only.
*5) For X-ray beam limiting device BLA-900C and BLA-900C/R1
*6) For X-ray beam limiting device BLA-900A and BLA-900A/R1
*7) Dedicated option for XMEZ-LMM021/A2
*8) This kit is used to mount two backup monitors.

No. 2B308-309EN
87
2.4 Compatible Units
(1) Injector
(a) MARK-VII ARTERION

(b) AVANTA

(c) AVIDIA

(d) ANGIOMAT ILLUMINA

(e) CVi

(f) Rempress

(g) ACCUTRON HP

(h) ACCUTRON HP-D

(2) 3D Workstation

• Vitrea

(3) Angio Workstation (XIDF-AWS801)

Use this system in combination with the Canon Medical Systems specified
software version. Contact your Canon Medical Systems representative for
details.

(4) Video products

The combined equipment should meet the requirements below.
For connection, contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.

(a) Input (any of the following)

• 1600 × 1200 (UXGA), V: 60 Hz/H: 75 kHz, color

R, G, B: 0.7 Vp-p H, V: TTL level (HD D-SUB connection for R, G, B, H, V)

• 1280 × 1024 (SXGA), V: 75 Hz/H: 80 kHz, monochrome

VIDEO: 0.7 Vp-p H, V: TTL level (BNC connection for VIDEO, H, V)

• 1280 × 1024 (SXGA), V: 60 Hz/H: 75 kHz, monochrome (DVI-D

connection)

(b) Scan converter DSC-X001A (option) output

• 525 lines (NTSC), V: 59.94 Hz/H: 15.734 kHz, interlaced

1 Vp-p (BNC connection for composite video, MINI DIN connection for
component video)

• 625 lines (PAL), V: 50 Hz/H: 15.625 kHz, interlaced

1 Vp-p (BNC connection for composite video, MINI DIN connection for
component video)

No. 2B308-309EN
88
 (5) Network devices
The combined equipment should meet the requirements below.
For connection of the following units, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.

Data format DICOM 3.0

Communication protocol TCP/IP protocol
Hardware interface Ethernet

(6) Patient monitoring equipment

The combined equipment should meet the requirements below.
For connection of the following units, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.

(a) Analog signal output

(b) Output signal ±5 V

(c) Electrically insulated from the human body

(7) X-ray protection systems

MAVIG PRPS series, LBPS series, or equivalent

(8) CARTO3 (CARTOUNIVUTM Module)

When CARTO3 is used in combination, electro-anatomical mapping can be

performed. Refer to the Reference manual for the setting procedures and
precautions for the Alphenix system when CARTO3 is used in combination.

NOTE: For details of combinable devices, refer to the accompanying documents for
the relevant system.

No. 2B308-309EN
89
No. 2B308-309EN
90
3. Operating Requirements
Contents 3.1 Power Requirements
3.2 Environmental Requirements
3.3 Installation Conditions
3.4 Classification & Safety Requirements
3.5 Energy Conservation Measures

No. 2B308-309EN
91
3.1 Power Requirements
The power cables of units are routed at the time of system installation and
the user does not have to connect these cables.

• Digital radiography system

• X-ray high-voltage generator
• Support unit
• Catheterization table
Line voltage AC 380/400/415/440/480 V
200 V (*1)
Line frequency 50/60 Hz
Input power 170 kVA +10% or less (short time)
30 kVA +10% or less (long time)
Recommended power transformer capacity:
100 kVA or more
Allowable line 380 V: 0.08 Ω or less
impedance
400 V: 0.09 Ω or less
415 V: 0.09 Ω or less
440 V: 0.10 Ω or less
480 V: 0.12 Ω or less
200 V (*1): 0.043 Ω or less
Rating of the power 100 A (400 V)
circuit breaker 150 A (200 V) (*1)
Maximum input current Maximum line current
(100 kV, 1000 mA, 0.1 s)
380 V: 269 A
400 V: 255 A
415 V: 246 A
440 V: 232 A
480 V: 213 A
Range of line voltage regulation at maximum line
current:
380 V: 7.1%
400 V: 7.2%
415 V: 6.7%
440 V: 6.6%
480 V: 6.6%
Line voltage fluctuation ±10% or less (*2)
Number of phases 3-phase

*1) When a step-up transformer (XSDT-100C) is used, the power can also
be supplied from 3-phase AC mains with a rating of 200 V.

*2) Value obtained by adding the power voltage variation due to system
load to the power voltage variation under no load.

No. 2B308-309EN
92
3.2 Environmental Requirements
This system must be used under the following environmental conditions.

Examination room/control room

Ambient temperature 18°C to 33°C (*1)
Relative humidity 35% to 70% (*2) (*3)
Atmospheric pressure 800 hPa to 1060 hPa
Atmosphere Do not use the system in the locations specified
below.
• Locations containing flammable gases
• Locations containing corrosive gases
• Locations subject to steam
• Locations subject to water droplets or
condensation
• Dusty locations
• Locations subject to salty atmosphere
• Locations subject to the direct sunlight
• Locations subject to excessive vibration or
shock
• Locations subject to abnormal fluctuations in line
voltage
• Locations subject to sudden changes in
temperature that may cause condensation
inside the system
Heat generation X-ray high-voltage generator: 3.14 kWh
(standby status: 3.14 kWh, fluoroscopy: 2.1 kWh)
An air conditioning system that keeps the room
temperature and humidity within the specified
operating and storage environmental conditions is
required in the room where the system is installed.
Note that the above values are standard values,
and the actual values may differ, depending on the
operating conditions.

*1) The maximum ambient temperature when the air-cooled FPD is used in
combination is 30°C.

*2) There should be no condensation. If the humidity exceeds the specified

value, use a dehumidifier or other means to reduce the humidity.

*3) When the area dose meter (option) is used in combination, in addition
to the above conditions, the volumetric humidity must not exceed
20 g/m3.
Therefore, when the temperature is 30°C, the relative humidity should
be 65% or less.
When the temperature is 33°C, the relative humidity should be 55% or
less.

NOTICE: Do not use the system in an environment where abrupt temperature changes
can occur. Abrupt temperature changes can produce condensation within
the system, which may cause corrosion or a malfunction in the system.

No. 2B308-309EN
93
3.3 Installation Conditions
The installation conditions for this system are specified below. For the
installation procedures, refer to the installation manual for the system.

(1) Examination room (*1)

Single-plane system Biplane system

Room Ceiling height 2700 mm or more 2960 mm to 3000 mm
dimensions
Width 4300 mm or more 5200 mm or more
Depth 6200 mm or more 7200 mm or more
X-ray protection work The walls, ceiling, and floor of the examination room,
the window glass for observation from the control
room, and entrance doors must be provided with
X-ray shielding in accordance with the local and
national regulations of the area where this system is
installed.
Potential equalization The room in which this system is installed must be
provided with protective and equipotential grounding
in accordance with all applicable local legal
requirements, and the room must be used for
medical purposes only.
Grounding requirements Grounding must be provided in accordance with all
applicable local legal requirements for medically-
used electrical equipment.

*1) For details of the installation conditions, refer to the installation manual
for the system.

(2) Requirements related to the physical layout of the major

components of the patient environment
Major components are installed in the patient environment.

No. 2B308-309EN
94
3.4 Classification & Safety Requirements

Item Classification/Safety
Type of protection against Class I (permanently installed equipment)
electric shock (*1)
Degree of protection against Type B applied part (catheterization table)
electric shock (*1)
Degree of protection against Whole system: IP00
harmful ingress of water or
Footswitch: IP28
particulate matter (*2)
Mode of operation (*1) Continuous operation
Degree of safety of Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a
application in the presence flammable anaesthetic mixture with air or with
of a flammable anaesthetic oxygen or nitrous oxide
mixture with air or with
oxygen or nitrous oxide (*1)
Mechanical safety Catheterization table
Maximum permissible load/maximum patient
weight/maximum weight of accessories and options
• CAT-850B: 240 kg/220 kg/20 kg
• CAT-880B: 270 kg/250 kg/20 kg
Applied part Tabletop of the catheterization table

*1) Classification based on IEC 60601-1

*2) Classification based on IEC 60529

No. 2B308-309EN
95
3.5 Energy Conservation Measures
The following steps can help conserve energy.

(1) Turn OFF the power of the system when the system is not
going to be used.

(2) Turn OFF the power of the monitor even during brief
periods away from the system.

(3) Acquire fluoroscopic images instead of radiographic

images when appropriate.

NOTE: 1. To reduce the power consumption of the system, the system automatically
enters sleep mode in the following cases. Note that sleep mode operates
differently depending on the situation.

• If the system is not used for 15 minutes after the end of a study, monitors
other than the system monitor and the large-screen monitor enter sleep
mode.

• If the system is not used for 15 minutes after the end of a study and the
support unit is in the park position, tube filament preheating of the X-ray tube
assembly is terminated.

• If both of the following two conditions are applicable, anode rotation in the
X-ray tube assembly is terminated.

a) The system has not been used for 15 minutes after the end of a study and
the support unit is in the park position.

b) Two hours has elapsed since system startup and the HU for the X-ray tube
assembly is 15% or less.

2. When study start operation is performed, the system exits sleep mode.
If the system does not exit sleep mode for some reason, hold down the [Ctrl],
[Alt], and [Delete] keys simultaneously to forcibly exit sleep mode.
Note that it is possible to adjust the period of time before the system enters
sleep mode.
For details, contact your service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
96
4. Names and Functions of the Parts of
the System
Contents 4.1 System Console (System Monitor)
4.2 Main Console
4.3 Tableside Console
4.4 Satellite Console (Option)
4.5 Fluoroscopic Monitor
4.6 Reference Monitor
4.7 X-ray Tube Support Unit
4.8 Catheterization Table
4.9 Tabletop Control Console (Option)

No. 2B308-309EN
97
4.1 System Console (System Monitor)
The system console is used to perform study-related operations such as
registration and retrieval of study information, support of various studies, file
manipulation, and image processing.

These operations are implemented by selecting the corresponding menus

and files on the monitor. A mouse is used to select menus and files, and a
keyboard is used to enter characters.

• Single-plane system

Basic screen layout (Initial screen)

[1] Common information display area

Refer to subsection 4.1.1 "Common information display area".

[2] Status bar

Refer to subsection 4.1.2 "Status bar".

[3] Mode area

Refer to subsection 4.1.3 "Mode area".

No. 2B308-309EN
98
• Biplane system

Basic screen layout (Initial screen)

[1] Common information display area

Refer to subsection 4.1.1 "Common information display area".

[2] Status bar

Refer to subsection 4.1.2 "Status bar".

[3] Mode area

Refer to subsection 4.1.3 "Mode area".

No. 2B308-309EN
99
 4.1.1 Common information display area
The following information items are displayed in the common information
display area.
(For single-plane system)

(For biplane system)

This icon is displayed during X-ray generation.

This icon is displayed when X-ray generation is prohibited.

This icon blinks until the system is ready for X-ray generation after
starting up the system.
It lights when X-ray generation is ready.
This icon is displayed when the first stage of the handswitch is pressed
and X-ray exposure is ready.
The selected beam hardening filter is displayed.
1: F1 (copper, 0.2 mm) is selected.
2: F2 (copper, 0.3 mm) is selected.
3: F3 (aluminum 1.8 mm or 2.0 mm) is selected.
4: F4 (copper, 0.5 mm) is selected.
5: F5 (copper, 0.9 mm) is selected.
The X-ray tube anode heat storage capacity is displayed in the range
from 0% to 100%. When the capacity exceeds 90%, this icon blinks and
a warning message is displayed in the warning message display area.
This icon blinks when the temperature of the X-ray tube reaches the
caution temperature. If the temperature of the X-ray tube exceeds the
caution temperature, it lights and a warning sound is generated.
This icon is displayed when injector interlock is selected.

This icon is displayed when radiography is performed under restricted

conditions.

This icon is displayed when the patient incident dose rate reaches the
limit.

This icon is displayed when the system is subject to reduced operation.

No. 2B308-309EN
100
(For single-plane system)
FPD field size (FOV) display

Dose meter measurement value display

When a dose meter is used in combination, the cumulative dose (X-ray
generation paused)/dose ratio (X-ray generation in progress) and the area
dose are displayed.

Fluoroscopic condition/radiographic condition information

The fluoroscopic conditions are displayed at the upper part and the
radiographic conditions are displayed at the lower part, respectively.

Operation
Manual Auto
mode

Fluoroscopy in progress HLC fluoroscopy in

progress
HLC-L fluoroscopy in Fluoroscopic image
progress recording in progress
HLC fluoroscopic image HLC-L fluoroscopic image
recording in progress recording in progress
Prompt for test shot Radiography in progress

One-shot radiography is DA is enabled.

enabled.
DSA is enabled. Rotation DA is enabled.
(For biplane system)
Rotational DSA is 3D DSA radiography is
enabled. enabled.
AlphaCT is enabled.
Stepping DSA is enabled. Prompt for proceeding to
Status the next stage in stepping
display DSA
Prompt for breath-holding Fluoroscopy roadmapping
in stepping DSA Display when "Peak" is
selected
Fluoroscopy roadmapping Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Display when "Add" is Display when "CO2" is
selected selected
Fluoroscopy roadmapping Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Display when Display when
"fluoroscopic subtraction" "Fluoroscopy landmark" is
is selected selected
Prompt for start of SEC hold status
injection
LIH image is being LIH image is being
displayed. displayed.
(During fluoroscopy
roadmapping)
Fluoroscopy Low, Middle, Normal, High
mode
EXP/S Fluoroscopy pulse rate f/s Acquisition rate
Radiographic
kV Tube voltage mA Tube current
condition
display ms Pulse width min Cumulative fluoroscopy
time display

No. 2B308-309EN
101
NOTE: Select a method from the following cumulative dose/dose rate calculation
methods.
For details, contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.

• Calculation procedure based on the isocenter (standard setting)

The X-ray input surface is specified as a location 150 mm from the
isocenter in the direction of the X-ray tube assembly.

• Calculation procedure based on a point a certain distance from the

tabletop
The X-ray input surface is specified as a location 50 mm toward the X-ray
tube assembly from a point in the center of the X-ray beam that is a
specified distance (default: 100 mm) above the tabletop.

No. 2B308-309EN
102
4.1.2 Status bar

[1] [Snap shot]

For systems with InnerVision (remote maintenance system) used in

combination, the logs during examination and the images displayed on the
monitor (still images) can be transferred to and stored in InnerVision. If an
error occurs, execute Snap shot. When repairing the system, the stored logs
and images can be used to check the error. To execute Snap shot, click the
camera-shaped icon and then click the [OK] button in the displayed dialog.
To cancel Snap shot, click the [Cancel] button.

NOTE: The error logs can also be stored in InnerVision in the case of system reset
processing. Use this function when Snap shot cannot be executed due to an
error such as system failure. For details, refer to subsection 5.8 "System
Reset".

[2] [Job] (Job controller)

The status icons indicating the status of the following processing are
displayed.

If a processing status icon such as "Stopped" or "Failed" is displayed,

contact your Canon Medical Systems representative for inspection and
repair.

• Local : Data transfer processing between the media (CD-R, DVD±R)

and the system. Refer to the following table.
• Network : Data transfer processing between a network server and the
system. Refer to the following table.
• Printing : Printing processing. Refer to the following table.

• 3D : 3D processing. Refer to the following page.

NOTE: When the status icon is clicked, a dialog box is displayed and details of the
processing status can be checked. For details, refer to section 5 "Image File
Management" of the reference manual.

No. 2B308-309EN
103
 Local Network Printing
Status System local processing Network processing Printing processing

Idle (Normal status)

Running (Processing is in progress.)

Stopped (Processing has stopped

or there is a connection error.)

Failed (Processing has failed.)

3D
Status
3D processing
Memory acquisition error
An unsupported command is received or another internal error has occurred.

Transfer is in progress when reconstruction/calibration is requested.

Reconstruction is in progress when reconstruction/calibration is requested.

FTP is in progress when reconstruction/calibration is requested.
Calibration is in progress when reconstruction/calibration is requested.

The power of the Angio Workstation is OFF.

The power of the 3D workstation is OFF.

An error notification is received from the Angio Workstation.

An error has occurred during image processing (HSIP Wrapper).
An error has occurred during image processing (LUT).
An error has occurred during image processing (CONV).
Images are not 3D reconstruction images.
The acquisition angle is too small.
Even though a transfer cancel request is issued, appropriate items do not exist.

Reconstruction or calibration is performed locally on the Angio Workstation.

An error has occurred when a request is issued to the Angio Workstation. (An
error has occurred during image transfer.)
An error has occurred when a request is issued to the Angio Workstation.
(Response waiting timeout)
The Angio Workstation has issued an error while reconstruction/calibration
termination processing is in progress.

A one-touch transfer request is issued when current images do not exist.

The calibration data does not exist.

An error has occurred at the 3D workstation.

The calibration table corresponding to reconstruction images to be transferred

does not exist.

No. 2B308-309EN
104
 [3] [System disk]

The following icon is displayed during verification processing of the system

disk. Verification processing is performed to check whether the data is
backed up normally in the system disk. If any abnormalities are found,
backup processing is automatically performed again. Verification processing
is performed when the system is restarted after the power of the system is
turned OFF in an emergency or the system is not shut down normally.

This is displayed during verification processing.

NOTE: The examination can be resumed during verification processing. Note,

however, that some processing such as image transfer may take a long time.

[4] [RAID]

The free space in the image memory is displayed. The display may differ
depending on whether the study is or is not in progress. Note that this
display does not show an accurate value for the free space. It should be
used only as a rough guide.

(a) Study in progress: The free space is displayed as the number of frames.

(b) Study not in progress: The free space (GB/MB) is displayed.

Overwrite : This is displayed when the RAID is in

overwrite mode.

Remain : This is displayed when the RAID is not in

overwrite mode.

This is displayed when the RAID has sufficient free

space and recording to the RAID is possible.

This is displayed when the RAID does not have sufficient

free space and recording to the RAID is not possible.

NOTE: When the RAID becomes full, delete or move files from the RAID to secure
the required free space. For details, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
105
4.1.3 Mode area
This area is used for setting and selection for each mode. Click the tab
showing the desired mode name to display the setting screen for the mode.

[Patient] mode

Study appointment is made in this mode. Operation concerning start and

termination of the study is also performed.

[Acquisition] mode

The fluoroscopic conditions and the radiographic conditions are set for the
current study in this mode.

[Exam] mode (image processing during a study)

Review or image processing for the acquired images is performed during

study in this mode. For details, refer to the reference manual.

[Directory] mode (image file management)

Image files recorded in the RAID are transferred to a CD-R or DICOM server
in this mode. For details, refer to the reference manual.

[Review] mode (image processing after completion of studies)

Image processing for the acquired images is performed after completion of

studies in this mode. For details, refer to the reference manual.

[Printing] mode

The acquired images are printed in this mode. The images to be printed are
generated on the display and transferred to the printer. For details, refer to
the reference manual.

[Utility] mode (system preset)

Various system functions and conditions are preset in this mode. See the
reference manual.

[Shutdown] mode

The system power is turned OFF in this mode.

No. 2B308-309EN
106
 4.1.4 Basic operating procedures using the system console (System monitor)
This subsection describes the basic operating procedures using the system
console, such as the procedure for the selection of functions using the
corresponding buttons.

(1) Operating the mouse

Move the cursor to the desired button and select the function by operating
the mouse.
When the cursor is moved beyond the right edge of the screen, it will be
displayed on the reference or fluoroscopic monitor. The operating procedure
for the mouse is common to all monitors.

NOTE: The cursor is moved from the current monitor to the next monitor in a preset
order (refer to the example below). To change the order, contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.

Example: System monitor ↔ Reference monitor ↔ Fluoroscopic monitor

(1.1) Moving the cursor

The cursor on the screen moves according to the movement of the

mouse.

(1.2) Selecting a function

To select a function, move the cursor to the desired button and press the left
or right mouse button (left-click or right-click the desired function button).

Left button • Left-click : To press the left mouse button once

Right button • Right-click : To press the right mouse button once

Wheel • Single-click : To press a mouse button once

• Double-click : To press a mouse button (the left mouse button unless

otherwise specified) twice in quick succession
Mouse
In this manual, if just "click" is used, it means left-click. If right-clicking or
double-clicking is required, it will be specified.

No. 2B308-309EN
107
(2) Procedures for selecting functions and settings
(2.1) Control button

Move the cursor to the desired button and click it.

(2.2) List box

Select an item from among the functions/conditions displayed in the list box
as follows.

<1> Move the cursor to in the list box and click it.

The selectable lists are displayed in the pull-down menu.

<2> Move the cursor to the item to be selected and click it.

(2.3) Radio button

Select a function assigned to a radio button as follows.

Move the cursor to the target radio button and click it. A mark is placed in
the button and the corresponding function is selected.

(2.4) Check box

Select a function assigned to the check box as follows.

Move the cursor to the target check box and click it. A check mark is placed
in the box and the corresponding function is selected. If the selected check
box is clicked again, it is deselected.

No. 2B308-309EN
108
(2.5) Scroll bar

By scrolling the display area in the vertical or horizontal directions, the

contents outside the current display area can be displayed (the figure below
shows the horizontal scroll bar).

Click the scroll box and slide it vertically or horizontally.

The display area can also be moved by clicking the arrowheads

at the ends of the scroll bars.

(2.6) Slider

Used to increase/decrease the value. Move the cursor to the slider and click
it. While holding down the mouse button, move the slider to the left or right.
When the slider is moved to the right, the value increases. When the slider
is moved to the left, the value decreases.

(2.7) Spin box

Used to increase/decrease the value. To increase the value, move the

cursor to  and click it. When the mouse button is held down, the value
increases continuously. To decrease the value, move the cursor to  and
click it. When the mouse button is held down, the value decreases
continuously.

No. 2B308-309EN
109
 (3) Entering the text
The procedure for entering the patient name and other information is
described below.

<1> Move the cursor to the text entry section. The shape of the cursor changes
to .

<2> Click the mouse button.

<3> Enter text using the keyboard.

<4> To set the entered text, press the Enter key on the keyboard.

NOTE: 1. The entered text can be deleted using the Backspace key or Delete key on
the keyboard.

2. It is possible to move to the next text entry section using the Tab key (or in
some cases the Enter key) on the keyboard.

3. Pressing the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard displays the current position of the
mouse pointer.

No. 2B308-309EN
110
(4) Adjusting the display area
In the screen for [Directory] mode, the size of display area of the [Patient],
[Study], and [Image] windows can be changed.

<1> Move the cursor to the border and click it. The shape of the cursor is
changes to .

<2> Move the mouse to change the position of the border.

(5) Drag & drop

Data can be moved to the target area by drag & drop operation.

<1> Move the cursor to the target data and click it.

<2> While holding down the mouse button, move the cursor to the movement
destination (drag).

<3> Release the mouse button at the movement destination (drop).

Data list Movement destination

<2> Drag

Data of study A Data of study A

<1> Click and hold down <3> Release the mouse

the mouse button button (Drop)

No. 2B308-309EN
111
4.2 Main Console
Main console is used to support operations in the examination room from the
control room. This console is used in combination with the fluoroscopy
footswitch in the control room. It is also possible to use it in combination with
the optional review console.

(1) Main console

(1.1) Image field operating section

[1] Left compensation filter operating lever

[2] Center compensation filter operating lever

This lever is used in SP Vascular systems and BP Vascular systems.

[3] Right compensation filter operating lever

[4] X-ray exposure field adjustment lever

[5] Ω-arm control selection button (*1)

[6] C-arm control selection button (*1)

[7] Ω-arm FOV size selection button (*1)

[8] C-arm FOV size selection button

*1) For biplane system

No. 2B308-309EN
112
 (1.2) Basic image operating section

[9] Frame reverse feed/slow playback button

[10] Dynamic image playback/pause button

[11] Frame feed/fast playback button

[12] Menu operating lever

[13] Map image file selection button

MAP

[14] Dynamic image file selection button

RUN

[15] Image processing target selection button

[16] Fluoroscopy timer reset button

[17] Function buttons

NOTE: Starting a study ("Start Study") can be executed using the menu operating
lever. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") from the Examination Room". Only in an emergency, start a
study using the menu operating lever.

CAUTION: Except when an emergency study is required, do not press the top of
the menu operating lever without starting a study ("Start Study"). The
system enters study start status, possibly resulting in incorrect X-ray
generation.

No. 2B308-309EN
113
 (2) Power ON switch box
The power ON switch box is used to turn ON/OFF the power of the system.
It is installed next to the monitor in the control room.

[1] Power ON button

[2] Power OFF button

[1]
[3] Emergency stop button

[2] [4] Hanger for the X-ray exposure handswitch

The X-ray exposure handswitch is placed on this hanger. Pick up the

handswitch when using it.
[3] [5] X-ray exposure handswitch

[4]

[5]

WARNING: If the power of the system is turned OFF using the power OFF button,
the results of any image processing that is in progress are not saved.
Be sure to turn OFF the power from the system console in all cases
other than emergencies.

CAUTION: 1. Do not attempt to disassemble the X-ray exposure handswitch or

remove the guard for preventing unintentional X-ray generation. The
performance of the handswitch may be degraded or X-rays may be
generated unintentionally, resulting in unnecessary X-ray exposure.

Guard

X-ray exposure
handswitch

2. Do not press the X-ray exposure handswitch while it is still in the

hanger. Doing so may move the monitor, causing X-ray generation at
an incorrect timing. Thus, the required image may not be acquired,
resulting in unnecessary exposure of the patient to X-rays.

No. 2B308-309EN
114
 (3) Fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room
The fluoroscopy footswitch is used to start/stop fluoroscopy. It is installed in
the control room.

• For single-plane system

[1]

[1] Fluoroscopy start button

• For biplane system

[1] F-side fluoroscopy start button

[2] L-side fluoroscopy start button

*) If the F-side and L-side fluoroscopy start buttons are stepped on

simultaneously, biplane fluoroscopy is performed.

CAUTION: The fluoroscopy footswitch is placed on the floor. Be careful not to

step on the switch unintentionally. Doing so may result in
unnecessary exposure to X-rays.

No. 2B308-309EN
115
 (4) Review console (option)
This console is used for image playback and image processing.

[1] Spatial filter adjustment dial

[2] Brightness adjustment dial

[3] Contrast adjustment dial

[4] Map save button

[5] Map image tile-display button

[6] Map image file selection button

[7] Image playback jog/shuttle

[8] Dynamic image file selection button

[9] Dynamic image tile-display button

[10] Map image → dynamic image display button

CAUTION: The brightness adjustment dial and contrast adjustment dial should be
rotated slowly. If the dial is rotated too quickly, halation may occur and
the image may disappear. In this case, rotate the dial in the opposite
direction until the image becomes visible again.
If the fluoroscopic image does not return to normal, reset the
brightness/contrast settings (refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions
Using Function Buttons" of the reference manual).

No. 2B308-309EN
116
4.3 Tableside Console
This console is used by the physician to operate the support unit or
catheterization table in the examination room or to perform image viewing
operations such as reference image playback.

NOTE: 1. If the optional tablet console (with switch box) is used in combination, it is
also possible to use the tableside console shown below. Note that this
console is not provided with the image operating section. Some functions
available in the image operating section can be executed using the switch
box.

2. When the tableside console is removed from the rail of the catheterization
table, the rail switch on the rear of the tableside console is turned OFF.
The tableside console cannot be used to operate the support unit or
catheterization table while the rail switch is OFF.

No. 2B308-309EN
117
(1) Positioning operating section
This operating section is used to determine the radiographic position.

[1] Anatomical angle control selection button

[2] Operation selection button

[3] Emergency stop button

[4] Function button

[5] Ω-arm operation selection button (*1)

[6] C-arm operation selection button (*1)

[7] FPD near/away movement button

[8] Table vertical movement button

[9] Arm rotation/sliding lever

[10] Override button

[11] Arm/tabletop operation start lever

[12] Tabletop longitudinal/lateral brake release lever

*1) For biplane system

No. 2B308-309EN
118
(2) Image field operating section
This is the operating section for changing the X-ray exposure field and the
FOV, adjusting the position of the compensation filter, and rotating the FPD.

[13] Left compensation filter operating lever

[14] Center compensation filter operating lever

This lever is used in SP Vascular systems and BP Vascular systems.

[15] Right compensation filter operating lever

[16] X-ray exposure field adjustment lever (*1)

[17] Ω-arm control selection button (*2)

[18] C-arm control selection button (*2)

[19] Ω-arm FOV size selection button (*2)

[20] C-arm FOV size selection button

*1) This lever can be also used for manual rotation operation for the FPD.
The FPD is rotated in the same direction as the lever is rotated, and the
FPD returns to the initial angle when the lever is pressed. The FPD
moves to the set position (portrait or landscape) when the lever is held
down for 1 second or longer.
However, manual rotation operation cannot be performed using the
X-ray exposure field adjustment lever on the field size operating section
of the main console.

*2) For biplane system

No. 2B308-309EN
119
 (3) Image operating section
This image operating section is used to playback/switch acquired images.

[21] Dynamic image file selection button

RUN

[22] Frame reverse feed/slow playback button

[23] Dynamic image playback/pause button

[24] Frame feed/fast playback button

[25] Map image file selection button

MAP

[26] Menu operating lever

NOTE: Starting a study ("Start Study") can be executed using the menu operating
lever. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") from the Examination Room". Only in an emergency, start a
study using the menu operating lever.

CAUTION: Except when an emergency study is required, do not press the top of
the menu operating lever without starting a study ("Start Study"). The
system enters study start status, possibly resulting in incorrect X-ray
generation.

Auto [27] Auto-positioning selection button

Pos.

START
[28] Auto-positioning start button

[29] Function buttons

The function is switched between the following functions depending on

the status of auto-positioning selection button [27].

No. 2B308-309EN
120
Status of auto-positioning selection button Description of function button
The function assigned to each button can be selected.
Auto (The light is not lit.)
Pos.
The function button is lit.
Functions have been assigned to each function button at
the time of system installation. To change these
assignments, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.
The auto-positioning No. can be entered.
Auto
Pos. (The light is lit.) The function button is not lit.

No. 2B308-309EN
121
4.4 Satellite Console (Option)
The satellite console is used to support operation from the tableside console.
It can be installed on a dedicated stand and be placed away from the
catheterization table.

Register the satellite console installation position in the system and perform
operation from the registered position. For the satellite console installation
procedure, refer to subsection 6.2 "Installing the Satellite Console (Option)".

For single-plane systems, the satellite console (option) and the tablet
console (option) can be mounted on a dedicated stand.

NOTE: 1. When the satellite console is removed from the rail of the stand, the rail
switch on the rear of the satellite console is turned OFF. The satellite
console cannot be used to operate the support unit or catheterization table
while the rail switch is OFF.

2. The functions that can be set for the function buttons on the satellite console
are different from those that can be set for the function buttons on the
tableside console. Contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
122
 • Satellite console for single-plane system

NOTE: If the optional tablet console (with switch box) is used in combination, it is
also possible to use the satellite console shown below. Note that this
console is not provided with the image operating section. Some functions
available in the image operating section can be executed using the switch
box.

No. 2B308-309EN
123
• Satellite console for biplane system

[1] C-arm operating lever

Used to rotate/slide the C-arm. Longitudinal movement/lateral

movement can also be controlled.

[C-arm rotation/sliding]

Tilt the lever in the C-arm rotation or sliding direction while holding
down the top button of the lever. As the lever tilt angle increases, the
movement speed increases.

When the lever is returned to the center, C-arm movement stops.

[Longitudinal/lateral movement]

Longitudinal movement refers to the movement of the C-arm in the

patient-axis direction. This movement can be performed when the
C-arm is set on the patient's side.

Lateral movement refers to the movement of the C-arm in the direction

perpendicular to the patient axis. This movement can be performed
when the C-arm is set at the patient head end.

Tilt the lever in the longitudinal direction (to set the C-arm at the side of
the patient) or in the lateral direction (to set the C-arm to the patient
head position) while holding down the button next to the lever.

When the lever is returned to the center, C-arm movement stops.

No. 2B308-309EN
124
[2] Anatomical angle control selection button

Used to switch the C-arm angulation method to anatomical angle

control. While this control is ON, regardless of the C-arm set position
(head end, right side, or left side of the patient), it is possible to angle
the C-arm in the direction in which the C-arm operating lever [1] is tilted.
The button is lit while this control is ON.

[3] Function button

A frequently-used function can be assigned to this button.

In the initial setting, the fluoroscopic timer reset function is set.
To change this setting, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.

[4] Emergency stop button

Used to stop movement of the support unit and the catheterization

table.

[5] Table up/down movement/floor base rotation lever

Used to move the tabletop of the catheterization table in the up/down

direction or to perform floor base rotation of the support unit. Note that
the table up/down movement function may not be provided in some
systems.

• Table up/down movement

Holding down the lever and tilting it away from you moves the tabletop
upward.
Holding down the lever and tilting it toward you moves the tabletop
downward.

• Floor base rotation

Turning the lever in the clockwise direction performs floor base rotation
of the support unit to the right side of the patient.
Turning the lever in the counterclockwise direction performs floor base
rotation of the support unit to the left side of the patient.

[6] FPD near/away movement lever on the C-arm

Used to move the FPD mounted on the C-arm in the near/away

movement directions.

Tilting the lever away from you moves the FPD away from the patient.
Tilting the lever toward you moves the FPD toward the patient.

[7] Override button

Used to release an interlock. While the button is held down, an

interlock can be released.
For details of the interlocks, refer to subsection 5.3 "Interlocks".

No. 2B308-309EN
125
 [8] Arm synchronized operation lever

The synchronization function is to move the C-arm and Ω-arm together

in the LAO/RAO directions.

While holding down the top button of the lever, tilt the lever in the LAO
or RAO direction. The C-arm and Ω-arm move in the direction in which
the lever is tilted. When the lever is returned to the original location,
both arms stop.

[9] Ω-arm rotation/sliding lever

Used to rotate/slide the Ω-arm.

Tilt the lever in the Ω-arm rotation or sliding direction while holding
down the top button of the lever. As the lever tilt angle increases, the
movement speed increases. When the lever is returned to the original
position, the Ω-arm stops.

[10] Ω-arm longitudinal/lateral movement lever

Tilt the lever in the longitudinal or lateral direction while holding down
the top button of the lever. When the lever is returned to the original
position, the Ω-arm stops.

[11] Ω-arm beam up/down movement lever

Used to move the FPD and X-ray tube assembly of the Ω-arm together
in the up/down direction.

Tilting the lever away from you moves the FPD and X-ray tube
assembly upward. Tilting the lever toward you moves the FPD and
X-ray tube assembly downward.

[12] FPD near/away movement lever on the Ω-arm

Used to move the FPD mounted on the Ω-arm in the near/away

movement direction.

Tilting the lever away from you moves the FPD away from the patient.
Tilting the lever toward you moves the FPD toward the patient.

[13] 0 button

Used to select auto-positioning No. 0.

CAUTION: The Ω-arm beam up/down movement lever ([11]), the FPD near/away
movement lever on the Ω-arm ([12]), the floor base rotation lever ([5]),
and the FPD near/away movement lever on the C-arm ([6]) are single-
action levers that permit the system to be controlled by simply tilting
the lever. Therefore, take special care to prevent inadvertent operation.
Unintended system movement may injure the patient.
Note that a lever may be tilted inadvertently by a part of the operator's
body when the operator is positioning the patient, attaching the sterile
cover, etc.

No. 2B308-309EN
126
4.5 Fluoroscopic Monitor
This monitor is used to display fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images, LIH images, radiographic images, and dynamic images. The
display information differs depending on the system and the unit used in
combination.

NOTE: It is possible to set the system so that dynamic images are displayed on the
reference monitor.
For details, contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.

Fluoroscopic monitor

[1] Image display area

Images are displayed in this area together with the following image-
related information (except in the case of LIH images). Note that the
only related information items displayed during fluoroscopy are the
brightness, contrast, spatial filter, and image magnification ratio. The
only related information item displayed during radiography is the
elapsed radiographic time.

No. 2B308-309EN
127
*1) These information items can be hidden or displayed as a set. To hide
the items, right-click any point on the monitor screen and deselect [Info.
Disp.] in the displayed menu. To display the information items again,
right-click any point on the monitor screen and select [Info. Disp.] in the
displayed menu.

[2] Information display area

The study information is displayed here.

Whether or not the information is displayed can be selected for each
study protocol.
The above figure shows an example where the study information is
displayed.

[3] Patient information

After the study starts, the patient name, date of birth, sex, and age are
displayed. The age is displayed as follows.

• 25-year-old patient : 25 Y
• 3-month-old patient : 3M
• 2-week-old patient : 2W
• 5-day-old patient : 5D

[4] Auto-positioning No. display

When the auto-positioning function is used, the auto-positioning No. is

displayed. When Sequential Navigation is used, the status information
(step number/total number of steps) is displayed.

No. 2B308-309EN
128
 [5] Support unit/catheterization table position information display

The support unit/catheterization table position information is displayed

here.
When auto-positioning is performed, the position registered to the
selected auto-positioning No. is displayed.

Arm angle display in the LAO/RAO direction

Arm angle display in the CRA/CAU direction

SID display

FOV size display

Catheterization table tabletop height display

Catheterization table tabletop longitudinal position display

Catheterization table tabletop lateral position display

Tabletop rotation angle

Tabletop longitudinal tilting angle display

Displays when harmonic tilting is selected

Tabletop lateral tilting angle display

Ceiling travel longitudinal position (Ω-arm support unit)

Ceiling travel lateral position (Ω-arm support unit)

Ω-arm X-ray beam up/down movement position

Warning indicating that the Ω-arm is not at the isocenter

Floor base rotation angle display

Indicates that a biplane acquisition program is selected.

BP
Indicates that a frontal single-plane acquisition program is selected.
F
Indicates that a lateral single-plane acquisition program is selected.
L

No. 2B308-309EN
129
NOTE: The following icons can also be displayed.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.

FPD/beam limiting device rotation angle display

Support column rotation angle display

Longitudinal position

Lateral position

[6] X-ray information display

The information related to X-ray generation is displayed here.

For the biplane system, the X-ray information items for the frontal and
lateral planes are controlled separately. Frontal X-ray information is
displayed on the frontal monitor and lateral X-ray information is
displayed on the lateral monitor.

• X-ray tube anode heat accumulation display

• X-ray tube overheating warning indicator
• Fluoroscopy mode (Low, Middle, Normal, High) display
• Cumulative fluoroscopy time display
• Dose display (option)
• Cumulative dose display (option)

[7] Stopwatch (not displayed in the initial setting)

The stopwatch can be displayed in the information display area. If you

would like the stopwatch to be displayed, contact your service
representative.
The display position depends on the setting.

NOTE: It is possible to also display the elapsed time for radiography. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
130
[8] Status indicators

When status indicator setting has been performed, symbols (graphic

indicators) indicating the status of fluoroscopy and radiography are
displayed here.

The display position depends on the setting.

For the biplane system, the frontal status is displayed on the frontal
monitor and the lateral status is displayed on the lateral monitor.

HLC fluoroscopy is being

Fluoroscopy is being performed.
performed.

HLC-L fluoroscopy is being Test exposure is being

performed. performed.

Radiography is being performed. SEC hold status

The LIH image is being displayed. DA enabled status

Stepping DSA breath hold

DSA enabled status
instruction

Stepping DSA next stage stepping One-shot radiography enabled

instruction status
Injection start instruction (when
Stepping DSA enabled status mask images are created in
fluoroscopic subtraction)

3D-DSA enabled status or

Rotational DA enabled status
AlphaCT enabled status

Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Rotational DSA enabled status LIH image (mask image) is
being displayed.
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Display when "Peak" is
Display when "CO2" is selected
selected
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Display when "fluoroscopic
Display when "Add" is selected
subtraction" is selected
Fluoroscopy roadmapping Display when fluoroscopic
Display when "fluoroscopic acquisition is performed in
landmark" is selected normal mode
Display when fluoroscopic Display when fluoroscopic
acquisition is performed in HLC acquisition is performed in
mode HLC-L mode.

No. 2B308-309EN
131
 X-ray exposure disabled status

X-ray exposure disabled status (in LIH

display)

FPD calibration display

FPD calibration is being performed (in

LIH display).

[9] Warning information display

Error and warning information for the system is displayed here. The
display styles for these information items differ as shown below.

• Error information display

• Warning information display

[10] Fluoroscopic monitor selection status indicator

Lights when the image displayed in the image display area is selected
as the target for image processing.

No. 2B308-309EN
132
4.6 Reference Monitor
This monitor is used to display map images. Depending on the system, it
may also be possible to display RUN images (dynamic playback images).

In addition, photo images can also be displayed.

An example is shown in the following figure.

Reference monitor

[1] Image display area

Images and image-related information are displayed here. For the

image-related information, refer to [1] "Image display area" in
subsection 4.5 "Fluoroscopic Monitor"

[2] Information display area

Thumbnails for image selection are displayed. It is also possible to

display the function button selection menu. For details of thumbnail
display and the procedures for switching between thumbnail display and
menu display, refer to subsection 12.1 "Selecting Map Image/Dynamic
Image". The menu display is described here.

No. 2B308-309EN
133
 Menu name display

The name of the menu selected in the menu display area is displayed
here.
Up to 10 menus can be set for every study protocol. It is possible to
display one menu at one time and to switch to the next menu to be
displayed.
For the menu switching method and the function switching method in
the menu display area, refer to subsection 12.3 "Switching Between
Menus on the Reference Monitor and Selecting Functions".

Menu display area

The function buttons registered in the menus are displayed here.

Up to 8 function buttons can be registered in each menu.

[Warning display]

The error and warning information items for the system are displayed
here. The display styles for these information items differ as shown
below.

• Error information display

After a
Error Error Error short time Error Error Error
Error Error Error Error Error Error
Error Error Error Error Error Error

• Warning information display

Warning Warning
Warning Warning
Warning Warning

[Operation guide display]

Displays the operation hints.

[3] Reference monitor selected status indicator

Lights when the image displayed in the image display area is selected
as the target for image processing.

NOTE: A Favorites function for displaying frequently used menus is available when
an appropriate setting is made. To change the setting, contact your service
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
134
4.7 X-ray Tube Support Unit

CAUTION: To maintain the performance of the FPD touch sensor, observe the
following precautions.

• Do not allow sharp objects to come in contact with the touch sensors.
If the cover or interior of the touch sensor is damaged, the
performance of the touch sensor will deteriorate.

• To maintain the safety of the system, replace the touch sensors every
3 years. To replace the touch sensors, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.

4.7.1 Floor-mounted C-arm support unit

This unit can be used in single-plane and biplane systems. For the biplane
system, the ceiling-suspended Ω-arm support unit is used in combination in
addition to this unit.

For the operating procedures, refer to section 9 "Operating Procedures for

Units in the Examination Room".

(1) Name of each part of the C-arm support unit

(1.1) C-arm support unit with floor rotation base touch sensor

The figures below show the C-arm support unit with the floor rotation base
sensor mounted.

For names of each part of the C-arm support unit with the optional optical
sensor mounted, refer to (1.2) "C-arm support unit with optical sensor (option)".

No. 2B308-309EN
135
 C-arm support unit

No. 2B308-309EN
136
[1] FPD

[2] FPD near/away movement switches

[3] FPD touch sensor

[4] C-arm

[5] X-ray beam limiting device

[6] X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor

[7] X-ray tube assembly

[8] X-ray tube assembly selection lamp

[9] Floor rotation base

[10] Floor rotation base touch sensor

(both sides of the floor rotation base)

[11] Emergency stop buttons

[12] Support column operation buttons

For details, refer to (2) "Support column operation buttons".

No. 2B308-309EN
137
(1.2) C-arm support unit with optical sensor (option)

C-arm support unit

No. 2B308-309EN
138
[1] FPD

[2] FPD near/away movement switches

[3] FPD touch sensor

[4] C-arm

[5] X-ray beam limiting device

[6] X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor

[7] X-ray tube assembly

[8] X-ray tube assembly selection lamp

[9] Floor rotation base

[10] Floor rotation base touch sensor

(both sides of the floor rotation base)

[11] Optical sensor

(both sides of the optional floor rotation base)

[12] Emergency stop button

[13] Support column operation buttons

For details, refer to (2) "Support column operation buttons".

No. 2B308-309EN
139
 (2) Support column operation buttons
These are the local control buttons for operating the C-arm support unit.
Each operates the C-arm support unit only while it is held down. When it is
released, C-arm support unit movement stops.

CAUTION: When the C-arm support unit is operated using these buttons,
movement cannot be observed properly because the support column
obstructs the view. Take special care to prevent interference between
the C-arm support unit and persons or surrounding units.

[1] [3]

[2] [4]

Clockwise Counterclockwise
rotation rotation

[1] Support column rotation button (for clockwise rotation)

Used to rotate the support column.

While the button is held down, the support column rotates clockwise.

[2] Floor base rotation button (for clockwise rotation)

Used to rotate the floor base.

While the button is held down, the floor base rotates clockwise.

[3] Support column rotation button (for counterclockwise rotation)

Used to rotate the support column.

While the button is held down, the support column rotates
counterclockwise.

[4] Floor base rotation button (for counterclockwise rotation)

Used to rotate the floor base.

While the button is held down, the floor base rotates counterclockwise.

No. 2B308-309EN
140
(3) Movement of each section

No. 2B308-309EN
141
4.7.2 Ceiling-suspended Ω-Arm support unit
This unit is used in the biplane system. The floor-mounted C-arm support
unit is used in combination in addition to this unit.
For the operating procedures, refer to section 9 "Operating Procedures for
Units in the Examination Room"

(1) Name of each part of the system

Ceiling-suspended Ω-arm support unit

[1] Ω-arm

[2] FPD

[3] FPD touch sensor

[4] X-ray beam limiting device

[5] X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor

[6] X-ray tube assembly selection lamp

[7] X-ray tube assembly

No. 2B308-309EN
142
 (2) Movement of the support unit

Ceiling-suspended Ω-arm support unit

NOTE: 1. For the typical Ω-arm support unit position names and the positions, refer to
subsection 9.1 "Operating Procedures for the Support Unit".

2. For the system switching procedures for single-plane systems (when the
Ω-arm support unit is used as a single unit) and for biplane systems (when
the Ω-arm support unit is used in combination with the C-arm support unit),
refer to subsection 9.5 "Switching the System (Biplane System)".

No. 2B308-309EN
143
4.8 Catheterization Table
The patient is set on this table. For the operating procedures, refer to
section 9 "Operating Procedures for Units in the Examination Room".

WARNING: 1. The maximum permissible patient weight is the value obtained by

subtracting the total weight of the accessories and options set on the
table from the maximum permissible load shown in the table below (*1).
Do not place a patient whose weight exceeds this value on the table.
Doing so may result in the tabletop being damaged or the patient
sustaining an injury.

For example, if accessories and options weighing 30 kg in total are set

on catheterization table CAT-850B, a patient weighing more than 210 kg
must not be placed on the table.

The permissible patient weight specified in the table below assumes

that the accessories and options set on the table weigh a total of 20 kg
(*2) or less.

Catheterization table Permissible load Permissible patient weight

CAT-850B 240 kg 220 kg
CAT-880B 270 kg 250 kg (*3)

*1) The permissible load and the permissible patient weight differ
depending on the catheterization table.

*2) Total weight of the accessories and options assumed to be set on the
catheterization table

*3) When the accessory tabletop rail (option) with heavy components
installed on it is used in combination, the maximum permissible patient
weight on the catheterization table is 220 kg.

No. 2B308-309EN
144
WARNING: 2. Do not mount an object weighing more than 40 kg on the accessory
mounting rails of the catheterization table. In addition, do not mount
the optional accessory tabletop rail for an accessory that can be
attached at the head end of the tabletop (*1). Doing so may damage the
rails and cause an accident.

Note that the above values are the maximum limits when the center of
gravity of the object is immediately above the rails ("A" in the following
figure). The maximum limits become lower if the center of gravity of
the object is further from the rails. For example, if the center of gravity
of the object is a lateral distance of 100 mm away from the rails ("B" in
the following figure), the maximum permissible mass of the mounted
object becomes less than half of the maximum limit. For details, refer
to the table below.

Distance between the rail and the center

of gravity of the object (mm)
0 (A) 50 100 (B) 150 200
Permissible Accessory mounting 40 25 17 10 5
mass (kg) rails of the table
Accessory tabletop rail 20 15 10 5 0

*1) Refer to subsection 6.16 "Mounting the Accessory Tabletop Rail

(CAT-880B)".

3. Do not subject the head end of the tabletop of the catheterization table
to excessive force. The tabletop may be damaged and the patient may
be injured. Observe the following precautions.

• Before the patient gets on/off the catheterization table, move the
tabletop to the foot-end limit.
Have the patient get on/off the catheterization table from the center of
the table. Have an assistant help if required. Ensure that the patient
does not get on/off at the tabletop-end section. In particular, ensure
that the patient does not sit on the tabletop end-section.
• Before performing cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR), move the
tabletop to the patient foot-end limit (stroke end).
• Do not place objects under the tabletop because they may interfere
with the tabletop when the tabletop is lowered.

4. When the catheterization table is being tilted, always visually confirm

that the tilting direction is correct. If incorrect operation is performed
and the tabletop tilts in the wrong direction, the patient may fall off the
tabletop.

No. 2B308-309EN
145
WARNING: 5. During tabletop tilting, there may be insufficient clearance between the
tabletop and the floor or between the console or related units installed
on the catheterization table and the floor. Be extremely careful to avoid
catching your feet.
In particular, when the tablet console used in combination with the
system is installed near the foot end of the catheterization table and
the catheterization table is tilted toward the foot end, there may be
insufficient clearance between the floor and the tablet console. Keep
this point in mind.

CAUTION: During tabletop rotation, the tabletop and the entire column support
section move. Be careful not to get your foot caught between the
support column cover and the floor.

No. 2B308-309EN
146
4.8.1 Catheterization table (CAT-850B)

(1) Name of each part of the catheterization table

Catheterization table (CAT-850B)

[1] Tabletop mat

[2] Tabletop

[3] Operating panel

⇒ Refer to (2) "Operating panel".

[4] Footswitch

⇒ Refer to (3) "Footswitch".

[5] Accessory mounting rail

Used to mount accessories such as the tableside console and drip

infusion stand.
There are rails on the left, right, and foot end of the catheterization
table.

[6] Tabletop locking shaft

No. 2B308-309EN
147
(2) Operating panel
This panel includes the operating buttons for the catheterization table and
displays the operating status.

Operating panel

[1] Tabletop rotation center position display

Lights when the rotation angle of the tabletop is 0º or 180º.

[2] Tabletop rotation brake release button

Releases the tabletop rotation brake and lights when the brake is
released.
When the button is pressed again to reapply the brake, the light goes
out.
Note that the brake is automatically reapplied and the tabletop is
secured 10 seconds after the tabletop rotation brake is released.

[3] Tabletop lateral movement lock button

Locks the tabletop lateral movement brake and lights when the brake is
engaged.
When the button is pressed again, the brake is released and the light
goes out.
Though the tabletop can normally be moved in both the longitudinal and
lateral directions, the tabletop lateral movement lock restricts tabletop
movement to the longitudinal direction.

[4] Step-sliding test button

Used to check the set step-sliding movement and adjust the step-sliding
distance.
When the button indicating the tabletop sliding direction is pressed,
step-sliding is performed (1 step each time the button is pressed).

No. 2B308-309EN
148
[5] Power reset button

Used to turn ON the drive power of the C-arm support unit and
catheterization table after it has been turned OFF using the Emergency
stop button. Wait for at least 5 seconds after pressing the Emergency
stop button before pressing this button.

[6] Emergency stop button

Immediately stops movement of the catheterization table and C-arm

support unit. Use this button in emergencies.
Note that once this button is pressed, the units cannot be operated until
the emergency stop status is released.

No. 2B308-309EN
149
 (3) Footswitch (wired footswitch)
Details of the wired footswitch are described below. For the wireless
footswitch, refer to (4) "Wireless footswitch" in subsection 4.8.1.

Used to start/stop X-ray exposure. Footswitches may include function

buttons. However, unless specified otherwise, this operation manual
assumes that a footswitch without function buttons is used.

CAUTION: To prevent interference between the footswitch and the support unit,
operate the support unit only after confirming that the footswitch is not
positioned within the operating range of the support unit. Also, take
special care to prevent interference between the footswitch and the
support unit while operating the support unit. If the footswitch is
pressed by the support unit, X-rays may be generated unintentionally.

NOTICE: The footswitch for the biplane system has the following features.

a. If the frontal button and the lateral button are pressed simultaneously,
biplane fluoroscopy is enabled.

b. The Radiography start button is effective for the plane (F, L, or BP)
registered in the selected acquisition program.

c. The acquisition plane switching function assigned to function button 1 of the

footswitch with the function buttons is effective when an acquisition program
containing an interlock that disables X-ray exposure (*1) is selected.
If the acquisition plane switching function has been assigned to function
button 1, the acquisition plane is switched each time this button is pressed.

• Frontal radiography can be performed : X-ray generation on the lateral side

is prohibited (L-Pause).
• Lateral radiography can be performed : X-ray generation on the frontal side
is prohibited (F-Pause).
• BP radiography can be performed.

*1) For details, refer to subsection 8.2.10 "Acquisition program edit functions" of
the reference manual.

No. 2B308-309EN
150
(3.1) Footswitch without function buttons

• For single-plane system (XBFS-850S)

HLC fluoroscopy start button

Fluoroscopy start button

Radiography start button

• For biplane system (XBFS-850B)

Lateral HLC fluoroscopy start button

Frontal HLC fluoroscopy start button

Frontal fluoroscopy start button

Lateral fluoroscopy start button

Radiography start button

No. 2B308-309EN
151
 (3.2) Footswitch with function buttons

A function can be assigned to each of the three function buttons.

The settings in parentheses are the default functions assigned at the time of
shipment. For the functions that can be assigned, contact your Canon
Medical Systems representative.

NOTE: If the HLC fluoroscopy start button and F-REC start button are assigned to
function buttons, when they are pressed simultaneously, the F-REC start
button is selected and fluoroscopic image recording starts.

• For single-plane system (XBFS-880S, XBFS-880S/A1(*1))

Function button 2
(HLC fluoroscopy start button)

Fluoroscopy start button

Radiography start button

Function button 1
(image processing function: blank)

Function button 3 (blank)

*1) XBFS-880S and XBFS-880S/A1 have the same functional capabilities,

but they differ in shape.
The figure above shows XBFS-880S.

• For biplane system (XBFS-880B)

Function button 3
(Lateral HLC fluoroscopy start button)

Function button 2
(Frontal HLC fluoroscopy start button)

Function button 1
(Acquisition plane switching button)

Frontal fluoroscopy start button

Radiography start button

Lateral fluoroscopy start button

Biplane fluoroscopy start button

No. 2B308-309EN
152
• For biplane system (XBFS-1000M [option])

*1) The home position is the reference position for placing your foot. To
remove this home position tab, contact your service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
153
 (4) Wireless footswitch
The details of the wireless footswitch are described below. For the wired
footswitch, refer to (3) "Footswitch (wired footswitch)" of subsection 4.8.1.

CAUTION: 1. Before operating the support unit, confirm that the footswitch is not
placed within the movement range of the support unit. In addition, be
extremely careful to prevent the footswitch from being caught during
operation of the support unit. If the footswitch is caught by the
support unit, an exposure switch may be pressed and unintentional
X-ray exposure may result.
2. Depending on the arrangement of the X-ray protective plate and
peripheral units as well as the number and locations of
engineers/patients, the communication range of the footswitch may be
reduced, possibly resulting in interruption of communication. Before
starting the examination, check that footswitch communication is
established properly in the layout that will be used.
3. If the wireless footswitch cannot be used due to communication failure,
use the footswitch in the control room or the wired footswitch as an
emergency measure. To use the wired footswitch, turn OFF the power
of the Alphenix system and connect the footswitch cable to the
catheterization table. For the connector location, refer to subsection
6.4 "Connecting the Cables".

NOTE: The wireless footswitch conforms to the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC).

(4.1) Wireless communication range

The communication range of the wireless footswitch is maximum 5 m. Use

the wireless footswitch within 5 m of the support column of the
catheterization table in which the receptor is installed.

NOTE: 1. The receiver of the wireless footswitch is located on the patient right-hand
side to ensure good signal reception. If it is necessary to use the wireless
footswitch on the patient left-hand side, place the wireless footswitch as
close to the catheterization table as possible.
2. Signal-blocking objects such as the support unit, peripheral units, or persons
should not be located between the support column section of the
catheterization table and the wireless footswitch.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, place the wireless footswitch as close
to the catheterization table as possible.
3. Depending on the wireless network environment, network interference may
occur, possibly resulting in interruption of communication. When the
wireless footswitch is used, avoid using other wireless devices whenever
possible.
4. Confirm that the green LED lights before using the footswitch. If the LED
blinks, communication with the receptor is not established. In this case,
move the footswitch toward the receptor until the LED lights.
5. The orange LED indicates that the remaining charge of the battery is low and
the communication range may therefore be limited to 5 m or less. In this
case, charge the battery referring to (4.5) "Procedure for charging the
battery".
The footswitch can be used while the battery is being charged. For details,
refer to subsection (4.6) "Emergency battery charging".

No. 2B308-309EN
154
 (4.2) Name and function of each section

The name and function of each section of the wireless footswitch are
described.

The wireless footswitch is provided with three function buttons. A function

can be assigned to each of the three function buttons. The functions shown
in parentheses are the default functions assigned at the time of shipment.
For the functions that can be assigned to the function buttons, contact your
service representative.

NOTE: If the HLC fluoroscopy start button and F-REC start button are assigned to
the function buttons of the footswitch and both buttons are pressed at the
same time, the F-REC start button is selected and fluoroscopic image
recording starts.

• Single-plane system (XBFS-880WS)

No. 2B308-309EN
155
• Biplane system (XBFS-880WB)

No. 2B308-309EN
156
• For biplane system (XBFS-1000WM [option])

*1) The home position is the reference position for placing your foot. To
remove this home position tab, contact your service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
157
 (4.3) LED display

The status of the wireless footswitch can be checked by the lighting status of
the LEDs.

LED Lighting status Footswitch status

Green LED Lit Communication is established.
Fast blinking The fluoroscopy start button or
radiography start button is pressed.
Slow blinking Communication is not established.
Not lit Communication is not possible
(the battery has run out).
Orange LED Lit The remaining battery charge is low
(recharging is required).
Blinking Recharging of the battery is in progress.
Not lit The battery is fully charged.
(If the green LED also goes OFF, the
battery has run out.)
Red LED Lit A communication error has occurred.
(Refer to 3. in the note below.)
Blinking Shorting mode error
(Refer to 4. in the note below.)
Not lit No errors.
All LEDs Not lit The battery is completely discharged.

NOTE: 1. If the battery is completely discharged (all the LEDs go OFF or both the
green and orange LEDs go OFF), fully charge the battery before using the
wireless footswitch.

2. If the battery cannot be charged, or if, even after a full charge, the battery
runs out immediately or the wireless footswitch cannot be used, failure of the
wireless footswitch or abnormality in the battery is likely. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative for inspection.

3. If the red LED lights, restart the system. If the LED does not go OFF after
restarting the system, failure of the wireless footswitch is likely. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative for inspection.

4. If the red LED blinks, restart the system, or connect the footswitch to the AC
adaptor and plug it into an outlet. If the LED continues to blink, failure of the
wireless footswitch is likely. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative for inspection.

No. 2B308-309EN
158
 (4.4) Operating procedure

<1> Confirm that with the system turned ON, the orange LED goes OFF and the
green LED lights.

<2> The wireless footswitch is ready for operation.

The procedure for operating the buttons on the wireless footswitch is the
same as that for the wired footswitch. For details, refer to (3) "Footswitch
(wired footswitch)" in subsection 4.8.1.

NOTICE: After the power of the system is turned ON, wait until the green LED of the
wireless footswitch lights. If the button or pedal of the wireless footswitch is
pressed before the green LED lights, the system detects an error (the red
LED blinks) and operation from the wireless footswitch is disabled. For the
procedure for clearing the error, refer to (4.3) "LED display".

NOTE: 1. When the orange LED lights, battery charging is required. For the charging
procedure, refer to (4.5) "Procedure for charging the battery" and (4.6)
"Emergency battery charging".

2. If communication is interrupted and the green LED blinks when the pedal is
being pressed, release the pedal and then press it again. If communication
is not recovered, it is likely that the communication environment is
insufficient. Change the footswitch position and press the pedal again. The
green LED lights if communication is recovered.

No. 2B308-309EN
159
 (4.5) Procedure for charging the battery

When the remaining charge in the battery is low, charge the battery using
the AC adaptor supplied with the footswitch.

For the procedure for charging the battery during use of the footswitch, refer
to (4.6) "Emergency battery charging".

<1> Connect the connector of the AC adaptor to the connector of the wireless
footswitch for charging.

AC adaptor Connecting to the connector

<2> Connect the AC adaptor to the power outlet of the facility. Charging starts
and the orange LED blinks. The battery will reach a full charge in about 4.5
hours (if it was fully discharged). The orange LED goes OFF when charging
is completed.

<3> Disconnect the connector of the AC adaptor from the connector of the
wireless footswitch and securely tighten the connector cap.

NOTICE: 1. During charging of the battery (when the AC adaptor is connected), do not
use the wireless footswitch for examinations. An accident may occur.

2. After the battery is fully charged, securely tighten the connector cap in the
footswitch. Failure to do so may permit entry of water, etc., resulting in
malfunction of the footswitch.

3. Do not expose the connector of the AC adaptor to water. An electrical short

may occur, resulting in malfunction of the AC adaptor.

NOTE: The battery can be recharged approximately 500 times. Replace it once a
year or when a decrease in usable time between charges becomes
noticeable. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative
when battery replacement is required.

No. 2B308-309EN
160
 (4.6) Emergency battery charging

If the remaining charge in the battery becomes low during the examination
(the orange LED lights), use the supplied emergency power supply cable to
supply power from the catheterization table. Power is supplied to the
wireless footswitch, and charging of the battery starts at the same time.
Operation from the wireless footswitch can be continued. If the battery is not
recharged and the battery runs out, operation from the wireless footswitch
becomes impossible.

<1> Connect the emergency power supply cable connector to the connector of
the wireless footswitch for charging.

Emergency power supply cable Connecting the connector

<2> Connect the connector on the other end of the emergency power supply
cable to the footswitch connector of the catheterization table. For the
location of the footswitch connector, refer to subsection 6.4 "Connecting the
Cables". Charging starts and the orange LED blinks.

Connecting the connector

<3> After the examination is terminated, charge the battery of the wireless
footswitch using the AC adaptor. Refer to (4.5) "Procedure for charging the
battery".

NOTICE: 1. Keep the emergency power supply cable in an easily accessible location. It
is recommended that the location of the emergency power supply cable be
confirmed when daily checks are performed.

2. After charging of the footswitch is completed, be sure to securely mount

connector caps to the charging connectors of the footswitch and the table.
Failure to do so may allow the entry of liquids such as water into the
footswitch or table, leading to malfunction.

No. 2B308-309EN
161
NOTE: 1. In systems with the wired footswitch used in combination, the connectors for
the wired footswitch and wireless footswitch are provided in the
catheterization table and their shapes are different. Be sure to use the
correct connector when connecting the footswitch.

2. When the power of the system is turned OFF, the battery of the wireless
footswitch is not charged, even if the emergency power supply cable is
connected.

No. 2B308-309EN
162
(5) Movements of the catheterization table

Tabletop longitudinal movement

Tabletop vertical movement

Tabletop lateral movement

Tabletop rotation

No. 2B308-309EN
163
4.8.2 Catheterization table (CAT-880B)

(1) Name of each part of the catheterization table

[1]

[3]

[2]
[4] [3]

Catheterization table (CAT-880B)

[1] Tabletop

[2] Power reset button

Used to turn ON the drive power of the C-arm support unit and
catheterization table after it has been turned OFF using the Emergency
stop button. Wait for at least 5 seconds after pressing the Emergency
stop button before pressing this button.

[3] Accessory mounting rail

Used to mount accessories such as the tableside console and drip

infusion stand.
There are rails on the left, right, and foot end of the catheterization
table.

[4] Footswitch

Refer to 4.8.1 (3) "Footswitch".

For details of the wireless footswitch (option), refer to (4) "Wireless

footswitch" of this subsection.

No. 2B308-309EN
164
(2) Name of each part of the tabletop operating box

No. 2B308-309EN
165
 (3) Movements of the catheterization table

Tabletop vertical movement

Tabletop lateral movement

Tabletop longitudinal movement

Tabletop rotation

No. 2B308-309EN
166
 Tabletop longitudinal tilting

Tabletop lateral tilting

(4) Footswitch
The details of the wired footswitch, refer to (3) "Footswitch (wired
footswitch)" of subsection 4.8.1. For the wireless footswitch, refer to (4)
"Wireless footswitch" of subsection 4.8.1.

No. 2B308-309EN
167
4.9 Tabletop Control Console (Option)
The tabletop control console is a console for operating the catheterization
table. The following operations can be performed.

• Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement (simultaneous operation)

• Tabletop longitudinal movement (tabletop lateral movement fixed)
• Tabletop up/down movement
• Tabletop rotation

[6] Tabletop UP movement button

[7] Lever

[8] Console mounting hook

Tabletop control console

No. 2B308-309EN
168
[1] Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement brake release switch

When this switch is held down, the brake for tabletop longitudinal/lateral
movement is released. When this brake is released, the tabletop can
be moved manually in the longitudinal and lateral directions.

[2] Tabletop rotation center position indicator

Lights when the tabletop rotation angle is 0° or 180°.

[3] Tabletop rotation brake release button

This button is used to release the brake for tabletop rotation.

While this button is lit, the brake for tabletop rotation is released.

[4] Tabletop lateral movement lock button

This button engages the brake for tabletop lateral movement. When
this brake is engaged, the brake for tabletop lateral movement is not
released even when the tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement brake
release switch is pressed. When the tabletop is to be moved only in the
longitudinal direction, engage the brake for tabletop lateral movement.
When the brake is engaged, the button lights.

[5] Tabletop DOWN movement button

This button moves the tabletop downward. When this button is held
down, the tabletop moves downward continuously.

[6] Tabletop UP movement button

This button moves the tabletop upward. When this button is held down,
the tabletop moves upward continuously.

[7] Lever

This lever is used to mount the tabletop control console on the

catheterization table. The lock is released when the lever is pulled,
allowing the tabletop control console to be mounted/removed.

[8] Console mounting hook

This hook engages with the accessory mounting rail of the

catheterization table when the tabletop control console is mounted on
the catheterization table.

No. 2B308-309EN
169
No. 2B308-309EN
170
5. Safety Devices
Contents 5.1 Emergency Stop
5.2 System Shutdown in Emergencies
5.3 Interlocks
5.4 Interference Warning Function
5.5 Catheterization Table Manual Operation in Emergencies
5.6 Error Reset/Reduced Operation
5.7 Backup Fluoroscopy
5.8 System Reset
5.9 Quick Switching to Patient Mode and Shutdown Mode
5.10 Disabling X-ray Exposure
5.11 Starting an Emergency Study ("Start Study") From the
Examination Room
5.12 Detecting Abnormalities in the FPD Cooling Systems
5.13 Protecting the Personal Information of Patients
5.14 Interlock by the UPS

No. 2B308-309EN
171
5.1 Emergency Stop
(1) Stopping movement of the support unit and catheterization
table
When the Emergency stop button is pressed, movement of the C-arm
support unit, Ω-arm support unit, and catheterization table is stopped and the
emergency stop status is set. The support units and the table become
operable again only when the emergency stop status is released.

Emergency stop activation

Press the Emergency stop button .

This button is provided at the following locations. Familiarize yourself with

the locations.

Locations of the Emergency stop buttons

• Power ON switch box Refer to the figure below.
• Tableside console Refer to the figure below.
• Rear of the C-arm support Refer to (1) "Name of each part of the C-arm
column support unit" in subsection 4.7.1.
• Catheterization table Refer to (2) "Operating panel" in subsection
operating panel 4.8.1.
• Table operating box Refer to (2) "Name of each part of the
(CAT-880B) tabletop operating box" in subsection 4.8.2.
• Tablet console (Option) Refer to 9.7 "Operating the Tablet Console
(Option)" .

Power ON switch box Tableside console

WARNING: Except when the support unit or the catheterization table is to be

stopped immediately, do not press the Emergency stop button to stop
system movement. If the Emergency stop button is repeatedly used for
such purposes, the system may malfunction, resulting in an accident.

NOTE: 1. X-rays can be generated even in the emergency stop status.

2. If the emergency stop button is pressed during X-ray exposure, the

system enters emergency stop status and X-ray exposure is stopped.
Note that X-rays can be generated without releasing emergency stop
status.

No. 2B308-309EN
172
 Emergency stop release
Remove the causes of the emergency stop. After ensuring safety, press the
Power reset button on the catheterization table.

Power reset button

Catheterization table

CAUTION: When the power reset button is pressed to release the emergency stop
status, wait until the emergency stop status is released (this takes
approximately 15 seconds) before performing fluoroscopy or
radiography. Otherwise, images may be affected by the movement of
the beam limiting device during the release operation, and
unnecessary X-ray exposure may result.

No. 2B308-309EN
173
5.2 System Shutdown in Emergencies
If an emergency such as smoke or fire occurs or if the system cannot be
shut down normally for some reason, the power supply of the system can be
turned OFF forcibly.

[System shutdown method in emergencies]

Press the Power OFF button .

A cover for preventing inadvertent operation is provided for the Power OFF
button. Open this cover to use the Power OFF button.

Power ON switch box

WARNING: Do not use the Power OFF button to turn the system power supply OFF
in normal cases. When this button is used, the image data being
processed may not be saved.

NOTICE: Use the Power OFF button only to stop the system in an emergency. If the
power is repeatedly turned OFF using the power OFF button, the system
may malfunction.

No. 2B308-309EN
174
5.3 Interlocks
Interlocks limit the movements of the C-arm support unit and catheterization
table to prevent interference accidents. Interlocks are actuated in the
following cases.

(1) If a touch sensor detects contact

[Operational restriction in the interlocked status]

Electrically powered operation of the C-arm support unit and catheterization

table is disabled.

Note, however, that tabletop vertical movement in the direction away from
the FPD touch sensor or X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor can be
performed.

[Releasing the interlock]

<1> Check which touch sensor has detected contact.

<2> Hold down the Override button. Operate the C-arm support unit or
catheterization table so that the touch sensor is moved away from the
contacted object.

WARNING: 1. Safety devices are not activated while the Override button is held
down. When using the Override button, be sure to prevent interference
between the support unit and persons or surrounding units.

2. Touch sensors must be used only for preventing contact.

Touch sensors should not be used as Stop switches for system
positioning. If a touch sensor is brought into contact with a person or
with a unit used in combination, the contacted person or unit may be
compressed forcibly. In particular, if a touch sensor comes into
contact with the patient's face, the patient may be injured.

No. 2B308-309EN
175
(2) Optical sensor (option)
The floor rotation base is equipped with optical sensors in order to prevent
the operator's foot from being caught between the C-arm and the floor base
rotation section of the support unit CAS-880A. If an object or person enters
the detection range of an optical sensor, operation of the support unit is
restricted to ensure safety. Confirm the detection range of the optical
sensors, restricted operation, and the action to take described below.

[Detection range of the optical sensors]

The shaded areas in the following figures indicate the detection range of the
optical sensors.

(Support unit CAS-880A, viewed from the top)

No. 2B308-309EN
176
 [Restricted operation]

If an object or person enters the detection range of an optical sensor,

operation of the support unit is restricted as described below.

Unit Restricted operation

C-arm rotation
C-arm sliding
Floor base rotation
Support unit (CAS-880A)
Column rotation
FPD rotation (*1)
Beam limiting device rotation
Catheterization table No restricted operation

*1) FPD near/away movement is possible.

• When the optical sensor detects an object or person inside the detection
range and a "restricted operation" as specified above is attempted, an alarm
is generated and the operation is not performed.
• If the optical sensor detects the entry of an object or person into the
detection range during "restricted operation", an alarm is generated and
operation is stopped.
• If the optical sensor detects the entry of an object or person into the
detection range, error message "W22 Arm touch sensor actuated." is
displayed on the monitor.

No. 2B308-309EN
177
 [Action to take]

Take the actions described below when the optical sensor detects the entry
of an object or person into the detection range.

<1> At the tableside console, be sure to keep your hands away from the
arm/tabletop operation start lever.
At the satellite console, be sure to keep your hands away from the button on
the side of the C-arm operating lever.

<2> Remove the object or person from the detection range.

<3> Confirm that the alarm stops and the error message is cleared.

<4> Confirm that there is no risk of an object or person coming into contact with
the support unit.

<5> Resume operation with care.

WARNING: Safety devices are not activated while the Override button is held
down. When using the Override button, be sure to prevent interference
between the support unit and persons or surrounding units.

NOTE: It is possible to remove restrictions and continue operation of the support

unit without removing the object or person from the detection range of the
optical sensor. While holding down the Override button of the tableside
console or satellite console, perform operation again.

No. 2B308-309EN
178
(3) If the C-arm support unit is too close to the floor, wall, or
table base of the catheterization table
[Restricted operation]

The C-arm support unit stops automatically. The C-arm support unit cannot
be moved further in the direction of contact.

[Releasing the interlock]

Move the C-arm support unit away from the object causing contact.
For the biplane system, if the Ω-arm is too close to the floor and the interlock
is actuated during sliding movement, stop and then restart operation. Sliding
movement is resumed from the position where it was interrupted. At this
time, confirm that there is nothing (feet, objects, etc.) between the Ω-arm
and the floor before restarting operation.

(4) If the Ω-arm comes close to the floor rotation base of the
C-arm (Biplane system)
[Restricted operation]

The support unit stops automatically. The support unit cannot be moved
further in the direction of contact.

[Releasing the interlock]

The interlock release procedure is the same as that described in step (1) "If
a touch sensor detects contact".

(5) If the C-arm position satisfies both of the following (Biplane

system):

• The column rotation angle is not between +44° and -44°

• The floor base rotation angle is between +5° and -5°.

[Restricted operation]

Manual operation from the tableside console is restricted. Auto-positioning

and operation using the operating buttons on the support column of the
C-arm are possible.

[Releasing the interlock]

Rotate the C-arm by one of the methods below until the support column
rotation angle is between +44° and -44°.

• Support column rotation using the control switch on the rear of the C-arm
• Auto-positioning

No. 2B308-309EN
179
(6) If the tabletop is too close to the floor or floor base of the
C-arm during tabletop tilting
When the catheterization table CAT-880B is used in combination, if the
tabletop is too close to the floor or floor base of the C-arm during tabletop
tilting, an interlock is activated.

[Restricted operation]

The catheterization table stops automatically. Until the interlock is released,

further electrically powered movement of the catheterization table toward the
floor is disabled.

[Releasing the interlock]

Move the tabletop away from the floor by tabletop tilting, tabletop vertical
movement, or tabletop longitudinal movement (electrically powered
operation).

Note, however, that it may be impossible to tilt the tabletop depending on the
tabletop longitudinal position.

In this case, move the tabletop away from the floor by tabletop vertical
movement or tabletop longitudinal movement (electrically powered
operation) and then move the tabletop to the foot end.

(7) Tabletop lateral tilting

When the catheterization table CAT-880B is used in combination, an
interlock is activated during tabletop lateral tilting to prevent fingers from
being caught underneath the tabletop.

[Restricted operation]

Catheterization table movement is stopped at +10° or -10° during tabletop

lateral tilting. Tabletop lateral tilting can be resumed by releasing the
interlock.

[Releasing the interlock]

The interlock can be released by releasing the operation switch. Resume

tilting only after confirming that the hands of the patient and medical staff (or
other objects) are not under the tabletop.

No. 2B308-309EN
180
5.4 Interference Warning Function
This function issues a warning when the C-arm support unit is within the
interference range.

The interference range is the range within which the C-arm support unit is
likely to come into contact with the patient or the rear of the catheterization
tabletop.

Note that the interference warning function is not actuated while the support
unit or catheterization table in the interference range is moving in the
direction away from the interference range.

CAUTION: If the interference warning function is activated, the operating speed is

reduced. Take special care to prevent contact when operating the
support unit and catheterization table in this status. Even when the
interference warning function actuates, the system is not stopped
automatically before contact.

(1) Warning for interference with the rear of the tabletop

When the C-arm support unit and the rear of the tabletop of the
catheterization table closely approach each other, the movement speeds of
the C-arm support unit and catheterization table are reduced. If the C-arm
support unit and catheterization table continue to approach each other, a
warning sound is generated.

(2) Warning for interference with the patient

If the C-arm support unit moves into the patient barrier (*2), the movement
speed of the C-arm support unit is reduced (*1) (*3). A warning sound is not
generated.

*1) For the biplane system, the operating speed is always reduced when both of
the arms are deployed. Therefore, if the support unit enters the interference
range, the operating speed is not further reduced.

*2) Patient barrier

This refers to the volume in which the patient is assumed to be placed
(indicated by the dotted lines).
35 cm

70 cm

Patient barrier

No. 2B308-309EN
181
 *3) When the Ω-arm is used in the single-plane configuration (in a biplane
system), if the X-ray tube of the Ω-arm enters the patient barrier, the
movement speed of the Ω-arm is not reduced.

(3) Interference range with the other support unit

In the following cases, the interference warning function is actuated to
prevent interference between the C-arm and the Ω-arm.

(a) When the Ω-arm is not at the isocenter

In this case, the warning mark shown on the left is lit on the in-room monitor.
At this time, the C-arm and the Ω-arm move at low speed with an alarm
sound.

(b) When the Ω-arm and the C-arm come close to each other

At this time, the support unit moves at low speed with an alarm sound.

(c) When the support column rotation angle of the C-arm is not between +4°
and -4°.

At this time, the support unit moves at low speed with an alarm sound.

NOTE: 1. When the Ω-arm and the C-arm come close to each other within the
isocenter permissible range, the support units stop automatically.
Note, however, that automatic stop is not an interlock. Automatic stop is
performed to indicate that the support unit enters within the area where
further care is required to prevent interference in the interference area.
Perform the following to resume operation.

2. To operate a support unit that was stopped automatically, release the control
switch and start operation again.
Note that the interference warning function is actuated during this time.
Before operating the system, fully understand the features of the interference
warning function and perform the operation carefully so that the Ω-arm and
the C-arm do not interfere with each other.

No. 2B308-309EN
182
5.5 Catheterization Table Manual Operation in Emergencies
(1) Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement, and rotation
If the power of the catheterization table is turned OFF for some reason, the
tabletop brake cannot be released. In this case, push the tabletop of the
catheterization table strongly in the desired movement direction (lateral,
longitudinal, or rotational direction). The tabletop can be moved. If the
patient's condition changes suddenly while the power is OFF, move the
tabletop manually and secure sufficient space around the catheterization
table.

<1> Push the tabletop in the desired direction.

Tabletop longitudinal movement Tabletop rotation

(Possible for CAT-850B only)

Tabletop lateral
movement

Tabletop manual operation

NOTICE: Except in an emergency, do not press the tabletop of the catheterization

table after the brake has been applied. Doing so repeatedly will result in
wearing of the brake and a consequent decrease in braking force.

NOTE: 1. If the tabletop is locked and its movement is disabled even when the brake is
released in power ON status, tabletop locking can be released by pressing
the Override button.
In this case, select the acquisition program for the current study again.

2. If the tabletop cannot be moved manually, pull the tabletop mat in the foot-
end direction to shift the patient position.

No. 2B308-309EN
183
5.6 Error Reset/Reduced Operation
5.6.1 Error reset/reduced operation during fluoroscopy, radiography, or image
operations
Even if a system error related to fluoroscopy, radiography, or image
operations occurs, it is often possible to reset the error. In such cases, the
system returns to its normal operation status after the error is reset. Even
when the error cannot be reset, if the error correction function can be
activated, operation can be switched to reduced operation.

Reduced operation permits the minimum required procedures, such as

removal of the catheter, to be performed.

During reduced-operation fluoroscopy, the load on the system may increase

and some functions may be restricted.

(1) Error reset or switching to reduced operation

If a system error in which error resetting or switching to reduced operation is
possible occurs, the following dialog box is displayed on the system console
monitor.

<1> Click the Reset button to reset the error.

<2> If the error occurs repeatedly, click the Reduce button to switch to reduced
operation.

NOTE: If a system error for which error reset can be executed or system operation
can be switched to reduced operation occurs, the icon on the left is
displayed in the information display area on the fluoroscopic monitor.

No. 2B308-309EN
184
 (2) Requesting repair
Reduced operation is a function that enables temporary use of the system in
emergencies. If an error that requires reduced operation occurs, contact
your Canon Medical Systems representative for inspection and repair.

5.6.2 Resetting of beam limiting device errors

Even if an error such as the beam limiting device not operating correctly
during fluoroscopy/radiography occurs, the error can be reset according to
the procedures below.

If the system cannot be reset, contact your Canon Medical Systems

representative for inspection and repair.

(1) Error resetting

Press the Emergency stop button. Then, press the power reset button. For
details of the procedures and the locations of the Emergency stop button
and the power reset button, refer to subsection 5.1 "Emergency Stop".

<1> Press the Emergency stop button.

<2> Press the power reset button.

Error resetting is completed within about 15 seconds.

CAUTION: When the power reset button is pressed to release the emergency stop
status, wait until the emergency stop status is released (this takes
approximately 15 seconds) before performing fluoroscopy or
radiography. Otherwise, images may be affected by the movement of
the beam limiting device during the release operation, and
unnecessary X-ray exposure may result.

NOTE: Even if an error such as an operation error of the support unit or

catheterization table occurs, it is often possible to reset the error.
If the system cannot be reset, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative for inspection and repair.

No. 2B308-309EN
185
5.7 Backup Fluoroscopy
Backup fluoroscopy can be performed with the minimum functions required
for fluoroscopy maintained.

(1) Backup Fluoroscopy mode

The system enters Backup Fluoroscopy mode in the following cases.

• Approximately 2 minutes (*1) after the system power is turned ON, the
system enters Backup Fluoroscopy mode. When system startup is
completed, the system exits Backup Fluoroscopy mode.

• If a system error in which backup fluoroscopy can be performed occurs, the

system automatically enters Backup Fluoroscopy mode.

*1) For some systems with upgraded software, the system enters Backup
Fluoroscopy mode approximately 3 minutes after turning ON the power of
the system.

(2) Confirmation of the ready state

When the system is ready for backup fluoroscopy, all of the function buttons
on the upper row of the main console blink.

(3) Fluoroscopy
Perform fluoroscopy in the same manner as in normal fluoroscopy.

(4) Request for repair

Backup fluoroscopy is a function that permits temporary use of the system in
emergencies. If an error that requires backup fluoroscopy occurs, contact
your Canon Medical Systems representative for inspection and repair.

NOTE: 1. Depending on the type of system error, the backup fluoroscopy image may
be displayed only on the examination room monitor.

2. When the 12 × 16-inch FPD is used in combination, the FOV size can only
be switched from the current size to the immediately larger or smaller size
during backup fluoroscopy.

No. 2B308-309EN
186
 5.8 System Reset
This function is used to reset the system in the event of system failure.
There are two resetting methods: system restart and hardware resetting.
The resetting method differs depending on the error status. Referring to the
table below, confirm the error status and the location of the descriptions of
the appropriate countermeasures to be taken, and then reset the system.
In addition, in some cases the system can be restored using this function
when the system automatically enters backup mode due to a system error.

Countermeasures
Error status
(section to be referred to)
An error related to image playback on the system monitor occurred. (1) System restart
An error related to operations of the system monitor occurred.
The system cannot be shut down. (2) Hardware reset
The following error message appeared.
"Internalerror. Press reset SW on CCB front."

CAUTION: Before resetting the system, ensure safety and terminate the
examination. If the system is reset during examination, the
examination is interrupted and cannot be resumed until the reset
process is completed.
Perform hardware reset if the examination cannot be terminated due to
a system error.

(1) System restart

The system is recovered by system restart when a system error has
occurred. System restart is effective when an error related to image
playback on the system monitor, reference monitor, or fluoroscopy monitor
or an error related to operations at the system monitors has occurred.

<1> Press the Ctrl, Alt, and Delete keys on the keyboard together.
The System Reset screen appears. The functions of the displayed buttons
are shown in the figure below.

[Shutdown] button Shuts down the system when pressed.

[Restart] button Restarts the system when pressed.

[Partial Reset] button Initializes part of the software when pressed.

[Log Collect] button Transfers the error log to InnerVision (remote maintenance system) when
InnerVision is installed in the system.
For the procedure for transferring the error log and the operating procedure
for InnerVision, contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
In addition, do not select [All log] in [Log Collect] during the study. Error log
transfer may take several tens of minutes to complete, interfering with the
study.

[Cancel] button Closes the System Reset screen when pressed.

No. 2B308-309EN
187
NOTE: 1. If the System Reset screen does not appear though the above operation is
performed, it indicates that System Reset is not possible. In this case,
forcibly turn OFF the system power, wait for about 20 seconds, and then turn
ON the system power again to restart the system.
In emergencies, remove the catheter and guide wires in backup mode and
then forcibly turn OFF the system power.

2. If a system error has not occurred, do not reset the system. The
examination will be interrupted.

<2> Proceed with resetting according to the system status.

*1) Only application software programs related to studies are restarted or

initialized.

*2) The system automatically restarts.

*3) After the system is shut down, turn ON the system power to restart the
system.

NOTICE: When part of the software is initialized by a "Partial Reset", be sure to shut
down the system. If the system continues to be used without performing
shutdown, an error may occur. The shutdown timing should be determined
according to the examination status because the shutdown processing will
take about 8 minutes.

No. 2B308-309EN
188
 (2) Hardware reset
The system can be recovered by restarting only the DFP-8000C in the
following cases.

• When the system cannot be shut down by normal system power OFF
operation

• When the following message is displayed

"Internalerror. Press reset SW on CCB front."

<1> Press the Reset button on the DFP-8000C system main unit using a pointed
object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. The DFP-8000C is shut down and
the system is restarted immediately.

DFP-8000C main unit

NOTICE: 1. Data that is currently being processed may be lost when system reset is
performed.

2. Do not press the Reset button in cases other than those described above.
System malfunction may result if the system is restarted repeatedly by
pressing the Reset button.

3. In the case of smoke or fire when the system power must be turned OFF
immediately, press the power OFF button. Refer to subsection 5.2 "System
Shutdown in Emergencies" for details.

4. If the system is not returned to normal status even after executing hardware
reset, restart the system by performing the following procedure.

<1> Press the power OFF button on the power ON switch box to execute forcible
system power OFF (refer to subsection 5.2 "System Shutdown in
Emergencies").

<2> Wait for 20 seconds after the system power is turned OFF and then turn the
system power ON.

No. 2B308-309EN
189
5.9 Quick Switching to Patient Mode and Shutdown Mode
It is possible to switch the current mode to Patient mode or Shutdown mode
simply by pressing the corresponding function key on the keyboard.
It is also possible to select and execute functions in the modes by using the
keyboard. Use this function when your mouse is disabled.

(1) Mode switching

It is possible to switch modes by using the corresponding function key "F**"
on the keyboard.

• Press the F5 key to switch the current mode to Patient mode.

• Press the F12 key to switch the current mode to Shutdown mode.

(2) Selecting and executing a function

It is possible to the use function keys on the keyboard to select and execute
a function in the selected mode as shown below.

(2.1) Executable functions

Mode Function Function button used

Registration of an emergency patient [Emergency ID]
Patient mode Starting a study. (*1) [Start]
Completing a study [Finish]
Shutdown
Turning OFF the system power [Shut Down]
mode

*1) It is not possible to select a patient from an appointment list and start a
study.

(2.2) Method of selecting and executing a function

Use the keys below on the keyboard to select and execute functions.

Key Function
Used for navigating between items on the GUI, such as
buttons that can be executed and list boxes in which
Tab key
selections can be made. Each time this key is pressed, the
focus switches to the next item in the GUI.
Space key Executes the function selected in the GUI.
Sets a selection made in the GUI.
Enter key In Patient mode, this key can be used to switch between GUI
setting and entry box setting.

NOTE: The Tab, Enter, and Space keys on the keyboard also function as explained
above in modes other than Patient mode and Shutdown mode.

No. 2B308-309EN
190
5.10 Disabling X-ray Exposure
X-ray exposure can be disabled forcibly. Use this function to prevent
inadvertent X-ray exposure.

(1) Disabling X-ray exposure and enabling X-ray exposure

again
When the X-ray exposure disable button is clicked, X-ray exposure is
disabled. Clicking the button again cancels the X-ray exposure disable
setting and enables X-ray exposure again. This button lights when X-ray
exposure is disabled.

For the biplane system, it is possible to disable X-ray exposure

independently for the F and L systems.

(F-Pause) (L-Pause)

NOTE: 1. X-ray exposure can be disabled using the corresponding function button (if
the X-ray exposure disable function has been assigned to a function button).
Refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions Using Function Buttons" of the
reference manual.

2. When the support unit is set to the retracted position (park position (*1)),
X-ray exposure is automatically disabled.

*1) Floor base rotation angle: 0°; column rotation angle: +90° or -90°

No. 2B308-309EN
191
 (2) Confirm that X-ray exposure is disabled.
Confirm that the following displays and buttons are lit when X-ray exposure
is disabled. Note that if X-ray exposure is disabled due to movement of the
support unit to the park position, the following displays and buttons do not
light.

The X-ray exposure

disable icon is displayed
on the system monitor.

The X-ray exposure

disable display is lit
on the in-room monitor.

The X-ray exposure

disable button is
highlighted on the
Acquisition mode screen
of the system monitor. For the biplane system, the X-ray exposure
disabled icons are displayed for the frontal
and lateral sides separately.

(F-Pause) (L-Pause)

NOTE: If the X-ray exposure disable function is assigned to one of the function
buttons on the main console, the assigned function button also lights when
X-ray exposure is disabled.

No. 2B308-309EN
192
5.11 Starting an Emergency Study ("Start Study") From the
Examination Room
"Start Study" can be executed from the examination room. Start a study
using this method in emergencies, such as when the patient status changes
suddenly after "Finish Study" was executed and the study must be resumed
immediately.

In normal cases, do not start a study using this method.

<1> Start a study. Press the top button of the Menu operating lever on the
tableside console. After the screen for study is displayed on the
fluoroscopic/reference monitor, a study can be started.

<2> Complete a study. Perform the normal study completion method. Refer to
subsection 10.4 "Finish Study".

NOTE: 1. For the emergency study starting procedures when an urgent patient is
accepted, refer to subsection 10.5 "Urgent Patient Acceptance".

2. The number is automatically assigned to the patient information. Correct the

information after the study is completed.

3. The Emergency-Study Protocol used for the study which is started by this
operation can be edited. For details, refer to subsection 8.2.3 "Registering a
new study protocol and editing an existing protocol" in the reference manual.

CAUTION: 1. Any mismatch in the patient information may result in incorrect

diagnosis.
Be sure to correct the urgent patient information after completing the
study.
To correct the data after the study, use the editing functions for image
related information in Directory mode or Review mode.

2. Except in an emergency, do not press the Menu operating lever on the

tableside console while "Start Study" is not executed. If the button is
pressed unintentionally, the system enters the study start status,
resulting in incorrect X-ray exposure.

No. 2B308-309EN
193
5.12 Detecting Abnormalities in the FPD Cooling Systems
If any abnormality occurs in the FPD cooling systems and the FPD is not
cooled properly, the FPD power is automatically turned OFF to avoid
damaging the FPD.

<1> If a message indicating an FPD temperature error is displayed on the system

monitor, immediately stop the study and store all of the data items that are
being processed.

Within approximately 5 minutes after the message is displayed, the power of

the system is automatically turned OFF.

<2> Contact your Canon Medical Systems representative for inspection and
repair of the system.

Do not use the system until inspection and repair have been completed.

NOTICE: While using the system, if an alarm sequence (three short alarm sounds
followed by a silent period of approximately 4 seconds) is repeated,
terminate the study and turn OFF the power of the system.
Since the FPD cooling system may be defective in this case, if the FPD
cooling system is used as is, the FPD also may be defective.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.
Do not use the system until inspection and repair have been completed.

5.13 Protecting the Personal Information of Patients

This system is provided with a function for protecting the personal
information handled in this system.

To make this function available, setting by a Canon Medical Systems service

engineer is required. For further information, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.

For details of this function and the operating procedures, refer to the
reference manual.

5.14 Interlock by the UPS

If a small-capacity UPS used only for back-up power during fluoroscopy is
used in combination, image acquisition is disabled by an interlock triggered
by a power outage notification signal from the UPS.

<1> When the UPS is 100% charged, operations including fluoroscopy, support
unit movement, and catheterization table movement can be performed for
approximately 5 minutes (depending on the specifications of the UPS used).
If a message indicating a power outage is displayed, ensure safety and then
terminate the study. Set the catheterization table to the CPR position and
then shut down the system.

No. 2B308-309EN
194
6. Installation of Accessories and
Optional Units
Contents 6.1 Installing the Tableside Console
6.2 Installing the Satellite Console (Option)
6.3 Mounting the Sterile Caps
6.4 Connecting the Cables
6.5 Installing the Tabletop Mat and Arm Supports
6.6 Installing and Adjusting the Drip Infusion Stand
6.7 Installing the Armrest (One Arm)
6.8 Installing the Armrests (Both Arms: Option)
6.9 Installing the Arm Holder (Option)
6.10 Installing the Arm Cover (Option)
6.11 Installing the Leg Securing Band (Option)
6.12 Installing/Removing the Tabletop Control Switch (Option)
6.13 Installing the Tabletop Mat (XBTM-001A: Option)
6.14 Mounting the Patient Immobilization Band (CAT-880B)
6.15 Mounting the Drape Holder (CAT-880B)
6.16 Mounting the Accessory Tabletop Rail (CAT-880B)
6.17 Mounting the Tabletop Control Console
6.18 Mounting the Tablet Console
6.19 Other Catheterization Table Optional Units
6.20 Installing/Removing the Detachable Spacer

No. 2B308-309EN
195
6.1 Installing the Tableside Console
6.1.1 Installing the tableside console

(1) Installing the tableside console on the catheterization table

To install the tableside console on the accessory mounting rail of the
catheterization table, hang the mounting hooks of the tableside console over
the accessory mounting rail while pulling the lever at the rear of the tableside
console.

After installing the tableside console, confirm that it is secured firmly.

To remove the tableside console, lift it while pulling the lever toward you.

Mounting hook

Lever

Accessory mounting rail

CAUTION: When installing the tableside console on the accessory mounting rail
of the catheterization table, engage the tableside console mounting
hook with the accessory mounting rail. If the hook is not properly
engaged with the rail, the tableside console may fall and be damaged.
If the tableside console falls, it may malfunction even if it does not
appear to be damaged. It should be inspected by Canon Medical
Systems service personnel before it is used.

No. 2B308-309EN
196
 (2) Setting the installation position of the tableside console
The installation position of the tableside console should be set in the system.
Otherwise, the lever tilt directions and the support unit operating directions
may not match.

CAUTION: If the mounting orientation of the tableside console is changed, be sure

to set the new position information.
Otherwise, the operating directions of the levers may not match the
actual movement directions of the support unit(s).

<1> Press the Auto-positioning selection button and confirm that it lights.

<2> Hold down the Override button on the tableside console and press the 0 key.

The mounting position that is currently saved is displayed in the warning

display section of the reference monitor.

Registered position Display

Head end of the catheterization table Head
Left side of the catheterization table Left
Right side of the catheterization table Right
Foot end of the catheterization table Foot

<Left side>

<Head end> <Foot end>

<Right side>

No. 2B308-309EN
197
<3> While holding down the Override button, press and release the 0 key
successively until the mounting position to be set is displayed in the warning
display section.

Each time the 0 key is pressed with the Override button held down, the
tableside console position setting changes in the order below.

<Head end> → <Left side> → <Foot end> → <Right side>

↑

<4> After the mounting position is displayed on the warning display section, do
not press the Override button and 0 key for 5 seconds.

The selected position is saved and the position display in the warning display
section on the reference monitor goes out.

No. 2B308-309EN
198
6.1.2 Installing the tabletop operating box (CAT-880B)

(1) Installing the tabletop operating box on the catheterization

table
Install the tabletop operating box on the accessory mounting rail of the
catheterization table. For the installation procedure, refer to 6.1.1 (1)
"Installing the tableside console on the catheterization table". For the name
of the each part of the table operating box, refer to 4.8.2 (2) "Name of each
part of the tabletop operating box".

(2) Setting required after installing the tabletop operating box

After the tabletop operating box is installed, it may be necessary to switch
the movement directions assigned to the tabletop forward and backward
movement buttons. Confirm that the movement directions are assigned
correctly. If the movement direction assignment is incorrect, tabletop
longitudinal movement will be performed in the direction opposite to that
intended.

<1> Move the peripheral units outside the movement range of the catheterization
table.

<2> Press the tabletop forward movement button or backward movement button
on the tabletop operating box.

<3> If the tabletop moves as intended, setting is not necessary. If it moves in the
direction opposite to that intended, switch the movement directions assigned
to these buttons using the tabletop longitudinal movement direction reversal
switch at the bottom of the tabletop operating box.

<4> Press the tabletop forward movement button or backward movement button
on the tabletop operating box to confirm that the tabletop moves as intended.

No. 2B308-309EN
199
6.2 Installing the Satellite Console (Option)
(1) Installing the satellite console on the dedicated stand
Mount the satellite console and the satellite tablet console on the accessory
mounting rail of the dedicated stand. For the installation procedure, refer to
subsection 6.1 "Installing the Tableside Console".

CAUTION: 1. The satellite console must be installed on the accessory mounting rail
of the dedicated stand. If the satellite console is placed at a location
other than that specified (such as on the floor), an accident may result.

2. Do not place the dedicated stand for the satellite console under the
tabletop of the catheterization table.
If the stand and the tabletop come into contact, damage or a system
malfunction may result.

NOTICE: If the satellite console stand is used, observe the following precautions to
avoid the console falling and becoming damaged.

• Do not place the stand on a sloping floor or within the movement range of
each unit.
• Do not entangle your feet in the satellite console cable.
• Mount the satellite console at the center of the accessory mounting rail.
• Mount/hang only the satellite console on the stand.
• When operating the system, lock the brake of the stand.

No. 2B308-309EN
200
(1.1) Satellite console stand

This stand is for mounting the satellite console.

Accessory mounting rail

The brake is
released.

The brake is
applied.

(1.2) Tablet console stand

This stand is for mounting both the satellite console and the satellite tablet
console. Mount the tablet console on the upper level of the accessory
mounting rail and mount the satellite console on the lower level of the
accessory mounting rail.

No. 2B308-309EN
201
(2) Saving the installation position
In the same manner as for the tableside console, save the satellite console
installation position.

For the saving procedure, refer to subsection 6.1 "Installing the Tableside
Console".

Save the position using the Override button and the 0 key on the satellite
console. Note that the orientation of the satellite console relative to the
catheterization table should be as shown in the figure below.

No. 2B308-309EN
202
6.3 Mounting the Sterile Caps
Be sure to use the system with sterile caps mounted to the sections
specified below in order to prevent secondary infection due to blood and to
prevent system malfunction or incorrect operation due to contrast medium.

CAUTION: Use a sterile cap that meets the conditions below. Using a sterile cap
that does not meet these conditions may result in incorrect operation,
incorrect movement, or system malfunction.

• Transparent

• Capable of preventing entry of liquid

• Of an appropriate size for the unit to avoid interference with operation

(1) Mounting the sterile cap to the console

Mount a sterile cap to the console attached to the accessory mounting rail of
the catheterization table.

The sterile cap must be mounted so that it covers the entire console as
shown in the figure below.

CAUTION: 1. If a console without a sterile cap is exposed to liquid such as

physiological saline solution or contrast medium, immediately wipe off
the liquid. Otherwise, system malfunction or incorrect operation may
occur.

2. If a sterile cap is damaged, be sure to replace it with new one. In

addition, if a sterile cap is not mounted properly, immediately correct it.
If the system is used with a cap that is damaged or not mounted
properly, blood may remain on the system, resulting in a risk of
secondary infection.

3. If a tablet console (option) is used, cover the tablet console with a

sterile cap.

No. 2B308-309EN
203
 (2) Mounting the sterile cap to the FPD
Mount a sterile cap to the FPD.

The sterile cap must be mounted so that it covers the entire FPD as shown
in the figure below.

CAUTION: 1. When mounting a sterile cap to the FPD, do not apply pressure to the
front surface of the FPD. Doing so actuates the touch sensor mounted
on the front surface of the FPD, and FPD away movement is performed,
resulting in a risk of hand injury if your hand becomes caught in the
system. If the touch sensor is actuated, immediately remove your hand
from the front surface of the FPD. FPD movement stops.

2. Make sure that the FPD near/away movement switches are completely
covered by a sterile cap. If the FPD near/away movement switches are
not covered with a sterile cap, blood may remain on the switches
during operation, resulting in a risk of secondary infection.

3. If a sterile cap is damaged, be sure to replace it with new one. In

addition, if a sterile cap is not mounted properly, immediately correct it.
If the system is used with a cap that is damaged or not mounted
properly, blood may remain on the system, resulting in a risk of
secondary infection.

NOTICE: Do not cover the lifter cover with a sterile cap. If the lifter cover is covered, it
may come off or be damaged during FPD near/away movement.

No. 2B308-309EN
204
 (3) Mounting the sterile cap to the footswitch
Mount a sterile cap to the footswitch of the catheterization table.

The sterile cap must be mounted so that it covers the entire footswitch as
shown in the figure below.

CAUTION: 1. If a footswitch without a sterile cap is exposed to liquid such as

physiological saline solution or contrast medium, immediately wipe off
the liquid. Otherwise, system malfunction or incorrect operation may
occur.

2. If a sterile cap is damaged, be sure to replace it with new one. In

addition, if a sterile cap is not mounted properly, immediately correct it.
If the system is used with a cap that is damaged or not mounted
properly, blood may remain on the system, resulting in a risk of
secondary infection.

No. 2B308-309EN
205
6.4 Connecting the Cables
When the following units are used, connect the connectors of the cables
from each unit to the corresponding connectors of the catheterization table.
Confirm the positions of the connectors of the catheterization table.

• Injector (contrast medium injector)

• Tabletop control switch
• Tabletop operating box (CAT-880B)
• Satellite console
• Footswitch
• Additional footswitch

CAUTION: 1. Before connecting the cables of the units used in combination to the
catheterization table, be sure to turn OFF the power of the system and
units used in combination. If the cables are connected with the power
ON, an electric shock or malfunction may occur.

2. To prevent electric shock to the patient, connect the potential

equalization conductors of peripheral units (such as the
electrocardiograph) used in combination with the system to the
equipotential terminal ( ) of the catheterization table.

(1) Connecting with the CAT-850B

Connectors for control switches

Equipotential terminal

Satellite console connector

Connectors for footswitches

(Also provided on front.)

Connector for injection

Cable connector connection positions (CAT-850B)

No. 2B308-309EN
206
(2) Connecting with the CAT-880B

Cable connector connection positions (CAT-880B)

No. 2B308-309EN
207
6.5 Installing the Tabletop Mat and Arm Supports
When performing diagnosis, be sure to use the tabletop mat and the arm
supports.

WARNING: To prevent the patient's arm or hand from getting caught, mount the
arm supports to the catheterization table.

(1) Installing the tabletop mat and arm supports

Place the tabletop mat on the tabletop of the catheterization table.

NOTICE: Make sure that the tabletop mat does not protrude from the tabletop.
If the tabletop mat is not aligned properly with the tabletop, shadows caused
by the mat may appear on images.

(2) Installing the arm supports

Install the arm supports after placing the patient on the catheterization table.
Insert the arm supports under the tabletop mat from both sides of the patient.

Tabletop Tabletop mat Arm supports

Installing the arm supports

No. 2B308-309EN
208
6.6 Installing and Adjusting the Drip Infusion Stand
NOTICE: 1. Do not hang an object weighing 2 kg or more on one side of the drip infusion
stand or objects weighing 4 kg or more on both sides of the drip infusion
stand. Doing so may cause the stand to fall over.

2. When operating the tabletop, be careful not to allow the drip infusion stand to
interfere with other units such as the support unit and the monitor
suspension unit.

<1> Insert the drip infusion stand fixing fitting into the accessory mounting rail.

<2> Insert the drip infusion stand into the pipe of the fixing fitting.

<3> Turn the knob of the fixing fitting clockwise to fix the drip infusion stand.

<4> Confirm that the drip infusion stand is securely fixed.

Drip infusion stand

<2>

<1> <3>
Accessory mounting rail
Knob of the fixing fitting
Drip infusion stand fixing fitting

Installing the drip infusion stand

No. 2B308-309EN
209
6.7 Installing the Armrest (One Arm)
After placing the patient on the catheterization table, insert the armrest under
the tabletop mat.

Tabletop Tabletop mat

Armrest

Installing the armrest

WARNING: 1. Do not place anything other than the patient's arm on the armrest.
Also, do not allow the armrest to be subjected to a force of more than
100 N (approximately 10 kgf). If these instructions are not followed, the
armrest may be damaged and the patient may be injured.

2. Take special care to prevent interference between the armrest and the
support unit. If the armrest contacts the support unit, the armrest may
be damaged and the patient may be injured.

No. 2B308-309EN
210
6.8 Installing the Armrests (Both Arms: Option)
Armrests for both arms of the patient are provided as an option.
The armrests are required for the Sones method.

<1> Remove the tabletop mat and place the armrest mounting plate on the
tabletop.

<2> Attach the armrest mounting plate securely to the tabletop using the fixing
bands.

Armrest mounting plate

Fixing bands

Attaching the armrest mounting plate

<3> Insert the armrests into the armrest mounting brackets attached to the
mounting plate.

<4> There are three settings for the mounting angle. The angle changes
according to the groove into which the angle adjustment shaft is inserted.

• To set the armrest to the horizontal position, slide the shaft out from the
groove.

• To tilt the armrest upward, insert the shaft into the inner groove.

Armrest mounting bracket

Angle adjustment shaft Armrest

Installing the armrests and adjusting the mounting angles

WARNING: Before using the armrests, confirm that armrest shafts are fully
inserted into the mounting section holes. If the armrest shafts are not
inserted properly, the armrests may come off during use and the
patient may be injured.

No. 2B308-309EN
211
6.9 Installing the Arm Holder (Option)
The arm holder consists of the mounting section, the arm holder section, and
the handgrip section.

6.9.1 Arm holder for the CAT-850B

(1) Securing the mounting section

<1> Insert the mounting section into the tabletop. Turn the lever toward direction
(B). The mounting section is then secured on the tabletop. To release the
mounting section, turn the lever toward direction (A).

<2> Confirm that the mounting section is firmly secured.

(A)
(B) Lever

Securing the mounting section

(2) Mounting the holder section and adjusting the handgrips

<1> Insert the arm holder into the grooves of the mounting section.

<2> Insert the handgrips into the grooves of the mounting section.

<3> Instruct the patient to place his/her arms on the arm holder. Then instruct
the patient to hold the handgrips as shown in the figure below.

<4> Adjust the positions of the handgrips according to the patient physique. After
adjustment, turn the adjustment knobs to lock the handgrips.

Arm holder

Handgrip

Adjustment knob

Mounting the holder section

No. 2B308-309EN
212
6.9.2 Arm holder for the CAT-880B

(1) Securing the mounting section

<1> Insert the mounting section into the tabletop within the area specified by the
double-headed arrow in the figure below.

Mark

Head end of the tabletop

Mounting location (between the marks)

<2> To secure the mounting section to the tabletop, turn the lever to set it to the
(B) position. To remove the mounting section from the tabletop, turn the
lever to set it to the (A) position.

<3> Confirm that the mounting section is firmly secured.

(A)
(B)

Lever

Securing the mounting section

No. 2B308-309EN
213
 (2) Mounting the holder sections and adjusting the handgrips
<1> Insert the ends of the arm holders securely into the grooves of the mounting
sections.

<2> Insert the handgrips into the holes of the mounting sections.

<3> Instruct the patient to place his/her arms on the arm holders. Then instruct
the patient to hold the handgrips as shown in the figure in subsection 6.9.1
(2).

<4> Adjust the positions of the handgrips according to the patient physique. After
adjustment, turn the adjustment knobs to lock the handgrips.

Arm holder

Handgrip

Adjustment knob

Mounting the holder section

No. 2B308-309EN
214
6.10 Installing the Arm Cover (Option)
Install the arm cover on the catheterization table if required.

<1> Place the arm cover on the tabletop and secure it using the two securing
bands on the tabletop.

<2> Place the tabletop mat on the arm cover.

Tabletop mat

Arm cover

Securing band

No. 2B308-309EN
215
6.11 Installing the Leg Securing Band (Option)
Use the leg securing band to prevent leg movement during stepping DSA.

(1) Operating procedure

(1.1) Pulling out the securing band

<1> Move the lock lever to engage the lever with the notch.

<2> Pull out the securing band.

(1.2) Winding the securing band

<1> Disengage the lock lever from the notch and return it to the previous position.

<2> Move the knob clockwise to wind the securing band.

Lock lever
Lock lever Securing band
<1>
<1> <2> <2>

Knob

Pulling out the securing band Winding the securing band

No. 2B308-309EN
216
(2) Securing the patient's legs
<1> Insert the leg securing band into the accessory mounting rail at the tabletop
side.

<2> Pull out the securing band and engage the band-end hook with the
accessory mounting rail on the other side. At this time, maintain the
securing band tension so that the hook is not disengaged.

<3> While maintaining the securing band tension, wind the securing band without
causing the patient pain.

<4> Confirm that the patient's legs are properly secured.

Accessory
mounting rail

Hook

Securing the patient's legs

No. 2B308-309EN
217
6.12 Installing/Removing the Tabletop Control Switch (Option)
The tabletop control switch can be installed on the accessory mounting rails
on the left/right sides of the catheterization table. Install the tabletop control
switch at a position where operation can be performed easily. It is not
possible to place the tabletop control switch at a position away from the
catheterization table main unit.

(1) Installation
<1> Install the tabletop control switch. Pull the tabletop control switch lever
toward you and install the switch to the rail as is. When the lever is released,
the switch is secured.

<2> Install the two cable hooks to the rail. A hook must be installed near the foot
end of the table.

<3> Hang the tabletop control switch cable using the two hooks.

<4> Confirm that the tabletop control switch cable does not interfere with
operation of the catheterization table. Slowly move the tabletop of the
catheterization table in the lateral and longitudinal directions and confirm that
the tabletop moves to the stroke end with sufficient slack of the cable. Also
confirm that the cable does not get caught by the catheterization table.

(2) Removal
<1> Remove the tabletop control switch. Pull the tabletop control switch lever
toward you and lift it as is.

To change the position of the tabletop control switch on the rail, slide the
switch while pulling the lever.

Mounting the hook

Cable
Mounting/removing the
tabletop control switch

No. 2B308-309EN
218
6.13 Installing the Tabletop Mat (XBTM-001A: Option)
<1> Remove the standard tabletop mat from the tabletop of the catheterization
table.

<2> Place the tabletop mat (XBTM-001A) on the tabletop.

The folded end of the tabletop mat fastener should be facing down.

Head end

Tabletop mat (XBTM-001A)

Foot end
Fastener

<3> Place a sheet over the tabletop mat if required. This may make it easier to
move the patient on the tabletop mat.

<4> If accessories or options for the system (such as the arm support or armrest)
are used, there may be some unevenness between the tabletop and the
tabletop mat. In this case, place a piece of cloth or a cushion over the
uneven area.

Tabletop mat Arm support

Tabletop
Place a piece of cloth or a cushion
to correct the unevenness.

NOTICE: Use the tabletop mat with the designated cover attached.

No. 2B308-309EN
219
6.14 Mounting the Patient Immobilization Band (CAT-880B)
Two patient immobilization bands are used to secure the patient on the
catheterization table. They are wound around the patient's chest and
abdomen. Be sure to use both bands.

CAUTION: 1. Do not allow the patient immobilization band to bear the entire weight
of the patient.

2. Before operation, confirm that the patient immobilization band

immobilizes the patient firmly. If the patient immobilization band is not
secured firmly, it may come off during examination and cause an
accident.

3. The serviceable life of the patient immobilization band is one year and
it must be replaced with a new band within one year from the first use
of the band. The expiration date for use must be written on the label of
the patient immobilization band (refer to the figure below) using
permanent ink. This expiration date must be checked against the
current date before each use. If the patient immobilization band is
used for more than one year, it may deteriorate and break or the Velcro
tape may come off. Fluffing on the Velcro tape, abrasion or damage on
the patient immobilization band, etc. are signs that a new patient
immobilization band should be used even if it is less than one year
from the first use of the band. To obtain a new patient immobilization
band, contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.

Write down the expiration

date for use here.

(MONTH/YEAR)
19803001

No. 2B308-309EN
220
<1> Wind one of the patient immobilization bands around the patient and tabletop
and tighten it using Velcro A.

<2> Pull the patient immobilization band and additionally tighten it using Velcro B.

<3> Further tighten the patient immobilization band using Velcro C.

<4> Confirm that the patient is fully immobilized by the patient immobilization
band.

<5> Place the second patient immobilization band around the patient and tighten
it in the same way.

Patient immobilization band

Velcro B Velcro A

Velcro C

No. 2B308-309EN
221
6.15 Mounting the Drape Holder (CAT-880B)
Mount the drape holder on the tabletop as required.

CAUTION: Observe the following precautions when using the drape holder.
Failure to observe these precautions may result in injury to the patient
or operator or damage to the system.

a. Before starting an examination, confirm that the tabletop locking knob

and the angle locking knob are securely engaged.

b. Be careful to avoid contact between the drape holder and the support
unit.

c. Do not hang anything other than the drape on the drape holder.

<1> Insert the clamp for the drape holder into the tabletop at a location between
the end of the tabletop and the marks.

<2> Tighten the clamp locking knob.

<3> Confirm that the drape holder is securely mounted to the tabletop.

<4> Adjust the bar angle by loosening the bar angle locking knob.

<5> Adjust the bar length by loosening the bar length locking knob.

<6> Tighten the bar angle locking knob and the bar length locking knob.

No. 2B308-309EN
222
6.16 Mounting the Accessory Tabletop Rail (CAT-880B)
Mount the accessory tabletop rail on the tabletop as required.

WARNING: 1. When the accessory tabletop rail (option) with heavy components (*1)
installed on it is used in combination, the maximum allowable load on
the catheterization table is 220 kg. Do not place a patient whose mass
exceeds 220 kg on the table because the tabletop may be damaged and
the patient may be injured.

* 1) The term "heavy components" refers to components that are not

assumed to be mounted on the catheterization table. Standard
components mounted on the catheterization table such as the
tableside console and optional units are not included.

2. Do not mount an object weighing more than 20 kg on the accessory

tabletop rail. Doing so may damage the rail and cause an accident.

Note that 20 kg is the maximum limit when the center of gravity of the
mounted object is immediately above the rail ("A" in the following
figure). Depending on its center of gravity, even an object that weighs
less than 20 kg may not be mountable. For example, if the center of
gravity of the object to be mounted is 100 mm away from the rail ("B" in
the following figure), the maximum permissible mass of the object is
10 kg. Refer to the following figure for details.

No. 2B308-309EN
223
CAUTION: Observe the following precautions when using the accessory tabletop
rail.
Failure to observe these precautions may result in injury to the patient
or operator or damage to the system.

1. Before starting an examination, confirm that the tabletop locking knob

is securely fastened.

2. Be careful to avoid contact between the accessory tabletop rail and the
support unit.

3. Do not mount an operating console on the accessory tabletop rail.

<1> Insert the clamp for the accessory tabletop rail into the tabletop at a location
between the end of the tabletop and the marks.

<2> Tighten the two clamp locking knobs.

<3> Confirm that the accessory tabletop rail is securely mounted to the tabletop.

No. 2B308-309EN
224
6.17 Mounting the Tabletop Control Console
The tabletop control console is mounted on the accessory mounting rail of
the catheterization table. Mount the console at a convenient location. Note
that the tabletop control console cable cannot be removed from the
catheterization table.

WARNING: 1. Mount the tabletop control console on the catheterization table

(normally, on the patient's right side as shown in the figure below).
The emergency stop button is located on the patient's right side.

Catheterization table

Tabletop control console

Emergency stop button

2. If the tabletop control console is to be mounted on the patient's left

side, also mount the tableside console (*1) on the patient's left side.
An emergency stop button is also provided on the tableside console.
The catheterization table is not provided with an emergency stop
button on the patient's left side.

*1) Tableside console included in the standard configuration of the

combined system.

CAUTION: Fully engage the console mounting hook of the tabletop control
console with the accessory mounting rail. If the hook is not fully
engaged with the rail, the console may fall and be damaged.
If the console falls, it may malfunction even if it does not appear to be
damaged. The console should be inspected by Canon Medical
Systems service personnel before it is used.

<Example of correct setting> <Example of incorrect setting>

No. 2B308-309EN
225
NOTICE: 1. When mounting/removing the tabletop control console, be sure not to press
the tabletop DOWN movement button. The tabletop of the catheterization
table may be lowered and the tabletop may come into contact with peripheral
units.

2. Do not pull the cable of the tabletop control console. If strong force is
applied to the cable, the cable connectors of the tabletop control console and
catheterization table may be damaged.

(1) Removing the tabletop control console

<1> Pull the lever at the rear of the tabletop control console.

<2> While pulling the lever, lift the console to remove it.

(2) Mounting the tabletop control console

<1> Pull the lever at the rear of the tabletop control console.

<2> While pulling the lever, engage the mounting hook of the console with the rail.

The console can be moved along the rail when the lever is pulled.

<3> Release the lever and confirm that the console is securely engaged.

No. 2B308-309EN
226
(3) Cable handling
Handle the tabletop control console cable carefully to avoid interference
when the catheterization table is moved.

<1> Mount the two cable hooks on the rail. Mount one hook on the foot-end side
of the table.

<2> Hang the tabletop control console cables using the two hooks.

<3> Confirm that the tabletop control console cable does not interfere with
movement of the catheterization table.

Carefully move the tabletop of the catheterization table in the lateral and
longitudinal directions to confirm that the cable is not subjected to excessive
strain at the stroke ends. Also confirm that the cable is not caught by the
catheterization table.

No. 2B308-309EN
227
6.18 Installing the Tablet Console
Install the tablet console on the catheterization table as shown below. Use
the lever to lock or release the mounting hook. Confirm that the tablet
console is installed securely before using it.

CAUTION: 1. Cover the tablet console with a sterile cap before use.

2. If a console without a sterile cap is exposed to a liquid such as

physiological saline solution or contrast medium, immediately wipe off
the liquid.
Otherwise, system malfunction or incorrect operation may occur.

No. 2B308-309EN
228
6.19 Other Catheterization Table Optional Units
For the handling procedures for the following optional units, refer to the
operation manual provided for the corresponding optional unit.

Optional unit Model name

Extension rails XBER-001A
Extension table XBET-001A
Head-end table control switch kit XBHR-001A

6.20 Installing/Removing the Detachable Spacer

If this system is used in the USA, add the detachable spacer at the X-ray
beam limiting device touch sensor. The SSD (Source-To-Skin-Distance) is
restricted to the minimum SSD, or 38 cm.

Note, however, if this system is used for specific surgical applications, it is

allowed to remove the detachable spacer.

After the detachable spacer is removed, the minimum SSD is 30 cm.

(1) Installing the detachable spacer (to increase the SSD to

38 cm)
<1> Place the detachable spacer on the X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor.
Align the mounting screws of the detachable spacer with the screw holes.

<2> Tighten the four mounting screws of the detachable spacer.

<3> Confirm that the detachable spacer is firmly secured.

No. 2B308-309EN
229
 (2) Removing the detachable spacer
<1> Loosen the four mounting screws of the detachable spacer to remove the
spacer.

<2> Mount caps over the four screw holes.

C-arm of the INFX-8000V/B, INFX-8000V/Y, C-arm of the INFX-8000V/B, INFX-8000V/Y,

INFX-8000V/P SP Cardiac system INFX-8000V/P SP Vascular / BP Cardiac
(Combination with the X-ray beam limiting system
device BLA-900C)

Ω-arm of the INFX-8000V/B, INFX-8000V/Y, Ω-arm of the INFX-8000V/B, INFX-8000V/Y,

INFX-8000V/P BP Cardiac system INFX-8000V/P BP Vascular system

No. 2B308-309EN
230
7. Daily Checks
Contents 7.1 Checks Before Operation
7.2 Checks After Operation

No. 2B308-309EN
231
7.1 Checks Before Operation
Be sure to perform the required checks before starting operation. Make a
copy of the check sheet provided at the end of this operation manual and
use it when performing inspection.

CAUTION: If any system abnormality is found during the checks before operation,
stop using the system and post a sign reading "DO NOT USE" on the
system. Then contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative for inspection and repair.

NOTE: The system status (items related to fluoroscopy/radiography) can be

recorded in imaging condition check mode. This permits changes in the
system status to be checked by comparing previous records with the current
status. It is recommended that the checks in imaging condition check mode
be performed periodically during the preoperation checks. For details, refer
to section 10 "Check of Fluoroscopy/Radiography Functions" of the
reference manual.

(1) Checks before turning ON the power

(a) Checks in the control room

• Confirm that the ambient temperature, atmospheric pressure, relative

humidity, and atmosphere meet the operating requirements.
• Confirm that there is no dirt on the main console, system console, and
monitors.
• Confirm that the emergency power supply cable is prepared. (*1)

*1) When the wireless footswitch (option) is used.

(b) Checks in the examination room

• Confirm that the cables are not cut, caught, bent, or twisted.
• Confirm that there is no object that may cause interference within the
operation ranges of the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor
suspension unit.
• Confirm that the TV monitor is fixed to the monitor suspension unit.
• Confirm that each unit is cleaned and sterilized.
• Confirm that there are no objects that may come into contact with the
footswitch in the surrounding area.
• Confirm that the battery of the wireless footswitch is charged. (*1)

*1) When the wireless footswitch (option) is used.

No. 2B308-309EN
232
(2) Checks after turning ON the power
(a) Checks in the control room

• Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or temperature

increase.
• Confirm that no error message is displayed on the system console
monitor.
• Confirm that communication with the patient in the examination room is
possible using the intercom microphone.

(b) Checks in the examination room

• Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or temperature

increase.
• Confirm that the tableside console is located at the registered position.
• Confirm that the current day and time display area of the system monitor
match the actual current day and time.
• Confirm that the green LED of the wireless footswitch lights. (*1)
• Confirm that the orange LED of the wireless footswitch does not light. (*1)
• Confirm that the red LED of the wireless footswitch does not light. (*1)

*1) When the wireless footswitch (option) is used.

(c) Checks for the Emergency stop function

This check must be performed with the system stopped.

• Confirm that the drive power of the support unit and catheterization table
is turned OFF when the Emergency stop button is pressed.
• In the emergency stop status, confirm that the drive power can be turned
ON using the Power reset button on the operating panel of the
catheterization table.

No. 2B308-309EN
233
(d) Checks for touch sensor operation

Check the following statuses while the touch sensor is being pressed.
Perform the check for each touch sensor. Also, check at least four positions
on each touch sensor. For the touch sensor locations, refer to subsection
4.7 "X-ray Tube Support Unit".

• Confirm that a warning sound is generated. (*1)

• Confirm that the FPD automatically moves to the far limit (only FPD touch
sensor).
• Confirm that all electrically powered operations for the support unit are
disabled.
• For the biplane system, confirm that all electrically powered operations for
the other support unit are also disabled.
• Confirm that vertical movement of the tabletop of the catheterization table
is possible in the direction away from contact (only FPD and X-ray beam
limiting device touch sensor).

*1) For the floor base rotation touch sensor, a warning sound is generated
when it is touched during C-arm operation.

(e) Operational checks

Confirm that there are no abnormal operations of the support unit,

catheterization table, and monitor suspension unit. Also, check the following
statuses.

• Confirm that operations are performed normally.

• Confirm that there are no abnormal sounds and unusual smells.
• Confirm that there is no play.
• Confirm that operations are smooth.

No. 2B308-309EN
234
(f) Check of X-ray exposure

Confirm that there are no abnormalities related to X-ray exposure. Also,

check the following statuses.

• Confirm that fluoroscopy can be performed (with an absorbing object

positioned on the catheterization table).
Start fluoroscopy using the fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room and
the examination room.
• Confirm that radiography can be performed (with an absorbing object
positioned on the catheterization table).
Start radiography using the X-ray exposure handswitch or footswitch.
• Confirm that the functions assigned to the function buttons of the
footswitch can be performed.
• Confirm that the X-ray tube ready icon is displayed on the system console
(system monitor) immediately after the radiography start operation is
performed until preparation for X-ray exposure is completed.
• Confirm that the X-ray ON icon is displayed on the reference monitor and
system console (system monitor) during X-ray generation.
• Confirm that an appropriate brightness is set by the ABC (automatic
brightness control) function.
• Confirm that the FOV size can be switched. (This should be checked
during fluoroscopy.)
• Confirm that no abnormal sound is generated during X-ray exposure
(such as a rotation sound from the X-ray tube assembly).
• Confirm that fluoroscopy can be stopped.
Stop fluoroscopy using the fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room and
the examination room.
• Confirm that radiography can be stopped.
Stop radiography using the X-ray exposure handswitch or footswitch.

(g) Checks before operation for the units to be used in combination

Perform checks before operation for the units to be used in combination with
this system, such as the injector (contrast medium injector), and confirm that
there are no abnormalities.
For the procedures for the checks before operation, refer to the operation
manual provided with each unit used in combination.

(h) Confirmation of image display on the monitors

Confirm that fluoroscopic images, radiographic images, and playback

images are displayed normally on the following monitors in the examination
room and control room.

• Fluoroscopic monitor
• Reference monitor
• Backup monitor (when a large-screen monitor is combined)

No. 2B308-309EN
235
7.2 Checks After Operation
Perform the following checks after operation to prepare for the next
examination.

(1) Checks before turning OFF the power

(a) Checks in the control room

• Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or system

damage.
• For systems in which an X-ray tube assembly with a liquid metal bearing
is used in combination, confirm that the support unit is set to the standard
position (LAO/RAO 0°, CRA/CAU 0°).

(b) Checks in the examination room

• Confirm that the cables are not cut, caught, bent, or twisted.
• Confirm that the TV monitor is fixed to the monitor suspension unit.

(2) Checks after turning OFF the power

(a) Checks in the control room

• Confirm that ambient temperature, atmospheric pressure, relative

humidity, and atmosphere meet the storage requirements.
• Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or system
damage.

(b) Checks in the examination room

• Confirm that the support unit, catheterization table, footswitch, and

monitor suspension unit are not be damaged.

(3) After performing checks

When the checks after operation have been completed, confirm that the
power supplies of the system and units used in combination are turned OFF.

Also, turn OFF the power switch of the power distribution board.

When the wireless footswitch (option) is used, use the supplied AC adaptor
to charge the footswitch battery.

No. 2B308-309EN
236
8. Turning the System Power ON/OFF
Contents 8.1 Turning the System Power ON
8.2 Turning the System Power OFF (System Shutdown)

No. 2B308-309EN
237
8.1 Turning the System Power ON
<1> Turn ON the power switches of the power distribution boards of the
examination room and the control room.

<2> Perform the required checks before operation (before turning the power
supply ON).

<3> Turn ON the power of the monitor.

<4> Press the Power ON button .

<5> After approximately 6 minutes, startup of the system is completed. The

Patient mode screen is displayed on the system console monitor.

Power ON switch box System console

Patient mode screen (example of display)

CAUTION: 1. Before starting the first study of the day or before resuming studies
after several hours has elapsed since the system power was turned
OFF, turn the system power ON and then wait for at least 30 minutes.
If a study is started before sufficient time has elapsed after turning ON
the power, artifacts may occur on images, possibly resulting in
incorrect diagnosis. If any artifacts occur, wait until the artifacts
disappear and then start a study.

2. After the power is turned ON, wait at least two minutes before
operating the switches. Failure to do so may generate an error. In
such a case, wait until startup processing is completed and then
restart the system (turning the power OFF and then ON).

No. 2B308-309EN
238
NOTICE: Except in emergencies, wait for approximately 20 seconds after the power
has been turned OFF before turning the power ON again. Failure to do so
may cause a system malfunction.

NOTE: 1. Approximately 2 minutes after the power is turned ON, backup fluoroscopy is
enabled.
For details of backup fluoroscopy, refer to subsection 5.7 "Backup
Fluoroscopy".

2. For systems whose patient personal information protection function has

been made available, the following screen is displayed on the system
console monitor when system startup is completed. In this case, log on to
the system with an authorized user ID and password. When logon is
successful, the Patient mode screen is displayed. For details, refer to
section 9 of the reference manual.

If the system is shut down without performing the standard examination

completion operation and then started up again, or if the system power is
turned OFF during an examination and then the system is started up again,
the logon screen is not displayed but the discontinued examination is
resumed automatically.

No. 2B308-309EN
239
8.2 Turning the System Power OFF (System Shutdown)
This subsection describes the normal shutdown procedures.

For the procedure for turning the system power OFF immediately in an
emergency, refer to subsection 5.2 "System Shutdown in Emergencies".

(1) Completing a study (Finish study)

Before turning OFF the system power, be sure to select Finish Study.
Otherwise, acquired data sets are not saved. For the Finish Study
procedures, refer to section 10.4 "Finish Study".

(2) System power OFF

<1> Click the Shutdown tab on the system console.

<2> Click the Shutdown button.

<3> The shutdown confirmation dialog box is displayed. To perform shutdown,

click the OK button. To cancel shutdown, click the Cancel button.

⇒ When the OK button is clicked, the system power is turned OFF after
approximately 1 minute and 30 seconds.

(3) Turning OFF the breaker on the power distribution board

After the system is shut down, turn OFF the breaker for the system on the
power distribution board.

No. 2B308-309EN
240
WARNING: 1. If the power is turned OFF using the Power OFF button for emergency
stop, the image data that is being processed may not be saved.

2. Do not turn OFF the main power switch on the power distribution board
while system shutdown processing is being performed. If the button is
turned OFF during shutdown processing, data may be lost.

NOTICE: 1. Do not turn OFF the system power until the used heat storage capacity of
the X-ray tube anode decreases to 30%. If the system power is turned OFF
while the used heat storage capacity of the X-ray tube anode is still high, the
X-ray tube assembly may malfunction.

2. If the power is turned OFF repeatedly using the Power OFF button for
emergency stop, the system may malfunction.

3. If the following operation(s) are performed, the X-ray tube may malfunction
or its service life may be shortened.

• System shutdown operation and system power ON operation are performed

repeatedly in a short time.

• The Power OFF button for emergency stop is used frequently.

• The Power OFF button for emergency stop is pressed during the period from
when the system power is turned ON to when system startup is completed.

• The main power switch on the power distribution board is turned OFF while
system shutdown processing is being performed.

• The support unit is not at the standard position (LAO/RAO 0°, CRA/CAU 0°)
when the system power is turned OFF. Before shutting down the system, set
the support unit to the standard position.

No. 2B308-309EN
241
NOTE: 1. If shutdown processing is performed while a study is in progress, the
following message is displayed. When the OK button is clicked, the study is
aborted and the power of the system is turned OFF.
To terminate the study normally, click the Cancel button, terminate the study
in Patient mode (Finish Study), and then shut down the system.

2. If the system power is turned OFF due to a power failure, reboot the system
by performing the standard system power ON procedures after the power is
recovered.
To reboot the system, perform the normal Power ON operation.
If a power failure occurs while image acquisition or data transfer is in
progress, image acquisition or data transfer may not be completed normally.
Therefore, check the acquired images or transferred data. If the check
reveals that a process is not completed normally, acquire images or transfer
data again.
Note that the power requirements of the system are extremely high;
therefore, the system cannot be used with a standalone power generator.

3. If the system is shut down or the power supply to the system is interrupted
due to a power failure during an examination and the system is then started
up again, the discontinued examination is resumed automatically.

No. 2B308-309EN
242
9. Operating Procedures for Units in
the Examination Room
This section describes the operating procedures for the units included in the
system configuration in the examination room.

For the operating procedures for optional units and units manufactured by
companies other than Canon Medical Systems, refer to the operation
manual supplied with each applicable unit.

Contents 9.1 Operating Procedures for the Support Unit

9.2 Operating Procedures for the Catheterization Table
9.3 Auto-Positioning
9.4 Auto-Angle/Auto-Mapping Functions
9.5 Switching the System (Biplane System)
9.6 Operating the Large Screen Monitor (Option)
9.7 Operating the Tablet Console (Option)

No. 2B308-309EN
243
WARNING: 1. Before starting operation, move objects present in the "operating
ranges when the system is used normally" outside the ranges. These
ranges are specified in the following figures. If any objects required for
examination must be located within the ranges, special care is required
so that they do not interfere with the system.

2. Do not enter the area where the clearance between the C-arm and the
floor becomes small (shaded section in the figure below). Your feet
may be caught between the C-arm and the floor.
Do not place any objects (such as the footswitch) on the floor in this
area.

<Operating range when the C-arm support unit and the catheterization
table are used>

<Operating range when the Ω-arm support unit and the catheterization
table are used>

No. 2B308-309EN
244
WARNING: 3. Before rotating the floor base, confirm that all persons other than the
patient are outside the movement range of the support unit. Otherwise,
their feet may be caught between the floor and the floor base, resulting
in personal injury.

4. Before rotating the floor base, move all cords outside the movement
range of the support unit. Otherwise, the cords may be caught
between the floor and the floor base and damaged, possibly resulting
in an accident such as an electrical shock or system malfunction.

5. Be careful to prevent hands from being caught in moving sections of

the support unit or catheterization table. In particular, special care
must be taken to ensure that hands are not caught between the FPD
and the FPD support section cover or between the C-arm and the C-
arm support section.

6. Be careful to prevent feet from being caught between the C-arm and
the floor base rotation section. If the support unit is moved when
someone is stepping over the C-arm or floor base rotation section or
when someone is stepping on the floor-base rotation section, their feet
may be caught.

Example of unsafe action <1> Example of unsafe action <2>

Example of unsafe action <3>

No. 2B308-309EN
245
NOTE: The display angle of the image displayed on the monitor is automatically
adjusted so that the direction toward the end of the catheterization table is
always at the top. The display angle does not change even when the
support arm rotation angle of the C-arm support unit or the FPD rotation
angle is changed.

[Canceling the automatic adjustment function]

The automatic adjustment function for the display angle is canceled in the
following cases.

• When the FPD touch sensor has detected contact

• When manual rotation operation is performed for the FPD (the X-ray
exposure field adjustment lever on the tableside console is rotated)

[Restoring the automatic adjustment function]

The automatic adjustment function is restored by performing either of the

following operations.

• When the X-ray exposure field adjustment lever on the table side console is
pressed

• When the system is restarted

No. 2B308-309EN
246
9.1 Operating Procedures for the Support Unit

WARNING: 1. X-ray generation is possible whenever the support unit is not at the
park position. Be extremely careful not to perform X-ray exposure
inadvertently.

2. Releasing the X-ray exposure disable mode makes it possible to

generate X-rays even when the support unit is located at the park
position. Therefore, take special care to prevent inadvertent X-ray
exposure.

3. For biplane systems, be extremely careful to prevent persons from

being caught between the C-arm and the Ω-arm. In particular, note that
the space between the C-arm and the Ω-arm is narrow if the system is
installed in a small examination room even when the Ω-arm is retracted
to the park position.

NOTE: If the tableside console is not mounted on the accessory mounting rail of the
catheterization table, the support unit cannot be operated. Mount the
tableside console on the rail.

The procedures for operating the support unit are described here.

 Names of the support unit set positions

 Rotating and sliding the C-arm/Ω-arm

 FPD near/away movement

 Floor base rotation of the C-arm

 Support column rotation of the C-arm

 Longitudinal/Lateral travel of the C-arm

 Ω-arm ceiling travel

 Up/Down movement of the Ω-arm

 Manual operation for FPD rotation

 Rotation and opening/closing of the compensation filter

 Opening/Closing the blades of the X-ray beam limiting device

(X-ray exposure field adjustment)

 Changing the FOV size

 Mounting/removing the X-ray grid

No. 2B308-309EN
247
  Names of the support unit set positions
Typical set positions of the support unit are shown below.

<1> C-arm support unit set position names and the positions

Name Position
C-arm set position Column rotation angle : 0°
Floor base rotation angle : 0°
C-arm park position Column rotation angle : +90° or -90°
(factory setting) Floor base rotation angle : 0°
C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
C-arm standard status C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
C-arm standard status Column rotation angle : 0° (C-arm set position)
(C-arm is set at the Floor base rotation angle : 0°
patient head end)
C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
Standard position when Column rotation angle : 0° (C-arm set position)
the C-arm is set at the Floor base rotation angle : -90°
patient right side
C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
Standard position when Column rotation angle : 0° (C-arm set position)
the C-arm is set at the Floor base rotation angle : 90°
patient left side
C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
Single-plane set This refers to the set status in which the C-arm support unit is used
(SP set) alone after the Ω-arm support unit is retracted.

<2> Ω-arm set position names and the positions

Name Position
Ω-arm set position Ceiling lateral/longitudinal positions : 0 cm
X-ray beam vertical movement position : 0 cm
Ω-arm park position Ω-arm support unit retraction position
Ceiling longitudinal position : -220 cm (at the time of
shipment of the system)
Ceiling lateral movement position : 0 cm
Ω-arm standard status Ceiling lateral/longitudinal positions : 0 cm (Ω-arm set position)
Ω-arm sliding angle : LAO = 90°
Ω-arm rotation angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
X-ray beam vertical movement position : 0 cm
LL orientation A position in which the FPD is located on the left side of the patient.
RL orientation A position in which the FPD is located on the right side of the patient.

No. 2B308-309EN
248
 <3> System set position names and positions in the biplane status

Name Position
Biplane isocenter Point where the isocenter of the C-arm coincides with that of the Ω-arm.
Isocenter permissible Ω-arm ceiling lateral movement position : -10 cm to 10 cm
range
Ω-arm ceiling longitudinal movement position : -10 cm to 10 cm
Biplane standard status C-arm : C-arm standard status
Ω-arm : Ω-arm standard status
Interference area Area in which the C-arm may interfere with the Ω-arm within the
isocenter permissible range.
Biplane set (BP set) This refers to the set status in which the C-arm support unit is used in
combination with the Ω-arm support unit.

 Rotating and sliding the C-arm/Ω-arm

<1> For the biplane system, select an arm to be operated.

• To select the C-arm

Press the C-arm operation selection button and confirm that this button lights.

• To select the Ω-arm

Press the Ω-arm operation selection button and confirm that this button lights.

• When the C-arm and the Ω-arm are used together (synchronized operation)
Press the C-arm operation selection button and the Ω-arm operation
selection button simultaneously and confirm that both buttons light.

<2> While holding down the arm/tabletop operation start lever, tilt the arm
rotation/sliding lever in the direction in which the arm is to be tilted.

No. 2B308-309EN
249
  FPD near/away movement

(1) Operation from the tableside console

<1> For the biplane system, select the FPD of the C-arm or that of the Ω-arm.

For the selection procedure, refer to " Rotating and sliding the C-arm/
Ω-arm".

<2> While holding down the arm/tabletop operation start lever, tilt the FPD
near/away movement button in the direction in which the FPD is to be moved.

NOTE: When the FPD mounted to the Ω-arm is the 12-inch FPD, FPD near/away
movement of the Ω-arm is paused at the SID 1200 mm position. To further
increase the SID, stop operation once and then perform the operation
described in step <2> again. For SIDs from 1201 mm to 1330 mm, the FPD
rotation angle is returned and fixed to 0°. Note that image rotation correction
synchronized with Ω-arm rotation is not performed.

(2) Operation from the FPD main unit

FPD near/away
movement switch

<1> Operation is also possible using the FPD near/away movement switches of
the FPD main unit.

Up (away) : Press the ▲ switch.

Down (near) : Press the ▼ switch.

No. 2B308-309EN
250
 Floor base rotation of the C-arm

(1) Operation from the tableside console

<1> For the biplane system, press the C-arm operation selection button and
confirm that this button lights.

<2> Press the operation selection button and confirm that this button lights.
Operation from the tableside console is cancelled if no operation is
performed for 7 seconds. Perform the next operation within 7 seconds.

<3> While holding down the arm/tabletop operation start lever, tilt the FPD
near/away movement button in the direction in which the C-arm is to be
moved.

When the lever of the button is tilted away from you, counterclockwise floor
base rotation is performed.
When the lever of the button is tilted toward you, clockwise floor base
rotation is performed.

No. 2B308-309EN
251
 (2) Operation using the buttons at the rear of the C-arm

Clockwise
rotation

Counterclockwise
rotation

Floor base rotation button Floor base rotation button

(for clockwise rotation) (for counterclockwise rotation)

<1> Press the floor base rotation button corresponding to the desired direction of
rotation.

Press the button to start floor base rotation and release it at the desired
position where rotation is to be stopped.

 Support column rotation of the C-arm

Support column rotation button

(for clockwise rotation)

Support column rotation button

(for counterclockwise rotation)

Clockwise
rotation
Counterclockwise
rotation

<1> Press the support column rotation button corresponding to the desired
direction of rotation.

Press the button to start support column rotation and release it at the desired
position where rotation is to be stopped.

No. 2B308-309EN
252
 Longitudinal/Lateral travel of the C-arm
Lateral travel of the C-arm is possible when the floor base rotation angle is
between +45° and -45°.
Longitudinal travel of the C-arm is possible when the floor base rotation
angle is not between +45° and -45°.

<1> For the biplane system, move the Ω-arm to the Ω-arm park position.

<2> For the biplane system, press the C-arm operation selection button and
confirm that this button lights.

<3> Press the operation selection button and confirm that this button lights.
Operation from the tableside console is cancelled if no operation is
performed for 7 seconds. Perform the next operation within 7 seconds.

<4> While holding down the arm/tabletop operation start lever, tilt the arm
rotation/sliding lever in the direction in which the C-arm is to be moved.

No. 2B308-309EN
253
 Ω-arm ceiling travel

<1> For the biplane system, press the Ω-arm operation selection button and
confirm that this button lights.

<2> Press the operation selection button and confirm that this button lights.
Operation from the tableside console is cancelled if no operation is
performed for 7 seconds. Perform the next operation within 7 seconds.

<3> While holding down the arm/tabletop operation start lever, tilt the arm
rotation/sliding lever in the direction in which the Ω-arm is to be moved.

No. 2B308-309EN
254
 Up/Down movement of the Ω-arm

<1> For the biplane system, press the Ω-arm operation selection button and
confirm that this button lights.

<2> Press the operation selection button and confirm that this button lights.
Operation from the tableside console is cancelled if no operation is
performed for 7 seconds. Perform the next operation within 7 seconds.

<3> While holding down the arm/tabletop operation start lever, tilt the FPD
near/away movement button in the direction in which the Ω-arm is to be
moved.

When the lever of the button is tilted away from you, up movement is
performed.
When the lever of the button is tilted toward you, down movement is
performed.

No. 2B308-309EN
255
 Manual operation for FPD rotation
The FPD can be rotated in the desired direction. The X-ray beam limiting
device is automatically rotated to match FPD rotation.

Note, however, that in normal operation the FPD is rotated automatically to

ensure the FPD set angle related to the patient. Therefore, the image
displayed on the monitor is not rotated, regardless of the C-arm angle setting
relative to the patient.

If the FPD used in combination is 12 × 16-inch FPD, the FPD set position
can also be changed.

(1) Manual operation for FPD rotation

<1> Turn the lever to the left or right.

<2> To return to the initial angle, press down on the lever.

(2) Switching the set position of the 12 × 16-inch FPD

The set position of the FPD can be switched between portrait or landscape.

Portrait Position where the longer sides of the FPD are parallel to the
patient axis
Landscape Position where the shorter sides of the FPD are parallel to
the patient axis

<1> Press the lever for 1 second or more.

No. 2B308-309EN
256
 Rotation and opening/closing of the compensation filter
In order to compensate for significant differences in X-ray density, apply
compensation filters over areas where the X-ray absorption factor is low.
The type of compensation filter differs according to the system, as shown in
the table below.

• SP Cardiac system Filters for children/adults (two)

• BP Cardiac system
• SP Vascular system Heart/straight-type filters (two) and central
• BP Vascular system compensation filter (one)

Central compensation filter operating lever

Left compensation filter Right compensation filter
operating lever operating lever

Ω-arm operation selection button

C-arm operation selection button

<1> The left, right, and central compensation filters can be opened/closed or
rotated independently.

(a) Opening/Closing : Tilt the lever laterally.

(b) Rotation : Tilt the lever vertically.

No. 2B308-309EN
257
NOTE: 1. The compensation filters can also be opened/closed or rotated using the
Compensation filter operating levers on the main console. Note that the
central compensation filter operating lever is at a different position.

2. The left and right compensation filters can be used for two different purposes
by interchanging their positions. For the procedure for interchanging the
compensation filters, refer to subsection 11.6.9 "Function setting".

3. For the biplane system, the compensation filters of the support unit used in
fluoroscopy/radiography are selected automatically. It is not necessary to
select the compensation filters on the support unit.

4. For the biplane system, it is possible to select the compensation filters to be

operated. Press the C-arm operation selection button or the Ω-arm
operation selection button to select the compensation filters for the C-arm or
Ω-arm. The selected button lights.

5. For the biplane system, the compensation filters for both the C-arm and
Ω-arm can be operated simultaneously (synchronized operation). Press the
C-arm operation selection button and the Ω-arm operation selection button
simultaneously and confirm that both buttons light.

No. 2B308-309EN
258
  Opening/Closing the blades of the X-ray beam limiting device
(X-ray exposure field adjustment)
Normally, the X-ray beam limiting device blades are opened/closed
automatically by the auto collimation function, resulting in the X-ray exposure
field being set automatically. This subsection describes the manual
operation method.

<1> Use the X-ray exposure field adjustment lever to open/close the blades of
the X-ray beam limiting device.

(a) Adjustment in the lateral direction : Tilt the lever left/right.

(b) Adjustment in the vertical direction : Tilt the lever toward you/away from
you.

NOTE: 1. The X-ray exposure field can also be adjusted using the X-ray exposure field
adjustment lever on the main console.

2. If the X-ray beam limiting device blades are operated manually, the auto
collimation function is automatically set to OFF. When the X-ray exposure
field size is adjusted to the FPD size by manual operation, manual operation
mode is automatically switched to auto-collimation mode.

3. If the beam limiting device blades cannot be operated, press the Emergency
stop button followed by the power reset button to release the error. For
details of the procedures and the locations of the Emergency stop button
and the power reset button, refer to subsection 5.1 "Emergency Stop".

4. For the biplane system, the beam limiting device of the support unit used for
fluoroscopy/radiography is selected automatically. It is not necessary to
select the beam limiting device on the support unit.

5. For the biplane system, it is possible to select the beam limiting device to be
operated. Use the C-arm operation selection button or the Ω-arm operation
selection button to select the beam limiting device for the C-arm or Ω-arm.
The selected button lights.

No. 2B308-309EN
259
  Changing the FOV size
The fluoroscopic (radiographic) image can be magnified or reduced by
changing the FOV size.

<1> The FOV size of the FPDs on the C-arm and Ω-arm can be changed
separately using the corresponding FOV size selection button. It is not
necessary to select the C-arm/Ω-arm operation selection button.

• To magnify the image (to reduce the FOV size)

Press the "+" mark on the button.

• To reduce the image (to increase the FOV size)

Press the "−" mark on the button.

NOTE: 1. The FOV size can also be changed using the FOV size selection button on
the main console.

2. When the live zoom magnification ratio is set to 1.0, if operation is attempted
to further reduce the minimum FOV size, the live zoom magnification ratio is
switched by two steps and the image is magnified by two steps. Note that
the FOV value is calculated using the FOV size and the magnification ratio
for live zoom at that time and displayed on the monitor (*1).

Example: 8-inch FPD

FOV switch 20 cm → 17 cm → 15 cm → 12 cm → 12 cm → 12 cm →
(8 inches) (7 inches) (6 inches) (5 inches) (5 inches) (5 inches)
Magnification 1.0 → 1.0 → 1.0 → 1.0 → 1.2 (*2) 1.4 (*2)
ratio for live (automatically (automatically
zoom switched) switched)
FOV display 20 cm 17 cm 15 cm 12 cm 10 cm (*3) 9 cm (*3)
(8 inches) (7 inches) (6 inches) (5 inches) (4.2 inches) (3.6 inches)

Return

*1) On the Acquisition tab on the system monitor, the FOV size and the
magnification ratio for live zoom are displayed separately.
*2) For systems with the 12-inch FPD or 12 × 16-inch FPD, the magnification
ratio is switched to 1.4 and 1.8, in that order.
*3) The information transferred to DICOM is the actual FOV size.

No. 2B308-309EN
260
NOTE: 3. When FPD TFP-1200C/A1 or TFP-1200C/A2 is used in combination, the
FOV can be selected from among a total of 7 sizes (4 standard FOVs and 3
high-resolution FOVs) as shown in the table below. In addition, changing the
mode allows you to select an FOV from only the standard FOV range or the
high-resolution FOV range, as shown in the table below.
When the mode is deselected, the FOV can be selected from all 7 sizes.

Mode
FOV
(image field size) High-resolution
Deselected Standard FOV
FOV
12 inches

Standard 10 inches
FOV 8 inches
6 inches
3.0 inches
High-
resolution 2.3 inches
FOV
1.5 inches

The mode can be changed with the function button on the tableside console
or the footswitch. Press the function button to which the standard FOV/high-
resolution FOV selection function has been assigned to change the mode.
Each time the function button is pressed, the mode changes in the following
order (cyclically).

Standard FOV → High-resolution FOV → Cancel mode selection

(deselected)

For details concerning the function change, refer to subsection 2.2

"Functions of the Function Buttons" of the reference manual.

4. To execute the live zoom function when FPD TFP-1200C/A1 or TFP-

1200C/A2 is used in combination, it is necessary to switch to a standard
FOV size in advance.

No. 2B308-309EN
261
 ■ Mounting/removing the X-ray grid (option)

The X-ray grid can be mounted or removed as required.

CAUTION: 1. Do not allow liquid such as water or an object such as a pin or clip to
enter the X-ray grid insertion port. Doing so may result in a fire,
electric shock, or malfunction of the unit. In addition, the liquid or
object may appear on acquired images. If liquid or an object enters the
grid insertion port, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative immediately.

2. Confirm that the X-ray grid is securely mounted before starting the
examination. If the X-ray grid is not securely mounted, it may fall out,
causing personal injury.

3. Be sure to insert the X-ray grid horizontally. If the grid is inserted at an

angle, the touch sensor may be actuated or the FPD may be moved.

4. For 3D-DSA or AlphaCT, the X-ray grid must be used if it was used
during image acquisition for calibration and must not be used if it was
not used. Otherwise, errors or artifacts may occur in the 3D
reconstruction results (3D image).

5. Handle the X-ray grid with extreme care. If the X-ray grid is scratched
or deformed, both fluoroscopic and radiographic images may be
affected. Pay particular attention to the following points.

• Do not subject the X-ray grid to physical shock. Be extremely careful

not to allow the X-ray grid to fall when mounting it or removing it.
• Do not place any objects on the X-ray grid.
• Do not allow liquid or contrast medium to come in contact with the
X-ray grid. If there is any liquid or contrast medium on the grid,
immediately wipe it off with a clean soft cloth.

(1) Checking whether the X-ray grid is mounted

Whether the X-ray grid is mounted can be checked in the grid mounting
confirmation window.

• When the window is white () : The X-ray grid is mounted properly.
• When the window is black () : The X-ray grid is not mounted properly or is
not used.

(2) Mounting the X-ray grid

<1> Insert the X-ray grid into the grid insertion port. The grid must be inserted in
the direction indicated by the arrow labels on it (refer to the figure below).

<2> Push the X-ray grid horizontally.

<3> Confirm that the grid mounting confirmation window is white (). If it is
black (), the X-ray grid is not mounted properly. Push the X-ray grid all the
way into the grid insertion port.

No. 2B308-309EN
262
(3) Removing the X-ray grid
<1> Press the grid eject button.

<2> Pull out the X-ray grid horizontally from the grid insertion port, taking care not
to drop it.

No. 2B308-309EN
263
9.2 Operating Procedures for the Catheterization Table
9.2.1 Operating procedures for the CAT-850B

CAUTION: Confirm that there are no objects that may interfere with the tabletop
within the movement range of the tabletop. Note that the lower section
of the tabletop is obstructed from view.

NOTE: The tabletop can be operated using the tabletop control console (option).
For the operating procedures, refer to (4) "Tabletop operation using the
tabletop control console".

(1) Tabletop vertical movement

<1> Hold down the Arm/tabletop

operation start leve r.
<2> Tilt the Tabletop vertical movement
button toward the desired tabletop
vertical movement direction.

NOTICE: If the sound of braking is heard frequently when stopping vertical movement
of the tabletop of the catheterization table, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative for adjustment. The stop position may have shifted
(for example, due to the abrasion of parts), actuating automatic braking.
Note, however, that it is not abnormal to hear the sound of braking when the
power is turned OFF.

No. 2B308-309EN
264
 (2) Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement
<1> Select the sliding direction of the tabletop.
The tabletop can be slid in both the longitudinal and lateral directions. To
restrict sliding to the lateral direction, set the tabletop lateral movement lock
button to ON (lit).

Tabletop lateral movement lock button

<2> Slide the tabletop.

Push the tabletop while holding down the tabletop longitudinal/lateral brake
release lever.
To lock the tabletop, stop the tabletop and then release the tabletop
longitudinal/lateral brake release lever.

Tabletop
longitudinal/lateral
brake release lever

NOTE: Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement can be performed using the tabletop

control switch (option).
Press and hold down the tabletop control switch and push the tabletop in the
desired movement direction. The tabletop brake is released while the
tabletop control switch is held down, enabling the tabletop to move freely.
To engage the tabletop brake, release the tabletop control switch after the
tabletop is stopped.

Tabletop control switch

No. 2B308-309EN
265
 (3) Tabletop rotation

CAUTION: Do not touch the tabletop control switch (option) when the tabletop is
being rotated. If the tabletop control switch is pressed unintentionally,
the tabletop will slide in the longitudinal and lateral directions when the
tabletop is rotated, possibly causing an accident.

Tabletop control switch

<1> If tabletop rotation is locked, release tabletop rotation. Pull out the tabletop
locking shaft on the side of the table until the rotation release indicator (red)
is visible.

<2> Release the tabletop rotation brake.

Press the tabletop rotation brake release button . The button lights and
the tabletop rotation brake is released.

Tabletop rotation center position display

Tabletop rotation brake release button

No. 2B308-309EN
266
 <3> Rotate the tabletop.

Push the tabletop slowly. The tabletop rotation center position display
lights when the tabletop is rotated to the 0° or 180° position. Stop the
tabletop at the desired position.

After the tabletop has come to a complete stop, press the tabletop rotation
brake release button (the button is lit). The brake operates to secure
the tabletop (the button goes out).
Note that when a period of 10 seconds elapses after the brake is released,
the brake is automatically actuated and the tabletop is immobilized.

<4> Secure the tabletop.

To secure the tabletop, stop the tabletop and then press the tabletop rotation
brake release button . The button goes out.

Note that when a period of 10 seconds elapses after the brake is released,
the brake is automatically actuated and the tabletop is immobilized.

<5> Tabletop rotation can be securely locked at the 0° position using the tabletop
locking shaft. When it is necessary to prevent unexpected tabletop rotation,
such as during patient transfer, push the tabletop locking shaft into the table
until the rotation release indicator (red) is not visible.

NOTE: The tabletop locking shaft cannot be pushed when the tabletop is not at the
0° position. Be sure to set the tabletop at the 0° position.

No. 2B308-309EN
267
 (4) Tabletop operation using the tabletop control console

NOTICE: 1. Do not press the buttons on the tabletop control console strongly. If
excessive force is used, the console may be disengaged from the
catheterization table and sustain damage.

2. Do not pull the cable of the tabletop control console. If strong force is
applied to the cable, the cable connectors of the tabletop control console and
catheterization table may be damaged.

(4.1) Tabletop up/down movement operation

The tabletop movement control section is designed so that the tabletop

upward/downward operation simulates manual tabletop upward/downward
movement.

[Moving the tabletop upward]

Press the tabletop UP movement button at the rear of the tabletop control
console.

[Moving the tabletop downward]

Press the tabletop DOWN movement button at the front of the tabletop
control console.

No. 2B308-309EN
268
(4.2) Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement operation

The tabletop of the catheterization table can be moved in the longitudinal

and lateral directions simultaneously. It is also possible to move the tabletop
in the longitudinal direction only by locking movement in the lateral direction.

1. Selecting the movement direction

<1> When the tabletop is to be moved in both of the longitudinal and lateral
directions

Confirm that the tabletop lateral movement lock button is not lit. If the button
is lit, press the button so that it is not lit.

<2> When the tabletop is to be moved in the longitudinal direction only

Confirm that the tabletop lateral movement lock button is lit. If the button is
not lit, press the button so that it is lit.

2. Moving the tabletop

<1> Hold down the tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement brake release switch.

<2> Manually move the tabletop while holding down the tabletop
longitudinal/lateral movement brake release switch.

<3> To lock tabletop movement, stop tabletop movement and then release the
tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement brake release switch.

Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement

brake release switch

No. 2B308-309EN
269
 (4.3) Tabletop rotation operation

The tabletop of the catheterization table can be rotated.

CAUTION: When rotating the tabletop, be careful not to touch the tabletop control
console. If the tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement brake release
switch is pressed unintentionally, the tabletop may move in the
longitudinal and lateral directions simultaneously while the tabletop is
rotating.

<1> Release the brake for tabletop rotation.

Press the tabletop rotation brake release button and confirm that the button
is lit.

<2> Rotate the tabletop.

Manually move the tabletop carefully. The tabletop rotation center position
indicator lights when the tabletop rotation angle is 0° or 180°.

<3> To lock tabletop movement, stop tabletop movement and then press the
tabletop rotation brake release button. The button goes out and tabletop
movement is locked. About ten seconds after the brake is released, the
brake engages automatically and tabletop movement is locked.

No. 2B308-309EN
270
9.2.2 Operating procedures for the CAT-880B

WARNING: When the catheterization table is being tilted, always visually confirm
that the tilting direction is correct. If incorrect operation is performed
and the tabletop tilts in the wrong direction, the patient may fall off the
tabletop.

CAUTION: 1. Confirm that there are no objects that may interfere with the tabletop
within the movement range of the tabletop. Pay particular attention to
the area under the tabletop because it is a blind spot.

2. If tabletop lateral movement cannot be performed manually, check

whether the tabletop tilt angle is set to a value other than 0°. Set the
tabletop tilt angle to 0° and then retry.
Even if the tabletop tilt angle is set to 0° when the system power is
turned OFF, the tilt angle of the tabletop may shift under its own weight
and therefore not be set to 0° when the system power is turned ON the
next time.

NOTE: For the tabletop movement directions and locations of the switches on the
tabletop operating box, refer to subsection 4.8.2 "Catheterization table
(CAT-880B)".

(1) Tabletop up/down movement

While the tabletop up movement touch switch is pressed, the tabletop moves
upward until it reaches the upper limit. While the tabletop down movement
touch switch is pressed, the tabletop moves downward until it reaches the
lower limit.

(2) Tabletop longitudinal movement

The operating procedure for tabletop longitudinal movement differs
depending on the tabletop tilt angle.

(2.1) When the tabletop is in the horizontal position (manual operation)

Move the tabletop manually. If tabletop longitudinal movement is locked and

manual operation is not possible, release the lock referring to step (2.3)
"Locking tabletop longitudinal movement".

<1> Press the tabletop lateral movement lock button of the tabletop operating
box and confirm that the button lights.

<2> Hold down the tabletop operating knob of the tabletop operating box and
manually move the tabletop in the desired direction.

NOTE: When the tabletop is in the horizontal position, it is also possible to move the
tabletop in the longitudinal and lateral directions at the same time. For the
operating procedure, refer to step (3) "Tabletop lateral movement".

No. 2B308-309EN
271
 (2.2) When the tabletop is not in the horizontal position (motor-driven
movement)

While the tabletop forward movement button is held down, the tabletop
moves forward until it reaches the forward limit. While the tabletop backward
movement button is held down, the tabletop moves backward until it reaches
the backward limit.

(2.3) Locking tabletop longitudinal movement (locking manual operation)

When the tabletop is in the horizontal position, it is possible to lock tabletop

longitudinal movement (manual operation). Press the tabletop forward and
backward movement buttons simultaneously to lock tabletop longitudinal
movement. Pressing these buttons simultaneously again releases the
tabletop longitudinal movement lock. These buttons blink while tabletop
longitudinal movement is locked.

(3) Tabletop lateral movement

Tabletop lateral movement can be performed manually. If the tabletop is in
the horizontal position, tabletop longitudinal movement can also be
performed. To fix the tabletop longitudinal movement position, refer to step
(2.3) "Locking tabletop longitudinal movement".

<1> Press the tabletop lateral movement lock button of the tabletop operating
box and confirm that the button goes out.

<2> Hold down the tabletop operating knob of the tabletop operating box and
manually move the tabletop in the desired direction.

(4) Tabletop rotation

CAUTION: When rotating the tabletop of the catheterization table CAT-880B, pay
attention to the following points.

(a) Be sure not to touch the tabletop operating knob while the tabletop is
rotating. If the operating knob is pressed during tabletop rotation,
there is a risk of the tabletop moving in the longitudinal and/or lateral
directions while it is rotating.

(b) When the tabletop is rotated, the column base section is rotated
together with it. Be careful not to let your feet be caught between the
column base cover and the floor.

<1> Press the tabletop rotation brake release button of the tabletop operating box
and confirm that the button lights, indicating that the tabletop rotation brake
is released.

<2> Slowly rotate the tabletop. When the tabletop is at the 0° position, the
tabletop rotation center position display lights. To lock the tabletop at the
desired angle, rotate the tabletop to the desired angle and press the tabletop
rotation brake release button. Confirm that the button goes out, indicating
that the tabletop rotation brake is engaged.

Note that if tabletop rotation is not performed within 10 seconds after the
tabletop rotation brake release button is pressed, the tabletop rotation brake
is engaged automatically.

No. 2B308-309EN
272
 (5) Tabletop longitudinal tilting
There are two tabletop longitudinal tilting modes: independent longitudinal
tilting mode and harmonic tilting mode.

NOTE: When the tabletop rotation brake is released, tabletop longitudinal tilting
cannot be performed. Before performing tilting, confirm that tabletop rotation
is locked.

(5.1) Independent longitudinal tilting

Independent longitudinal tilting is the standard tabletop tilting mode in which

the tabletop is moved in the longitudinal tilting direction only.

<1> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.
<2> While holding down the release button, do one of the following:

• Tabletop end up : Press the tabletop end up button.

• Tabletop end down : Press the tabletop end down button.

(5.2) Harmonic tilting

In harmonic tilting mode, the tabletop is tilted while maintaining the position
of the ROI.

<1> Switch to harmonic tilting mode by pressing both the tabletop end up and
down buttons at the same time and holding them down for more than one
second.

<2> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.
<3> While holding down the release button, do one of the following:

• Tabletop end up : Press the tabletop end up button.

• Tabletop end down : Press the tabletop end down button.

NOTICE: In harmonic tilting mode, the tabletop is moved longitudinally and vertically
when longitudinal tilting is performed. Be careful to avoid contact between
the tabletop and peripheral equipment.

No. 2B308-309EN
273
NOTE: 1. To exit harmonic tilting mode, press both the tabletop end up and down
buttons at the same time and hold them down for more than one second.

2. In harmonic tilting mode, the tabletop tilt reset button on the operating box
blinks.

3. When the arm of the support unit is not positioned near the tabletop (i.e.,
only the catheterization table is in use), the axis of rotation for harmonic
tilting mode is set to a position 30 cm from the end of the tabletop. To
change the position of the axis of rotation, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.

4. To modify the system so that harmonic tilting mode is automatically selected

when the system is turned ON, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.

5. Harmonic tilting cannot be performed in the following cases:

• The tabletop is at the stroke limit of longitudinal, vertical, or longitudinal tilting

movement.

• An error has occurred.

(6) Tabletop lateral tilting

NOTE: When the tabletop rotation brake is released, tabletop tilting cannot be
performed. Before performing tilting, confirm that tabletop rotation is locked.

<1> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.

<2> While holding down the release button, do one of the following:

• Tabletop left up : Press the tabletop left up button.

• Tabletop right up : Press the tabletop right up button.

(7) Resetting tabletop tilting

The following procedure can be used to easily return the tilted tabletop to the
horizontal position (longitudinal angle 0°, lateral angle 0°).

NOTE: When either the longitudinal or lateral angle is not 0°, the tabletop tilt reset
button on the table operating box lights. When both angles are 0°, the reset
button goes out.

<1> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.

<2> While holding down the release button, hold down the reset button until the
tabletop returns to the horizontal position. When the tabletop is in the
horizontal position, the reset button goes out.

No. 2B308-309EN
274
9.3 Auto-Positioning
Up to 64 radiographic and fluoroscopic positions can be stored and
reproduced.

(1) Positions that can be stored

The system position (support unit position (*1) and catheterization table
position (*2)) can be stored and reproduced. In addition, the compensation
filter position, SID, FOV, and magnification ratio for live zoom can also be
stored.

*1) Rotation angles of the beam limiting device and the FPD on the C-arm that
have been manually changed are not stored.

*2) For systems with the CAT-880B used in combination, the tabletop lateral tilt
angle and tabletop longitudinal tilt angle can also be stored.

(2) Types of auto-positioning reproduction methods

The following two types of auto-positioning reproduction methods are
available: all-axes reproduction and anatomical-angle reproduction.
Anatomical angles can be reproduced for the floor-mounted C-arm support
unit CAS-880A.

(a) All-axes reproduction method

This method, which is the default setting, reproduces the stored system
positions.

(b) Anatomical-angle reproduction method (CAS-880A)

This method reproduces the stored anatomical angles (LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU).

The stored anatomical angles are reproduced regardless of the C-arm
insertion direction relative to the patient. Thus, if radiography is to be
performed at the same anatomical angle, it is not necessary to store the
corresponding system positions for each C-arm insertion position (floor-base
rotation angle, support column rotation angle).
This method is useful when it is necessary to vary the C-arm insertion
position according to the procedure but the anatomical angle must be
maintained.

• To switch from the all-axes reproduction method to the anatomical-angle

reproduction method, contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.
• Anatomical angles can be reproduced by using positioning button numbers
that can be set/changed.
• For biplane systems, anatomical angles can be reproduced for the C-arm
only. All stored angles can be reproduced for the Ω-arm.
• Anatomical angles cannot be reproduced if the support column rotation
angle is outside the range of +60° to -60°.
• For certain C-arm insertion directions relative to the patient or Ω-arm
position, the stored angle may not be reproduced.

CAUTION: When the anatomical-angle reproduction method is selected, start the

reproduction operation only after setting the C-arm to a position at
which radiography for the patient can be performed. If the C-arm is
located away from the patient, it may interfere with the patient,
operator, or peripheral units during movement to reproduce the set
position.

No. 2B308-309EN
275
 (3) Conditions and restrictions for auto-positioning
Auto-positioning operation is restricted depending on the system status and
the support unit position.

(3.1) A position cannot be reproduced in the following cases.

(a) The system is in Backup fluoroscopy mode.

(b) For the biplane system, the Ω-arm is set to the LL orientation (*2) when a
user-set position with the RL orientation (*1) is to be reproduced.

(c) For the biplane system, the Ω-arm is set to the RL orientation when a user-
set position with the LL orientation is to be reproduced.

(d) For the biplane system, switching between the RL orientation and the LL
orientation is required when the C-arm floor base rotation angle is not within
the range from +45° to -45°.

NOTE: For cases (c) and (d), reproduce the appropriate biplane standard status by
auto-positioning and then reproduce the desired position.
To reproduce the biplane standard statuses for the LL and RL orientations,
use the following auto-positioning Nos.

Biplane standard status for the LL orientation : No. 70

Biplane standard status for the RL orientation : No. 71

(3.2) A position cannot be stored in the following cases.

(a) The system is in Backup fluoroscopy mode.

(b) The system is in the interlocked status.

(c) The following cases apply when biplane positions are saved.

• The Ω-arm is not within the isocenter permissible range (*3).

• The C-arm support column rotation angle is not 0°.
• The floor base rotation angle is not within ±45° (*4).

*1) RL orientation: Ω-arm positions in which the FPD is set on the right side of
the patient

*2) LL orientation: Ω-arm positions in which the FPD is set on the left side of the
patient

*3) The point at which the C-arm and Ω-arm isocenters match is called the
biplane isocenter.
A certain range from this isocenter is called the isocenter permissible range.
For details, refer to subsection 9.5 "Switching the System (Biplane System)".

*4) To store a position in this status, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
276
 (4) Auto-Positioning No.
The positions can be stored by setting positioning Nos. and can be
reproduced by specifying desired auto-positioning Nos. The positions
corresponding to some positioning Nos. are fixed and cannot be changed.

NOTE: 1. The positions that can be registered and reproduced as auto-positioning

Nos. are used in common by all study protocols. To register a new position,
start a dummy study using any study protocol.

2. Reproduced position settings can be added or deleted for each positioning

No. For example, SID setting can be deleted or a new movement can be
added for a specific positioning No. To change a setting, contact your
Canon Medical Systems representative.
Note that changes may be restricted for some auto-positioning Nos.

3. For the biplane system, the standard FPD positions on the Ω-arm relative to
the patient have been set as follows. If the standard FPD positions have
been changed according to user preferences it may be necessary to
substitute "RL orientation" with "LL orientation" (or vice versa) in this manual
(e.g. if the FPD position has been changed to the left side of the patient in
BP Vascular systems, regard "RL orientation" below as "LL orientation").

• BP Cardiac system : FPD located at the left of the patient

(LL orientation)
• BP Vascular system : FPD located at the right of the patient
(RL orientation).

4. For the biplane system, the standard position and coordinate system setting
of the Ω-arm support column angle can be changed according to user
preferences. The Ω-arm position display during positioning is also changed
correspondingly. For details, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
277
 • Single-plane system

No. Stored position Remarks

0 C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the C-arm standard
Support column position.
rotation angle : 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm • The position can be reproduced even before
starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them is
performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding
support column rotation, floor
base rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is performed,
the SID remains unchanged.
1 to 72 C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The setting can be changed.
(*2) Floor base
• The position can be reproduced during a
rotation angle : 0° study.
Support column *1) The SID described on the left is
rotation angle : 0° reproduced when any of the following
SID (*1) : 110 cm movements is required. If none of them is
performed, the SID does not change.
FOV : Maximum
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding,
Tabletop height of the catheterization table: 101 cm
support column rotation,
floor base rotation
*2) For systems in which the 12 × 16-inch FPD
is installed, No. 50 and
No. 51 reproduce the positions specified
below.
50 FPD position : Portrait • The setting can be changed.
Position where the longer
• The FPD only is moved.
sides of the FPD are parallel
to the patient axis
51 FPD position : Landscape • The setting can be changed.
Position where the shorter
• The FPD only is moved.
sides of the FPD are parallel
to the patient axis

No. 2B308-309EN
278
No. Stored position Remarks
73 C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the standard position
Floor base when the C-arm is set on the patient left
rotation angle : 90° side.
Support column • The setting cannot be changed.
rotation angle : 0° • The position can be reproduced even before
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them is
performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is performed,
the SID remains unchanged.
74 C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the standard position
Floor base when the C-arm is set on the patient right
rotation angle : -90° side.
Support column • The setting cannot be changed.
rotation angle : 0° • The position can be reproduced even before
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them is
performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is performed,
the SID remains unchanged.

No. 2B308-309EN
279
No. Stored position Remarks
75 C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm is set at the lower limb on the
Floor base patient left side.
rotation angle : 120° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even before
rotation angle : -60° starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm *1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them is
performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is performed,
the SID remains unchanged.
76 C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the C-arm standard
Floor base position.
rotation angle : 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even before
rotation angle : 0° starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm *1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them is
performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is performed,
the SID remains unchanged.
77 Park position • The C-arm moves to the park position.
NOTE) Initial position • The setting cannot be changed.
C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU • The position can be reproduced even before
0° starting a study.
Floor base *1) The SID described on the left is
rotation angle : 0° reproduced when any of the following
Support column movements is required. If none of them is
rotation angle : -90° performed, the SID does not change.
SID (*1) : 124 cm • C-arm: Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
NOTE) The park position can be changed at
the time of system installation.
To change the position after the
system has been installed, contact
your Canon Medical Systems
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
280
 • Biplane system (BP Cardiac system)

No. Stored position Remarks

0 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle (*3) : 0° before starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm *1) The SID described on the left is
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° reproduced when any of the following
Rot. 0° movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
X-ray beam
up/down height : 0 cm • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
Ceiling position
rotation
(*4) : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) While in biplane status
*4) If the floor base rotation angle of the
C-arm is not between +45° and -45°,
the Ω-arm position in the ceiling
longitudinal/lateral directions is not
reproduced.
1 to 7 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The setting can be changed.
10 to 17 Floor base • The position can be reproduced during a
20 to 27 rotation angle : 0° study.
Support column *1) The SID described on the left is
rotation angle : 0° reproduced when any of the following
SID (*1) : 110 cm movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
FOV : Maximum
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
Lateral Ω-arm : Park position (*2)
column rotation, floor base
FOV : Maximum rotation
Tabletop height of the catheterization table: 101 cm • Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the LL orientation, the LL park
position is reproduced. When auto-
positioning starts with the Ω-arm in the
RL orientation, the RL park position is
reproduced.

No. 2B308-309EN
281
 No. Stored position Remarks
30 to 37 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The setting can be changed.
40 to 47 Floor base • The position can be reproduced during a
50 to 57 rotation angle : 0° study.
64, 65
Support column *1) The SID described on the left is
rotation angle : 0° reproduced when any of the following
SID (*1) : 110 cm movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
FOV : Maximum
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90°
column rotation, floor base
Rot. 0° (LL orientation)
rotation
X-ray beam
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
up/down height : 0 cm
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
SID (*1) : 110 cm
FOV : Maximum
Tabletop height of the catheterization table: 101 cm
60 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The biplane head end free space position
Floor base from the patient left side is reproduced.
rotation angle : 125° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle : 0° before starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm *1) The SID described on the left is
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° reproduced when any of the following
Rot. 0° (LL orientation) movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
X-ray beam
up/down height : 0 cm • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
rotation
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.

No. 2B308-309EN
282
No. Stored position Remarks
61 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The biplane head end free space position
Floor base from the patient right side is reproduced.
rotation angle : -125° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle : 0° before starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm *1) The SID described on the left is
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° reproduced when any of the following
Rot. 0° (LL orientation) movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
X-ray beam
up/down height : 0 cm • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm column rotation, floor base
rotation
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains unchanged.

62 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The biplane groin access position from
(*3) Floor base the patient left side head end is
rotation angle : 77° reproduced.
Support column • The Ω-arm ceiling longitudinal position
rotation angle : -20° moves to 35 cm from the isocenter.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm • The setting cannot be changed.
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° • The position can be reproduced even
Rot. 0° (LL orientation) before starting a study.
X-ray beam *1) The SID described on the left is
up/down height : 0 cm reproduced when any of the following
Ceiling position : Longitudinal 35 cm movements is required. If none of them
Lateral 0 cm is performed, the SID does not change.
SID (*2) : 132 cm • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) For systems that use the XGCO-820A,
it is recommended that the following
Frontal position be set instead.
• C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0°
• Floor base rotation angle : 68°
• Support column rotation angle : -19°
• SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm

No. 2B308-309EN
283
No. Stored position Remarks
63 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The biplane groin access position from
Floor base the patient left side foot end is
rotation angle : 123° reproduced.
Support column • The setting cannot be changed.
rotation angle : -20° • The position can be reproduced even
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm before starting a study.
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° *1) The SID described on the left is
Rot. 0° (LL orientation) reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
X-ray beam
is performed, the SID does not change.
up/down height : 0 cm
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
column rotation, floor base
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.

No. 2B308-309EN
284
No. Stored position Remarks
66 Frontal Park position • The C-arm moves to the park position on
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° the left side of the patient (*4).
Rot. 0° (LL orientation) • The Ω-arm switches to LL orientation.
X-ray beam When the Ω-arm is set to RL orientation
up/down height : 0 cm and this auto-positioning is performed,
the Ω-arm moves to the location between
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
the C-arm and the catheterization table or
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm moves to the rear of the C-arm (*3). The
Ω-arm switches from RL orientation to LL
orientation and then to the lateral position
shown on the left.
• When the Ω-arm sliding angle is near 35°,
Ω-arm movement stops automatically. To
resume movement, perform restart
operation.
• The setting cannot be changed.
• The position can be reproduced even
before starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) The default location for Ω-arm position
switching between RL and LL
orientation is between the C-arm and
the catheterization table. If sufficient
space is provided at the rear of the
C-arm, Ω-arm position switching can be
performed at the rear of the C-arm. For
details, contact your service
representative.
*4) For systems in which Ω-arm position
switching is performed at the location
between the C-arm and the
catheterization table. When switching
is performed at the rear of the C-arm,
the C-arm moves to the park position
after Ω-arm position switching has been
performed and the Ω-arm has been set
to the lateral position shown on the left.

No. 2B308-309EN
285
No. Stored position Remarks
67 Frontal Park position • The C-arm moves to the park position on
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° the left side of the patient (*4).
Rot. 0° (RL orientation) • The Ω-arm moves to the RL orientation.
X-ray beam When the Ω-arm is set to LL orientation
up/down height : 0 cm and this auto-positioning is performed,
the Ω-arm moves to the location between
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
the C-arm and the catheterization table or
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm moves to the rear of the C-arm (*3). The
Ω-arm switches from LL orientation to RL
orientation and then to the lateral position
shown on the left.
• When the Ω-arm sliding angle is near 35°,
Ω-arm movement stops automatically. To
resume movement, perform restart
operation.
• The setting cannot be changed.
• The position can be reproduced even
before starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) The default location for Ω-arm position
switching between RL and LL
orientation is between the C-arm and
the catheterization table. If sufficient
space is provided at the rear of the
C-arm, Ω-arm position switching can be
performed at the rear of the C-arm. For
details, contact your service
representative.
*4) For systems in which Ω-arm position
switching is performed at the location
between the C-arm and the
catheterization table. When switching
is performed at the rear of the C-arm,
the C-arm moves to the park position
after Ω-arm position switching has been
performed and the Ω-arm has been set
to the lateral position shown on the left.

No. 2B308-309EN
286
No. Stored position Remarks
70 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The biplane standard status is
Floor base reproduced.
rotation angle : 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle : 0° before starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm • When the Ω-arm is set to RL orientation
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° and this auto-positioning is performed,
Rot. 0° (LL orientation) the Ω-arm moves to the location between
X-ray beam the C-arm and the catheterization table or
up/down height : 0 cm moves to the rear of the C-arm (*3, *4).
The Ω-arm switches from RL orientation
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm to LL orientation and then to the lateral
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm position shown on the left. The C-arm
moves to the frontal position shown on
the left.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) The default location for Ω-arm position
switching between RL and LL
orientation is between the C-arm and
the catheterization table. If sufficient
space is provided at the rear of the
C-arm, Ω-arm position switching can be
performed at the rear of the C-arm. For
details, contact your service
representative.
*4) For systems in which Ω-arm position
switching is performed at the location
between the C-arm and the
catheterization table, the C-arm moves
to the park position and the Ω-arm
moves to the position switching location
and then performs position switching.

No. 2B308-309EN
287
No. Stored position Remarks
71 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the C-arm standard
Floor base position.
rotation angle : 0° • The Ω-arm moves to the RL orientation.
Support column • The setting cannot be changed.
rotation angle : 0°
• The position can be reproduced even
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm before starting a study.
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° • When the Ω-arm is set to LL orientation
Rot. 0° (RL orientation) and this auto-positioning is performed,
X-ray beam the Ω-arm moves to the location between
up/down height : 0 cm the C-arm and the catheterization table or
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm moves to the rear of the C-arm (*3, *4).
The Ω-arm switches from LL orientation
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm to RL orientation and then to the lateral
position shown on the left. The C-arm
moves to the frontal position shown on
the left.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) The default location for Ω-arm position
switching between RL and LL
orientation is between the C-arm and
the catheterization table. If sufficient
space is provided at the rear of the
C-arm, Ω-arm position switching can be
performed at the rear of the C-arm. For
details, contact your service
representative.
*4) For systems in which Ω-arm position
switching is performed at the location
between the C-arm and the
catheterization table, the C-arm moves
to the park position and the Ω-arm
moves to the position switching location
and then performs position switching.

No. 2B308-309EN
288
No. Stored position Remarks
72 Frontal C-arm angle : RAO 30° • The biplane LV position is reproduced.
CRA/CAU 0°
• The setting cannot be changed.
Floor base
• The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle : 0°
before starting a study.
Support column
*1) The SID described on the left is
rotation angle : 0°
reproduced when any of the following
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm movements is required. If none of them
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 60° is performed, the SID does not change.
Rot. 0° (LL orientation) • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
X-ray beam column rotation, floor base
up/down height : 0 cm rotation
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm • Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.

No. 2B308-309EN
289
No. Stored position Remarks
73 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the standard
Floor base position when the C-arm is set on the
rotation angle : 90° patient left side.
Support column • The Ω-arm moves to the park position.
rotation angle : 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm • The position can be reproduced even
Lateral Park position (*3) before starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the LL orientation, the LL park
position is reproduced. When auto-
positioning starts with the Ω-arm in the
RL orientation, the RL park position is
reproduced.

No. 2B308-309EN
290
No. Stored position Remarks
74 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the standard
Floor base position when the C-arm is set on the
rotation angle : -90° patient right side.
Support column • The Ω-arm moves to the park position.
rotation angle : 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm • The position can be reproduced even
Lateral Park position (*3) before starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the LL orientation, the LL park
position is reproduced. When auto-
positioning starts with the Ω-arm in the
RL orientation, the RL park position is
reproduced.

No. 2B308-309EN
291
No. Stored position Remarks
75 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm is set at the lower limb on the
Floor base patient left side.
rotation angle : 120° • The Ω-arm moves to the park position.
Support column • The setting cannot be changed.
rotation angle : -60°
• The position can be reproduced even
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm before starting a study.
Lateral Park position (*3) *1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the LL orientation, the LL park
position is reproduced. When auto-
positioning starts with the Ω-arm in the
RL orientation, the RL park position is
reproduced.

No. 2B308-309EN
292
No. Stored position Remarks
76 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the C-arm standard
Floor base position.
rotation angle : 0° • The Ω-arm moves to the park position.
Support column • The setting cannot be changed.
rotation angle : 0°
• The position can be reproduced even
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm before starting a study.
Lateral Park position (*3) *1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the LL orientation, the LL park
position is reproduced. When auto-
positioning starts with the Ω-arm in the
RL orientation, the RL park position is
reproduced.
77 Frontal Park position • The C-arm moves to the park position.
NOTE) Initial position • The Ω-arm moves to the park position.
C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/ • The setting cannot be changed.
CAU 0°
• The position can be reproduced even
Floor base before starting a study.
rotation angle : 0°
*1) The SID described on the left is
Support column reproduced when any of the following
rotation angle : -90° movements is required. If none of them
SID (*1) : 124 cm is performed, the SID does not change.
Lateral Park position (*2) • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the LL orientation, the LL park
position is reproduced. When auto-
positioning starts with the Ω-arm in the
RL orientation, the RL park position is
reproduced.
NOTE) The park position can be changed
at the time of system installation.
To change the position after the
system has been installed, contact
your Canon Medical Systems
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
293
 • Biplane system (BP Vascular system)

No. Stored position Remarks

0 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle (*3) : 0° before starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm *1) The SID described on the left is
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° reproduced when any of the following
Rot. 0° movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
X-ray beam
up/down height : 0 cm • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
Ceiling position
rotation
(*4) : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) While in biplane status
*4) If the floor base rotation angle of the
C-arm is not between +45° and -45°,
the Ω-arm position in the ceiling
longitudinal/lateral directions is not
reproduced.
1 to 7 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The setting can be changed.
10 to 17 Floor base • The position can be reproduced during a
20 to 27 rotation angle : 0° study.
Support column *1) The SID described on the left is
rotation angle : 0° reproduced when any of the following
SID (*1) : 110 cm movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
FOV : Maximum
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
Lateral Ω-arm : Park position (*2)
column rotation, floor base
FOV : Maximum rotation
Tabletop height of the catheterization table: 101 cm • Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the RL orientation, the RL
park position is reproduced. When
auto-positioning starts with the Ω-arm in
the LL orientation, the LL park position
is reproduced.

No. 2B308-309EN
294
 No. Stored position Remarks
30 to 37 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The setting can be changed.
40 to 47 Floor base • The position can be reproduced during a
50 to 57 rotation angle : 0° study.
64, 65
(*2) Support column *1) The SID described on the left is
rotation angle : 0° reproduced when any of the following
SID (*1) : 110 cm movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
FOV : Maximum
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90°
column rotation, floor base
Rot. 0° (RL orientation)
rotation
X-ray beam
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
up/down height : 0 cm
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
*2) For systems in which the 12 × 16-inch
SID (*1) : 110 cm FPD is installed, No. 50 and No. 51
FOV : Maximum reproduce the positions specified
below.
Tabletop height of the catheterization table: 101 cm
50 Frontal FPD position : Portrait • The position cannot be changed.
(Position where the
• Only the FPD moves.
longer sides of the FPD
are parallel to the patient
axis)
51 Frontal FPD position : Landscape • The position cannot be changed.
(Position where the
• Only the FPD moves.
shorter sides of the FPD
are parallel to the patient
axis)
60 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The biplane head end free space position
Floor base from the patient left side is reproduced.
rotation angle : 125° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle : 0° before starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm *1) The SID described on the left is
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° reproduced when any of the following
Rot. 0° (RL orientation) movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
X-ray beam
up/down height : 0 cm • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
rotation
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.

No. 2B308-309EN
295
No. Stored position Remarks
61 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The biplane head end free space position
Floor base from the patient right side is reproduced.
rotation angle : -125° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle : 0° before starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm *1) The SID described on the left is
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° reproduced when any of the following
Rot. 0° (RL orientation) movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
X-ray beam
up/down height : 0 cm • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
rotation
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains unchanged.

62 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The biplane groin access position from
(*3) Floor base the patient left side head end is
rotation angle : 77° reproduced.
Support column • The Ω-arm ceiling longitudinal position
rotation angle : -20° moves to 35 cm from the isocenter.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm • The setting cannot be changed.
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° • The position can be reproduced even
Rot. 0° (RL orientation) before starting a study.
X-ray beam *1) The SID described on the left is
up/down height : 0 cm reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
Ceiling position : Longitudinal 35 cm
is performed, the SID does not change.
Lateral 0 cm
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
SID (*2) : 132 cm
column rotation, floor base
rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) For systems that use the XGCO-820A,
it is recommended that the following
Frontal position be set instead.
• C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0°
• Floor base rotation angle : 68°
• Support column rotation angle : -19°
• SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm

No. 2B308-309EN
296
No. Stored position Remarks
63 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The biplane groin access position from
Floor base the patient left side foot end is
rotation angle : 123° reproduced.
Support column • The setting cannot be changed.
rotation angle : -20° • The position can be reproduced even
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm before starting a study.
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° *1) The SID described on the left is
Rot. 0° (RL orientation) reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
X-ray beam
is performed, the SID does not change.
up/down height : 0 cm
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
column rotation, floor base
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.

No. 2B308-309EN
297
No. Stored position Remarks
66 Frontal Park position • The C-arm moves to the park position on
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° the left side of the patient (*4).
Rot. 0° (LL orientation) • The Ω-arm switches to LL orientation.
X-ray beam When the Ω-arm is set to RL orientation
up/down height : 0 cm and this auto-positioning is performed,
the Ω-arm moves to the location between
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
the C-arm and the catheterization table or
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm moves to the rear of the C-arm (*3). The
Ω-arm switches from RL orientation to LL
orientation and then to the lateral position
shown on the left.
• When the Ω-arm sliding angle is near 35°,
Ω-arm movement stops automatically. To
resume movement, perform restart
operation.
• The setting cannot be changed.
• The position can be reproduced even
before starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) The default location for Ω-arm position
switching between RL and LL
orientation is between the C-arm and
the catheterization table. If sufficient
space is provided at the rear of the
C-arm, Ω-arm position switching can be
performed at the rear of the C-arm. For
details, contact your service
representative.
*4) For systems in which Ω-arm position
switching is performed at the location
between the C-arm and the
catheterization table. When switching
is performed at the rear of the C-arm,
the C-arm moves to the park position
after Ω-arm position switching has been
performed and the Ω-arm has been set
to the lateral position shown on the left.

No. 2B308-309EN
298
No. Stored position Remarks
67 Frontal Park position • The C-arm moves to the park position on
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° the left side of the patient (*4).
Rot. 0° (RL orientation) • The Ω-arm switches to RL orientation.
X-ray beam When the Ω-arm is set to LL orientation
up/down height : 0 cm and this auto-positioning is performed,
the Ω-arm moves to the location between
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm
the C-arm and the catheterization table or
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm moves to the rear of the C-arm (*3). The
Ω-arm switches from LL orientation to RL
orientation and then to the lateral position
shown on the left.
• When the Ω-arm sliding angle is near 35°,
Ω-arm movement stops automatically. To
resume movement, perform restart
operation.
• The setting cannot be changed.
• The position can be reproduced even
before starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) The default location for Ω-arm position
switching between RL and LL
orientation is between the C-arm and
the catheterization table. If sufficient
space is provided at the rear of the
C-arm, Ω-arm position switching can be
performed at the rear of the C-arm. For
details, contact your service
representative.
*4) For systems in which Ω-arm position
switching is performed at the location
between the C-arm and the
catheterization table. When switching
is performed at the rear of the C-arm,
the C-arm moves to the park position
after Ω-arm position switching has been
performed and the Ω-arm has been set
to the lateral position shown on the left.

No. 2B308-309EN
299
No. Stored position Remarks
70 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The biplane standard status is
Floor base reproduced.
rotation angle : 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle : 0° before starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm • When the Ω-arm is set to RL orientation
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° and this auto-positioning is performed,
Rot. 0° (LL orientation) the Ω-arm moves to the location between
X-ray beam the C-arm and the catheterization table or
up/down height : 0 cm moves to the rear of the C-arm (*3, *4).
The Ω-arm switches from RL orientation
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm to LL orientation and then to the lateral
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm position shown on the left. The C-arm
moves to the frontal position shown on
the left.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) The default location for Ω-arm position
switching between RL and LL
orientation is between the C-arm and
the catheterization table. If sufficient
space is provided at the rear of the
C-arm, Ω-arm position switching can be
performed at the rear of the C-arm. For
details, contact your service
representative.
*4) For systems in which Ω-arm position
switching is performed at the location
between the C-arm and the
catheterization table, the C-arm moves
to the park position and the Ω-arm
moves to the position switching location
and then performs position switching.

No. 2B308-309EN
300
No. Stored position Remarks
71 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the C-arm standard
Floor base position.
rotation angle : 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
Support column • The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle : 0° before starting a study.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm • When the Ω-arm is set to LL orientation
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 90° and this auto-positioning is performed,
Rot. 0° (RL orientation) the Ω-arm moves to the location between
X-ray beam the C-arm and the catheterization table or
up/down height : 0 cm moves to the rear of the C-arm (*3, *4).
The Ω-arm switches from LL orientation
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm to RL orientation and then to the lateral
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm position shown on the left. The C-arm
moves to the frontal position shown on
the left.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
• Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) The default location for Ω-arm position
switching between RL and LL
orientation is between the C-arm and
the catheterization table. If sufficient
space is provided at the rear of the
C-arm, Ω-arm position switching can be
performed at the rear of the C-arm. For
details, contact your service
representative.
*4) For systems in which Ω-arm position
switching is performed at the location
between the C-arm and the
catheterization table, the C-arm moves
to the park position and the Ω-arm
moves to the position switching location
and then performs position switching.

No. 2B308-309EN
301
No. Stored position Remarks
72 Frontal C-arm angle : RAO 30° • The biplane LV position is reproduced.
CRA/CAU 0°
• The setting cannot be changed.
Floor base
• The position can be reproduced even
rotation angle : 0°
before starting a study.
Support column
*1) The SID described on the left is
rotation angle : 0°
reproduced when any of the following
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm movements is required. If none of them
Lateral Ω-arm angle : Slid. 120° is performed, the SID does not change.
Rot. 0° (RL orientation) • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
X-ray beam column rotation, floor base
up/down height : 0 cm rotation
Ceiling position : Longitudinal/lateral 0 cm • Ω-arm : Rotation, sliding, ceiling
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm travel (longitudinal/lateral)
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.

No. 2B308-309EN
302
No. Stored position Remarks
73 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the standard
Floor base position when the C-arm is set on the
rotation angle : 90° patient left side.
Support column • The Ω-arm moves to the park position.
rotation angle : 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm • The position can be reproduced even
Lateral Park position (*3) before starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the RL orientation, the RL
park position is reproduced. When
auto-positioning starts with the Ω-arm in
the LL orientation, the LL park position
is reproduced.

No. 2B308-309EN
303
No. Stored position Remarks
74 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the standard
Floor base position when the C-arm is set on the
rotation angle : -90° patient right side.
Support column • The Ω-arm moves to the park position.
rotation angle : 0° • The setting cannot be changed.
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm • The position can be reproduced even
Lateral Park position (*3) before starting a study.
*1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the RL orientation, the RL
park position is reproduced. When
auto-positioning starts with the Ω-arm in
the LL orientation, the LL park position
is reproduced.

No. 2B308-309EN
304
No. Stored position Remarks
75 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm is set at the lower limb on the
Floor base patient left side.
rotation angle : 120° • The Ω-arm moves to the park position.
Support column • The setting cannot be changed.
rotation angle : -60°
• The position can be reproduced even
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm before starting a study.
Lateral Park position (*3) *1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the RL orientation, the RL
park position is reproduced. When
auto-positioning starts with the Ω-arm in
the LL orientation, the LL park position
is reproduced.

No. 2B308-309EN
305
No. Stored position Remarks
76 Frontal C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU 0° • The C-arm moves to the C-arm standard
Floor base position.
rotation angle : 0° • The Ω-arm moves to the park position.
Support column • The setting cannot be changed.
rotation angle : 0°
• The position can be reproduced even
SID (*1) (*2) : 120 cm before starting a study.
Lateral Park position (*3) *1) The SID described on the left is
reproduced when any of the following
movements is required. If none of them
is performed, the SID does not change.
• C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) If the SID is greater than or equal to this
value before auto-positioning is
performed, the SID remains
unchanged.
*3) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the RL orientation, the RL
park position is reproduced. When
auto-positioning starts with the Ω-arm in
the LL orientation, the LL park position
is reproduced.
77 Frontal Park position • The C-arm moves to the park position.
NOTE) Initial position • The Ω-arm moves to the park position.
C-arm angle : LAO/RAO/CRA/ • The setting cannot be changed.
CAU 0°
• The position can be reproduced even
Floor base before starting a study.
rotation angle : 0°
*1) The SID described on the left is
Support column reproduced when any of the following
rotation angle : -90° movements is required. If none of them
SID (*1) : 124 cm is performed, the SID does not change.
Lateral Park position (*2) • C-arm : Rotation, sliding, support
column rotation, floor base
rotation
*2) When auto-positioning starts with the
Ω-arm in the RL orientation, the RL
park position is reproduced. When
auto-positioning starts with the Ω-arm in
the LL orientation, the LL park position
is reproduced.
NOTE) The park position can be changed
at the time of system installation.
To change the position after the
system has been installed, contact
your Canon Medical Systems
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
306
 (5) Storing a position
Positions registered as the following positioning Nos. can be overwritten by
new positions.

Auto-positioning Nos. that can be overwritten

Single-plane system 1 to 7, 10 to 17, 20 to 27, 30 to 37, 40 to 47, 50 to 57
(*1), 64 and 65, 70 to 72
Biplane system 1 to 7, 10 to 17, 20 to 27, 30 to 37, 40 to 47, 50 to 57
(*1), 64 and 65

*1) Positions assigned to No. 50 and No. 51 cannot be overwritten for systems
in which the 12 × 16-inch FPD is installed.

CAUTION: When registering auto-positioning positions, register the positions by

maintaining at least a 5 cm space between the system and the patient,
and between the units. If the positions are registered without at least a
5 cm space, interference may occur between the system and the
patient or between the units when auto-positioning is performed.

<1> Set the support units and the catheterization table to the position to be
stored.
The positions set for the movements described in (1) "Positions that can be
stored" can be stored.

<2> Press the Auto-positioning selection button of the tableside console.

Positioning No. Confirm that the button lights.

<3> Enter an auto-positioning button No. using the function buttons. For single-
digit position numbers, enter "0" first. For example, enter "0" and "3" to enter
position 3.

<4> The entered positioning No. and the position managed by the No. are
displayed in the Image display area of the fluoroscopic monitor for five
seconds. Check the display contents to confirm whether the overwriting
process can proceed. Note that if the button last pressed in step <1> is held
for 2 seconds or longer, overwriting is executed.

<5> To overwrite the position, enter the positioning No. again and hold the button
last pressed for two seconds or longer. A confirmation sound is generated
Positioning data display when the system is at the correct position.

No. 2B308-309EN
307
 (6) Reproducing the desired position
<1> Move all the peripheral units out of the operating range of the support unit
and the catheterization table.

Positioning No. <2> Enter the positioning No. with which the position to be reproduced is
managed. For the procedure for entering the positioning No., refer to steps
<2> and <3> of in (5) "Storing a position".

<3> The entered positioning No. and the position managed by the No. are
displayed in the Image display area of the fluoroscopic monitor. Confirm that
the displayed information is correct. To cancel reproduction, leave the
buttons untouched for at least 5 seconds or press the Override button.

<4> Start movement to the position to be reproduced.

Pull and hold the arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the Auto-
positioning start button until the system moves to the position to be
reproduced. A confirmation sound is generated when the system is at the
Positioning data display correct position.

CAUTION: 1. During auto-positioning, be aware of possible collision between the

support unit and the catheterization table. In particular, if
catheterization table CAT-880B is tilted, the support unit may come
into contact with the catheterization table. Operate the system
extremely carefully.

2. If both of the conditions below are applicable, Ω-arm movement

behind the C-arm may not be easily visible. Be extremely careful to
avoid possible collision between the Ω-arm and other persons or
peripheral units.

• Auto-positioning No. 66, 67, 70, or 71 is performed.

• Ω-arm position switching is performed between LL or RL at the rear of
the C-arm.

No. 2B308-309EN
308
NOTE: 1. When auto-positioning involving reproduction of the catheterization tabletop
position is to be performed, inform the patient that the catheterization table
will move during reproduction of the tabletop position before starting auto-
positioning.

2. To interrupt auto-positioning, release the arm/tabletop operation start lever

or the Auto-positioning start button. To restart auto-positioning, pull and hold
the arm/tabletop operation start lever or press the Auto-positioning start
button within 5 s after the interruption. Auto-positioning is resumed from the
position where it was interrupted.

3. The magnification ratio for live zoom at the time the position was registered
is reproduced.

4. If a specific position cannot be reproduced by the position reproduction

operation, the position may be a position that cannot be registered to and
reproduced by the auto-positioning number. A position (arm movement) is
specified for the individual auto-positioning numbers. Other positions (arm
movements) cannot be registered to or reproduced by the auto-positioning
number. If it is desired to change the position setting, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
309
 9.4 Auto-Angle/Auto-Mapping Functions
The radiographic angle (RAO/LAO/CRA/CAU angle) and SID of the acquired
images are reproduced by the support unit (auto-angle). In addition,
acquired images at the closest angle to the current radiographic angle can
be replayed on the monitor (auto-mapping).

Note that to use the auto-mapping function, it must be assigned to one of the
Function buttons. For details, refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions
Using Function Buttons" of the reference manual.

(1) Reproducing the desired radiographic angle (auto-angle

function)
<1> Move all peripheral units out of the operating range of the support unit.

<2> Play back images. (For details, refer to section 12 "Image Playback".)

For dynamic images, stop playing back the images.

<3> If the monitor selection menu is displayed on the reference monitor, use the
monitor selection menu to select the monitor on which the image to be used
for the Auto Angle function is displayed.

<4> Press the Auto angle function button .

Monitor selection menu

Positioning No. <5> The radiographic angle to be reproduced is displayed on the monitor. Check
the angle.

<6> Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the auto-positioning
start button until the radiographic angle to be reproduced is set. A
confirmation sound is generated when the system is at the correct position.

Positioning data display

CAUTION: Before attempting to reproduce the auto-angle, make sure that the
support unit arm is set to a position where radiography can be
performed.
Movement for reproducing the angle is started at the current position,
even if the arm is away from the patient, and contact with persons or
peripheral units may result.

No. 2B308-309EN
310
NOTE: 1. To interrupt auto-mapping, release the arm/tabletop operation start lever or
the auto-positioning start button. To restart auto-mapping, pull and hold the
arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the auto-positioning start
button within 5 s after the interruption. Auto-mapping is resumed from the
position where it was interrupted.

2. The auto-angle function is disabled for images without radiographic angle

information.
Even when the Auto angle button is pressed after selecting such an image,
the radiographic angle information is not displayed.

3. The support unit radiographic angle reproduced using the auto-angle

function may include an error of ±1° relative to the original data.

4. If the image includes position information that cannot be reproduced by the

support unit to be auto-angled, the position is not reproduced.
If a non-reproducible FOV (field size) is included in the image, however, the
reproducible FOV closest to that FOV is reproduced automatically.

5. Auto-angle can be performed using images acquired by systems other than

Alphenix systems.
At this time, only the C-arm rotation angle and slide angle
(CRA/CAU/LAO/RAO) can be reproduced.

6. If the C-arm support unit is not at the set position (support column rotation
angle 0°), the radiographic position cannot be reproduced.

7. In biplane systems, auto-angle is enabled for the support unit in the following
statues.
Note that this function cannot be used even in the following cases depending
on the images to be used.

• Both the C-arm and Ω-arm support units are at the set position (biplane
position).

• The C-arm is at the set position and Ω-arm is at the park position.

• The C-arm is at the park position and Ω-arm is at the set position.

8. For the biplane system, when auto-angle is performed using images

acquired using an Alphenix single-plane system, the position of the frontal
unit (C-arm support unit) is reproduced and the lateral unit (Ω-arm support
unit) moves to the Ω-arm park position.

9. For the biplane system, if the C-arm support unit is not at the set position
(support column rotation angle = 0°), it is not possible to reproduce
radiographic positions for frontal images.

10. For the biplane system, positions requiring switching between LL orientation
and the RL orientation cannot be reproduced.

No. 2B308-309EN
311
NOTE: 11. Some of the positions that can be reproduced using the auto-angle function
can be changed.
To change the settings, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative.
At the time of shipment from the factory, the LAO/RAO, CRA/CAU, SID, and
FOV have been registered as positions that can be reproduced.

Positions that can be reproduced

Changeable SID/FOV (image field size*1)/tabletop height of the catheterization
positions table/compensation filter position/floor base rotation position/support
column rotation position
Unchangeable LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU/ceiling longitudinal position (*2)/ceiling lateral
positions movement position (*2)/X-ray beam height (*2)

*1) Live Zoom is not included.

*2) Ω-arm of the biplane system.

12. If images to which lateral/vertical inversion processing was performed at the

3D workstation are transferred to the Alphenix system with the processed
status, the viewing method for the actual fluoroscopic/radiographic images
may differ from that for the transferred 3D images.

13. In systems supporting 3D reconstruction (*1), auto-angling using 3D

reconstruction images is possible (the viewing angle of the 3D reconstruction
image is reproduced by the support unit).

(1) Display a 3D reconstruction image on the monitor of the Angio workstation

monitor and set the viewing angle of the 3D reconstruction image. For the
operating procedure, refer to the operation manual for the combined option
(*1).

(2) Select the support unit whose radiographic angle is to be reproduced using
the buttons in the menu on the reference monitor.

Support unit Single-plane system Biplane system

C-arm (F system)

Ω-arm (L system)

(3) The display angle of the 3D reconstruction image is displayed on the monitor
as the radiographic angle to be reproduced. Confirm the displayed value.

(4) Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the auto-positioning
start button until reproduction of the radiographic angle is completed. A
confirmation sound is generated when position reproduction is completed.

*1) System combined with the Angio workstation

No. 2B308-309EN
312
NOTE: 14. In biplane systems supporting 3D reconstruction, biplane auto-angling using
a 3D reconstructed image is possible (the viewing angle of the 3D
reconstruction image is reproduced using both the frontal plane support unit
and the lateral plane support unit).

(1) Display a 3D reconstructed image in 3D Viewer of the Angio Workstation

and set the viewing angle for the 3D reconstructed image. For the operating
procedures, refer to the operation manual for the option used in combination.

(2) Execute the BP Auto Angle function using 3D Viewer.

(3) Thumbnails can be displayed (*2) by clicking the [BP Angle List] button in the
menu on the reference monitor screen.

(4) When a thumbnail (with the angle to be reproduced) is clicked, the

radiographic angle to be reproduced is displayed on the monitor.

(5) Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the auto-positioning
start button until the radiographic angle is reproduced. A confirmation sound
is generated when position reproduction is completed.

*2) Up to eight thumbnails can be registered. If eight thumbnails have already

been registered when the BP Auto Angle function is executed, the oldest
thumbnail is automatically deleted.

15. In auto-angling using a 3D reconstruction image, the position may not be

reproduced correctly if a 3D reconstruction image that was created using the
following types of images is used.

• Past image
• Image acquired using a system other than Alphenix

16. In auto-angling using a 3D reconstruction image, support unit movement

may be limited by various conditions and may not reach the position to be
reproduced.
Especially for biplane systems, in which complicated movements are often
required for positioning, stricter limitations are set for the movements in order
to ensure safety. Note the following points.

• Stricter limitations are set for the movements in order to prevent interference
between the C-arm and Ω-arm, and the possibility that the movements will
be limited is therefore higher.
• Position reproduction requiring switching between the LL position and RL
position of the Ω-arm is not possible.

17. In Alphenix systems combined with the 3D roadmap kit (XIDF-3DP802 or

XIDF-3DP802/A1), the Path Direction function and Path Navigation function
of the 3D roadmap application can be selected and executed on the system
using the procedure below. Refer to the operation manual for the 3D
roadmap kit for details of the Path Direction function and Path Navigation
function.

(1) Draw a path line on the MPR image and click the [3DRM On/Off] button.
Refer to the operation manual for the 3D roadmap kit for details of the
operating procedure.

No. 2B308-309EN
313
NOTE: (2) Click the [Path Direction] button in the menu on the reference monitor. The
3D reconstruction image corresponding to the path line as viewed directly
from the top is displayed on the monitor.

(3) Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever on the tableside console. It is not
necessary to select [3D Auto Angle].
The arm of the support unit moves to the position where the path line is
viewed from the input (puncture) direction.

(4) Start fluoroscopy and confirm the path line input (puncture) position.

(5) Click the [Path Navigation] button in the menu on the reference monitor. The
3D reconstruction image corresponding to the path line as viewed directly
from the side is displayed on the monitor.

(6) Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever on the tableside console. It is not
necessary to select [3D Auto Angle].
The arm of the support unit moves to the position where the path line is
viewed from the input (puncture) direction.

(7) Repeat steps (2) to (6) as many times as required to confirm the position,
angle, and depth of the device.

No. 2B308-309EN
314
 (2) Replaying the image closest to the current radiographic
angle (auto-mapping function)
Among the acquired images, the image with the closest radiographic angle
to the current radiographic angle (RAO/LAO/CRA/CAU angle) is retrieved
and displayed on the reference monitor.

The image is retrieved in the following order.

Map image (Map) → Dynamic image (Run (including one-shot)) →

Fluoroscopic image acquisition (F-Rec)

<1> Press the Auto-mapping image button of the Function buttons or the

Auto Map button (the Tool tab) in Exam mode on the system monitor.
The retrieved image is displayed on the reference monitor.

NOTE: 1. If the Auto-mapping image button is pressed again before changing the
radiographic angle, the image with the second closest radiographic angle to
the current radiographic angle is displayed.

2. If there are several images acquired with the same angle, the latest image is
displayed. Each time the Auto-mapping image button is pressed, the image
will be switched to the next most-recent image.

3. For the biplane system, when auto-mapping is performed using the main
console (control room), the image acquired at the corresponding angle is
searched from among both the frontal and lateral images.
When auto-mapping is performed using the tableside console (examination
room), the image acquired at the corresponding angle is searched from
among the frontal images.

4. For the biplane system, when searching of a Run image is attempted in the
single-plane status, the system searches only the frontal images. Lateral
images are not searched.

5. For the biplane system, when searching of a Run image is attempted in the
biplane status, the system searches the frontal images first. When the target
image is found from the frontal images, the pair image is specified from the
lateral images.

6. The permissible search angle range can be set. The initial setting is ±5° of
the search angle.
To change the setting, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
315
9.5 Switching the System (Biplane System)
This subsection describes the following procedures when using the auto-
positioning function: switching between the single plane and the biplane, and
switching to a specific position in the biplane status.

For auto-positioning, refer to step (6) "Reproducing the desired position" of

subsection 9.3.

(1) To use the C-arm support unit independently (single-plane

set)

To use the C-arm support unit alone, move the Ω-arm to the park position
using the auto-positioning function. The auto-positioning No. is "76".

(2) To use the Ω-arm support unit independently (single plane)

To use the Ω-arm support unit independently, move the C-arm to the park
position using the auto-positioning function. The auto-positioning No. is "66"
or "67".

NOTE: When the Ω-arm is in the single-plane status, it can be set to the LL
orientation or the RL orientation using the auto-positioning function.

Auto-positioning No.
Switching to the LL position 66
Switching to the RL position 67

(3) To use the two support units in combination (biplane)

In the biplane configuration, the biplane standard position can be reproduced
by auto-positioning.

Status before reproduction Auto-positioning No.

Biplane status 0
When the C-arm is at the set position LL orientation standard status : 70
and the Ω-arm position is at the park RL orientation standard status : 71
position

NOTE: When the system is in the biplane status, Ω-arm can be set to the LL
orientation or the RL orientation using the auto-positioning function.

Auto-positioning No.
Switching to the LL position 70
Switching to the RL position 71

No. 2B308-309EN
316
9.6 Operating the Large Screen Monitor (Option)
The large screen monitor allows multiple images to be displayed at the same
time. The display layout can be changed according to the type of
examination (diagnosis, interventional procedure, etc.).

(1) Turning the power ON/OFF

(1.1) Turning ON the power

Turn ON the power of the Alphenix system. The power of the large screen
monitor is turned ON.

(1.2) Turning OFF the power

Turn OFF the power of the Alphenix system. The power of the large screen
monitor is turned OFF.

(2) Selecting the display layout

Select the desired display layout of the large-screen monitor on the touch
panel of the console.

(3) Operating procedure for the backup monitor

If the large-screen monitor malfunctions during an examination, use the
backup monitor installed behind the large-screen monitor. Operate the
monitor suspension to set the backup monitor so that it faces the front.

Note that the information to be displayed on the reference monitor is not

displayed on the backup monitor. Restrictions may apply for some
examinations. After the examination is completed, immediately contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative for inspection.

NOTE: 1. It is recommended that an image resolution of 1280 × 1024 pixels be used

for diagnosis.

2. It is possible to select the display layout using the system console, tableside
console, main console, or satellite console. For details, refer to the
reference manual.

3. The backup monitor is used as a backup in case of failure of the large-

screen monitor. It is installed behind the large-screen monitor and is not
normally used.

4. The data to be displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor is displayed on the

backup monitor (for biplane systems, the data for the fluoroscopic monitor for
the frontal system or the lateral system is displayed).

No. 2B308-309EN
317
9.7 Operating the Tablet Console (Option)
9.7.1 Details of the tablet console
When a tablet console is used in combination, the following operations can
be performed in the examination room.

(1) Operations that can be performed using the tablet console

• Emergency stop of the support unit and the catheterization table (*1)
• Restoration of the support unit and the catheterization table from emergency
stop status (resetting the power supply) (*1)
• Menu operation (selection and setting) (*1)
• Selecting an acquisition program
• Auto-positioning operation (*1) (*2)
• Selecting a function
• Performing auxiliary operations on the Angio Workstation
• Performing playback, pause, and frame feeding of dynamic images
• Switching dynamic image files and map image files

*1) When the switch box is used in combination

*2) Selection of the auto-positioning number is possible even when the switch
box is not used in combination.

(2) External appearance of the tablet console

The following figure shows the tablet console with the switch box. The
switch box may not be included in some configurations of the system.

No. 2B308-309EN
318
 (3) Switch box
The switch box includes some of the functions of the tableside console.
The switch box may not be included in some configurations of the system.

CAUTION: Do not press the menu selection button without starting a study ("Start
Study") unless an emergency study is to be performed. The system
enters study start status, possibly resulting in incorrect X-ray
generation.

NOTE: Starting a study ("Start Study") can be executed using the menu selection
button. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") from the Examination Room". A study should be started
using the menu selection button only in an emergency.

No. 2B308-309EN
319
(4) Touch panel console (tablet console)

[Basic touch panel operations]

• Swipe : Touch the panel lightly and slide your finger.

• Tap : Briefly touch the panel with your finger.
• Long-press : Touch the panel and keep your finger on the panel for some
time.

No. 2B308-309EN
320
9.7.2 Starting up the tablet console

(1) Turning the power ON/OFF

The power of the tablet console is automatically turned ON/OFF when the
power of the Alphenix system is turned ON/OFF. It is not necessary to turn
the tablet console ON/OFF manually.

NOTE: 1. When the power of the Alphenix system is turned ON, if the tablet console
does not turn ON automatically, hold down the power button on the tablet
console for 4 seconds or longer.

2. When the power of the Alphenix system is turned OFF, if the tablet console
does not turn OFF automatically, follow the procedure below to turn OFF the
tablet console.

(a) Tap the Home button.

(b) Long-press the shutdown button on the tablet console.

No. 2B308-309EN
321
NOTE: 2. When the following screen is displayed, tap the [Shutdown] button.
To cancel shutdown and return to the previous screen, tap the [Cancel]
button.

No. 2B308-309EN
322
(2) Startup
When the tablet console has started up, the startup screen is displayed.
Select the target category from the startup screen to display the workflow
screen.

If the study protocols and the category are linked, starting a study (Start
Study) automatically displays the workflow screen for the category linked to
the selected study protocol.

No. 2B308-309EN
323
(3) Home function
Tap the Home button to switch the current screen to the startup screen.

If the power of the tablet console does not turn OFF automatically when the
power of the Alphenix system is turned OFF or if it is necessary to select a
category, return to the startup screen. For the procedure for operating the
tablet console, refer to steps (1) and (2).

No. 2B308-309EN
324
9.7.3 Function selection on the tablet console
The functions of the tablet console can be selected using three methods.
For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions below.

Function selection method Details

Selection using the [Work Flow] tab Select the functions registered for each workflow.
Selection using the [Function] tab Select the desired functions from among the available
functions.
Selection using the [Favorites] tab Register or select frequently used functions.

(1) Selection using the [Work Flow] tab

In the [Work Flow] tab, the functions (selection buttons) are registered
according to the study procedures and techniques. Switch to the desired
workflow and then select the target function.

NOTE: 1. Multiple workflows can be registered according to the type of image

acquisition. In the figure above, workflows 1 to 4 are registered.

2. To register workflows and to register functions for each workflow, contact

your service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
325
 (2) Selection using the [Function] tab
All of the functions (selection buttons) are registered in the [Function] tab
and categorized in the tabs displayed on the left of the screen.

Functions used most recently in the [Function] tab

Functions used for image analysis

Functions used for fluoroscopy/radiography
Other functions

NOTE: Functions can be grouped into specific categories in each tab. When
multiple categories have been registered, touch the desired button as shown
below to switch pages.

No. 2B308-309EN
326
 (3) Selection using the [Favorites] tab
The target function can be selected from the [Favorites] tab, in which
frequently used functions can be registered. For the procedures for
registering functions in the [Favorites] tab, refer to the following NOTE.

NOTE: 1. Registering a function in the [Favorites] tab

Long-press the selection button of the function to be registered.

2. Deleting a function from the [Favorites] tab

(a) Open the [Favorites] tab and long-press the selection button of the function
to be deleted from the [Favorites] tab.

(b) The recycle bin icon is displayed in the upper part of the screen.
Drag and drop the selected function (selection button) into the recycle bin.
Functions that are deleted from the [Favorites] tab are not deleted from their
original tabs.

No. 2B308-309EN
327
(4) Displaying BP images simultaneously (BP link)
BP images (pairs consisting of a frontal image and a lateral image) acquired
using a biplane system can be displayed simultaneously on the monitor with
a single touch. Photo images and map images can be displayed using the
BP link function.

<1> Click the [Work Flow] tab, [Function] tab, or [Favorites] tab and then select
one of the functions (selection buttons) below.

Selecting a photo image: Tap [Photo Thumbnail].

Selecting a map image: Tap [Map Thumbnail].

The BP images acquired in the selected study are displayed.

<2> On the displayed screen, select the monitor for displaying the BP images.

Displaying BP images on the reference monitor: Tap [Ref].

Displaying BP images on the additional monitor: Tap [Add].

<3> Confirm that [BP Link] is enabled. If it is disabled, tap [BP Link] to enable it.

<4> Tap the BP images to be displayed on the monitor.

<5> To return to the previous screen, tap [Exit].

No. 2B308-309EN
328
9.7.4 Tool dialog
The following functions can be selected from the tool dialog. For details,
refer to the corresponding descriptions below.

Tool dialog Function

Used to select an auto-positioning No.
Refer to (1) "Selecting an auto-positioning No."
Used to select a study protocol and acquisition program.
Refer to (2) "Selecting a study protocol / acquisition program".
Used to operate the mouse cursor on the Angio Workstation (option)
screen.
Refer to (3) "Operating the mouse cursor on the Angio Workstation".
Used to select the display layout of the large-screen monitor (option).
Refer to (4) "Selecting the large-screen monitor layout".
Used to perform image operations, including switching, playback, and
pause of dynamic images and map images.
Refer to (5) "Performing image operations" and (6) "Performing image
operations using touch gestures".
Used to close the dialog box that was opened during function
selection. Also used to bring the dialog box to the front of other
screens.

No. 2B308-309EN
329
 (1) Selecting an auto-positioning No.
An auto-positioning No. used to specify a reproduction position (auto-
positioning function) can be selected using the tablet console.
It is also possible to register new support unit positions or to specify a
reproduction angle of the support unit.

CAUTION: Be sure that you clearly understand the auto-positioning function

before attempting to perform auto-positioning.

<1> Tap .

The auto-positioning operation screen is displayed.

*1) This button is displayed when an INFX-8000V biplane system is used.

To operate the buttons, refer to NOTE 14 in subsection 9.4 "Auto-
Angle/Auto-Mapping Functions" of the INFX-8000V system operation
manual. The functions of the [BP Auto Angle] button (shown in the operation
manual above) and [BP Angle List] button are the same.

No. 2B308-309EN
330
 <2> Perform the following operations according to the objective.
For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions below.

Function Details
Selecting a An auto-positioning No. can be selected using either of the
reproduction position following two methods: by selecting a registered reproduction
position from among the graphics or by specifying an auto-
positioning No.
Refer to [Selecting a reproduction position from among the
graphics] and [Selecting a reproduction position by specifying an
auto-positioning No.].
Registering the current Saves the current position and overwrites the previously registered
position auto-positioning reproduction position. The current position is
overwritten using either of the following two methods: by selecting a
registered reproduction position from among the graphics or by
specifying an auto-positioning No.
Refer to [Registering a position by selecting a graphic to overwrite
the current position] and [Registering a position by specifying an
auto-positioning No. to overwrite the current position].

NOTICE: When a reproduction position is changed using the

tablet console, the reproduction position for the
auto-positioning No. registered in the tableside
console is also changed.

Specifying a Used to specify a reproduction angle (CRA/CAU, LAO/RAO) of the

reproduction angle of support unit.
the support unit
Refer to [Specifying a reproduction angle of the support unit].

[Selecting a reproduction position from among the graphics]

Tap the button in which the target reproduction position is displayed

graphically.
The number at the upper right corner of each button indicates the auto-
positioning No.
The selected reproduction position is displayed graphically on the left of the
screen.

No. 2B308-309EN
331
 [Selecting a reproduction position by specifying an auto-positioning
No.]

Specify the auto-positioning No. for the target reproduction position.

NOTICE: After an auto-positioning No. has been selected, do not tap the [Store]
button. Doing so causes the current position to be overwritten by the
reproduction position registered for the selected auto-positioning No.

No. 2B308-309EN
332
[Registering a position by selecting a graphic to overwrite the current
position]

This function is used to save the current system position and overwrite the
previously registered auto-positioning reproduction position. Tap the target
graphic to select the registered reproduction position to be overwritten. Then
set the system to the desired position to be registered and perform the
following procedure.

No. 2B308-309EN
333
[Registering a position by specifying an auto-positioning No. to
overwrite the current position]

This function is used to save the current system position and overwrite the
previously registered auto-positioning reproduction position. Specify the
auto-positioning No. for the target registered reproduction position. Then set
the system to the desired position to be registered and perform the following
procedure.

No. 2B308-309EN
334
 [Specifying a reproduction angle of the support unit]

Specify a reproduction angle of the support unit.

The arm rotation angle and the arm sliding angle can be specified
(CRA/CAU, LAO/RAO).

NOTE: The figures above show the operation screen for a biplane system.
For a single-plane system, the settings for are not displayed.

No. 2B308-309EN
335
 <6> Start movement to the position to be reproduced.

Hold down the Auto-positioning start button until the system moves to the
position to be reproduced. A confirmation sound is generated when the
system is at the correct position.

NOTE: 1. To interrupt auto-positioning, release the Auto-positioning start button. To

restart auto-positioning, press the Auto-positioning start button within 5 s
after the interruption. Auto-positioning is resumed from the position where it
was interrupted.

2. To set the support unit to the reference position (LAO/RAO 0°, CRA/CAU
0°), perform the following procedures.

<1> Click the 0 button.

<2> Press the auto-positioning start button.

3. The arm position can be reproduced using the auto-positioning start button
or the arm/tabletop operation start lever on the tableside console.

No. 2B308-309EN
336
(2) Selecting a study protocol / acquisition program
A study protocol and acquisition program can be selected using the tablet
console.

<1> Tap .

<2> To select a study protocol, open the [Protocol] tab. To select an acquisition
program, open the [Program] tab.

<3> On the "Protocol List" screen, select the study protocol to be edited.

No. 2B308-309EN
337
<4> Select the target acquisition program by performing the following procedures.

(3) Selecting the function for the Angio Workstation

When the optional Angio Workstation (AWS) is used in combination, function
selection operations on the AWS can be performed using the tablet console.
The following three methods are available.
For details of the functions of the AWS, refer to the operation manual for the
AWS.

• Using the mouse cursor on the tablet console

• Using the function selection button on the tablet console
• Using the shortcut key on the tablet console

(3.1) Selecting a function using the mouse cursor

<1> Tap .

<2> Operate the mouse cursor on the displayed operation screen.

Swipe on the operating panel to start operating the mouse cursor.
Check cursor operations using the monitor screen. Mouse right-clicking and
left-clicking can be performed using the corresponding buttons displayed on
the operating panel.

No. 2B308-309EN
338
 <3> Image grayscale adjustment and panning operations can also be performed
using the tablet console.

Tap to display the following screen. The same operations as dragging

using the mouse can be performed by swiping in the horizontal or vertical
direction, including grayscale adjustment and panning.

To return to the previous operation screen, tap .

NOTE: 1. When the screen shown in step <2> is displayed, touching the screen with
two fingers (or if a single finger is already on the screen, tapping the screen
with another finger) switches the current screen to the screen shown in
step <3> for grayscale adjustment or panning. To return to the screen
shown in step <2>, remove your fingers from the screen.

2. A keyboard function is available on the tablet console.

(a) Tap displayed at the upper left corner of the operating panel screen.
A keyboard is displayed on the operating panel screen.

(b) Tap the keys on the keyboard displayed on the operating panel screen to
enter text.

(c) The AWS applications can be switched using the function keys (F1 to F11)
on the displayed keyboard.

No. 2B308-309EN
339
 (3.2) Selecting a function using function selection buttons

<1> Tap [Details].

<2> From the displayed list, tap the function selection button with which the
target function is to be executed.

(3.3) Selecting a function using the shortcut key

If a shortcut key has been assigned, the desired function can be selected
using the shortcut key.

NOTE: To set shortcut keys, refer to the reference manual. Up to three shortcut
keys can be assigned to each AWS application.

No. 2B308-309EN
340
 (4) Selecting the large-screen monitor layout
The display layout of the large-screen monitor can be selected using the
tablet console.
It is also possible to select a display layout preset in the system.

NOTE: When a biplane system is used, the location of the F-Live monitor (which
displays a live image of the frontal plane) is fixed and cannot be changed.

<1> Tap . Change the desired display layout on the displayed

operation screen.

<4> To select a preset layout, click [Monitor Layout] and select the layout on the
displayed screen.

<6> To edit the monitor selected from the preset layout, click [Edit]. On the
displayed screen, edit the monitor (refer to the procedures in steps <2> and
<3>).

NOTE: Editing the display monitor as shown in step <6> is only temporary. The
preset display layout cannot be overwritten.

No. 2B308-309EN
341
 (5) Performing image operations
Switching, playback, and pause of dynamic images and map images can be
performed using the tablet console.

NOTE: Dynamic image and map image operations can be performed in the same
manner as turning the pages of a book. Refer to (6) "Performing image
operations using touch gestures".

<1> Tap . Image operations can be performed using the displayed

image operation buttons.

<2> Perform image operations. The functions of the image operation buttons are
as follows.

No. 2B308-309EN
342
 (6) Performing image operations using touch gestures
Dynamic image and map image operations can be performed in the same
manner as turning the pages of a book.

<1> Swipe to the lower edge of the operating panel.

<2> Perform dynamic image and map image operations using the displayed
screen shown below.

• Dynamic image Tap the operating panel screen with a single finger.
playback Each time the screen is tapped, dynamic image playback starts or is paused.
• Frame reverse feeding/ Touch the operating panel with a single finger and then swipe up or down.
frame feeding Up: frame reverse feeding, Down: frame forward feeding
• Dynamic image Touch the operating panel with a single finger and then swipe left or right.
switching Left: switching to the previous image, Right: switching to the next image
• Map image switching Touch the operating panel with two fingers and then swipe left or right.
Left: switching to the previous image, Right: switching to the next image
• Current monitor Tap the operating panel with three fingers.
switching Each time the screen is tapped, the current monitor is switched between the
fluoroscopic monitor and the reference monitor.

<3> To terminate this image operation, swipe in the lower part of the
screen to the upper edge of the operating panel.

No. 2B308-309EN
343
No. 2B308-309EN
344
10. Study Appointment
Study appointment is made in Patient mode before starting the study.
Operation concerning start and finish of the study is also performed in this
mode.

Contents 10.1 Patient Mode Selection

10.2 Appointment for a New Study
10.3 Start Study
10.4 Finish Study
10.5 Urgent Patient Acceptance
10.6 Repeat Study Appointment
10.7 Image Link
10.8 Correcting/Canceling the Appointment
10.9 Data Retrieval From the HIS/RIS
10.10 Transferring the Data to the HIS/RIS
10.11 RDS/RDSR Transfer

No. 2B308-309EN
345
10.1 Patient Mode Selection
<1> Click the Patient tab and select Patient mode.

[Study list display area]

The study list is displayed here. Select the corresponding study in this list. It
is possible to specify the search conditions and search the corresponding
patients.

A mark displayed next to the list indicates the status of the study.

Study is completed.

Study is in progress.

(None) Study has not been performed.

[Study information/patient information input area]

Patient information and study information are entered at the time of study
appointment.

No. 2B308-309EN
346
10.2 Appointment for a New Study
A study appointment is made for a new patient.

Refer to subsection 10.6 "Repeat Study Appointment" if the patient has a

study history.

<1> Enter the patient information and the study information in the Patient Info
tab. Enter the information in the Other Info tab, as required.

To clear all the entries, click the Clear button.

<2> Register the study appointment.

Reconfirm the entries and click the Register button.

If a dialog indicating that some input items have been skipped is displayed,
enter the data to those items and click the Register button again.

NOTE: 1. This system identifies the patient based on 4 items: Patient Name, Sex, Date
of Birth, and Patient ID.

The Patient ID can be used to identify the desired patient even if several
patients have the same Patient Name, Sex, and Date of Birth.
If the entered patient ID is the same as an existing patient ID, the
appointment is handled as appointment information for the existing patient,
and the 4 items become identical to those of the existing patient.

2. For the following ID/Nos., perform entry in single-byte English characters or

numbers according to the rules used at the hospital.

• Patient ID : The patient ID assigned to an individual patient.

• Accession No. : Enter the accession No.

3. It is possible to change the input items for the patient information. For
details, see the reference manual.

4. Study Date can be selected using the calendar displayed by clicking the
button next to the Study Date input area.

No. 2B308-309EN
347
10.3 Start Study
(1) Selecting the scheduled study
<1> Select "Scheduled Studies" in the Study Status list box.

<2> Click the target study in the study list display area.

(2) Starting the study

<1> Confirm that the study information and the patient information displayed in
the study/patient information input area corresponds to the patient to be
examined.

<2> Click the Start button.

Switch to the Acquisition tab and start the study.

No. 2B308-309EN
348
CAUTION: Before starting the first study of the day or before resuming a study
when several hours has elapsed after the system power was turned
OFF, turn the system power ON and then wait at least 30 minutes.
If a study is started before sufficient time has elapsed after turning ON
the power, artifacts may occur on images, possibly resulting in
incorrect diagnosis. If any artifacts occur, wait until the artifacts
disappear before starting the study.

NOTE: 1. It is also possible to start a study without registering an appointment (without

pressing the Registration button).
Enter the required information items for New Study Appointment or Repeat
Study Appointment, and then click the Start button.

2. Depending on the conditions, FPD calibration may be started automatically

when Start Study operation is performed.
Once FPD calibration is started, neither fluoroscopy nor radiography can be
performed until the calibration is completed.

No. 2B308-309EN
349
10.4 Finish Study
When a study is completed, be sure to perform the study completion process
(Finish Study). If this process is not performed, the next study cannot be
started.

<1> Confirm that the patient has left the examination room.

<2> Click the Finish button.

CAUTION: 1. Once Finish Study is executed, examination (fluoroscopy or

radiography) can no longer be performed for the study. For a patient
whose condition might undergo a sudden change, do not select Finish
Study until the patient leaves the examination room.
Refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study ("Start Study")
from the Examination Room" for the procedure for starting an
examination for a patient whose condition has changed suddenly,
making immediate reexamination necessary after Finish Study is
executed.

2. Be sure to perform Finish Study operation before starting the next

study. If the next study is started without performing Finish Study
operation, the acquired data is recognized as a part of the previous
study, leading to incorrect diagnosis.

No. 2B308-309EN
350
NOTE: 1. The acquired data sets are transferred to Review mode automatically when
Finish Study is executed (*1).

*1) It is possible to change the setting of not transferring the acquired datasets
automatically. If it is desired to change the setting, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.

2. The study protocols can be configured so that the following functions are
executed automatically when Finish Study operation is performed. Refer to
the reference manual for the detailed procedure.

• Data transfer and archiving to CD-R or DVD±R

• Data transfer to the network server
• Photo image printing

These functions are not executed if the system power is turned OFF without
performing Finish Study operation or if a study is started using the urgent
case function. In such cases, perform archiving and transfer manually.

3. The map deletion confirmation message is displayed even when the map
image has already been saved.

4. When the system is set to transfer the data manually to the HIS/RIS server,
it is possible to display the MPPS dialog box automatically when Finish
Study operation is performed. For the setting procedure, see the reference
manual.

5. If the system is set to archive data automatically when Finish Study

operation is performed, Finish Study can be executed even if the archive
destination is not ready. In this case, a dialog box checking what action
should be taken is displayed. Note that, depending on the size of the data to
be archived, there may be a delay before this dialog box is displayed.

6. When the RDSR transfer function is selected, the dose data can be
transferred to the specified server on termination of the examination. For
details, refer to subsection 10.11 "RDS/RDSR Transfer".

No. 2B308-309EN
351
10.5 Urgent Patient Acceptance
If there is no time to enter the patient information during in emergencies or
other situations, an information ID is automatically issued by the system to
permit the study to be performed.

There are two acceptance methods: normal acceptance and simplified

acceptance.

In situations of great urgency, it is recommended that simplified acceptance

be used.

CAUTION: Any mismatch in the patient information may result in incorrect

diagnosis.
Be sure to correct the urgent patient information after completing the
study.
To correct the data after the study, use the editing functions for image-
related information in Directory mode or Review mode.

10.5.1 Normal registration

<1> Click the Emergency ID button.

An urgent patient ID is automatically issued and displayed in the area for

urgent patient information entry.

<2> Select the study protocol from the Study Protocol list box.

<3> Click the Start button to start the study.

No. 2B308-309EN
352
NOTE: 1. The automatically issued ID for the urgent patient includes the following
items.

• Patient Name (Last Name) • Patient ID

• Sex • Date of Birth
• Study Date

2. An urgent patient study can be registered after the urgent patient ID is

issued. To register the patient, enter the required information items and click
the Register button.

3. The study protocol to be selected automatically can be preset. Refer to

section 8 "System Presetting (Utility Mode)" of the reference manual for the
procedure.

No. 2B308-309EN
353
10.5.2 Simplified registration
When registering an urgent patient, select the preset study protocol. This
completes patient acceptance and starts the study automatically.

This registration method is appropriate in situations of great urgency.

<1> Issue the urgent patient ID. Click the Entrance button.

The Entrance dialog box opens.

<2> Select the study protocol. Click the appropriate Emergency button to which
the target study protocol is registered. The urgent patient ID is automatically
issued and the study is started with the selected study protocol. The Start
Study operation is not required.

NOTE: 1. To close the Entrance dialog box and return to the normal appointment
screen, click the Routine button.

2. For the registration procedure for the Emergency buttons, refer to section 8
"System Presetting (Utility Mode)" of the reference manual.

3. It is also possible to display the Entrance dialog box automatically when the
system is started. For the setting procedure, refer to section 8 "System
Presetting (Utility Mode)" of the reference manual.

4. If the patient status changes suddenly after "Finish Study" was executed,
"Start Study" can be executed from the tableside console in the examination
room. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") from the Examination Room".

No. 2B308-309EN
354
10.6 Repeat Study Appointment
When a repeat study is to be performed for a patient who has a study history,
a repeat study appointment can be made using the patient's study history.

10.6.1 Simplified search

The studies performed in the specified period can be searched for. The
target study (patient) can be selected from the search results.

<1> Select "Completed Studies" in the Study Status list box.

<2> Select the period for search in the Display Range list box. The studies
performed in the specified period are displayed in the study list display area.

Today Current day

Last 6 Months Past 6 months (it is possible to specify the number of
days or weeks)
Last All All past studies (including the studies on the current day)
All All studies

<3> Select the desired study in the study list. The selected study information is
displayed in the study/patient information input area.

No. 2B308-309EN
355
10.6.2 Keyword search
The search conditions, such as the patient name and the study date, are
specified and then the studies are searched.

<1> Click the Search button.

<2> In the displayed Search dialog box, enter the search conditions.

(a) Select the study status in the Study Status list box.

All Studies
Completed Studies
Scheduled Studies (Not yet performed)

(b) Specify the search conditions in the search condition input area.

Check the desired search item checkbox and select or enter the search
conditions. To delete the entered search conditions, click the Clear button.

<3> Start searching. Click the Search button. The search results are displayed
in the search result display area.

<4> Click the desired study in the search results. The patient information or the
study information for the selected study is displayed in the Patient tab.

No. 2B308-309EN
356
 NOTE: When the system is connected to an HIS/RIS, the data in the HIS/RIS server
is also searched. Note that search cannot be cancelled while data in the
HIS/RIS server is being searched.

10.6.3 Auto search

If the search conditions are entered in the search items with the Auto search
mark, search is automatically started. For the procedure for enabling the
auto search function, see the reference manual.

No. 2B308-309EN
357
10.6.4 Repeat study appointment
Repeat study appointment is made using the patient information or the study
information for the searched study.

<1> Change the patient information or the study information displayed in the
study/patient information input area as required.

To restore the changed data, click the Cancel button.

To cancel the input information, click the Clear button.

<2> Register the study appointment.

Reconfirm the input data and click the Register button.

NOTE: When making an appointment for a new study using Completed Study
information, the study information is not displayed in the following items.
These items should be entered.

• Accession No.
• Study Time

No. 2B308-309EN
358
10.7 Image Link
If a past image is linked to the scheduled study, it can be reviewed during
study.

<1> Select the scheduled study to which the past image is linked in the study list
display area.

<2> Click the Prev. Study button. The Prev. Study dialog box is displayed.

<3> Select the storage location in which the image to be linked is saved by
switching the tab in the Prev. Study dialog box.

<4> In the study list display area of the dialog box, select the study in which the
image to be linked is contained. The image information is displayed in the
image list display area.

<5> To display the image information as a list, click the List button. To display
the image information as a thumbnail, click the Thumbnail button.

<6> In the image list display area, select the image to be linked. Multiple images
can be selected. To select all the images, click the Select All button.

<7> To set linkage, click the Link button.

To cancel linkage, click the Link Off button.

<8> Click the OK button to make the settings effective.

No. 2B308-309EN
359
10.8 Correcting/Canceling the Appointment
The information for the scheduled study can be changed before starting the
study. It is also possible to cancel the study appointment. For the procedure
for correcting or canceling the patient information after study is completed,
refer to section 5 "Image File Management" of the reference manual.

(1) Selecting the study

Select the target study in the study list display area. If the target study
cannot be found, search the study in the database. When searching the
target study, select "Scheduled Studies" in the Study Status list box.

(2) Correcting the contents of the scheduled study

<1> In the study list display area, click the target study.

<2> Correct the patient information or study information displayed in the

study/patient information input area.

<3> Click the Update button.

The data is overwritten and updated.

NOTE: 1. Clicking the Register button without overwriting causes the study to be
registered as a different study.

2. The contents of Completed Studies (information of completed studies)

cannot be modified.

(3) Canceling the appointment

<1> In the study list display area, click the target study.

<2> Click the Delete button to cancel it.

<3> A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click the OK button. The

appointment is canceled.

No. 2B308-309EN
360
10.9 Data Retrieval From the HIS/RIS
When an HIS/RIS is used, the study information or patient information
registered as an angiography study in the HIS/RIS server can be used.

10.9.1 Updating the received data

The information registered in the HIS/RIS server can be automatically
received at the time of startup of the system. After the power of the system
is turned ON, update the data with the received data, following the steps
described below.

<1> Click the Get Worklist setting button.

<2> Select the appropriate option in the Modality and System selection field in
the Get Worklist dialog box and click the OK button.

<3> Click the Get Worklist button.

No. 2B308-309EN
361
10.10 Transferring the Data to the HIS/RIS
When an HIS/RIS is used, various types of information concerning the study
can be transferred to the HIS/RIS server.

<1> Click the MPPS button. The MPPS dialog box is displayed.

<2> Enter the information in the information display area as required.

<3> Of the buttons described below, click the appropriate button.

Transfers the input information to the HIS/RIS server Completed button

Transfers the discontinued study information to the Discontinued button
HIS/RIS server
Saves the input information temporarily in the Save button
system
Cancels input of the information Cancel button

NOTE: It is possible to automatically open the MPPS dialog box when the study is
finished. For the setting procedure, see the reference manual.

No. 2B308-309EN
362
10.11 RDS/RDSR Transfer
10.11.1 Automatic data transfer at the end of the examination
The dose data can be transferred to the specified server termination of the
examination (Finish Study).

<1> Perform Finish Study. The following dialog box opens.

<2> Confirm the settings in the dialog box.

<3> RDS transfer : Select the server for the transfer destination.
RDSR transfer : Confirm the server for the transfer destination.

<4> Click .

RDS transfer

RDSR transfer

No. 2B308-309EN
363
10.11.2 Data transfer during the examination
The dose data can be transferred to the specified server at the desired
timing during the examination.

<1> Open the [Acquisition] tab.

<2> Click . A dialog box opens.

<3> Click the [Transfer] button displayed in the dialog box.

NOTE: When data transfer during the examination is performed, fluoroscopy or

radiography is disabled for several seconds until data transfer is completed.

No. 2B308-309EN
364
NOTE: 1. The data in Region Examined selected at the time of study appointment is
also transferred.

2. The dose data can be transferred after the examination is completed.

<1> Select the Patient tab.

<2> Select "Completed Studies".
<3> Select the study to be transferred.
<4> Click or .
<5> The RDSR dialog box opens. Transfer the data in the same manner as
above.

3. Before performing RDS transfer/RDSR transfer, confirm that no error

message concerning dosimeter failure is displayed. If the dosimeter has
failed, the correct dose data is not output.

4. To perform RDS transfer/RDSR transfer, presetting must be performed in

Utility mode. For the setting procedure, refer to the reference manual.

5. A summary of the dose information can be recorded as an image. This

image contains a summary of the dose information only and is handled as a
part of a RUN image (*1). If it is desired to use this dose information
recording method, ask your Canon Medical Systems service representative
to change the system setting.

*1) The image of the dose information summary is created at the end of the
RUN image.

No. 2B308-309EN
365
No. 2B308-309EN
366
11. Fluoroscopy/Radiography
(Acquisition Mode)
After the operation for starting the study (Start Study) is performed, execute
study (fluoroscopy/radiography) in Acquisition mode. For the Start Study
procedure, refer to section 10 "Study Appointment".

[Fluoroscopy]

This section describes the procedure for basic fluoroscopy. For the
fluoroscopic image recording and fluoroscopy roadmapping procedures, see
the reference manual.

[Radiography]

This section describes the procedure for digital angiography (DA), one-shot
radiography, and digital subtraction angiography (DSA). For the procedure
for other radiographic techniques, see the reference manual.

Contents 11.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode

11.2 Selecting the Acquisition Program (Switching the Study
Protocol)
11.3 Fluoroscopy
11.4 DA / One-Shot Radiography
11.5 Digital Subtraction Angiography (DSA)
11.6 Various Settings for Fluoroscopy and Radiography
11.7 FPD Calibration

No. 2B308-309EN
367
WARNING: 1. Before performing a study, tell the patient not to move unless
otherwise instructed. Also, pay attention to patient movement during
the study to ensure that the patient does not move.
If the patient moves during the study and the patient's hand or leg
protrudes from the tabletop of the catheterization table or comes into
contact with a moving section of the system, the patient's hand or leg
may get caught in the system.

2. Before performing image acquisition, call the patient by the patient

name displayed on the in-room monitor and receive confirmation from
the patient. This ensures that the patient name displayed on the in-
room monitor corresponds to the actual patient.
If the acquired images (image data) and patient information (patient
data) do not match, the images are for a different patient and
misdiagnosis will result.
When images are to be acquired for a new patient, confirm the identity
of the new patient as described above.

3. Before performing a study, confirm that the images acquired during the
previous study are no longer displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor. If
the images are identified incorrectly, misdiagnosis will result.
The related information for the displayed image can be checked in the
Radiographic Sequence No. and Examination Date display fields of the
Image Related Information display area on the fluoroscopic monitor.

4. During fluoroscopy or radiography, if any abnormality that interferes

with diagnosis is found on the TV monitor (excessive halation occurs,
no images are displayed, etc.), immediately stop
radiography/fluoroscopy. Then contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative for inspection and repair.

CAUTION: 1. Instruct the patient not to touch the operating switches or other
objects on the tabletop. In addition, confirm that the patient observes
these instructions during the examination.

2. Confirm that the patient is immobilized securely by checking the

following points before the catheterization table is tilted for
examination. Attention also must be paid to the following check
points during examination.

• The patient immobilization band is not loose and holds the patient
firmly.
• The patient's shoulders are in contact with the shoulder rests.
• The patient's feet are in contact with the footrest.

No. 2B308-309EN
368
NOTICE: In the following cases, the radiography start timing may be delayed for
several seconds after the radiography switch is pressed.

(1) When radiography is performed during image display in thumbnail format,

during current patient serial image playback, or during image file switching

(2) When the radiography switch is pressed twice in rapid succession

(3) When an acquisition program is changed immediately before the

radiography switch is pressed

(4) When a study protocol is changed immediately before the radiography

switch is pressed

NOTE: 1. If the fluoroscopy/radiography settings are changed, FPD calibration may

start. Fluoroscopy or radiography cannot be performed during FPD
calibration.

2. If radiography is performed with the image magnified by the live zoom,

images with the magnification ratio set by the live zoom are acquired.
In addition, for the setting in which normal fluoroscopic images and
fluoroscopic images magnified by live zoom are displayed simultaneously,
images magnified by live zoom are acquired.

3. When all the conditions below hold, it may not be possible to display the
edges of the field on the image due to X-ray tube assembly target angle
limitations. Please be aware of this.
The conditions differ depending on the FPD used.
It is possible to eliminate missing sections on images by setting the SID as
specified in the table below.

FPD used FOV SID (*1) C-arm position

TFP-800A/B1 8" × 8" 101 cm or more The C-arm is located in a
diagonal orientation relative to
TFP-1200A
12" × 12" 110 cm or more the patient.
TFP-1200A/C2
TFP-1216A/A1 12" × 12" 96 cm or more
12" × 16" 109 cm or more

*1) Differs slightly depending on the conditions.

4. It is necessary to perform fluoroscopy before radiography in order to

calculate the radiographic conditions. If the settings for the anatomical
region and radiographic angle have not been changed from those used in
the previous radiography, however, fluoroscopy can be skipped.
Even if the acquisition program (*2) has been changed, fluoroscopy can be
skipped as long as the settings of the anatomical region and radiographic
angle have not been changed from those used in the previous radiography.

*2) Excluding rotational DSA, stepping DSA, and other programs that change
the radiographic angle or anatomical region during acquisition.

No. 2B308-309EN
369
11.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode
<1> Click the Acquisition tab to select Acquisition mode.

• Single-plane system

• Biplane system

No. 2B308-309EN
370
11.2 Selecting the Acquisition Program (Switching the Study
Protocol)
Before starting radiography, the acquisition program to be used for
radiography is selected from those registered in the study protocol selected
at the time of study appointment. In addition, the study protocol selected at
the time of patient appointment can be switched during studies.

11.2.1 Selecting the acquisition program

(1) Selection from the Program tab

<1> Click the region for which the target acquisition program is registered in the
human body model shown in the Program tab.

<2> Click the Gr. tab to which the target acquisition program is registered.

<3> In the displayed acquisition program list, click the target acquisition program.

(2) Acquisition Program list box

It is also possible to select the acquisition program from the Acquisition
Program list box.

NOTE: 1. If another acquisition program is selected during fluoroscopy, the selected

acquisition program is set after fluoroscopy is completed. Thus, radiography
with the selected acquisition program cannot be performed during
fluoroscopy. After fluoroscopy is completed, confirm that the selected
acquisition program is set and then start radiography.

2. If an acquisition program in which auto-positioning is interlocked is selected,

a blue lamp lights and the auto-positioning number is displayed as shown in
the figure below.

No. 2B308-309EN
371
11.2.2 Switching the study protocol
The study protocol selected at the time of patient appointment can be
switched during studies.

When the study protocol is switched, it is necessary to select the target

acquisition program again.

Note that if a study is started using the emergency study protocol

(Emergency), the study protocol cannot be switched.

<1> Click the [Protocol] tab and select a study protocol.

<2> Select the target acquisition program. For the selection procedure, refer to
subsection 11.2.1 "Selecting the acquisition program".

NOTE: When a study protocol is switched, fluoroscopic conditions (such as

fluoroscopy mode) selected for the old study protocol are also switched to
the fluoroscopic conditions selected for the new study protocol.

No. 2B308-309EN
372
11.3 Fluoroscopy
The basic procedure for fluoroscopy is described.

11.3.1 Procedure for fluoroscopy

(1) Basic settings

<1> Click the Fluoroscopy tab.

<2> Click the Switch to normal fluoroscopy button and confirm that the button
lights.

NOTE: The fluoroscopic conditions (kV, mA, ms) are set to those set in the study
protocol. For the procedure for checking and changing the conditions, refer
to subsection 11.3.2 "Detailed fluoroscopy settings".

No. 2B308-309EN
373
 (2) Fluoroscopic X-ray generation
Fluoroscopic X-rays are generated while the fluoroscopy start button is held
down. For the biplane system, when the fluoroscopy start buttons for the
frontal and lateral sides are pressed, biplane fluoroscopy is performed.

• Single-plane system

• Biplane system

NOTE: 1. If fluoroscopy is performed continuously for 10 minutes, X-ray exposure is

automatically stopped in accordance with the safety standards. Fluoroscopy
can then be resumed.

2. Fluoroscopy can be performed using the following switches. For details,

refer to each subsection specified below.

Fluoroscopy operation switch/button Subsection to refer to

Fluoroscopy footswitch 4.2 (3) "Fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room"
Footswitch (with function buttons) 4.8.1 (3) "Footswitch"

3. The desired fluoroscopic images can be saved. For details, refer to the
reference manual.

No. 2B308-309EN
374
 (3) High Level Control (HLC) fluoroscopy
High Level Control (HLC) fluoroscopy can be selected by using the HLC
fluoroscopy start button.

• Single-plane system

• Biplane system

WARNING: In HLC fluoroscopy, the maximum incident dose to the patient is higher
than the normal dose limitation. Do not use HLC fluoroscopy more
than necessary.

NOTE: 1. The procedure for selecting HLC mode is described in the locations specified
below. In HLC mode, use the fluoroscopy start button to start/terminate HLC
fluoroscopy.
Note that HLC mode cannot be selected in systems for the USA.

• System console : Refer to subsection 11.3.2 "Detailed fluoroscopy settings ".

• Function button : Refer to the reference manual.

2. Warning sounds (chimes) are generated during HLC fluoroscopy.

3. For the footswitch with function buttons, the HLC fluoroscopy start function
may not be assigned. For details, refer to subsection 4.8.1 (3) "Footswitch".

No. 2B308-309EN
375
11.3.2 Detailed fluoroscopy settings
The basic fluoroscopy setting procedure is described. For other settings,
refer to subsection 8.2 "Editing the Study Protocol/Acquisition Program" of
the reference manual.

(1) Setting the fluoroscopic conditions

The fluoroscopic conditions can be set using two methods: automatic setting
and manual setting. The setting method registered in the study protocol is
normally selected. However, it can be changed by following the steps
described below.

<1> Click the Set Fluoroscopic Conditions button.

<2> In the displayed Fluo X-ray dialog box, select the method for setting the
fluoroscopic conditions. This changes between auto and manual each time
the Fluoroscopic Conditions Switch button is clicked.

<3> When Manual is selected, set the fluoroscopic conditions in the Fluoroscopic
Conditions list box. The figure below shows the screen for the single-plane
system. For the biplane system, setting must be performed for both the
frontal and lateral sides.

If "Auto" has been selected for the fluoroscopic mode, the FOV can be
switched between "Normal Focus" (standard FOV) and "HD Focus" (high-
resolution FOV). (The middle focus, the small focus, and the automatic
focus are available for "Normal Focus" and "HD Focus".) Note that "Auto"
may not be selectable depending on the combination of the FPD and X-ray
tube assembly used.

No. 2B308-309EN
376
NOTE: When the values for kV, mA, and ms are set in Manual mode, the
fluoroscopic conditions to be actually used in fluoroscopy are calculated by
the system based on these values. Therefore, confirm the final set values in
the common information display area of the fluoroscopic condition display
section on the system console.

(2) Fluoroscopy mode selection

Select Fluoroscopy mode from the Fluoroscopy Mode Selection list box.
The following four modes are available. For the biplane system, selection is
the same for the frontal and lateral sides.

Low Low X-ray dose mode

Middle Between low and normal mode
Normal Normal X-ray dose mode
High High X-ray dose mode

(3) Fluoroscopy pulse rate selection

The fluoroscopy pulse rate can be selected in the Fluoroscopy Pulse Rate
list box. Select [Cont.] when continuous fluoroscopy is performed.

(4) Maximum incident dose rate selection (except for the USA)
Select HLC mode to set the maximum patient incident dose rate to
175 mGy/min. Place a check mark in the HLC Selection check box.

NOTE: 1. The Fluoroscopy mode can be changed using the function buttons. For
details, refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions Using Function Buttons" of
the reference manual.

2. If [High] is selected for Fluoroscopy mode, HLC mode is automatically

selected. Note that the setting can be changed so that HLC mode is not
automatically selected. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
In systems for the USA, HLC mode is not automatically selected, even if
[High] is selected.

No. 2B308-309EN
377
 (5) Confirming fluoroscopy mode
Click the Details button. The following information can be checked.
The figure below shows the screen for the single-plane system. For the
biplane system, the settings for both the frontal and lateral sides can be
checked.

Dose FPD incident dose

Beam Filter Beam hardening filter
Dose Limit Limit of the incident dose to the patient
ABC kV Mode ABC tube voltage

NOTE: 1. When the system is set so that the beam hardening filter is automatically
selected, "Auto" is displayed in the Beam Filter section. The filter that has
been selected automatically can be checked in the common information
display area. For details, refer to subsection 4.1.1 "Common information
display area".

2. The beam hardening filter used in combination can be checked. Click the
Additional Filter Info button on the Utility mode screen. The beam hardening
filter confirmation dialog is displayed.

No. 2B308-309EN
378
11.4 DA / One-Shot Radiography
A dynamic image is acquired in DA. The acquired image is automatically
stored in the RAID.

In one-shot radiography, a single still image is acquired at any timing during

radiography. The acquired image is automatically stored in the RAID.

11.4.1 One-shot radiography

Two types of one-shot radiography are available: one-shot radiography with
manual selection of the radiographic conditions and instant-shot radiography
for simplified radiography. Note that a footswitch with function buttons is
needed to perform instant-shot radiography.

Types and features of one-shot radiography

One-shot radiography Instant-shot radiography
Selecting an acquisition program Required Not required
Setting the radiographic conditions Manual or auto Auto

(1) One-shot radiography

One-shot radiography is for manually setting the radiographic conditions.
The procedures for performing image acquisition are basically the same as
those for DA. For details, refer to subsection 11.4.2 "DA / one-shot
radiography".

(2) Instant-shot radiography

Instant-shot radiography is a simplified version of one-shot radiography in
which the radiographic conditions can be set automatically. Instant-shot
radiography can be performed even when an acquisition program other than
one-shot radiography is selected.

Note, however, that a footswitch with function buttons is needed to perform

instant-shot radiography.

[Preparatory work]

Ask your service representative to assign the instant-shot radiography

function to a function button of the footswitch.

No. 2B308-309EN
379
[Image acquisition procedure]

To acquire a still image, step on the function button to which the instant-shot
radiography function has been assigned.

The figure below shows an example in which the instant-shot radiography

function has been assigned to function button 3 of the footswitch of a single-
plane system.

No. 2B308-309EN
380
11.4.2 DA / One-shot radiography

(1) Selecting the acquisition program

<1> To perform DA, select the DA program. To perform one-shot radiography,
select the one-shot radiography program. For the selection procedure, refer
to subsection 11.2 "Selecting the Acquisition Program (Switching the Study
Protocol)".

NOTE: 1. When DA is performed for a region in which direct X-rays can easily enter
the detector, such as the lower extremities, it is recommended that [DT-DA]
(Dynamic Trace DA) be selected for the acquisition program. The effects of
direct X-rays are reduced, ensuring the appropriate dose (image level). In
addition, flattening processing for the image background is enhanced as
compared to that in normal image processing.
Do not select Dynamic Trace for a region in which the entry of direct X-rays
is not significant. Doing so may result in halation.

2. For the biplane system, frontal single-plane radiography, lateral single-plane

radiography, and biplane radiography are switched by switching the
acquisition programs.

3. For the biplane system, the biplane acquisition program and the single-plane
acquisition program can be differentiated by the icon at the beginning of the
program name.

4. Biplane radiography (60 pps) (*1) is suitable for pediatric patients. If this
acquisition program is used for adult patients, image quality may be reduced.
In this case, select biplane DA with an acquisition rate of 30 pps or less.

*1) Selectable for systems with the biplane system kit 4 (XIDF-BPS804) used in
combination.

No. 2B308-309EN
381
(2) Checking/setting the acquisition program
<1> Open the Radiography tab.

<2> Confirm the radiographic condition setting method. Either Auto or Manual
has already been assigned to the selected acquisition program. Confirm the
setting method in the display area shown below.

<3> When Manual is selected, set the radiographic conditions in Tube Voltage,
Tube Current, and Pulse Width list boxes. The figure below shows the
screen for the single-plane system. For the biplane system, the settings for
both the frontal and lateral sides can be checked.

(3) Checking the contrast medium

When "Injector interlock" is selected, confirm that the contrast medium
injector is ready.

No. 2B308-309EN
382
 (4) Starting fluoroscopy
<1> Move the support unit and perform angle setting.

<2> Hold down the fluoroscopy start button. Fluoroscopy starts.

Press the fluoroscopy start button and perform fluoroscopy for 2 seconds or
more. The radiographic conditions are automatically calculated. For the
fluoroscopic procedures, refer to (2) "Fluoroscopic X-ray generation" of
subsection 11.3.1.

NOTE: If any of the following settings is changed after fluoroscopy, the X-ray
conditions must be set again. In this case, perform fluoroscopy again for at
least 2 seconds.

• Aperture or angle of the diagnostic X-ray beam limiting device blades or

compensation filter (including virtual collimation)
• C-arm angle
• Tabletop position
• FOV size

No. 2B308-309EN
383
 (5) Starting radiography
Press the X-ray exposure handswitch to the second stage.

For DA, X-ray generation continues while the button is held down.

For one-shot radiography, image acquisition is performed and completed

when the button is pressed.

NOTE: 1. It is possible to start or finish radiography using the footswitch installed in the
examination room.

2. When injector interlock is selected, radiography cannot be started before the

injector is ready.

3. When biplane radiography is selected, the following information items are

displayed for Total Time and No. of Frames.

• Total Time : Total acquisition time in biplane radiography

• No. of Frames : Number of repetitions of X-ray exposure at a single plane
(one side only).

CAUTION: 1. Hold down the radiography switch until the acquired images are played
back on the monitor. If the switch is released before the images are
played back, the images may not be acquired and radiography must be
performed again.

2. If the Injector interlock/non-interlock selection button blinks during

radiography, stop generating X-rays if required. If the button blinks, an
[Injector injection problem has occurred and injection is disabled. Though
interlock/non- radiography can be continued in this status, there is a possibility that
interlock selection target contrast images may not be acquired and that the study must be
button] performed again.

No. 2B308-309EN
384
11.4.3 Detailed settings of DA / one-shot radiography
Various conditions preset to the selected acquisition program can be
changed before starting radiography. For settings other than those
described below, refer to subsection 8.2 "Editing the Study
Protocols/Acquisition Program" of the reference manual. For the biplane
system, most of the settings are the same for the frontal and lateral sides.

(1) Setting the focus size

The focus size can be changed. For the biplane system, the focus size can
be changed independently for the frontal and lateral sides.

(2) Setting the acquisition rate and time

The acquisition rate and time for DA can be changed. Radiography is
stopped when the time set in the Time field has elapsed. Note that the
actual radiography time may be slightly longer than the set time.

(3) Setting the maximum pulse width

The maximum pulse width during X-ray generation for DA can be changed.
Note that it cannot be changed when Manual is selected for the radiographic
condition setting method.

NOTE: 1. Reducing the maximum pulse width is an effective way to suppress image
blurring resulting from motion such as the heartbeat. However, when the
maximum pulse width is reduced, the desired level of image quality may not
be obtained due to a reduction in image contrast etc. The maximum pulse
width should be adjusted to an appropriate value.

2. When radiography is to be performed using a 12-inch FPD with a matrix size

of 512 × 512 and an acquisition rate of 60 fps set, select a 6-inch or 8-inch
FOV. Otherwise, radiography is disabled.

No. 2B308-309EN
385
(4) Setting injector interlock
The timing of X-ray generation and contrast medium injection can be set for
DA.

<1> Click the Injector Interlock button.

<2> Select the delay time. X-ray exposure is started when the period after start
of contrast medium injection, set from the Delay Time spin box, has elapsed.

(5) Locking ABC

The ABC function can be locked at any timing during DA and brightness can
be fixed. Note that this function is not available when Manual is selected for
the radiographic condition setting method.

<1> Click the ABC Lock Delay button.

<2> Select the delay time: the ABC function is locked when the period after start
of radiography, set from the Delay Time spin box, has elapsed.

(6) Automatic transfer of images for Parametric Imaging

Images acquired in DA can be transferred automatically to the Angio
Workstation for Parametric Imaging. For the procedure, refer to (6)
"Automatic transfer of images for Parametric Imaging" in subsection 11.5.4.

No. 2B308-309EN
386
(7) Other settings
In addition to the settings described above, the following settings can be
changed.

<1> Click the Details button. The setting screen opens.

<2> Change the settings as required. The figure below shows the screen for the
single-plane system. For the biplane system, the settings can be changed
independently for the frontal and lateral sides.

(*1)

*1) DR compression is a function for automatically correcting the

brightness between high-intensity and low-intensity areas. When
image acquisition is to be performed with DR compression, place a
check mark in the DR compression checkbox.

No. 2B308-309EN
387
11.5 Digital Subtraction Angiography (DSA)
In DSA, subtraction is performed between images with and without contrast
medium to eliminate the non-vascular tissue and thus generate images
depicting only the blood vessels.

The acquired images are automatically saved on the RAID.

CAUTION: For images with significant differences in brightness level within the
FOV, insert the appropriate compensation filter to decrease the
differences in brightness level. For such images, halation cannot be
corrected by gain adjustment.
If gain adjustment is performed for such images, on the monitor it may
seem that the halation has been corrected. However, the displayed
image may differ significantly from the actual image.

NOTE: 1. As advanced DSA radiographic techniques, stepping DSA, rotational DSA,

and AlphaCT can be performed. Refer to the reference manual for the
image acquisition procedures.

• Stepping DSA (option)

Stepping DSA is used to acquire information for generating a Panoramic

View of vascular images of the lower extremities. DSA of the lower
extremities is performed in several steps (each of the steps is of similar
size).

• Rotational DSA (option)

DSA is performed while the tube support arm is rotated. Angiographic

images for the region of interest can be acquired continuously in the
specified range.

• 3D-DSA, AlphaCT (option)

3D-DSA and AlphaCT are used to acquire information for generating three-
dimensional images for the region of interest.

2. When DSA is performed for a region in which direct X-rays can easily enter
the detector, such as the lower extremities, it is recommended that [DT-DSA]
(Dynamic Trace DSA) be selected for the acquisition program. The effects
of direct X-rays are reduced, ensuring the appropriate dose (image level). In
this case, the same image processing as in standard DSA is applied to the
image. When [DT-DSA] is selected, flattening processing for the image
background is enhanced as compared to that in normal image processing.
Do not select Dynamic Trace for a region in which the entry of direct X-rays
is not significant. Doing so may result in halation.

No. 2B308-309EN
388
NOTE: 3. When the Realtime auto pixel shifting function (RAPS function) is selected,
minor misalignment between the contrast image and the mask image is
corrected automatically and the corrected images are saved during DSA
acquisition. If additional correction is required, perform pixel shifting for the
saved images.

4. When acquisition program [DT-DSA] (Dynamic Trace DSA) is selected, the

brightness of the region of interest can be changed in three levels. Select
the brightness level using the "Dynamic Trace Parameter" list box before
starting radiography (fluoroscopy). The differences between the parameters
are shown in the table below.

Dynamic Trace Brightness of the region of interest in DT-DSA

Parameter During DSA During fluoroscopy (*1)
1 Same as in standard DSA Brighter than in standard fluoroscopy
2 (*2) Brighter than Param. 1 by one level
3 Brighter than Param. 1 by two levels

*1) Background flattening is applied when the brightness is changed. The

parameter of this processing is the same for 1 to 3.

*2) The default setting of "Dynamic Trace Parameter" is 2.

No. 2B308-309EN
389
11.5.1 DSA procedure

(1) Acquisition program selection

Select the DSA program. For the selection procedure, refer to subsection
11.2 "Selecting the Acquisition Program (Switching the Study Protocol)".

(2) Checking/changing the program settings

Check the preset program settings and change them if required. For the
procedure, refer to section 8 "System Presetting (Utility Mode)" of the
reference manual.
The figure below shows the screen for the single-plane system. For the
biplane system, the settings can be checked and changed independently for
the frontal and lateral sides.

(3) Checking the contrast medium

<1> Confirm that the contrast medium injector is ready.

<2> Confirm that Injector interlock is selected to automatically inject the contrast
medium at the specified timing.

(4) Performing fluoroscopy

Press the fluoroscopy start button and perform fluoroscopy for 2 seconds or
more. The radiographic conditions are calculated automatically.
For the fluoroscopic procedures, refer to (2) "Fluoroscopic X-ray generation"
of subsection 11.3.1.

No. 2B308-309EN
390
 (5) Starting radiography
Perform Test Shot to confirm that the radiographic conditions are appropriate.
(Check whether or not the halation level is appropriate.)
After confirmation, start radiography.

<1> Confirm that the Test Shot checkbox is checked. If not, place a check mark.

<2> Press the first stage of X-ray exposure handswitch.

The Test Shot image is displayed on the monitor in the examination room.

<3> Check the degree of halation. The halation areas are displayed black.

<4> If halation correction is required, release the handswitch to stop test exposure
and correct halation, following the steps described below. If halation
correction is not necessary, proceed with step <5> to start radiography.

(a) Tilt the Menu operating lever toward/away from you to correct the halation.

(b) Press the top button of the Menu operating lever to set the corrected result.

Location of the menu operating lever

Main console Refer to subsection 4.2 "Main Console".
Tableside console Refer to subsection 4.3 "Tableside Console".

<5> Start radiography. Press the X-ray exposure handswitch to the second
stage. Be sure to hold it down until image acquisition is completed.

CAUTION: Keep the X-ray exposure handswitch ON until the Test Shot image is
played back on the monitor in the examination room. Otherwise, X-ray
exposure is interrupted and Test Shot may need to be performed again.

No. 2B308-309EN
391
NOTE: 1. When the specified number of images are acquired, radiography for the next
stage is started automatically with the corresponding acquisition conditions.
When the radiography for the last stage is complete, radiography is
terminated automatically.

2. Test Shot can be omitted, but images may be acquired with darker
conditions than expected. Check the images in advance with Test Shot to
acquire better-quality images.

3. For details concerning halation correction, refer to subsection 11.5.2

"Halation correction".

4. Radiography can be started and terminated using the Radiography Start

button of the footswitch in the control room. If test exposure is performed
using the footswitch and halation correction is then found to be necessary,
immediately stop exposure. If the footswitch is kept pressed, the system
proceeds to the next radiography step.

5. When injector interlock is selected, radiography cannot be started until the

injector is ready.

No. 2B308-309EN
392
11.5.2 Halation correction
If there is halation in the Test Shot image, one of the following two methods
can be used to reduce the halation: Quick correction or Correction with SEC
Hold.

CAUTION: The halation correction value calculated during gain adjustment must
be considered as the reference value. In addition, the Test Shot image
displayed in the halation area must be considered as the reference
image.
For images with significant differences in brightness level within the
FOV, halation cannot be corrected using the calculated correction
value. If gain adjustment is performed for such images, on the monitor
it may seem that the halation has been corrected. However, the actual
image is not corrected and may differ significantly. In order to prevent
this problem, insert the appropriate compensation filter to decrease the
differences in brightness level in such images.

(1) Quick correction

This is a simple method of gain adjustment for halation correction.

<1> When halation is seen in the Test Shot image, release the first stage of the
X-ray exposure handswitch and perform gain adjustment as follows.

NOTE: 1. When thumbnail display is being performed on the reference monitor, the
gain cannot be adjusted even if the X-ray exposure handswitch is turned
OFF after Test Shot is completed.
In this case, perform the following steps to adjust the gain.

(1) Terminate the function currently being executed on the reference monitor.

(2) Select the monitor on which the Test Shot images are displayed. Each time
the Image processing target selection button on the main console is pressed,
selection is switched between the fluoroscopic monitor and the reference
monitor.

(3) Click the DSA Gain button in the menu display area of the reference monitor.

(4) Adjust the gain and apply the setting. Refer to <2> and <3> below.

2. When the DSA Gain button is selected in the menu display area of the
reference monitor, the menu display area gain value (%) is displayed.

<2> Adjust the gain.

Adjust the gain while checking the image halation.

If the gain needs to be increased, push the Menu operating lever away from
you.

If the gain needs to be reduced, pull the Menu operating lever toward you.

No. 2B308-309EN
393
 <3> Set the gain.

Press the Menu operating lever.

After the gain is set, the system is set to the SEC HOLD status.

<4> Resume DSA.

Check the halation again with a Test Shot image. If the halation is corrected,
hold down the second stage of the X-ray exposure handswitch and continue
DSA. If the halation still needs to be corrected, release the first stage of the
X-ray exposure handswitch and adjust the gain again.

NOTE: After halation correction, it is possible to omit Test Shot and start DSA
directly. However, if the halation correction is insufficient, images with an
appropriate brightness may not be obtained. Use Test Shot even after gain
adjustment to acquire better-quality images.

(2) Correction with SEC Hold

The gain can also be corrected using the SEC Hold function. Refer to
subsection 11.5.3 "SEC Hold" for further information.

No. 2B308-309EN
394
11.5.3 SEC Hold
It is possible to perform DSA by setting the radiographic conditions manually.

NOTE: After setting the radiographic conditions, it is possible to omit Test Shot and
start DSA directly. However, images with an appropriate brightness may not
be obtained. Use Test Shot to acquire better-quality images.

<1> Click the Hold button.

The radiographic conditions can be set manually.

The figure below shows the screen for the single-plane system. For the
biplane system, setting can be performed for both the frontal and lateral
sides.

<2> Change the conditions if required. The items below can be changed.

Tube Voltage (kV) : Radiographic tube voltage

Tube Current (mA) : Radiographic tube current
Pulse Width (ms) : Radiographic X-ray pulse width (*1)
Focus : X-ray focus size
Gain (%) : Gain

*1) The conditions cannot be changed.

<3> Click the Set button after changing the gain on the Radiography tab.

NOTE: 1. Gain% is linked to the gain adjustment in the examination room. Therefore,
if the gain is corrected in the examination room, the SEC Hold status should
be set automatically.

2. If the setting for the radiographic conditions is Manual, the radiographic

conditions are not set automatically even if fluoroscopy for automatic setting
is performed. The Manual setting must be released before Auto can be set.

3. Click the Hold button again to release the Manual setting for the radiographic
conditions and then select Auto again.

4. It is possible to preset whether the SEC Hold conditions are retained. If the
SEC Hold status is retained, the radiographic conditions are fixed but the
gain adjustment value is reset to 100%.

5. Due to the specifications of the system, often fluoroscopy cannot be

performed with the manually set values.

No. 2B308-309EN
395
11.5.4 Detailed settings for DSA
The conditions preset in the selected acquisition program can be changed
before image acquisition. For other settings, refer to subsection 8.2 "Editing
the Study Protocols/Acquisition Program" of the reference manual.

(1) Injector interlock selection

The acquisition timing and contrast medium injection timing can be set.

<1> Click the Injector Interlock button.

<2> Select one of the following two contrast medium injection timings.

• Acquiring a mask after injecting contrast medium

Select Mask Delay. In this case, set the time between injecting the contrast
medium and starting mask image acquisition. Refer to <3> below.

• Injecting the contrast medium after acquiring a mask

Select Injection Delay. Contrast medium injection starts after completion of

mask image acquisition.

<3> When Mask Delay is selected, set the time between injecting the contrast
medium and starting mask image acquisition.

No. 2B308-309EN
396
 (2) Setting of the acquisition parameters for mask images and
contrast images
The acquisition rate (Rate), the number of images summed to obtain the
average (Add), the number of acquired frames (Frames), the acquisition time
(Time), and the delay time for the start of the next stage of mask
image/contrast image acquisition can be checked or set.
Four stages of contrast image acquisition can be set (Contrast1 to Contrast4).

<1> Enter the parameter values to be set.

Rate : The acquisition rate can be set here.

Add : The number of summed images can be set here.

Frames : The number of acquired frames can be set here. If the

acquisition time is set, the number of acquired frames is
calculated automatically.
The mask stage can be displayed when Mask Record is
selected.

Time(s) : The acquisition time can be set here. If the acquisition rate
and the number of acquired frames are set, the acquisition
time is calculated automatically.

Note that the actual acquisition time may be slightly longer

than the time set here.

Delay Time(s): The delay time between completing acquisition for the
previous stage and starting acquisition for the next stage can
be set. The delay time set before mask image acquisition is
the time between injecting contrast medium and starting
mask image acquisition. See (1) "Injector interlock selection"
for further information.

NOTE: 1. The number of stages that can be set is restricted according to the conditions
such as the set acquisition time, the number of acquired frames, etc.

2. The number of acquired frames is automatically set to a multiple of the

number of set summed images.

No. 2B308-309EN
397
NOTE: 3. When DSA is performed for a region in which direct X-rays can enter the
detector, the image brightness may not be uniform in areas with and without
direct X-rays. If the image brightness is not uniform, it is advisable to acquire
a mask image and a contrast image using the same acquisition rate to
reduce brightness nonuniformity. It is also possible to reduce nonuniformity
by placing a compensation filter in the area where direct X-rays enter the
detector (even when different acquisition rates are used).

(3) Recording mask images

Mask images can be saved on the RAID. Place a check mark in the Mask
Record checkbox.

The number of acquired images is displayed in the Frames column.

(4) Check and change the AEC parameter settings

Check and change the AEC parameter settings if required.

<1> Click the AEC Param. button.

The AEC Parameter Setting dialog box is displayed.

The figure below shows the screen for the single-plane system. For the
biplane system, setting can be performed for both the frontal and lateral
sides.

<2> Check and change the AEC parameter settings if required.

Target kV : The target tube voltage can be set here.

Tube Voltage : The maximum and minimum values can be set here.
Pulse Width : The maximum and minimum values can be set here.
Focus : The X-ray focus size can be set here.
When Auto is selected, the X-ray focus size is automatically
selected. The focus sizes for automatic selection can be
selected from L-M-S or M-S.

L-M-S The focus size is automatically set to large, medium, or small.

M-S The focus size is automatically set to medium or small. For
certain X-ray tube assemblies used in combination, focus size is
restricted to medium only.

AEC ROI : The ROI used for adjusting the AEC can be set here.

No. 2B308-309EN
398
 (5) Check and set the AEC dose (standard dose)
Set the standard detector incident dose per X-ray exposure.

(6) Automatic transfer of images for Parametric Imaging

The target images for Parametric Imaging acquired in DSA can be
transferred automatically to the Angio Workstation. Enable the automatic
transfer function by following the procedure described below.

<1> Select the parameter for Parametric Imaging. For details of the parameters,
refer to the operation manual for the XIDF-AWS801 (Parametric Imaging
functional volume).

<2> Click the [PI Auto Transfer] button to enable the automatic transfer function.

NOTE: 1. The automatic transfer function can be enabled using the [PI Auto Transfer]
button in the menu display area on the reference monitor. Note, however,
that the parameter for Parametric Imaging set at the time of automatic
transfer cannot be set in the menu display area.

2. To manually transfer previously acquired images to the Angio Workstation,

use the [PI Parameter] or [PI Transfer] button. For details, refer to the
reference manual.

No. 2B308-309EN
399
 (7) Enabling the Realtime auto pixel shifting function
When the Realtime auto pixel shifting (RAPS) function is enabled, minor
misalignment between the contrast image and the mask image is corrected
automatically during DSA.

<1> Click the [Image Parameter] setting button in the [Details] dialog box.

<2> Place a checkmark in "RAPS".

NOTE: Depending on the positional relationship between the contrast image and the
mask image, misalignment may not be corrected.

No. 2B308-309EN
400
 (8) Enabling the automatic mask creation function
This function is used to automatically create a mask image using peak
tracing. The created mask image is set as the mask image for the
fluoroscopy roadmap when DSA acquisition is completed.
To enable this function, click the [Image Parameter] setting button and place
a checkmark for "Make Mask" in the displayed Image Parameter dialog box.

NOTE: 1. The mask images created using the automatic mask creation function are
not saved as map images. When another mask image is selected, the
created mask image is lost.

2. When the automatic mask creation function is used, the mask images are
created using peak tracing. Therefore, the automatic mask creation function
should be disabled for CO2 contrast radiography.

No. 2B308-309EN
401
(9) Other settings
The following settings can also be changed.
The figure below shows the screen for the single-plane system. For the
biplane system, setting can be performed for both the frontal and lateral
sides.

<1> Click the Details button. The corresponding setting screen is displayed.

<2> Change the settings if required.

*1) [SUB/N] : Subtraction image negative display

[SUB/P] : Subtraction image positive display
[LIVE/N] : Live image negative display
[LIVE/P]: Live image positive display

<3> Live image (non-subtracted image) display setting

Display setting can be changed to [LIVE/N] (live image negative display) or

[LIVE/P] (live image positive display) using the procedure described below.
Note that the parameters set for [LIVE/N] and [LIVE/P] from the Details
button in step <2> will be changed accordingly.

Click the [Image Parameter] setting button. In the displayed

[Image Parameter] dialog box, change the parameters as required. Each
parameter can be set separately for [LIVE/N] and [LIVE/P]. After the setting
for one of them is completed by clicking the OK button, the other can be set.

No. 2B308-309EN
402
11.6 Various Settings for Fluoroscopy and Radiography
The setting procedures for the following functions used in fluoroscopy or
radiography are described.

11.6.1 Disabling X-ray exposure

11.6.2 Setting the View ID on images
11.6.3 Setting the contrast medium name on images
11.6.4 Stopwatch
11.6.5 Adjustment of gradation and spatial filter
11.6.6 LIH (Last Image Hold) selection
11.6.7 MIH (Map Image Hold) selection
11.6.8 Simultaneous display setting
11.6.9 Function setting

11.6.1 Disabling X-ray exposure

In order to ensure safety, X-ray exposure can be disabled. For the
procedure for disabling/enabling X-ray exposure, refer to subsection 5.10
"Disabling X-ray Exposure". Note that X-ray exposure is always disabled
before Start study operation is performed.

11.6.2 Setting the View ID on images

It is possible to set the View ID on stored fluoroscopic or radiographic
images as related information.

Select the View ID to be set in the View ID selection list box before starting
image acquisition.

No. 2B308-309EN
403
11.6.3 Setting the contrast medium name on images
It is possible to set the contrast medium name on stored fluoroscopic or
radiographic images as related information.

Select the contrast medium name to be set in the Contrast Medium Name
list box before starting image acquisition.

NOTE: 1. A View ID can be entered from the keyboard. Click the View ID selection list
box to enable editing and then enter the View ID in the list box using the
keyboard. After entry is completed, press the Enter key on the keyboard to
register the View ID.

2. Registered View IDs can be deleted during a study. To delete a View ID,
select the View ID from the View ID selection list box and then press the
Delete key or the Backspace key on the keyboard.
When the Enter key is pressed, the View ID is deleted.

3. If no comment is required, before radiography or image acquisition is

performed, delete the text in the list box using the Delete key or other
means, or select "Blank".

4. The items to be included in the list can be preset in the acquisition program.
For setting procedures, refer to subsections 8.2.7 "Editing the contrast
medium name" and 8.2.23 "Editing the View ID lists" of the reference
manual.

5. It is possible to select whether the selected View ID is used continuously

after radiography is completed or the acquisition program is changed. For
the setting procedure, refer to subsection 8.2.5 "System parameter setting"
of the reference manual.

No. 2B308-309EN
404
11.6.4 Stopwatch
The stopwatch function is provided for measuring time. In addition, a buzzer
sound can be generated at the set time using the timer function.

(1) Stopwatch
To start the timer : Click the Start button.

To stop the timer : Click the Stop button.

To reset the timer : Click the Reset button.

(2) Timer setting

<1> Click the Set Timer button.

<2> Set a timer in the Set Alarm spin box.

A timer can be set from 15 seconds to 59 minutes and 59 seconds.

<3> Select the timer operating mode using the Timer radio buttons.

A buzzer sound is generated at the set time.

A buzzer sound is generated repeatedly at the set time

intervals. A buzzer sound is generated for a certain period of
time and stopped automatically. It is then generated again at
the set time intervals.
The alarm function is set to OFF.

<4> Click the OK button to confirm the settings.

(3) Stopping the buzzer

Click the Buzzer Stop button or the stop button.

No. 2B308-309EN
405
11.6.5 Adjustment of gradation and spatial filter
Gradation (brightness and contrast) and the spatial filter of the images
displayed on the reference and fluoroscopic monitors can be adjusted.

<1> Click the Details button.

<2> Set the gradation and spatial filter in the corresponding setting areas shown
below.
The figure below shows the screen for the single-plane system. For the
biplane system, setting can be performed for both the frontal and lateral
sides.

*1) Selections are available from types A to H or NONE. The enhancement

frequency and enhancement level is different for each type.

No. 2B308-309EN
406
11.6.6 LIH (Last Image Hold) selection
The LIH function allows the last frame of fluoroscopy to be automatically
played back immediately after fluoroscopy is completed. To enable the LIH
function, check the LIH checkbox.

NOTE: 1. It takes approximately 2 seconds for the LIH image to be displayed after
fluoroscopy is completed. If the next fluoroscopy is started during this
period, the LIH image being prepared for display is canceled.

2. The LIH image is updated each time fluoroscopy is performed.

3. LIH is disabled in backup fluoroscopy.

4. The LIH image may disappear when an operation such as acquisition start or
image playback is performed. Display a new LIH image as required.

5. Virtual collimation and virtual filtering

For the LIH image, X-ray exposure field setting (virtual collimation) and
compensation filter position setting (virtual filtering) are enabled.
Since fluoroscopy does not need to be performed during setting, the
exposure dose can be reduced.
If setting is performed with the LIH image displayed, the beam limiting device
blades and compensation filters are displayed as graphics.

6. Virtual position

For the virtual position using the LIH image, it is possible to confirm the
exposure field for the next fluoroscopy to be performed. While the LIH
image is displayed, the exposure range after the position of the support
system or catheterization table is moved is displayed as a frame in the LIH
image.

No. 2B308-309EN
407
NOTE: [Method for selecting the virtual position]

In the menu display area of the reference monitor, select the [Virtual Pos
ON] button while the LIH image is displayed. The button display changes to
"Virtual Pos OFF" and the virtual position is displayed on the LIH image.

The initial setting of the virtual position (ON or OFF) can be selected for each
study protocol or each acquisition program. For the setting procedures, refer
to subsection 11.6.9 "Function setting".

[Method for canceling the virtual position]

Select the [Virtual Pos OFF] button. The button display changes to "Virtual
Pos ON] and the virtual position display is canceled.

[Limitations of the virtual position]

• The virtual position is not displayed if the exposure field after the support
system or the catheterization table is moved is outside the range of the LIH
image.

• The virtual position is not displayed if the arm angle for the support system is
tilted by 40° or more.

• If a tilting table is used in combination, the tilting angle of the tabletop is not
taken into consideration. The virtual position is displayed as tilt angle "0°"
even when the tabletop is tilted.

7. It is possible to display the selected ABC ROI or AEC ROI on the LIH image.
For the procedure, see the reference manual. Setting is made in the system
parameter setting for the study protocol in Utility mode.

8. When both LIH and MIH are selected, MIH is given priority over LIH, and as
a result the LIH images are not displayed. For details of MIH, refer to
subsection 11.6.7 "MIH (Map Image Hold) selection".

9. If "Last Image Hold (Spot)" is selected in spot fluoroscopy, the fluoroscopic

image for the area set by the beam limiting device blades is automatically
displayed as the LIH image.
For details of the spot fluoroscopy function, refer to the reference manual.

10. Depending on local regulations, it may not be possible to deselect "Last

Image Hold" and "Last Image Hold (Spot)".

11. If fluoroscopy is interrupted by pressing the [X-ray exposure disable] button,

the LIH image may not be displayed.

No. 2B308-309EN
408
11.6.7 MIH (Map Image Hold) selection
The selected map image can be set for the MIH image. Immediately after
fluoroscopy is completed, the display on the fluoroscopic monitor is switched
from the fluoroscopic image to the MIH image. This function is useful when
comparing the fluoroscopic image and the map image on the fluoroscopic
monitor.

Note that the map image is normally displayed on the reference monitor.
Therefore, both the fluoroscopic and reference monitors need to be viewed
when comparing the fluoroscopic and map images.

(1) MIH selection

<1> Select the desired map image and display it on the reference monitor.

<2> Perform either of the following steps. The map image selected in step <1> is
set to the MIH image and displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor.

• Move the cursor on the selected map image and right-click the mouse. In
the displayed menu, select [MIH Select].
• In the reference monitor menu, select [MIH Select].

NOTE: 1. The virtual collimator, virtual filtering, or virtual position cannot be used on
the MIH image.

2. A single frame of a dynamic image can be set to the MIH image. Select the
dynamic image and display the desired frame as a still image. Then set the
still image to the MIH image by performing the step described above. The
selected frame is stored as a map image and set to the MIH image.

3. For systems in which a photo image can be displayed on the reference

monitor, it is possible to set a photo image to the MIH image.

4. The MIH function cannot be used when the spot fluoroscopy function is
selected.

5. Depending on local regulations, it may not be possible to select "MIH".

(2) Canceling the MIH function

To cancel the MIH function, perform either of the following steps.

• Select [MIH] in the reference monitor menu.

• Remove the checkmark from the MIH checkbox.

No. 2B308-309EN
409
11.6.8 Simultaneous display setting (simultaneous display during
fluoroscopy)
During fluoroscopy, the fluoroscopic image and the fluoroscopic roadmap
image or live zoom image can be displayed simultaneously.

Image to be displayed Selection method

Fluoroscopic roadmap image Check the [Processed Image] checkbox.
Live zoom image Check the [Live Image] checkbox.

NOTE: 1. For simultaneous display during fluoroscopy, the images specified in the
table below are displayed on the fluoroscopy monitor and the reference
monitor.

When fluoroscopy
During fluoroscopy
is completed
Fluoroscopy • Fluoroscopic roadmap LIH image
monitor image
• Live zoom image
Reference monitor • Fluoroscopic image Not displayed (*1)

*1) It is possible to display reference images by changing the setting. Consult

with your Canon Medical Systems representative if display of reference
images is desired.
However, be aware of the following points when this setting is changed.

• Fluoroscopic acquisition of reference images by F-REC (S) or F-REC is not

possible.
In addition, fluoroscopic acquisition of LIH images by F-REC (S) or F-REC
for display on the fluoroscopy monitor is possible.
• Reference images are deleted when fluoroscopy is resumed or radiography
is started.

2. When the [Processed Image] checkbox is checked, the fluoroscopic image is

displayed at the same magnification factor as the fluoroscopic roadmap
image.

No. 2B308-309EN
410
11.6.9 Function setting
The following functions set in the Function dialog box are described.

(1) Function setting

• FOV size selection
• Adjustment of the ABC brightness
• Live zoom
• Image inversion
• Virtual position selection
• Switching the positions of the left and right compensation filters
• Image recording to the VCR
• RDSR transfer
• Fluoroscopic timer setting
• Image-related information selection
(2) Patient position setting
(3) Large-screen monitor layout selection (option)

(1) Function setting

<1> Click . The corresponding [Function] dialog box opens.

NOTE: Function setting can be performed for each study protocol. Open the
"Function" dialog box by performing the following procedures and then
perform the required setting.

<1> Open the [Utility] tab.

<2> Click the [Protocol Presets] button.
<3> Enter the user name and the password correctly.
<4> In the displayed "Protocol Presets" window, select the study protocol to be
edited and then click the [EDIT] button.
<5> On the displayed study protocol editing screen, click the button indicated in
the figure below.
Confirm that the "Function" dialog box is displayed.

No. 2B308-309EN
411
 <2> Click .

<3> Change the settings. For details, refer to the following pages. For the
biplane system, setting can be performed for both the frontal and lateral
sides.

<4> Click to set the changes.

FOV size selection

<1> Select the FOV size.

Select the appropriate size in the FOV list box. The image size is enlarged
or reduced depending on the selected size.

NOTE: The FOV size can also be changed from the main console or the tableside
console. Refer to subsections 4.2 "Main Console" and 4.3 "Tableside
Console".

No. 2B308-309EN
412
 Adjustment of the ABC brightness
The ABC brightness can be adjusted if Auto Control is selected as a
fluoroscopic condition.

<1> Select the adjustment value in the ABC Brightness spin box.

The higher the value, the brighter the monitor image.

Live zoom
The magnification ratio of the fluoroscopic images (including LIH images)
can be changed digitally.

<1> Select the magnification ratio in the live zoom list box.
The fluoroscopic images will be magnified accordingly.

NOTE: 1. If live zoom is selected, the X-ray beam limiting device moves in response to
magnification of the image.

2. Live zoom can also be selected using the corresponding function button.
Refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions Using Function Buttons" of the
reference manual for details.

3. When FPD TFP-1200C/A1 or TFP-1200C/A2 is used in combination, select

a standard FOV size (12 inches to 6 inches).

Image inversion
The image displayed on the monitor can be laterally/vertically inversed.

<1> Select the image inversion direction using the image inversion selection
checkboxes.

No. 2B308-309EN
413
 Switching the positions of the left and right compensation
filters
The positions of the left and right compensation filters can be switched.

<1> Select the positions of the left and right compensation filters using the
Compensation Filter Switch radio buttons.

Virtual position setting

<1> Select the desired virtual position initial setting (On: enabled, Off: disabled).

Recording images on a VCR

Fluoroscopic/radiographic images can be automatically recorded on a VCR
using the following procedure.

<1> Insert a video cassette into the VCR.

<2> Click the VCR Selection checkbox to place a check in it.

<3> Select the types of images to be recorded from the list box.

Fluo. Only fluoroscopic images are recorded.

Rad. Only radiographic images are recorded.
Fluo&Rad. Both fluoroscopic and radiographic images are recorded.

NOTE: For details regarding the VCR connection or settings, contact your Canon
Medical Systems representative.
For the VCR operating procedures, read the operation manual provided with
the VCR.

No. 2B308-309EN
414
 RDSR transfer
The dose data is transferred to the specified server when the [Transfer]
button is clicked. Refer to subsection 10.11 "RDS/RDSR Transfer" for
details.

Fluoroscopy timer setting

The fluoroscopy timer can be set so that a buzzer sounds when the specified
fluoroscopic time is reached.

<1> Select the time period for generating buzzer sound in the fluoroscopy timer
setting list box.

If the fluoroscopy timer buzzer sounds, press the function button to which
the fluoroscopy timer buzzer stop function is assigned. The buzzer stops
and the fluoroscopy timer is reset to 0.
The fluoroscopy timer buzzer stop function is assigned to the following
function button on the tableside console as the default setting.

No. 2B308-309EN
415
NOTE: 1. For systems to be shipped to the USA, the fluoroscopic time is fixed to
5 minutes for compliance with the HHS standards applicable from June 2006
onwards.
The fluoroscopy timer setting list box is therefore not provided and setting is
not possible.

2. When the system power is turned OFF forcibly during a study using the
Power OFF button and the system power is then restarted, the fluoroscopy
timer is set to 5 minutes automatically. If backup fluoroscopy is started in
this status, the fluoroscopy timer counts up starting from 0.

3. The fluoroscopy timer can be preset to the study protocol. For details, see
the reference manual.

4. If a function other than the fluoroscopy timer buzzer stop function is to be

assigned to the function button in the positioning operating section, it is
recommended that the function should be assigned to a function button in
the image operating section.
When the satellite console (option) is used in combination, it is also possible
to assign the function to a function button on the satellite console.

Image-related information selection

The information to be attached to the image is selected.

• Radiographic object (Quality Control Image)

Radiographic object Selection method

[Patient] Uncheck the checkbox.
[Phantom] Check the checkbox.

• Study content (Procedure Intent)

Study content Selection method

[Diagnosis] Select [Diagnostic Intent].
[Therapy] Select [Therapeutic Intent]
[Diagnosis + therapy] Select [Combined Diagnostic and Therapeutic
Procedure].

No. 2B308-309EN
416
 (2) Patient position registration
The patient position at the time of examination is recorded as image-related
information.

<1> Click . The corresponding dialog box opens.

<2> Click .

<3> Select the patient position to be registered.

<4> Click to set the selection.

CAUTION: Be sure to confirm that the selected patient position corresponds to

the actual patient position and then set the selection. If an incorrect
position is selected, incorrect data is transferred to the destination
server.

NOTE: For the procedures for checking and editing image-related information, refer
to the reference manual.

No. 2B308-309EN
417
 (3) Large-screen monitor layout selection (option)
When the optional large-screen monitor is used, the display layout of the
large-screen monitor can be changed using the [Function] dialog.

<1> Click . The corresponding dialog box opens.

<2> Click .

<3> Select the desired layout and then click [Set].

To display all of the layouts, click [All].

<4> Click to set the selection.

NOTE: The large-screen monitor layout can also be selected in the menu display
area of the examination room monitor. Select the layout in the list displayed
by clicking [Layout]. It is also possible to change the layout using [<Layout]
or [Layout>]. For the menu operating procedures, refer to subsection 12.3
"Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and Selecting
Functions".

No. 2B308-309EN
418
11.7 FPD Calibration
This subsection describes the FPD calibration procedure.
For the FPD, artifacts may appear in images due to the effects of the internal
temperature etc. These artifacts can be eliminated by performing calibration.

The following two calibration methods are available.

(1) Automatic calibration

At the time of system startup, calibration is automatically performed if
required.

(2) Manual calibration

Calibration can be performed at the desired timing. This method should be
used if artifacts are observed during the study.

<1> Select the FPD Calibration button in the menu display area on the reference
monitor.
Selection buttons for calibration (Fluoroscopy button, Radiography button, All
button) are displayed.
For the biplane system, select the [FPD Calib. (F)] or [FPD Calib. (L)] button.

<2> To perform calibration for fluoroscopy, select the Fluoroscopy button.

Selection button Function Processing time (*1)

Fluoroscopy Executes fluoroscopy calibration Approx. 10 to 20 s
Radiography (*2) Executes radiography calibration Approx. 10 to 50 s
All (*3) Executes calibration for both Approx. 50 to 70 s
fluoroscopy and radiography
Abort Aborts calibration –
EXIT Closes the selection menu –

*1) The processing time may be longer than that indicated here depending on
the conditions.

*2) This is selectable for a biplane system.

*3) This is selectable when the 8-inch FPD is used in combination in the biplane
system.

No. 2B308-309EN
419
 Menu display area

Reference monitor

NOTE: 1. For the function button selection procedure in the menu display area, refer to
subsection 12.3 "Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and
Selecting Functions".

2. Fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed until calibration is

completed.
During calibration, the FPD Calibration display is lit in the status display area
of the fluoroscopic monitor.

No. 2B308-309EN
420
12. Image Playback
This section describes the procedure for playing back the acquired images.

Contents 12.1 Selecting Map Image/Dynamic Image

12.2 Dynamic Image Playback
12.3 Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and
Selecting Functions

No. 2B308-309EN
421
NOTE: 1. If the displayed image disappears during operation, switch to another image
and select the target image again.

2. In dynamic image playback, border lines may appear due to a temporary

image shift in the horizontal direction. In this case, reverse the frames and
perform frame-advance playback.

3. The frame from which image playback of the acquired fluoroscopic image is
started can be specified. The frames before the specified frame are not
played back.
If the acquired fluoroscopic image is played back from the first frame, dark
images are played back for the first few frames. To skip these, specify a
playback start frame located after the dark frames in the sequence.
The playback start frame can be set in site setup in Utility mode. For details,
see the reference manual.

4. For the biplane system, the acquired images listed below cannot be played
back at the same rate as for image acquisition. Check the playback rate
(playback speed) in the table below.

• Images acquired in high-speed biplane radiography (option)

• Fluoroscopic images acquired in high-speed biplane fluoroscopy (option)

Fluoroscopic conditions Playback rate

Acquisition mode Acquisition rate (playback speed)
2
High-speed biplane 1024 8/10/12 bits 30 pps Maximum 15 pps
radiography 2
512 8/10/12 bits 60 pps Maximum 30 pps
2
High-speed biplane 1024 10 bits 20 pps Maximum 15 pps
fluoroscopy 30 pps
(Fluoroscopic
image acquisition)

No. 2B308-309EN
422
12.1 Selecting Map Image/Dynamic Image
The procedure for selecting a map image (reference image) or dynamic
image to be played back is described here.

NOTE: 1. A map image is stored temporarily as a reference image during an

examination. For the procedure for saving map images, refer to the
reference manual.

2. The dynamic image including the selected map image can be played back.
For the playback procedure, refer to section 2 "Descriptions of Function
Buttons" of the reference manual.

(1) Selecting the desired image from the thumbnail display

Map images or dynamic images can be displayed on the reference monitor
as thumbnails, and the image to be played back can be selected.

(1.1) Switching between menu display and thumbnail display

If the function selection menu is displayed in the thumbnail display area,

press the menu display button. The thumbnails are displayed. To return to
the menu display, press the button again.
[Menu display]
(1.2) Switching between map image thumbnails and dynamic image
thumbnails

Double-click the top of the thumbnail display area, where "MAP" or "RUN" is
displayed, to switch between the display of map image thumbnails and
dynamic image thumbnails.

• MAP: Map image thumbnail

• RUN: Dynamic image thumbnail

No. 2B308-309EN
423
 (1.3) Selecting the desired image

Select the desired image by double-clicking the corresponding thumbnail.

The selected image is displayed full-screen.

For the procedure for playing back the selected dynamic image, refer to
subsection 12.2 "Dynamic Image Playback".

NOTE: 1. It is possible to change the number of images displayed in the thumbnail

from seven to five. If it has been changed to five images, the size of each
image is enlarged and "view ID" is displayed on each image. In addition, the
radiography angle for the frontal side is displayed at the lower left of the
screen and the radiography angle for the lateral side is displayed at the lower
right of the screen.
For biplane images, the radiographic angle for the frontal side is displayed at
the lower left of the image and the radiographic angle for the lateral side is
displayed at the lower right of the image.
To change the number of images to five, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.

2. If a slide bar is displayed in the thumbnail display area, additional thumbnails

are present and can be viewed by scrolling using the mouse.

3. The display can be switched between the map image thumbnails and
dynamic image thumbnails using the corresponding function buttons (if these
functions have been assigned to function buttons). Press the function button
corresponding to the type of thumbnail to be displayed. Pressing the same
button again switches the display to the other type of thumbnail.

: Map image thumbnail display button

: Dynamic image thumbnail display button

4. Each time the menu button assigned to the function button is pressed, the
display is cycled between the menu, dynamic image thumbnails, and map
image thumbnails, in that order.

5. Thumbnails can be selected using the menu operating lever. Move the lever
upward/downward to select the image and press the lever to set the
selection.

6. When two reference monitors are used, the monitor for image display can be
selected using one of the following methods.

• Select the desired thumbnail using the menu operating lever. When the
monitor selection buttons [Ref.1] [Ref.2] are displayed, select the desired
monitor using the lever. Press the lever to set the selection.
• Move the cursor to the target thumbnail using the mouse and press the right
mouse button. The monitor selection buttons [Ref.1] [Ref.2] are displayed.
Move the cursor to [Ref.1] or [Ref.2] as desired and press the right or left
mouse button.
• Move the cursor to [Ref.1] or [Ref.2] as desired and click it to select it. Then,
move the cursor to the desired thumbnail and double-click it.

No. 2B308-309EN
424
(2) Selecting images in catalog display mode
Multiple map images or dynamic images can be displayed on the reference
monitor in catalog display mode, and the image to be played back can be
selected.

<1> Switch from full screen display to catalog display using the following buttons
assigned to the function buttons.

Displayed image Function button (*1)

Dynamic image Dynamic image catalog button
Map image Map image catalog button

*1) For details, refer to section 2 "Descriptions of Function Buttons" of the

reference manual.

<2> Select the image from the catalog using the menu operating lever on the
console. Press the lever to set the image.

No. 2B308-309EN
425
 NOTE: In addition to image selection, the following operations can be performed
using the mouse.

• Fullscreen display : Double-click the thumbnail of the desired image.

• Scroll : Move the cursor to the catalog display and roll the
mouse wheel.
• Menu selection : Move the cursor to the catalog display and press the
right mouse button.

Menu Function
Full Screen Displays the image on which the cursor is placed in
fullscreen mode.
Home Displays the first page of the catalog display.
End Displays the last page of the catalog display.
Previous Page Displays the previous page of the catalog display.
Next Page Displays the next page of the catalog display.

(3) Switching to the previous/next image

The image currently displayed full-screen on the monitor can be switched to
the previous image or next image.
Use the Dynamic image file selection button or the Map image file selection
button to switch the image (*1).

• To display the previous image : Press the - end of the button once.
• To display the next image : Press the + end of the button once.

[Dynamic image file *1) Switches are provided with the following consoles.
selection] • Main console
• Review console
• Tableside console
• Satellite console
[Map image file
selection]

NOTE: The bookmark function, which enables image display switching to be

restricted to bookmarked images, is provided. For the procedure for setting
bookmarks, refer to subsection 4.28 "Bookmark" of the reference manual.
Note that if there are no bookmarked images or the bookmark function is
disabled, image display switching can be restricted by selecting the images
between which display switching is to be performed.

No. 2B308-309EN
426
12.2 Dynamic Image Playback
The procedure for playing back the selected dynamic image is described.

(1) Playback from main console

Use the following control buttons to control dynamic image playback.

Playback To play back images, press the dynamic image

playback/pause button when image playback is not
being performed.
Pause To pause image playback, press the dynamic image
playback/pause button during image playback.
Playback speed • Fast playback
Press the frame feed/fast playback button during
image playback.
The playback speed increases each time the button is
pressed.
• Slow playback
Press the frame reverse feed/slow playback button
during image playback.
The playback speed reduces each time the button is
pressed.
* To return to the standard playback speed, press the
dynamic image playback/pause button to pause
image playback and then press the button again.
Frame feeding Press the frame feed/fast playback button when image
playback is paused.
Frame reverse feeding Press the frame reverse feed/slow playback button
when image playback is paused.

No. 2B308-309EN
427
(2) Image playback from the review console (option)
It is possible to play back dynamic images using the review console (option).
If the shuttle is released, it automatically returns to the center position and
image playback is stopped. To continue image playback, hold the shuttle at
the playback position.

Playback Turn the shuttle clockwise.

To stop playback, return the shuttle to the center
position.
Reverse playback Turn the shuttle counterclockwise.
To stop reverse playback, return the shuttle to the center
position.
Playback speed control Turn the shuttle farther for faster playback.
Frame advance Stop playback and turn the jog clockwise.
Frame reverse Stop playback and turn the jog counterclockwise.

(3) Playback from the tableside console

Use the following operation buttons to control dynamic image playback. The
playback procedure is the same as for playback from the main console. For
details, refer to (1) "Playback from main console".

No. 2B308-309EN
428
(4) Image playback using the mouse
If dynamic images are displayed full-screen on the monitor, they can be
played back using the mouse. Move the cursor to the reference monitor or
fluoroscopy monitor and operate the mouse as described below.

Playback (*1) To play back images, double-click the left mouse button
when image playback is not being performed.
Stop Double-click the left mouse button during image
playback.
Frame feeding Rotate the mouse wheel backward while image
playback is paused.
Frame reverse feeding Rotate the mouse wheel forward while image playback
is paused.

*1) When the desired dynamic image is selected from the dynamic image
thumbnails by double-clicking it, the selected image is displayed full-screen,
and image playback starts automatically.

No. 2B308-309EN
429
 12.3 Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and
Selecting Functions
This subsection describes the procedures for switching between menus on
the reference monitor and selecting the functions to be executed.

(1) Switching between menus

Moving the Menu operating lever to right once switches to the next menu
[Menu operating lever] and to left once switches to the previous menu.

(2) Switching to the HOME menu

Frequently used functions should be set in the HOME menu because it is
possible to immediately switch to the HOME menu.

To switch to the HOME menu, move the Menu operating lever to left or right
and hold it there for more than one second.

(3) Selecting the function buttons

<1> When the Menu operating lever is moved away from you once, the
immediately upper function button is selected; when it is moved toward you
once, the immediately lower function button is selected. If the lever is moved
and held there, the selection highlight continues to move in the
corresponding direction.

The selected button is enclosed by square brackets.

<2> Press the Menu operating lever to execute the selected function.

Switching to the HOME menu

Name A Name B Name C

Function button
selection
HOME
menu

Switching between menus

NOTE: Menu and function buttons can be selected using the mouse.

• Menu selection : Click or on the menu title.

• Function button selection : Click the desired button.

No. 2B308-309EN
430
13. Image Processing During a Study
(Exam Mode)
In Exam mode, it is possible to display an image that has already been
acquired during a study and to perform processing operations, including
distance measurement and annotation, on the displayed image. For details,
refer to section 4 "Image Processing During a Study" of the reference
manual.

Note that some image processing operations, such as gradation processing

(which changes the brightness and contrast of the image) and image
magnification, can be performed using the function buttons without switching
to Exam mode. For details, refer to section 2 "Descriptions of Function
Buttons" of the reference manual.

Contents Selecting Exam Mode Transferring Images for 3D

Reconstruction
Selecting Images Image Transfer to Printing Mode
Playing Back Dynamic Images Calibration (Manual)
Adjusting the Image Gradation Bookmark
Displaying Vital Signs Data No Export
Negative/Positive Reversal Setting the Display Position of
Images for Parametric Imaging
Resetting Negative/Positive
Reversal and Gradation
Processing
Image Rotation
Image Vertical Inversion
Image Lateral Inversion
Image Rotation/Image Inversion
Reset
Saving Photo Images
Transferring Images to the
Examination Room
Map Image Operation
Annotation
Display Shutter Function
Tracing Angiographic Images
Editing Subtraction Images
Remask (Change of Mask Image)
Distance Measurement
ROI Measurement
Stereo View for Rotational Images
Panoramic View
Checking/Editing the Image-
Related Information

No. 2B308-309EN
431
No. 2B308-309EN
432
14. Image File Management
(Directory Mode)
Directory mode is used to archive fluoroscopic or radiographic image data
saved (exported) in the RAID to media or DICOM servers and to read
(import) the data saved on media or DICOM servers.

For details, refer to section 5 "Image File Management" of the reference

manual.

Contents Entering Directory Mode

Data Search
Checking the Volume of the Data
Data Deletion
Archiving the Data to a CD-R/DVD±R
Data Transfer to a Network Server
Storing Images to the Specified Storage Destination by Image Type
(Auto Server)
Converting the Image File Format
Data Import
Data Transfer to Review Mode
Settings Related to Data Transfer
Editing the Image-Related Information/Checking Edit History
Rearrangement
Database Output
Confirmation of the Processing Status of Import and Export

No. 2B308-309EN
433
No. 2B308-309EN
434
15. Image Processing After
Completion of a Study (Review
Mode)
Stored images can be manipulated after a study is completed. These
operations are performed in Review mode.

For details, refer to section 6 "Image Processing After Completion of a

Study" of the reference manual.

Contents Selecting the Image to Be Processed

Switching the Target Patient
Playing Back Dynamic Images
Adjusting the Image Gradation
Displaying Vital Signs Data
Saving Photo Images
Annotation
Editing Subtraction Images
Distance Measurement
ROI Measurement
Stereo View for Rotational Images
Panoramic View
Checking/Editing the Image-Related Information
Image Transfer to Printing Mode
Calibration
Bookmark
No Export
Setting the Display Position of Images for Parametric Imaging

No. 2B308-309EN
435
No. 2B308-309EN
436
16. Printing (Printing Mode)
Printing is a function for printing hard copies of the acquired images. It
provides print-related operations, including changing image arrangements
and image deletion when creating virtual print images on the monitor, and
enables image data to be sent to an output device.

For details, refer to section 7 "Printing" of the reference manual.

Contents Printing Mode Selection

Print
Print Job
Layout Settings
Sheet/Image Arrangement Editing
Editing an Image
Checking the Processing Status of Printing

No. 2B308-309EN
437
No. 2B308-309EN
438
17. Moving and Storage
Contents 17.1 Moving
17.2 Storage

No. 2B308-309EN
439
17.1 Moving
If the unit is to be moved, contact your Canon Medical Systems
representative. If the unit is moved by the user or by personnel not
designated by Canon Medical Systems, the unit may be damaged.

17.2 Storage
(1) Environmental conditions for storage
The environmental conditions in the room in which the unit is stored should
be as specified below:

Ambient temperature 5°C to 45°C

Relative humidity 30% to 80% (*1)
Atmospheric pressure 500 hPa to 1060 hPa

*1) There should be no condensation. If the humidity exceeds the specified

value, use a dehumidifier or other means to reduce the humidity.

(2) Checks during storage

Preventive maintenance must be performed even during storage.

For the preventive maintenance procedures, refer to section 18 "System

Maintenance".

(3) Checks when resuming use

Before resuming use after storage, check the system referring to subsection
7.1 "Checks Before Operation". If an abnormality is found during the checks,
contact your Canon Medical Systems representative for checks and repair.

NOTE: Storage of the X-ray tube assembly with liquid metal bearing (LM tube)
If the LM tube is used in combination, it is recommended that the LM tube be
stored at an ambient temperature of 18°C or higher. If it is stored at a
temperature lower than 18°C, the liquid metal will harden and must be
melted when the system is started up. The time required for melting the
liquid metal differs depending on the storage temperature. For example, if
the LM tube has been stored at 10°C, approximately 10 minutes is required
for melting the liquid metal.
In cases where melting must be performed, 6 minutes or more is required for
system startup.

No. 2B308-309EN
440
18. System Maintenance
In order to maintain the safety and performance of the system, maintenance
and inspection are necessary. Users are responsible for the maintenance
and inspection of the system after purchase.

The maintenance checks include daily checks, periodic checks, and

replacement of consumables and periodic replacement parts. Some periodic
checks and replacement procedures for periodic replacement parts require
the use of special tools or are associated with a risk of personal injury, and
special skills are required. Canon Medical Systems will perform such
preventive maintenance work on a for-charge basis. Please contact your
Canon Medical Systems representative to arrange for maintenance and
checks.

Specified service life: Ten years if the preventive maintenance specified by

the manufacturer is performed. [According to self-certification (our data)]
(Note that the specified service life of the general-purpose PC is five years.
If the system is used more than five years, replacement of the image
processor is required. The service life differs depending on the conditions of
use. Priority should be given to individually specified service life, if any.)
Note that replacement is required for the following parts even if the specified
service life has not elapsed.

Contents 18.1 Daily Checks

18.2 Periodic Inspection
18.3 Periodically Replaced Parts
18.4 Cleaning
18.5 Disinfection
18.6 Sterilization
18.7 Disposal of the System
18.8 Periodic Inspection Based on Requirements in the USA
(Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act)

No. 2B308-309EN
441
CAUTION: 1. If any abnormality is found as a result of checks, stop using the system
and contact your Canon Medical Systems representative for repair.

2. If preventive maintenance is performed by the user, special care must

be taken to ensure safety.

No. 2B308-309EN
442
18.1 Daily Checks
Checks before and after operation must be carried out by the user. For the
check procedures, refer to section 7 "Daily Checks".

18.2 Periodic Inspection

In order to maintain the safety and performance of the system, the following
periodic checks must be carried out. These checks require special skills. Be
sure to contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative for
details before performing these checks.

The items with a mark in the S column of the following table are safety check
items.

"Every inspection" for the "Interval" column is based on inspection every

6 months. However, this interval may vary depending on the number of
hours of system use.

(1) CAS-880A

Check point Check item Interval S

Entire unit Checking/cleaning the exterior Every
inspection
Checking the labels 1 year 
Checking the area around the floor base 1 year 
Checking the control switch Every
inspection
Checking the cables at the support column arm 3 years
section and floor base rotation section
Checking basic operation Every
inspection
Floor base rotation section Checking the limit switch 3 years 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Support column rotation Checking the limit switch 3 years 
section
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the cable routing arm 3 years
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
C-arm rotation section Checking the safety switch 3 years 
Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years 
Checking/lubricating the drive chain 3 years 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 

No. 2B308-309EN
443
 Check point Check item Interval S
C-arm sliding section Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years 
Checking/lubricating the drive chain 3 years 
Checking the C-arm drive belt 1 year
Checking the mechanical stopper 1 year 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the duct hose, clamp, and gas spring 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Detector near/away Checking the slide guide and travel rail 3 years
movement section Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years 
Checking the drive belt 3 years
Checking the backlash between the rack and the 3 years 
pinion gear
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the duct hose 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Checking the lifter frame 3 years
Checking the interior of the cover 3 years
Checking the roller screen 1 year
Detector rotation section Checking the limit switch 3 years
(water-cooled) Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years
Checking the drive V belt 3 years 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the timing belt 3 years 
Checking the coolant hoses and joint clamp of the 3 years
rotation section
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Checking the interior of the cover 3 years
Checking the detector section (rear of the FPD input 3 years
screen)
Checking the grid attachment/detachment section Every
inspection
Checking the V belt pulley setscrews and cap 3 years
securing screws

No. 2B308-309EN
444
 Check point Check item Interval S
Detector rotation section Checking the limit switch 3 years
(air-cooled)
Checking/lubricating the worm gear 3 years 
Checking the drive belt 3 years 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the air vent of the cover and the blades of 1 year
the FPD cooling unit fan
Checking the sponge and resin plate of the cooling 1 year
unit section
Checking the FPD cooling unit fan 1 year
Checking the important securing section 3 years 
Checking the interior of the cover 3 years
Checking the detector section (rear of the FPD input 3 years
screen)
Checking the grid attachment/detachment section Every
inspection
X-ray tube support section Checking the joint of the water-cooling hose 3 years
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Safety function check Checking the touch sensors Every 
inspection
Checking the override operation Every 
inspection
Checking the Emergency stop switch operation Every 
inspection
Control box Checking for dust 1 year 
Power-supply section Checking the line voltage 1 year
Checking the output voltages of the switching power 1 year
supply
Coolant circulator Checking the coolant hose for damage 3 years
Cleaning the air vent of the coolant circulator 1 year
Checking the coolant temperature and coolant Every
pressure in the coolant circulator inspection
Checking the amount of coolant in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
Checking the quality of coolant in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
Checking for coolant leakage in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
Support column rotation Checking basic operations Every
lock kit (*1) inspection
Checking magnet brake movement 1 year

*1) When a support column rotation lock kit is used in combination

No. 2B308-309EN
445
 (2) CAS-820B

Check point Check item Interval S

Entire unit Checking/cleaning the exterior Every
inspection
Checking the labels 1 year 
Checking the control switches Every
inspection
Checking the cable routing arm 1 year
Checking basic operation Every
inspection
Ceiling rail section Cleaning the travel surfaces 3 years
Checking the end stoppers 3 years 
Checking the rail securing bolts 3 years 
Ceiling longitudinal Checking the limit switches 3 years 
movement drive section Checking the travel rollers 3 years
Checking and lubricating the drive chain 3 years
Checking the encoders 1 year
Checking the float prevention roller mounting bolts 3 years
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Ceiling lateral movement Checking the limit switches 3 years 
drive section Cleaning the slide guides and travel rails 1 year
Checking the encoders 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Ω-arm rotation section Checking the drive belt 3 years
Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years
Checking and lubricating the drive chain 3 years
Checking the encoders 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Ω-arm sliding section Checking the drive belt 3 years
Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years 
Checking and lubricating the drive chain 3 years 
Checking the Ω-arm drive belt 1 year
Checking the mechanical stopper 1 year 
Checking the encoders 1 year
Checking the duct hose and clamps 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 

No. 2B308-309EN
446
 Check point Check item Interval S
Ω-arm vertical movement Checking the limit switches 3 years 
(FPD side) Checking the slide guides and travel rails 3 years
Checking the drive belt 3 years
Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years
Checking the lead screw 3 years 
Checking the potentiometers 1 year
Ω-arm vertical movement Checking the limit switches 3 years 
(X-ray tube side) Checking the slide guides and travel rails 3 years
Checking the drive belt 3 years
Checking the lead screw 3 years 
Checking the potentiometers 1 year
Checking the cable routing 3 years
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Detector near/away Checking the slide guides and travel rails 3 years
movement section
Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years
Checking and lubricating the drive chain 3 years
Checking the encoders 1 year
Checking the duct hose 1 year
Checking the coolant hoses 3 years
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Checking the interior of the cover 3 years
Checking the roller screen 1 year
Detector rotation section Checking the limit switch 3 years
(water-cooled)
Checking the speed reducer for oil leakage 3 years
Checking the drive V belt 3 years 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the timing belt 3 years 
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Checking the interior of the cover 3 years
Checking the grid attachment/detachment section Every
inspection
Checking the V-belt pulley setscrews and the cap 3 years
securing screws

No. 2B308-309EN
447
 Check point Check item Interval S
Detector rotation section Checking the limit switch 3 years
(air-cooled)
Checking/lubricating the worm gear 3 years 
Checking the drive belt 3 years 
Checking the encoder 1 year 
Cleaning the air vent of the cover and the blades of 1 year
the FPD cooling unit fan
Checking the sponge and resin plate of the cooling 1 year
unit section
Checking the FPD cooling unit fan 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Checking the interior of the cover 3 years
Checking the grid attachment/detachment section Every
inspection
X-ray tube support section Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Safety functions Checking the touch sensors Every 
inspection
Checking the override operation Every 
inspection
Checking the Emergency stop switch operation Every 
inspection
Control box Checking for dust 1 year
Power supply section Checking the line voltage 1 year
Checking the output voltages of the switching power 1 year
supply
Coolant circulator Checking the coolant hose for damage 3 years
Cleaning the air vent of the coolant circulator 1 year
Checking the coolant temperature and coolant Every
pressure in the coolant circulator inspection
Checking the amount of coolant in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
Checking the quality of coolant in the coolant Every
circulator inspection
Checking for coolant leakage in the coolant Every
circulator inspection

No. 2B308-309EN
448
 (3) BLA-900A, BLA-900A/R1, BLA-900C, BLA-900C/R1

Check point Check item Interval S

Entire unit Checking the grounding 3 years 
Checking the labels 1 year 
Checking the input line voltage 1 year
Checking the functions Checking the rectangular blades (*1)
Checking the compensation filters and ROI filters for (*1)
smooth movement
Checking the compensation filters for smooth (*1)
rotation
Checking the beam hardening filters for smooth (*1)
selection
Checking the rotation of the entire beam limiting 1 year
device
Checking the dose meter cable 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 3 years 

*1) Also check this item at the time of operational check of the support unit using
the console.

(4) CAT-850B

Check point Check item Interval S

External appearance check Checking/cleaning the exterior 1 year
Checking the labels 1 year 
Checking the tabletop mat 1 year
Entire unit Checking the performance 1 year  (*1)
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Tabletop vertical movement Checking the anchor securing status 3 years 
section Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Checking the motor 3 years
Checking the belt 3 years
Checking the linear guide 3 years
Checking the lead screw 1 year 
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Checking the bolt for the rotation-prevention nut 1 year
Tabletop longitudinal Checking the electromagnetic brake 3 years
movement section Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 3 years 
Checking the cross roller guide 3 years
Tabletop lateral movement Checking the electromagnetic brake 3 years
section Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 3 years 
Checking the cross roller guide 3 years
Checking the cable routing 1 year

No. 2B308-309EN
449
 Check point Check item Interval S
Tabletop rotation section Checking the electromagnetic brake 3 years
Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 3 years 
Checking the cable routing 3 years
Locking of tabletop rotation 3 years
Stepping DSA kit Checking the limit switch 3 years 
(when the XBSD-850B is
Checking the motor 1 year 
built in)
Checking the belt tension and checking for damage 3 years
Control panel Checking the operation and display 1 year
Accessories and optional Checking the tabletop control switch 1 year
parts Checking the footswitch 1 year
Checking the operation and display 1 year
Checking the wireless footswitch 1 year
Longitudinal movement Checking the limit switch 1 year 
encoder kit
Checking the drive pinions 1 year
Checking the encoder and the potentiometer 1 year

*1) Checking the Emergency stop button

(5) CAT-880B

Check point Check item Interval S

External appearance check Checking/cleaning the exterior 1 year
Checking the labels 1 year 
Checking the tabletop mat 1 year
Entire unit Checking the performance 1 year  (*1)
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Tabletop rotation section Checking the brake pad 1 year
Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 3 years 
Checking the cable routing 3 years
Replacing the fuses 1 year
Tabletop vertical movement Checking the anchor bolt securing status 3 years 
section Checking the important securing sections 3 years 
Checking the limit switch/interlock switch 3 years 
Checking the motor 3 years
Checking the chains/lubrication oils 3 years
Checking the linear guide 3 years
Checking the lead screw 1 year 
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Checking the bolt for the rotation-prevention nut 1 year

No. 2B308-309EN
450
 Check point Check item Interval S
Tabletop longitudinal tilt Checking the belt 3 years
section
Checking the jack 1 year
Checking the securing bolts for bearing housing 1 year 
Tabletop lateral movement Checking the magnet brake 3 years
section Checking the mechanical stopper 3 years
Checking the cross roller guide 1 year
Tabletop lateral tilt section Checking the linear guide 3 years
Checking the lead screws 1 year
Checking the cable routing 3 years
Checking the belt 3 years
Checking the cam-follower guide 3 years
Checking the spring for the cover 3 years
Tabletop longitudinal Checking the magnet brake 3 years
movement section Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 3 years 
Checking the cross roller guide 1 year
Checking the fall-prevention mechanism 1 year
Tableside console Visual checking 1 year
Checking the operation and display 1 year
Accessories and optional Checking the tabletop control switch 1 year
parts Checking the footswitch 1 year
Checking the drape holder 1 year
Checking the accessory table rail 1 year
Checking the hand grip 1 year
Checking the wireless footswitch 1 year

*1) Checking the Emergency stop button

No. 2B308-309EN
451
 (6) DFP-8000C/A2

Check point Check item Interval S

External appearance Checking the labels 1 year 
Cleaning the interior of the system Every
inspection
Cleaning the monitor, keyboard, mouse, and main Every
console inspection
Cleaning the PWBs 1 year
Replacing the fuses 1 year
Checking the cables and connectors 1 year
Checking the cooling fan operation Every
inspection
Tightening the screws in each section 1 year
Checking fan operation of the FPD command Every
processor inspection
Cleaning the exterior of the FPD command Every
processor inspection
Single unit Checking the input line voltage 1 year
Checking the DC line voltage 1 year
Checking the batteries on PWBs 1 year
System Hardware self-diagnosis test 1 year
Checking security software logs Every
inspection
Windows system file backup Every
inspection

No. 2B308-309EN
452
 (7) XTP-8100XG

Check point Check item Interval S

External appearance Checking the labels 1 year 
Cleaning the interior of the system Every
inspection
Checking the cables and connectors 1 year
Periodic replacement of the fuses 1 year
Checking the cooling fan operation Every
inspection
Checking the amount of insulation oil 1 year
Replacing the battery 2 years
Replacing the electrolytic capacitors 7 years
Water-cooled unit and high- Checking the amount of coolant Every
voltage cable for the X-ray inspection
tube Checking the interior of the coolant tank Every
inspection
Checking the pump Every
inspection
Checking the circulating coolant filter 1 year
Checking the high-voltage cable 1 year
Checking for coolant leakage from the coolant hose Every
inspection
Checking the pH of the coolant Every
inspection
X-ray output Checking the radiographic tube voltage/current Every
inspection
Checking the continuous fluoroscopic tube Every
voltage/current inspection
Checking the pulsed fluoroscopic tube 1 year
voltage/current
Checking the fluoroscopy timer Every
inspection
Activation of the getter Activating the getter electrode of the LM tube Every
electrode inspection

No. 2B308-309EN
453
 (8) MSF-04A, MSF-06A, MSF-08A, MSF-56A

Check point Check item Interval S

Entire unit Checking appearance, cleaning Every
inspection
Checking labels 1 year 
Checking movement 1 year
Lateral ceiling rails Checking travel surface of rails 3 years
Checking the longitudinal travel rollers 3 years 
Checking float prevention rollers 3 years
Checking the wobble prevention rollers 3 years
Checking important securing sections 3 years 
Travel base section Checking travel rollers 3 years 
Checking float prevention rollers 3 years
Checking wobble prevention rollers 3 years
Checking important securing sections 3 years 
Support column section Inspection, lubrication of roller chain 3 years 
Inspecting roller chain sprocket 3 years 
Inspecting gas spring 3 years
Inspecting both ends of gas spring 3 years
Checking important securing sections 3 years 
Monitor frame section Checking important securing sections 3 years 
Wiring Inspecting the securing side of the cable hanger 3 years
Inspecting the travel surface of the cable hanger 3 years
Inspecting hose clamp, hose band 3 years

No. 2B308-309EN
454
 (9) Entire system

Check point Check item Interval S

Power supply Checking the grounding 1 year 
Checking the input line voltage 1 year
Electrical safety test Measuring the enclosure current 1 year 
Power linkage within the System power linkage Every
system inspection
Emergency stop operation Every
inspection
System adjustment and Checking the fluoroscopic ABC operation 1 year
image quality check
Checking the radiographic ABC operation 1 year
Checking the ABC incident dose and image level 1 year
Checking the dose limit adjustment 1 year
(patient incident dose level)
Checking the monitor adjustment 1 year
Checking the fluoroscopic image quality 1 year
Checking the DA image quality 1 year
Checking the DSA image quality 1 year
Checking the dose area product meter 1 year
Performing gain calibration 1 year
Injector Interlock operation test 1 year
Electrical safety check 1 year  (*1)

*1) Checking the leakage current

(10) X-ray grid attachment unit

Check point Check item Interval S

Entire unit Appearance check, cleaning Every
inspection
Operational checks (checking whether the X-ray Every 
grid can be inserted properly, operational check of inspection
the touch sensor)

No. 2B308-309EN
455
 18.3 Periodically Replaced Parts
In order to maintain the safety, specifications, and performance of the
product, periodic replacement is required for some parts even within the
rated service life of the system.

(1) Periodically replaced parts

Special techniques are required for the replacement of periodic replacement
parts. Canon Medical Systems performs replacement work for the parts
listed below at the user's expense.

The replacement interval is defined for each part according to the

specifications and performance of the product.

<1> CAS-880A

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Battery 3 years Control box A01-PWB
Touch sensor 5 years FPD touch sensor
Roll screen 3 years FPD near/away movement section
Micro switch 5 years FPD near/away movement section
Gas spring 3 years C-arm sliding section
Bushing 3 years C-arm sliding section
Magnet brake 3 years Support column rotation section (when XGSL-880A is used in
combination)

<2> CAS-820B

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Battery 3 years Control box A01-PWB
Touch sensor 5 years FPD touch sensor
Fuse 1 year 0.5 A (time lag), inverter unit F1 to F4
Roll screen 3 years Detector near/away movement section
Potentiometer 9 years Detector near/away movement section
Cable routing arm 3 years Arm box, support column arm
clamp

No. 2B308-309EN
456
 <3> CAT-850B

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Contactor 3 years For setting the tabletop vertical movement holding brake ON/OFF
Potentiometer 3 years Tabletop vertical movement section, tabletop longitudinal
movement section, tabletop lateral movement section, and
tabletop rotation position detection section
Rechargeable 1 year Wireless footswitch rechargeable batteries (when a wireless
batteries footswitch is used in combination)

<4> CAT-880B

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Contactor 5 years For servo amplifier drive power supply
SSR 5 years For tabletop rotation brake
5 years For servo motor brake
Potentiometer 3 years For detection of tabletop rotation position
Zipper tube 3 years Tabletop rotation section (in the pit)
3 years Longitudinal tilting section
3 years Vertical movement section
Fastener tube 3 years Tabletop lateral movement section
Battery 2 years For TABLE CONT PWB
Disk spring 5 years For tabletop rotation locking
Fuses 1 year Brake motor for tabletop rotation
Wireless footswitch power supply line (when a wireless footswitch
is used in combination)
Rechargeable 1 year Wireless footswitch rechargeable batteries (when a wireless
batteries footswitch is used in combination)

No. 2B308-309EN
457
 <5> DFP-8000C/A2

Part number Quantity Replacement

Part name Application/Location
interval
Fuse ASF040*10A 3 1 year 10 A (slow-blow), system controller F1, F2, F3
ASF041*1A 5 1 year 1 A (time-lag), system cabinet F4,
system cabinet (T1) F11, F12,
XIDF-ESD801 F2
ASF041*2A 1 1 year 2 A (time-lag), XIDF-ESD801 F1
ASF041*5A 2 1 year 5 A (time-lag), system cabinet F5, F6
ASF051*2A 1 1 year 2 A (time-lag), system cabinet F10
1 year 15 A (slow-blow), CCB F1
ASF015*5A 1 year 5 A (time-lag), DVI-TX (F) F1
ASF026*3A 1 year 3 A (quick), SYS-IO F7, F10, F101
ASF026*6A 1 year 6 A (quick), SYS- IO F1, F2
ASF051*4A (*1) 1 1 year 4 A (time-lag) system cabinet F10

*1) For systems with XSDT-100C

<6> XTP-8100XG

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Fuse 1 year Power cabinet F1 to F5
Battery 2 years GXC-V1
Electrolytic capacitor 7 years X-ray high-voltage generator
Coolant 2 years For HEX-125
Coolant for the X-ray tube
Pump 10000 hours Water-cooled heat exchanger HEX-125

<7> BLA-900A, BLA-900A/R1, BLA-900C, BLA-900C/R1

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Ion chamber relay 2 years Rotation section of the X-ray beam limiting device
cable (BLA-900A,
BLA-900A/R1)
5 years Rotation section of the X-ray beam limiting device
(BLA-900C,
BLA-900C/R1)

No. 2B308-309EN
458
(2) Recommended replacement parts

Part name Replacement interval

System disk (SSD) in the console PC 5 years
System disk (SSD) in the RTS PC 5 years
Storage disk (SSD) for image acquisition 5 years
Servo amplifier 3 years
Inverter unit 3 years
Constant-voltage power supply 3 years
Tabletop mat 3 years
X-ray tube cover 3 years
Duct hose (with slit) 3 years
Duct hose (without slit) 5 years
MSF monitor stand gas spring (support 5 years
column section)
MSF monitor stand cable duct hose 5 years

(3) Consumable parts

<1> CD-R

In this system, the following CD-Rs (or equivalent) can be used.

For the operating procedures, refer to the operation manual provided with
the CD-R that is used.
Note that the performance of the media cannot be guaranteed. In no event
shall Canon Medical Systems be liable for problems caused by the media,
such as loss of data from the media or inability to save data on the media.

Manufacturer Storage capacity Speed

Taiyo Yuden CD-R 700 MB 2× to 48×
Mitsubishi Chemical CD-R 700 MB 2× to 48×

<2> DVD±R

In this system, the following DVD±R (or equivalent) can be used.

For the operating procedures, refer to the operation manual provided with
the DVD±R that is used.
Note that the performance of the media cannot be guaranteed. In no event
shall Canon Medical Systems be liable for problems caused by the media,
such as loss of data from the media or inability to save data on the media.

Manufacturer Storage capacity Supporting speed

Taiyo Yuden Single layer 4.7 GB 16× speed (maximum 24×
writing speed)
Mitsubishi Chemical Single layer 4.7 GB 16× speed (maximum 20×
writing speed)
Sony Single layer 4.7 GB 16× speed

No. 2B308-309EN
459
18.4 Cleaning
After operating the unit, clean the main unit, the optional units, and the room.

If cleaning is performed by a cleaning agency, ensure that they are aware of

the following WARNING and NOTICE instructions.

WARNING: 1. If disinfection is required due to the presence of blood etc., perform

thorough disinfection referring to subsection 18.5 "Disinfection".

2. Turn OFF the power to the unit before cleaning. If the power is ON, a
malfunction may occur, resulting in an accident.
Entry of liquids such as water or detergent into the unit could result in
a short circuit or electric shock.

3. If the arm of the support unit needs to be moved during cleaning, turn
ON the power switch after fully wiping off liquid such as water and
detergent from the surrounding area of the support unit, and then
operate it in a normal manner. Forcible movement of the arm may
cause an error. After the arm is moved, immediately turn OFF the
power switch.

4. Do not pour or spray liquids such as disinfectant, detergent, or water

on the system. Entry of liquids into the system may cause a
malfunction or an accident.

5. Do not pour liquids such as water or detergent on the floor. Entry of

liquids into the system or into the cable pit may cause a malfunction or
an accident.

6. Cleaning of the support unit, top of the monitor support, ceiling rails,
and other units located high above the floor should be performed by a
professional cleaning agency. Because it is dangerous, never work on
a stepladder etc.

7. When the FPD cover etc. on the top of the arm of the support unit is to
be cleaned, set the arm rotation angle or slide angle to 90° to move the
part to be cleaned to a safely low position.

NOTICE: Do not clean the system with organic solvents (such as paint thinner) or
abrasive cleansers because they may cause surface damage or
discoloration.

(1) Cleaning the unit

Wipe off stains with a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent.

Dilute the mild detergent to the concentration specified by the manufacturer.

Moisten a soft cloth with diluted detergent and then wring the cloth out firmly
so that the detergent does not drip from the cloth.

Wipe off the stains and then wipe the unit again with a dry soft cloth.

No. 2B308-309EN
460
(2) Cleaning of the room
Remove dust from the room using a vacuum cleaner. When cleaning the
floor, use a tightly wrung out mop or cloth so that water does not drip.

(3) Cleaning the tabletop mat (XBTM-001A) cover

Turn the cover inside out and clean it with the fastener open. Observe the
following precautions.

• When the cover is washed, the water temperature used for washing should
be 95°C or less.
• The cover should not be chlorine-bleached, dry cleaned, or ironed.
• When the cover is dried in a dryer, the temperature should be set to low.
• The tabletop mat cannot be washed. Clean it according to the procedure in
step (1) "Cleaning the unit".

No. 2B308-309EN
461
18.5 Disinfection
Disinfect the surfaces of the unit, accessories, and options according to the
instructions of the hospital's infection control officer.

WARNING: 1. After disinfection, ventilate the room thoroughly before turning ON the
power. If any flammable gases remain in the room, there is a danger of
fire or explosion when the power is turned ON.

2. Do not pour or spray disinfectant on the unit. Entry of disinfectant into

the unit may cause a malfunction or an accident.

3. Be sure to turn OFF the power of the unit before disinfection. If power
is supplied, an accident may occur due to unintended operation of the
unit when control switches are touched.
If liquid enters the unit, a fire or electric shock may occur.

NOTICE: 1. Do not use the types of disinfectants listed below. They will damage the
system. The performance and safety of the system cannot be guaranteed if
it has been damaged by use of an unsuitable disinfectant.

• Disinfectants that are excessively corrosive to metal or rubber, such as

chlorine-based disinfectants.

• Disinfectants that have instructions stating that they are inappropriate for any
of the following: metal, plastic, rubber, or painted surfaces.

• Disinfectants that may enter the system, such as formalin gas or spray-type
agents.

2. Disinfect the system only when necessary. Performing disinfection many

times may result in discoloration or cracking of the surface finish or in
damage to rubber or plastic parts. If the system appears to be harmed by a
disinfectant, immediately stop using the system. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems representative for repair.

3. Wipe off disinfectants thoroughly after the system has been disinfected.
Failure to do so may result in discoloration or cracking of the surface finish or
in damage to rubber or plastic parts. If the system appears to be harmed by
a disinfectant, immediately stop using the system. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems representative for repair.

No. 2B308-309EN
462
(1) Recommended disinfectants
The disinfectants listed below can be used on this unit. Read the handling
instructions for the disinfectant to be used and fully understand its
characteristics and precautions before using it.

• Glutaraldehyde : 2.0 w/v%

• Benzalkonium chloride : 0.2 w/v%

• Ethanol for disinfection : 76.9 to 81.4 v/v% solution

(Do not use this on the synthetic rubber on the
front panel of the control console.)

(2) Disinfection procedures

Before disinfection, clean all the areas specified below. After cleaning, wipe
each area with a cloth moistened with disinfectant and tightly wrung out. Be
careful not to allow disinfectant to enter the unit.

• Areas that have been in contact with the patient

• Areas that have been in contact with the operator

• Areas to which body fluids such as blood have adhered

Perform cleaning appropriately according to the procedures described in

subsection 18.4 "Cleaning".

No. 2B308-309EN
463
18.6 Sterilization
Sterilization cannot be performed for this system. If a sterile environment is
required, use sterile caps or sheets.

18.7 Disposal of the System

This system contains harmful materials such as lead (for shielding X-rays)
and batteries. If these materials are left outdoors, environmental
contamination may result.

When disposing of this system, contact your Canon Medical Systems

representative.

NOTE: 1. The following information is only for EEA countries.

(1) Concerning WEEE label (Directive 2012/19/EU)

The use of this symbol indicates that this product

should not be treated as household waste.
By ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly,
you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could
otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste-handling
of this product. For more detailed information
concerning the return and recycling of this product,
please consult the supplier from whom you purchased
the product.

* For system products, this label may be attached to the main unit only.

(2) Concerning Batteries (Directive 2006/66/EC)

The directive 2006/66/EC requires separate collection

and appropriate disposal of spent batteries.

This product contains batteries that are not intended to

be replaced by the user.
Replacement of those batteries will usually be done
during regular maintenance or service by service staff
who can also arrange proper disposal.

2. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.

See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
This is applicable to California, U.S.A., only.

No. 2B308-309EN
464
18.8 Periodic Inspection Based on Requirements in the USA
(Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act)
Perform periodic inspection based on requirements in the USA.
The points to be checked in the periodic inspection are listed below.
Of the items required by the standards, items that are not included in the
following list have already been checked at the time of shipment from the
factory. It is not necessary to check these items again.

Details of periodic inspection are described in the performance check

manual for this system.
Perform this periodic inspection at the local distributor or service office.

(1) DFP-8000C/A2, XTP-8100XG

Items to be checked Check interval

(a) Air kerma rate Once/year
(b) Reproducibility and linearity When the inverter unit or the high-
voltage transformer installed in the
X-ray high-voltage generator is
replaced
(c) Peak tube potential Once/year
(d) Tube current Once/year
(e) Automatic exposure control When the XTPCON PWB of the X-ray
limits high-voltage generator is replaced
(f) Displayed AKR and Once/2 years
cumulative air kerma

(2) Beam limiting device

Items to be checked Check interval

(a) Beam quality • When the X-ray tube assembly is
replaced
• When the X-ray beam limiting device
is replaced
(b) Alignment of the X-ray field • When the X-ray tube assembly is
with the fluoroscopic image replaced
receptor
• When the X-ray beam limiting device
is replaced
• When the FPD is replaced

No. 2B308-309EN
465
No. 2B308-309EN
466
19. Specifications
Contents 19.1 Electrical Safety
19.2 Support Unit
19.3 Catheterization Table
19.4 X-ray Beam Limiting Device
19.5 X-ray Tube Assembly
19.6 X-ray Flat Panel Detector (FPD)
19.7 Monitor Suspension Unit
19.8 TV Monitors (for image display)
19.9 X-ray High-Voltage Generator (XTP-8100XG)
19.10 Digital Radiography System (DFP-8000C/A2)
19.11 Power Requirements
19.12 Weights of the Accessories and Options
19.13 Materials Used in Patient Contact Sections
19.14 Applicable Standards (IEC)

No. 2B308-309EN
467
19.1 Electrical Safety
Classification and the standard values are based on IEC 60601-1.

(a) Type of protection against electric shock:

Class I equipment (permanently installed equipment)

(b) Degree of protection against electric shock:

Equipment including type B applied parts (only for the catheterization table)

(c) Leakage current

Current path Normal status Single fault condition

Enclosure leakage current 0.1 mA or less 0.5 mA or less
Ground leakage current 5 mA or less 10 mA or less
Patient leakage current DC 0.01 mA or less DC 0.05 mA or less
AC 0.1 mA or less AC 0.5 mA or less
Total patient leakage current DC 0.05 mA or less DC 0.1 mA or less
AC 0.5 mA or less AC 1.0 mA or less

No. 2B308-309EN
468
 19.2 Support Unit
(1) System movement
CAS-880A CAS-820B
Arm rotation (*1) Movement range LAO120° to RAO120° CRA45° to CAU45°
Rotation speed For BP configuration: Max. 10°/s For BP configuration: Max. 10°/s
For SP configuration: Max. 30°/s (*5) For SP configuration: Max. 15°/s
Arm sliding (*1) Movement range CRA50° to CAU90° For LL: LAO120° to LAO 0°
For RL: RAO120° to RAO 0° (*4)
Sliding speed For BP configuration: Max. 10°/s For BP configuration: Max. 10°/s
For SP configuration: Max. 20°/s For SP configuration: Max. 15°/s
FPD near/away Movement distance When the 8-inch FPD or 12-inch FPD is
380 mm
movement used in combination: 350 mm
When the 12 × 16-inch FPD is used in
combination: 300 mm
Movement speed Max. 100 mm/s
SID (Distance When the 8-inch FPD or 12-inch FPD is 950 to 1330 mm
between the X-ray used in combination: 900 to 1250 mm
focus and the FPD When the 12 × 16-inch FPD is used in
input surface) combination: 900 to 1200 mm
Support column Movement range Approx. +90° to approx. -90° –
rotation Movement speed Max. 10°/s (*2) –
Floor base Movement range Approx. +135° to approx. -135° –
rotation Movement speed Max. 10°/s (*2) –
FPD/X-ray Movement range When the 8-inch FPD is used in When the 8-inch FPD is used in
beam limiting combination: combination: 0° (fixed)
device rotation Approx. +70° to approx. -70°
When the 12-inch FPD or 12 × 16-inch When the 12-inch FPD is used in
FPD is used in combination: combination:
Approx. +135° to approx. -135° Approx. +45° to approx. -45° (*4)
Movement speed Max. 30°/s (*3) Max. 30°/s
Ceiling Movement range – 3400 mm (Max. 4250 mm)
longitudinal Movement speed – Max. 200 mm/s
travel
Ceiling lateral Movement range – 490 mm
travel Movement speed – Max. 100 mm/s
Ω-arm vertical Movement distance – ±70 mm
movement Movement speed – 10 mm/s

*1) The movement range may be restricted depending on the condition of

the units used in combination (such as the height of the tabletop of the
catheterization table).
Such restrictions are commonly incurred when angulation is performed
in the LAO/RAO direction and CRA/CAU direction together.
*2) 6°/s for local operation
*3) 10°/s for manual operation
*4) For SIDs of between 1201 mm and 1330 mm, the rotation angle of the
FPD and the beam limiting device is returned and fixed to 0°. They are
not rotated automatically.

No. 2B308-309EN
469
 *5) Refer to the table below for the C-arm rotation speed when radiography
is performed using the optional function.

C-arm rotation speed

Optional function
(with C-arm at patient head end)
Rotational DA Up to 50°/s
3D-DSA Up to 50°/s
Rotational DSA Up to 40°/s
AlphaCT Max. 25°/s
Max. 50°/s (*)
*) Only when the TFP-1216A/C1,
TFP-1200A/C1, TFP-1200A/C2,
TFP-1200C/A1, or TFP-1200C/A2 is used
in combination.

Other) While the Override button is held down, the operation speed is limited
to 1/3 of the maximum speed for all operations.

(2) Standard dimensions

CAS-880A CAS-820B
Isocenter height 1110 mm
C-arm inner diameter Approx. 890 mm –
Ω-arm inner diameter – Approx. 1340 mm
C-arm offset – –
C-arm reach 890 mm –
Focus-to-skin distance (FSD) Min. 300 mm
Focus-to-isocenter distance 700 mm 750 mm

(3) Mass

CAS-880A CAS-820B
Main unit (*) Approx. 1230 kg Approx. 1070 kg
Control cabinet Approx. 130 kg Approx. 130 kg

*) The mass includes that of the peripheral units such as the FPD, X-ray
tube assembly, etc.

(4) Finishing
Finish color: Standard white

(5) Input surface of the FPD and the central axis of the X-ray
beam cone
• 8-inch FPD or 12-inch FPD:
The central axis of the X-ray beam cone is perpendicular to the input surface
of the FPD.
• 12 × 16-inch FPD:
The central axis of the X-ray beam cone is almost perpendicular to the input
surface of the FPD. It is tilted by 1.4° relative to the perpendicular in the
direction corresponding to an increased X-ray tube target angle.

No. 2B308-309EN
470
19.3 Catheterization Table
(1) System movement

CAT-850B CAT-880B
Longitudinal movement 1350 mm 1350 mm
Lateral movement ±200 mm ±200 mm
Tabletop rotation +90° to -180° +90° to -90°
Tabletop vertical movement stroke 775 mm to 1150 mm 754 to 1054 mm
Tabletop vertical movement speed Approx. 20 mm/s Approx. 20 mm/s
Tabletop tilting stroke - +16° to -16°
Tabletop tilting speed - Tabletop longitudinal
tilting: Approx. 1.5°/s
Tabletop lateral tilting:
Approx. 3°/s

(2) Standard dimensions

CAT-850B CAT-880B
Tabletop length 2950 mm 2950 mm
Tabletop width (chest) 450 mm 450 mm

(3) Permissible load

Maximum Maximum Maximum weight of

permissible load patient weight accessories and options
CAT-850B 240 kg 220 kg 20 kg
CAT-880B 270 kg 250 kg 20 kg

(4) Additional mass

CAT-850B/CAT-880B
Additional mass at the time of 100 kg
cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)

(5) Inherent filtration (aluminum equivalent)

Tube voltage: 100 kV (HVL) Tube voltage: 100 kV (HVL)

3.7 mm aluminum 3.6 mm aluminum
Tabletop (thickest position) Maximum 1.5 mm Maximum 1.5 mm
Arm cover Approx. 0.3 mm Approx. 0.2 mm
Tabletop mat Approx. 0.4 mm Approx. 0.5 mm
Tabletop mat (XBTM-001A) Approx. 0.5 mm Approx. 0.5 mm
Arm support Approx. 0.7 mm Approx. 0.6 mm
Armrest Approx. 0.4 mm Approx. 0.3 mm

No. 2B308-309EN
471
 19.4 X-ray Beam Limiting Device
BLA-900A, BLA-900A/R1 BLA-900C/R1
X-ray exposure field Maximum 4000 × 400 mm (*1) 340 × 340 mm (*1)
(square)
Minimum 10 × 10 mm (*2)
Leakage dose Dose 0.75 mGy/h or less
(Including the leakage dose from the X-ray tube)
Conditions • 1000 mm from the focus
• 125 kV, 18 mA
Minimum inherent filtration 1.8 mm Aleq (*3) 2.0 mm Aleq (*3)
Beam hardening filter Filter F1: Copper 0.2 mm (Approx. 6 mm aluminum equivalent)
(Aluminum equivalent = (*3)
Value at a tube voltage F2: Copper 0.3 mm (Approx. 8 mm aluminum equivalent)
of 70 kV) (*3)
F3: Aluminum 1.8 mm F3: Aluminum 2.0 mm
F4: Copper 0.5 mm
(Approx. 13 mm aluminum equivalent) (*3)
F5: Copper 0.9 mm
(Approx. 22 mm
aluminum equivalent)
(*3)
Movement Automatic after registration in the acquisition program.
Compensation filters Material Stainless steel
Heart/straight type: Heart/straight type:
19 mm aluminum equivalent 19 mm aluminum equivalent
(*3) (*3)
Straight type (*4):
16mm aluminum equivalent
(*3)
Shape/Number Heart/straight type: Heart/straight type:
1 each for left/right 1 each for left/right
Straight type (*4): 1
Rotation range Approx. ±60° Approx. ±135°
(Filter rotation, opening, and (Filter rotation, opening, and
closing can be performed closing can be performed
independently.) independently.)
Rotation time Approx. 3 seconds/ Approx. 4.5 seconds/
120° (minimum) 270° (minimum)
Automatic operation Programmed setting of compensation filter positions linked
with auto-positioning and stepping DSA is possible.
ROI filter (*5) Material Copper: 19 mm Aleq (*3)
Shape/Quantity Rectangular opening at the
center: 1 pc
Operation Can be used for FOV size of Automatic retraction for
12 inches or less. radiography can be set.
Automatic retraction for
radiography can be set.
Beam limiting device Rotation range ±135°
rotation

No. 2B308-309EN
472
 *1) X-ray exposure field on a plane surface 900 mm away from the X-ray
focus
*2) X-ray exposure field on a plane surface 1330 mm away from the X-ray
focus
*3) Measurement conditions: "70 kV (HVL), 2.5 mm aluminum" or
"75 kV (HVL), 2.7 mm aluminum"
*4) BLA-900A only
*5) BLA-900A/R1 or BLA-900C/R1 only

19.5 X-ray Tube Assembly

X-ray tube assembly with liquid metal bearing
(hereinafter referred to as the LM tube)
DSRX-T7345GFS DSRX-T7444GDS DSRX-T7445GFS
Focus size (mm) 0.3/0.6/1.0 0.5/0.8 0.4/0.6/0.9
Short-time maximum input (kW) 17/48/100 50/100 30/50/100
Target angle (°) 11 8 9
Anode heat capacity (kHU) 3000 3000 3000
Maximum anode cooling rate 5.5 kW (7700 HU/s) 5.5 kW (7700 HU/s) 5.5 kW (7700 HU/s)
Inherent filtration 1.1 mm Aleq 1.1 mm Aleq 1.1 mm Aleq
(Tube voltage 75 kV) (Tube voltage 75 kV) (Tube voltage 75 kV)
Total filtration For systems with the For systems with the For systems with the
BLA-900A or BLA-900C: 3.1 mm BLA-900A or
BLA-900A/R1: aluminum or equivalent BLA-900A/R1:
2.9 mm aluminum or 2.9 mm aluminum or
equivalent equivalent

*) When the SID is reduced, the edges of the images may be missing.

*) The total filtration is the sum of the inherent filtration of the X-ray tube
assembly and the filtration of the beam hardening filter in the X-ray beam
limiting device. For the filtration of the beam hardening filter, refer to
subsection 19.4 "X-ray Beam Limiting Device".

*) When the DSRX-T7445GFS is used in combination with the CAS-880A, a

part of the X-ray exposure field may be cut off if the C-arm is not set at the
positions specified below.

• Support column rotation 0°/floor base rotation 0° (when the arm is set at the
patient head end)
• Support column rotation 0°/floor base rotation +90°/-90° (when the arm is set
at the patient side)

No. 2B308-309EN
473
19.6 X-ray Flat Panel Detector (FPD)
8-inch FPD 12-inch FPD (*1)
TFP-800A/A1, TFP-1200A,
TFP-800A/B1, TFP-1200A/B1,
TFP-800A/C1, TFP-1200A/C1,
TFP-800A/C2 TFP-1200A/C2
FOV size 198.7 mm × 198.7 mm (8" × 8") 298.0 mm × 298.0 mm (12" × 12")
173.8 mm × 173.8 mm (7" × 7") 248.3 mm × 248.3 mm (10" × 10")
149.0 mm × 149.0 mm (6" × 6") 198.7 mm × 198.7 mm (8" × 8")
124.2 mm × 124.2 mm (5" × 5") 149.0 mm × 149.0 mm (6" × 6")
Active area 194 mm × 194 mm 294.1 mm × 294.1 mm
Pixel size 194 µm × 194 µm 194 µm × 194 µm
Output image format 1024 × 1024 TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/B1,
(Digital output) TFP-1200A/C1, TFP-1200A/C2:
• Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
• Nonbinning 1536 × 1536
512 × 512 • Acquisition rate of 12 fps or less
• Nonbinning for the entire area
• Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less
• Binning 1024 × 1024
• Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
• Nonbinning for the center area
768 × 768
• Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
• Binning for the entire area
512 × 512
• Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less
• Binning for the center area
TFP-1200A/C1, TFP-1200A/C2:
384 × 384
• Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less
• Binning for the entire area
Output image format 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video
(Analog output) composite synchronization signal composite synchronization signal
1 Vp-p, termination resistor: 75 Ω 1 Vp-p, termination resistor: 75 Ω.
Resolution (Lp/mm) 2.6 (nonbinning) 2.6 (nonbinning)
DQE (%) TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1: TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/B1:
65 or more (0 Ip/mm) 65 or more (0 Ip/mm)
TFP-800A/C1, TFP-800A/C2: TFP-1200A/C1, TFP-1200A/C2:
77 (0 Ip/mm) 77 (0 Ip/mm)

*1) Refer to the following page for the specifications of the TFP-1200C/A1
or the TFP-1200C/A2.

No. 2B308-309EN
474
 12-inch FPD
TFP-1200C/A1, TFP-1200C/A2
FOV size 298.0 mm × 298.0 mm (12" × 12") 77.8 mm × 77.8 mm (3" × 3")
248.3 mm × 248.3 mm (10" × 10") 58.4 mm × 58.4 mm (2.3" × 2.3")
198.7 mm × 198.7 mm (8"× 8") 38.9 mm × 38.9 mm (1.5" × 1.5")
149.0 mm × 149.0 mm (6" × 6")
Active area 294.1 mm × 294.1 mm 76.3 mm × 76.3 mm
Pixel size 194 µm × 194 µm 76 µm × 76 µm
Output image format 1536 × 1536 1024 × 1024
(Digital output)
• Acquisition rate 12 fps or less • Acquisition rate 30 fps or less
• Nonbinning for the entire area • Nonbinning for the center area
1024 × 1024
• Acquisition rate 30 fps or less
• Nonbinning for the center area
768 × 768
• Acquisition rate 30 fps or less
• Binning for the entire area
512 × 512
• Acquisition rate 60 fps or less
• Binning for the center area
384 × 384
• Acquisition rate 60 fps or less
• Binning for the entire area
Output image format 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video
(Analog output) composite synchronization signal composite synchronization signal
1 Vp-p, termination resistor: 75 Ω 1 Vp-p, termination resistor: 75 Ω.
Resolution (Lp/mm) 2.6 (nonbinning) 6.6 (nonbinning)
DQE (%) 73 ±5 (0 Ip/mm) 73 ±5 (0 Ip/mm)

No. 2B308-309EN
475
 12 × 16-inch FPD
TFP-1216A/A1,
TFP-1216A/C1
FOV size 298.0 mm × 397. 3mm (12" × 16")
298.0 mm × 298.0 mm (12" × 12")
198.7 mm × 198.7 mm (8" × 8")
149.0 mm × 149.0 mm (6" × 6")
Active area 292.2 mm × 391.5 mm
Pixel size 194 µm × 194 µm
Output image format TFP-1216A/A1, TFP-1216A/C1:
(Digital output) 1536 × 2048
• Acquisition rate of 6 fps or less
• Nonbinning for the entire area
1024 × 1024
• Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
• Nonbinning for the center area
768 × 1024
• Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
• Binning for the entire area
TFP-1216A/C1:
512 × 512
• Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less
• Binning for the center area
384 × 512
• Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less
• Binning for the entire area
Output image format 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video
(Analog output) composite synchronization signal
1 Vp-p, termination resistor: 75 Ω.
Resolution (Lp/mm) 2.6 (nonbinning)
DQE (%) TFP-1216A/A1:
65 or more (0 Ip/mm)
TFP-1216A/C1:
77 (0 Ip/mm)

No. 2B308-309EN
476
19.7 Monitor Suspension Unit
(1) Monitors

Maximum Monitors that can be installed

loading No. of Maximum Maximum
capacity monitors Type Mass
width height
IDI1000F-2WCA (*1) 44 kg 2 19-inch LCD 11.4 kg or less 460 mm 370 mm
monitor or (each monitor)
IDI1000F-3WCA (*1) 3
smaller
IDI1000F-4WCA 4
IDI1000F-6WCA 6
MSF-08A (*2) 58 kg 8 10 kg or less
MSF-04A 30 kg 4 (each monitor)
MSF-06A 45 kg 6
MSF-56A 65 kg 1 Large-screen 50 kg or less 1319 mm 776 mm
monitor (each monitor)
2 19-inch LCD 10 kg or less 460 mm 370 mm
monitor or (each monitor)
smaller

*1) Cannot be used in combination with the biplane system.

*2) Cannot be used in combination with the single-plane system.

(2) System movement

(2.1) IDI1000F-2WCA/IDI1000F-3WCA/IDI1000F-4WCA/IDI1000F-6WCA

(a) Operation method : Manual operation (no holding brake)

(b) Longitudinal movement
Biplane system : 3550 mm (*1)
Single-plane system : 4010 mm (*1)
(c) Lateral movement : 1524 mm
(d) Ceiling base rotation : ±180°
(e) Monitor frame rotation : ±150°
(f) Monitor tray tilt : ±10°
(g) Up/down movement of
the monitor : 622 mm
*1) May be limited depending on the layout.

(2.2) MSF-56A/MSF-04A/MSF-06A/MSF-08A

(a) Operation method : Manual operation (no holding brake)

(b) Longitudinal movement : 3928 mm (*1)
(c) Lateral movement : 2472 mm (*2)
(d) Support column rotation: ±180°
(e) Support column vertical
movement : 350 mm
*1) May be limited depending on the layout.
*2) 2946 mm when the Lateral rails for flat panel monitor suspension XGMR-
MSF021 (option) is used in combination.

No. 2B308-309EN
477
 19.8 TV Monitors (for Image Display)

(1) Standard monitors

Fluoroscopic System monitor (LCD)

monitor/reference monitor or
Ext. signal display monitor
Model name ML19193, CL19196 or CDL2013A-1A or equivalent
equivalent
Monitor model name – –
Screen size 19 inches 21.3 inches
Color/monochrome Monochrome Color
Resolution 1280 × 1024 pixels 1600 × 1200 pixels
Maximum brightness ML19193: 1400 cd/m2 –
(0.7 Vp-p input) CL19196: 800 cd/m2
Scanning frequency
Vertical 75 Hz 60 Hz
Horizontal 80 kHz 75 kHz
Automatic brightness None None
control function
Tilt mechanism Provided Provided

(2) Optional monitors

Large-screen monitor Large monitor

(for fluoroscopic and (for fluoroscopic and Backup monitor
reference images) reference images)
For the examination room For the control room For the examination room
Model name XMEZ-LMM021 (*1) XMEZ-LMM021/A2 (*1) ML19193, CL19196 or
equivalent
Monitor model name LS560W, MDSC-8258MNA –
MDSC-8156RL (*3), or
MDSC-8258RL (*3)
Screen size 56.2 inches 58 inches 19 inches
Color/monochrome Color Color Monochrome
Resolution 3840 × 2160 pixels 3840 × 2160 pixels 1280 × 1024 pixels
Maximum brightness 450 cd/m2 (56.2 inches) 700 cd/m2 ML19193: 1400 cd/m2
(0.7 Vp-p input) 700 cd/m2 (58.0 inches) CL19196: 800 cd/m2
Scanning frequency
Vertical 60 Hz 60 Hz (standard) 75 Hz
Horizontal 130 kHz 130 kHz 80 kHz
Automatic brightness Provided Provided Provided
control function

No. 2B308-309EN
478
 Monitor integration system
For the control room
Model name XMEZ-LMMCR1 (*2)
Monitor model name MX270W
Screen size 27 inches
Color/monochrome Color
Resolution 2560 × 1440 pixels
Maximum brightness 300 cd/m2
(0.7 Vp-p input)
Scanning frequency
Vertical 29.5 to 61 Hz
Horizontal 31 to 89 kHz
Automatic brightness Provided
control function

*1) This kit is for the large-screen monitor and includes the large-screen monitor
(the model name of the monitor is different from the model name of the kit).
*2) This kit is for the monitor integration system and includes the integrated
monitor (the model name of the monitor is different from the model name of
the kit).
*3) This monitor can be combined to the XMEZ-LMM021/A1.

No. 2B308-309EN
479
19.9 X-ray High-Voltage Generator (XTP-8100XG)
(1) Rating

High voltage generation method Inverter type

Short-time rating 1000 mA 100 kV (0.1 second)
800 mA 125 kV (0.1 second)
Long-time rating Continuous fluoroscopy/125 kV, 4 mA
Pulsed fluoroscopy/120 kV, 200 mA (peak) (*1)
*1) This is limited by the rating of the X-ray tube
assembly.
Maximum nominal electric power 100 kW
(*2)
*2) Product of the set tube voltage and the
corresponding maximum selectable tube
current.
If the set tube voltage is 100 kV (loading time:
0.1 second), the maximum selectable tube
current is 1000 mA.
Generator duty cycle:
200 mA @ 125 kV: 8.8%
400 mA @ 125 kV: 4.4%
800 mA @ 125 kV: 2.2%
1000 mA @ 100 kV: 2.2%

(2) Radiographic condition ranges

The radiographic conditions for the radiographic techniques described above
are set automatically. However, if desired, the radiographic conditions can
be set manually for each technique within the ranges described below.

Tube voltage setting range 50 kV to 125 kV (2-kV steps)

Tube current setting range 20 mA to 1000 mA (16 steps) (*1)
*1) This is limited by the rating of the X-ray tube
assembly.
Acquisition time setting range DA : 1.0 ms to 25 ms
DSA : 1.0 ms to 100 ms
One-shot radiography : 1.0 ms to 100 ms
Available mAs range
• One-shot radiography > 0.5 mAs, < 125 mAs
• DSA < 100 mAs

No. 2B308-309EN
480
 (3) Fluoroscopy
(a) Fluoroscopy (continuous fluoroscopy)

Tube voltage range 50 kV to 125 kV

Tube current range 0.5 mA to 4 mA (The minimum tube current for
manual setting is 0.5 mA.)
Fluoroscopic time setting (*1)
• Setting range 1 to 5 minutes (in steps of 1 minute)
• Function The buzzer sounds when the time reaches the
preset time. If fluoroscopy is performed
continuously for 10 minutes, fluoroscopy is
automatically interrupted.

*1) Systems shipped to the USA in June 2006 onwards have the following
specifications.

• Setting range : Fixed to 5 minutes (setting is not possible)

• Function : A buzzer sounds at the end of 5 minutes of

fluoroscopy.

(b) Pulsed fluoroscopy

Tube voltage range 50 kV to 120 kV

(restricted according to the rating of the X-ray tube
assembly)
Tube current range 10 mA to 200 mA
(restricted according to the rating of the X-ray tube
assembly)
Pulse width 1.0 ms to 13.3 ms
Repetition pulse rate 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 exp/s (can be selected
and set at the time of installation)

NOTE: When FPD TFP-1200C/A1 or TFP-1200C/A2 is used in combination and a

high-resolution FOV size (3.0 inches, 2.3 inches, or 1.5 inches) is selected,
spot fluoroscopy cannot be selected.

No. 2B308-309EN
481
19.10 Digital Radiography System (DFP-8000C/A2)
19.10.1 Single-plane system

(1) Image input section

(a) Input image : 10242, 12 bits, 30 fps (maximum)
5122, 12 bits, 60 fps (maximum) (*1) (*2)

*1) When the 12-inch FPD is used in

combination, select an FOV of 8" or less.
*2) Excluding systems in which the
12 × 16-inch FPD is used in combination.

(b) Bit depth : 16 bits

(2) Image recording unit

(a) Image disk capacity : 480 GB (RAID level 1)

(b) Standard number of images

• 10242 16 bits : Approximately 206400 (maximum)

• 5122 16 bits : Approximately 820800 (maximum)

(*) These are the numbers when the maximum

number of frames are recorded per
dynamic image.
When a different number of frames is used,
the number of images that can be recorded
may decrease.

NOTE: If software V8.0 or earlier has been upgraded to software V8.3 or later, the
image disk capacity is 200 GB (the same as before upgrade).

(3) Image display section

(a) Fluoroscopic/reference monitors

• Display system : A fluoroscopic image output system and a

radiographic image output system are provided
in both the examination room and the control
room.
(When the XIDF-REF801 (option) is used in
combination, another image output system is
added in both the examination room and the
control room.)

• Image display : 1280 × 1024, 60 Hz, monochrome

(DVI-D connection)

(b) System monitor

• Display system : One system for the control room

• Image display : 1600 × 1200, 60 Hz, color

(DVI-D connection)

No. 2B308-309EN
482
 (4) Fluoroscopy
(a) Input image : 10242, 16 bits

(b) Pulse rate (can be selected and set at the time of installation)
: Continuous 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 p/s

(c) Fluoroscopy mode

selection : Two modes (normal/high), three modes
(low/normal/high), or four modes
(low/mid/normal/high) are available.
The mode can be selected at the tableside
console.

*1) Two modes: Only for USA

(d) Fluoroscopic image processing:

• Noise reduction spatial filter

• Signal enhancement spatial filter
• Recursive filter
• Gray-scale processing
• Dynamic range compression
• Display gamma processing (monitor correction)

(e) Fluoroscopic image operation:

• Image magnification
• Image rotation
• Subtraction
• Peak hold

(f) Graphic display : The X-ray exposure field, compensation filter,

ABC ROI, and AEC ROI are graphically
displayed on LIH images.

(g) Fluoroscopic image recording

• Still image recording : An LIH image or a frame acquired at the

desired timing during fluoroscopy can be
recorded on the image disk.
• Dynamic image recording: A dynamic image for the set maximum time (up
to 90 s and within 1020 frames) can be
recorded on the image disk.
In addition, the fluoroscopic images for a
certain period of time (initial value: 10 s) from
the end of fluoroscopy can be recorded on the
image disk by operating the system after
fluoroscopy is completed (F-Store function).

(h) Spot fluoroscopy : The area outside the specified ROI is shielded
from X-rays and fluoroscopy is performed only
for the ROI. The latest LIH image is displayed
for the area outside the ROI.

NOTE: When FPD TFP-1200C/A1 or TFP-1200C/A2 is used in combination and a

high-resolution FOV size (3.0 inches, 2.3 inches, or 1.5 inches) is selected,
spot fluoroscopy cannot be selected.

No. 2B308-309EN
483
(5) Fluoroscopy roadmapping processing

• Subtraction : Blood vessels and the guide wire can be

visualized using radiographic or fluoroscopic
images as mask images. Mask images are
generated from fluoroscopic images by
performing peak-trace processing, summed
averaging, bottom trace processing, or LIH
processing. It is also possible to use DSA
radiographic images as mask images.
• Landmark image display : Background images (mask images, bones,
and blood vessels containing contrast
medium) and the guide wire are displayed
by roadmapping. Radiographic images are
used as mask images.
• Fluoroscopy roadmapping image acquisition
a) Still image acquisition : An LIH image or a frame acquired at the
desired timing during fluoroscopy can be
recorded on the image disk.
b) Dynamic image acquisition : A dynamic image for the set maximum time
(up to 90 s and within 1020 frames) can be
recorded on the image disk.
In addition, the fluoroscopic images for a
certain period of time (initial value: 10 s)
from the end of fluoroscopy can be recorded
on the image disk by operating the system
after fluoroscopy is completed (F-Store
function).

(6) Study protocols/acquisition programs/radiographic and

fluoroscopic positions
(a) Study protocols : Acquisition programs (max. 50), parameters in
Fluoroscopy mode, and UI customization data
can be preset.
(b) Number of registered
study protocols : 100 (maximum)
(c) Acquisition programs : The radiographic technique, image acquisition
parameters, X-ray radiographic conditions,
View ID, etc. can be preset.
(d) Acquisition program
selection : Manual selection and automatic selection
synchronized with auto-positioning are possible.

(e) Number of radiographic

and fluoroscopic positions
(auto-positioning) : Up to 64 radiographic and fluoroscopic
positions for general studies

No. 2B308-309EN
484
(7) Radiography
The following radiographic techniques can be set.

(a) DSA function

Using the DSA function, images of blood vessels only are extracted by
subtracting mask images acquired before injection of contrast medium from
contrast images acquired after injection of contrast medium. Continuous
DSA is performed by using pulsed X-rays to acquire radiographic images.
To enable subtraction to be performed correctly, the X-ray conditions in DSA
are fixed (the mask and contrast images must be acquired under the same
conditions).

• Acquisition mode

Acquisition mode Acquisition rate

10242 16 bits 1/3, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 15, 30 fps

• Stage setting : Mask 1 stage + Contrast 5 stages (maximum)

• Stage common parameters : Acquisition matrix, number of bits
• Stage individual parameters : Acquisition rate, number of acquisition
frames, delay between stages
• Summed averaging during
radiography : Mask (1 to 32 frames), Live (1 to 8 frames)
• Acquisition time : 600 seconds or 1023 frames (maximum)
(Sum of the mask stage and the contrast
stages)

(b) DA function

Using the DA function, digital acquisition of images using pulsed X-rays is

performed.

• Acquisition mode (can be selected and set at the time of installation)

Acquisition mode Acquisition rate

10242 16 bits 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5 10, 15, 30 fps
5122 16 bits (*1) 60 fps (*2)

*1) For systems in which the 12 × 16-inch FPD is used in combination,

5122 cannot be selected.
*2) When acquisition is performed at a rate of 60 fps in systems with the
12-inch FPD used in combination, select an FOV of 8 inches or
6 inches.

• Acquisition time : 600 seconds or 2400 frames (maximum)

(2047 frames for systems using a
12 × 16-inch FPD.)

• X-ray conditions : ABC operation is performed during

radiography by estimating the radiographic
conditions from the immediately preceding
fluoroscopic conditions.

No. 2B308-309EN
485
 (c) One-shot radiography function

Using the one-shot radiography function, a digital radiographic image can be

acquired by performing radiography once during fluoroscopy. This function
is useful for checking the insertion position of the catheter and for observing
and recording the conditions during angioplasty.

• Acquisition mode : 10242, 16 bits (A single frame is recorded.)

• Radiographic conditions : The radiographic conditions are estimated

from the immediately preceding fluoroscopic
conditions.

• Image operations : Dynamic range compression, spatial filter

processing, grayscale processing, and
image rotation

(d) Rotation DA function (Manual Rotation)

Image acquisition with DA can be performed continuously between two

specified points while the C-arm is rotated or slid.

(e) Rotational DA function (optional)

Image acquisition with DA can be performed continuously between two

specified points while C-arm rotation or sliding is performed or C-arm
rotation and sliding are performed simultaneously.

• Acquisition mode

Acquisition mode
10242 16 bits 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5 10, 15, 30 fps
5122 16 bits 60 fps (*1)

*1) When acquisition is performed at a rate of 60 fps in systems with the

12-inch FPD used in combination, select an FOV of 8" or less.

• Acquisition program : The rotational angle, rotational orientation,

and rotational speed of the support unit can
be preset in the acquisition program.

• Maximum rotational speed of the support unit

Rotational Rotational speed when the C-arm is Rotational speed when the C-arm is
orientation at the head-end longitudinal position at the left/right lateral position
LAO/RAO 50°/s 30°/s
CAU/CRA 20°/s 20°/s

No. 2B308-309EN
486
 (f) Rotational DSA function (option)

• Acquisition mode : X-ray control using the angle trigger method

is employed. The mean image acquisition
speed changes as the support unit rotation
speed changes.

a) 10242, 16 bits : Approximately 1 to 25 fps

• Rotation mode : Mask-Return-Contrast acquisition (MRC

method)
Mask-Contrast acquisition (MC method)
Mask-Return-Contrast 1-Contrast 2 (MRCC
method)
Mask-Contrast 1-Contrast 2 (MCC method)

• Acquisition program : The rotation angle, rotation direction, and

rotation speed of the support unit can be
preset in the acquisition program.

• Stage common parameters : Acquisition matrix, number of bits, rotation

speed, acquisition rate, and number of
acquisition frames

• Stage individual parameters : Delay between stages

• Support unit rotation maximum speed

Rotation Rotation speed when the C-arm is Rotational speed when the C-arm is
direction at the head-end longitudinal position at the left/right lateral position
LAO/RAO 40°/s 30°/s
CAU/CRA 20°/s 20°/s

• X-ray radiation timing : The support unit angles at the time of each
mask image acquisition and the
corresponding contrast image acquisition
can be matched. (Angle trigger method)

(g) Stepping DSA function (option)

• Number of steps : Maximum 7 steps/8 stages

• Step speed : 1.7 s or less/step (step width: 220 mm)

• Acquisition mode (can be selected and set at the time of installation)

Acquisition mode
10242, 16 bits 1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 15 fps

• Other : The radiographic conditions and the

compensation filter position can be set for
each stage.

NOTE: When FPD TFP-1200C/A1 or TFP-1200C/A2 is used in combination, select

a standard FOV size (12 inches to 6 inches).

No. 2B308-309EN
487
(h) 3D-DSA function (optional)

• Data acquisition range : RAO 100° to LAO 100°

• Rotation speed : Max. 50°/s

• Radiography technique : 3D-DSA

• Rotational modes : Mask - Return - Contrast acquisition (MRC

method)
Mask - Contrast acquisition (MC method)

• Types of reconstruction images

a) Blood vessel 3D display from 3D-DSA images

b) Blood vessel 3D display from 3D-DSA images, device image extracted

from mask image, and device 3D display (*1).

c) Bone image and blood vessel image extracted from contrast image of
3D-DSA images, and bone and blood vessel 3D display

d) Blood vessel 3D display from 3D-DSA images, bone image extracted

from mask image, and bone 3D display (*2)

• 3D-DSA acquisition mode

a) 10242, 16 bits

1°/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed of 30°/s (*3)

2°/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed of 50°/s

b) 5122, 16 bits (only when the TFP-1216A/C1, TFP-1200A/C1,

TFP-1200A/C2, TFP-1200C/A1, or TFP-1200C/A2 is used in
combination)

1°/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed of 50°/s

*1) Superimposed display of the blood vessels and the device (device
fusion) can be performed using the corresponding workstation function.

*2) It is possible to superimpose and display blood vessel image and bone
image (bone fusion), depending on the function of the workstation used
in combination.

*3) When the maximum C-arm rotation speed of 30°/s is selected,

acquisition is performed at intervals of 1.2°/frame.

No. 2B308-309EN
488
(i) AlphaCT acquisition function (optional)

Images used to generate AlphaCT images (CBCT (Cone Beam CT) images)
are acquired.

• Data acquisition range : Approx. RAO 100° to approx. LAO 100°

• Rotation speed : Up to 25°/s

FPD used in combination Rotation speed

TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1, TFP-800A/C1,
TFP-800A/C2, TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/B1, Up to 25°/s
TFP-1216A/A1
TFP-1216A/C1, TFP-1200A/C1, TFP-1200A/C2,
Up to 50°/s
TFP-1200C/A1, TFP-1200C/A2

• Radiographic techniques : AlphaCT Vessel, AlphaCT 10s, AlphaCT 15s,

AlphaCT 22s, AlphaCT 5s, AlphaCT 8s,
AlphaCT 11s

• Rotation mode : Contrast acquisition (C method)

• Reconstruction image type : 3D display using CBCT images (mainly MPR)

3D display using Fine Voxel image
Reduction of metal artifacts

• AlphaCT acquisition mode

a) 10242, 16 bits

AlphaCT Vessel acquisition : 10242, 16 bits, acquisition of

approx. 100 frames, 50°/s

AlphaCT-Fast acquisition : 10242, 16 bits, acquisition of

approx. 250 frames, 25°/s

AlphaCT-Middle acquisition : 10242, 16 bits, acquisition of

approx. 400 frames, 15°/s

AlphaCT-High (quality) acquisition : 10242, 16 bits, acquisition of

approx. 600 frames, 10°/s

b) 5122, 16 bits (when combined with the TFP-1216A/C1, TFP-1200A/C1,

TFP-1200A/C2, TFP-1200C/A1, or TFP-1200C/A2)

AlphaCT-Fast HS acquisition : 5122, 16 bits, acquisition of

approx. 220 frames, 50°/s

AlphaCT-Middle HS acquisition : 5122, 16 bits, acquisition of

approx. 370 frames, 30°/s

AlphaCT-High HS acquisition : 5122, 16 bits, acquisition of

approx. 570 frames, 20°/s

No. 2B308-309EN
489
(8) Image processing
The following image processing operations can be performed for
radiographic images in the control or examination room.

• Spatial filter processing

• Gray-scale processing
• Scattered radiation correction processing (*1)
• Negative/positive reversal
• Display gamma function (monitor correction/several non-linear gamma
functions selectable by the user) (*1)
• Image magnification (magnification ratio: 1.0× to 5.0×), panning
• Summed average (mask/live addition for up to 64 frames (maximum))
• Subtraction
• Landmark
• Scanned image inversion (*2)
• Image inversion (lateral inversion, vertical inversion) (*2)
• Image rotation (An image can be rotated to the desired angle during
fluoroscopy or radiography. It is also possible to automatically rotate an
image so that the head end of the tabletop always comes to the top of the
monitor regardless of the C-arm insertion direction.)
• Auto-windowing
• Auto pixel shift (The amount of shift (mismatch) between mask images and
live images caused by motion artifacts is detected and is automatically
corrected or is corrected in the specified ROI.)
• Manual pixel shift (*2)
• Annotation (characters, arrows, segments, rectangles, circles) (*2)
• Shutter display
The shutter can be displayed manually or automatically. In automatic mode,
the shutter is applied to the beam limiting device blade position of the last
frame. Note that shutter display is temporarily canceled while a dynamic
image is being played back on the system monitor.
• Storage of processed images
The image is displayed with the previous processing function applied. In
addition, it is possible to return the processed image to the original (the
image at the time of acquisition) (*3).
• Peak/Bottom trace function (*2)
• Panoramic view (*2)
• SNRF processing
This is a digital image processing filter that can reduce noise from a dynamic
image without afterimage. This function is useful not only for fluoroscopic
images but also radiographic images.
*1) These parameters are preset in the examination protocols.
They cannot be changed in units of image.

*2) These image processing operations can only be performed from the control
room.

*3) The applicable image processing functions depend on the software version.

No. 2B308-309EN
490
(9) Analysis functions
(a) Distance measurement

(b) Simplified stenosis ratio measurement (comparison calculation using two

measured lengths)

(c) Calibration

• Automatic calibration : Automatic calculation is performed based on

the support unit and table location information.
Calculation is performed assuming that the
object is located at the isocenter.

• Manual calibration : Calculation is performed by using a calibration

object or by entering the PID.

(10) Parallel processing

While fluoroscopy or fluorography/radiography is being performed in the
examination room, the following processing operations can be performed
independently in the control room. Note, however, that there are some
limitations.

(a) Image selection, image playback, and image processing for a desired patient

(b) Reference image recording

(c) Photo image recording

(d) Image analysis

(e) Imager output (*1)

(f) Recording on external media (*1)

(g) Network transfer/receive (*1)

*1) Imager output, media recording, and network transfer/receive can be

performed in the background.

(11) Vital sign data

(a) Display channel : The two channels for the electrocardiogram and
the blood-pressure waveform are displayed
independently.

(b) Acquisition : Acquired at the same time as the radiographic

images (saved with the corresponding images)

(c) Transfer : DICOM transfer is possible as image related

information. Recording on external media is
possible in the DICOM format.

No. 2B308-309EN
491
(12) Image storage
(a) CD-R recording

• Images to be recorded : Dynamic images, still images

• Related information : Patient information, study information, vital sign
data
• Recording method : Compliance with DICOM 3.0. (5122 or 10242,
8/12 bits, JPEG lossless compression)
• Recording image frames : Approximately 4800 images maximum (5122,
8 bits)
• Recording operation : Manual or automatic background recording can
be performed after completing a study (Finish
Study).

(b) DVD±R recording (optional)

• Images to be recorded : Dynamic images, still images

• Related information : Patient information, study information, vital sign
data
• Recording method : Compliance with DICOM 3.0. (5122 or 10242,
8/12 bits, JPEG lossless compression)
• Recording operation : Manual or automatic background recording can
be performed after completing an examination.

(13) Study appointments

(a) Number of appointments : 200 or more

(b) Appointment items : Patient ID, patient name, sex, date of birth,
study protocols, examining physician, other

The scheduled study date is registered at the time of patient information

registration and the appointment information can be retrieved and managed.

(c) Appointment method

• Keyboard entry
• DICOM MWM

For a previously examined patient, a new appointment can be made after

retrieving the existing patient information and study information. (Up to
10,000 study histories can be stored.)

(d) Previous image reference ("Prevision")

• Previous images to be referred to during a study (DICOM XA images) can be

set at the time of making an appointment.
• The previous images can be imported from the following locations to the
image disk.
• CD-R/DVD RAM (optional)
• Network server
This function will be limited depending on the specifications of the connected
dynamic image PACS and those of the stored images.

No. 2B308-309EN
492
(14) Imager output

• DICOM print (imager connection)

(15) Function for supporting personal information protection

and security countermeasures

• User authentication

Identification and authentication by user ID and password

• User management/user's right management

Restriction of usable functions according to user's eligibility

• Audit trace (audit log)

Recording event logs related to personal information lifecycle, system

operation, and security

• Urgent user

For the user who is not registered in the system, it is possible to use the
minimal functions required for performing examination.

• Screen lock

When the system is not used for a given length of time, it is possible to
automatically lock the screen. Note that if the system is being used in
examination, the screen is not locked.

(16) Dose management (optional)

The ionization chamber of the area dose meter is installed on the front
surface of the beam limiting device (inside the X-ray tube cover). Dose
management can be performed during examination.

(a) Display of the dose rate during fluoroscopy and radiography (fluoroscopic
monitor and system monitor)

(b) The cumulative dose is displayed while fluoroscopy/radiography is not in

progress.

(c) Recording of the dose as related information in each study

(d) DICOM MPPS or DICOM RDSR output of the total dose for each study as a
study result
(The dose information can also be stored as image data.)

No. 2B308-309EN
493
(17) Network function
The following network functions are supported. (A connection check is
required at the time of actual connection.)

For the conformity specifications, refer to DICOM Conformance Statement.

(a) DICOM Storage (Storage SCU) : Image transfer

(b) DICOM Storage Commitment : Check of image storage

(Storage Commitment SCU)

(c) DICOM Query/Retrieve SCU, Storage SCP : Image search and image
retrieval

*) XA images can be handled. This function will be limited depending on

the specifications of the connected dynamic image PACS and those of
the stored images.

(d) DICOM Modality Worklist Management : Retrieval of patient and

examination information

(e) DICOM Modality Performed Procedure Step : Examination result response

(f) DICOM Radiation Dose Structured Report : Output of structured report

concerning the dose

(18) External signal input (option)

Video signals of one of the following types can be selected and input. In
addition, the signals can be output and displayed on the external display
monitor (option).

(a) 1280 × 1024 (SXGA) or 1600 × 1200 (UXGA)

(b) NTSC or PAL

No. 2B308-309EN
494
19.10.2 Biplane system

(1) Image input section

(a) Input image

• For single-plane : 10242, 30 fps (maximum)

5122, 60 fps (maximum) (*1, 2)

• For biplane : 10242, 15 pps (maximum)

5122, 30 pps (maximum) (*1, 2)

*1) When the 12-inch FPD is used in

combination, select FOV 8" or less.

*2) These values are not applicable when

the 12 × 16-inch FPD is used in
combination.

(b) Bit depth : 16 bits

(2) Image recording unit

(a) Image disk capacity : 480 GB (RAID level 1)

(b) Standard number of images

• 10242 16 bits : Approximately 206400 (maximum)

• 5122 16 bits : Approximately 820800 (maximum)

(*) These are the numbers when the

maximum number of frames are
recorded per dynamic image.
When a different number of frames is
used, the number of images that can be
recorded may decrease.

NOTE: If software V8.0 or earlier has been upgraded to software V8.3 or later, the
image disk capacity is 200 GB (the same as before upgrade).

No. 2B308-309EN
495
 (3) Image display section
(a) Fluoroscopic/reference monitors

• Display system : Two image output systems for the

frontal/lateral fluoroscopic monitors
(Each image output system has two ports:
one for the monitor in the examination room
and another for that in the control room.)
Two image output systems for the reference
1/reference 2 monitors
(Each image output system has two ports:
one for the monitor in the examination room
and another for that in the control room.)
• Image display : 1280 × 1024, 60 Hz, monochrome (DVI-D)

(b) System monitor

• Display system : One system for the control room

• Image display : 1600 × 1200, 60 Hz, color or monochrome
(DVI-D connection)

(4) Fluoroscopy
(a) Input image : 10242, 16 bits

(b) Pulse rate (can be selected and set at the time of installation)

Fluoroscopy type Pulse rate

S/P fluoroscopy, 10242, 16 bits Continuous 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 p/s
B/P fluoroscopy, 10242, 16 bits 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15 p/s
High-speed B/P fluoroscopy, 10242, 20, 30 p/s
16 bits (*1, 2)

*1) Option. This option can be selected for systems combined with the
8-inch FPD.
*2) Image quality is equivalent to 5122.

(c) Fluoroscopy mode selection : Two modes (normal/high) (*1), three modes
(low/normal/high), or four modes
(low/mid/normal/high) are available.

*1) Two modes: Only for USA

(d) Fluoroscopic image processing:

• Noise reduction spatial filter

• Signal enhancement spatial filter
• Recursive filter
• Gray-scale processing
• Dynamic range compression
• Display gamma processing (monitor correction)

No. 2B308-309EN
496
 (e) Fluoroscopic image operation:

• Image magnification
• Image rotation
• Subtraction
• Peak hold
• Image addition

(f) Graphic display : The X-ray exposure field, compensation filter,

ABC ROI, and AEC ROI are graphically
displayed on LIH images.

(g) Fluoroscopic image recording

• Still image recording : An LIH image or a frame acquired at the

desired timing during fluoroscopy can be
recorded on the image disk.

• Dynamic image recording : A dynamic image for the set maximum time
(up to 90 s and within 1020 frames) can be
recorded on the image disk.
In addition, the fluoroscopic images for a
certain period of time (initial value: 10 s)
from the end of fluoroscopy can be recorded
on the image disk by operating the system
after fluoroscopy is completed (F-Store
function).

(h) Fluoroscopic planes : Frontal single plane, Lateral single plane,

Biplane
The maximum pulse rate for biplane
fluoroscopy is 15 exp/s. (*1)

*1) When the biplane system kit 3 (option)

is used in combination, up to 30 exp/s
can be set.

(i) Spot fluoroscopy : The area outside the specified ROI is

shielded from X-rays and fluoroscopy is
performed only for the ROI. The latest LIH
image is displayed for the area outside the
ROI.

NOTE: When FPD TFP-1200C/A1 or TFP-1200C/A2 is used in combination and a

high-resolution FOV size (3.0 inches, 2.3 inches, or 1.5 inches) is selected,
the following restrictions apply to the system:

• Continuous fluoroscopy ( [Cont.]) cannot be selected.

• Spot fluoroscopy cannot be selected.

No. 2B308-309EN
497
(5) Fluoroscopy roadmapping processing

• Subtraction : Blood vessels and the guide wire can be

visualized using radiographic or fluoroscopic
images as mask images. Mask images are
generated from fluoroscopic images by
performing peak-trace processing, summed
averaging, bottom trace processing, or LIH
processing. It is also possible to use DSA
radiographic images as mask images.

• Landmark image display : Background images (mask images, bones,

and blood vessels containing contrast
medium) and the guide wire are displayed
by roadmapping. Radiographic images are
used as mask images.

• Fluoroscopy roadmapping image acquisition

a) Still image acquisition : An LIH image or a frame acquired at the

desired timing during fluoroscopy can be
recorded on the image disk.
b) Dynamic image acquisition: A dynamic image for the set maximum
time (up to 90 s and within 1020 frames)
can be recorded on the image disk.
In addition, the fluoroscopic images for a
certain period of time (initial value: 10 s)
from the end of fluoroscopy can be
recorded on the image disk by operating
the system after fluoroscopy is completed
(F-Store function).

(6) Study protocols/acquisition programs/radiographic and

fluoroscopic positions
(a) Study protocols : Acquisition programs (max. 50), parameters
in Fluoroscopy mode, and UI customization
data can be preset.

(b) Number of registered study

protocols : 100 (maximum)

(c) Acquisition programs : The radiographic technique, image

acquisition parameters, X-ray radiographic
conditions, View ID, etc. can be preset.

(d) Acquisition program

selection : Manual selection and automatic selection
synchronized with auto-positioning are
possible.

(e) Number of radiographic

and fluoroscopic positions
(auto-positioning) : Up to 64 radiographic and fluoroscopic
positions for general studies

No. 2B308-309EN
498
(7) Radiography
The following radiographic techniques can be set.

(a) DSA function

Using the DSA function, images of blood vessels only are extracted by
subtracting mask images acquired before injection of contrast medium from
contrast images acquired after injection of contrast medium. Continuous
DSA is performed by using pulsed X-rays to acquire radiographic images.
To enable subtraction to be performed correctly, the X-ray conditions in DSA
are fixed (the mask and contrast images must be acquired under the same
conditions).

• Acquisition mode

Acquisition mode Acquisition rate

S/P, 10242, 16 bits 1/3, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 15, 30 fps
B/P, 10242, 16 bits 1/3, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 15 pps

• Stage setting : Mask 1 stage + Contrast 5 stages

(maximum)

• Stage common parameters : Acquisition matrix, number of bits

• Stage individual parameters : Acquisition rate, number of acquisition

frames, delay between stages

• Summed averaging during

radiography : Mask (1 to 32 frames), Live (1 to 8 frames)

• Acquisition time : 600 seconds or 1023 frames (maximum)

(Sum of the mask stage and the contrast
stages)

No. 2B308-309EN
499
(b) DA function

Using the DA function, digital acquisition of images using pulsed X-rays is

performed.

• Acquisition planes : Frontal single plane, Lateral single plane,

Biplane

• Acquisition mode (can be selected and set at the time of installation)

Acquisition mode Acquisition rate

S/P 10242 16 bits 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 30 fps
S/P 5122 16 bits (*1) 60 fps (*2)
B/P 10242 16 bits 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15 pps
B/P 5122 16 bits (*1) 30 pps (*2)

*1) For systems in which the 12 × 16-inch FPD is used in combination,

5122 cannot be selected.
*2) When acquisition is performed at a rate of 60 fps in systems with the
12-inch FPD used in combination, select an FOV of 8 inches or
6 inches.

• Acquisition time : 600 seconds or 2400 frames (maximum)

2047 frames for systems with the
12 × 16-inch FPD used in combination.

• X-ray conditions : ABC operation is performed during

radiography by estimating the radiographic
conditions from the immediately preceding
fluoroscopic conditions.

(c) One-shot radiography function

Using the one-shot radiography function, a digital radiographic image can be

acquired by performing radiography once during fluoroscopy. This function
is useful for checking the insertion position of the catheter and for observing
and recording the conditions during angioplasty.

• Acquisition planes : Frontal single plane, Lateral single plane,

Biplane

• Acquisition mode : 10242, 16 bits (A single frame is recorded.)

• Radiographic conditions : The radiographic conditions are estimated

from the immediately preceding fluoroscopic
conditions.

• Image operations : Dynamic range compression, spatial filter

processing, grayscale processing, and
image rotation

No. 2B308-309EN
500
 (d) Rotation DA function (manual rotation)

Using the rotation DA function, a contrast image can be acquired while the
C-arm is rotated.

(e) Rotational DA function

• Acquisition plane : F-side single plane

• Acquisition mode

Acquisition mode
10242 16 bits 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5 10, 15, 30 fps
5122 16 bits (*1) 60 fps (*2)

*1) For systems in which the 12 × 16-inch FPD is used in combination,

5122 cannot be selected.
*2) When acquisition is performed at a rate of 60 fps in systems with the
12-inch FPD used in combination, select an FOV of 8" or less.

• Acquisition program : The rotational angle, rotational orientation,

and rotational speed of the support unit can
be preset in the acquisition program.

• Maximum rotational speed of the support unit

Rotational Rotational speed when the C-arm is Rotational speed when the C-arm
orientation at the head-end longitudinal position is at the left/right lateral position
LAO/RAO 50°/s 30°/s
CAU/CRA 20°/s 20°/s

(f) Rotational DSA function

• Acquisition mode : X-ray control using the angle trigger method

is employed. The mean image acquisition
speed changes as the support unit rotation
speed changes.

a) 10242, 16 bits : Approximately 1 to 25 fps

• Rotation mode : Mask-Return-Contrast acquisition (MRC

method)
Mask-Contrast acquisition (MC method)
Mask-Return-Contrast 1-Contrast 2 (MRCC
method)
Mask-Contrast 1-Contrast 2 (MCC method)

• Acquisition program : The rotation angle, rotation direction, and

rotation speed of the support unit can be
preset in the acquisition program.

• Stage common parameters : Acquisition matrix, number of bits, rotation

speed, acquisition rate, and number of
acquisition frames

No. 2B308-309EN
501
 • Stage individual parameters : Delay between stages

• Support unit rotation maximum speed

Rotation Rotation speed when the C-arm Rotation speed when the C-arm
direction is at the patient head end is at the side of the patient
LAO/RAO 40°/s 30°/s
CAU/CRA 20°/s 20°/s

• X-ray radiation timing : The support unit angles at the time of each
mask image acquisition and the
corresponding contrast image acquisition
can be matched. (Angle trigger method)

(g) Stepping DSA function

DSA can be performed for the entire lower extremities in a series of steps
using this function.

• Acquisition plane : Frontal single plane

• Number of steps : Maximum 7 steps/8 stages

• Step speed : 1.7 s or less/step (step width: 220 mm)

• Acquisition mode

Acquisition mode
10242 ,16 bits 1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 15 fps

• Other : The radiographic conditions and the

compensation filter position can be set for
each stage.

NOTE: When FPD TFP-1200C/A1 or TFP-1200C/A2 is used in combination, select

a standard FOV size (12 inches to 6 inches).

(h) 3D-DSA function (optional)

• Data acquisition range : RAO 100° to LAO 100°

• Rotation speed : Max. 50°/s

• Radiography technique : 3D-DSA

• Rotational modes : Mask - Return - Contrast acquisition (MRC

method)
Mask - Contrast acquisition (MC method)

No. 2B308-309EN
502
 • Types of reconstruction images

a) Blood vessel 3D display from 3D-DSA images

b) Blood vessel 3D display from 3D-DSA images, device image extracted

from mask image, and device 3D display (*1).

c) Bone image and blood vessel image extracted from contrast image of
3D-DSA images, and bone and blood vessel 3D display

d) Blood vessel 3D display from 3D-DSA images, bone image extracted

from mask image, and bone 3D display (*2)

• 3D-DSA acquisition mode

a) 10242, 12 bits

1°/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 30°/s (*3)

2°/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 50°/s

b) 5122, 12 bits (only when the TFP-1216A/C1, TFP-1200A/C1,

TFP-1200A/C2, TFP-1200C/A1, or TFP-1200C/A2 is used in
combination)

1°/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 50°/s

*1) Superimposed display of the blood vessels and the device (device fusion)
can be performed using the corresponding workstation function.
*2) It is possible to superimpose and display blood vessel image and bone
image (bone fusion), depending on the function of the workstation used in
combination.
*3) When the maximum C-arm rotation speed of 30°/s is selected, acquisition is
performed at intervals of 1.2°/frame.

(i) AlphaCT acquisition function (optional)

Images used to generate AlphaCT images (CBCT (Cone Beam CT) images)
are acquired.

• Data acquisition range : Approx. RAO 100° to approx. LAO 100°

FPD used in combination Rotation speed

TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/B1, TFP-800A/C1,
TFP-800A/C2, TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/B1, Up to 25°/s
TFP-1216A/A1
TFP-1216A/C1, TFP-1200A/C1, TFP-1200A/C2,
Up to 50°/s
TFP-1200C/A1, TFP-1200C/A2

• Radiographic techniques : AlphaCT Vessel, AlphaCT 10s, AlphaCT 15s,

AlphaCT 22s, AlphaCT 5s, AlphaCT 8s,
AlphaCT 11s
• Rotation mode : Contrast acquisition (C method)
• Reconstruction image type : 3D display using CBCT images (mainly MPR)
3D display using Fine Voxel image
Reduction of metal artifacts

No. 2B308-309EN
503
 • AlphaCT acquisition mode

a) 10242, 16 bits

AlphaCT Vessel acquisition : 10242, 16 bits, acquisition of approx.

100 frames, 50°/s
AlphaCT-Fast acquisition : 10242, 16 bits, acquisition of approx.
250 frames, 25°/s
AlphaCT-Middle acquisition : 10242, 16 bits, acquisition of approx.
400 frames, 15°/s
AlphaCT-High (quality)
acquisition : 10242, 16 bits, acquisition of approx.
600 frames, 10°/s

b) 5122, 16 bits (when combined with the TFP-1216A/C1, TFP-1200A/C1,

TFP-1200A/C2, TFP-1200C/A1, or TFP-1200C/A2)

AlphaCT-Fast HS acquisition : 5122, 16 bits, acquisition of approx.

220 frames, 50°/s
AlphaCT-Middle HS acquisition : 5122, 16 bits, acquisition of approx.
370 frames, 30°/s
AlphaCT-High HS acquisition : 5122, 16 bits, acquisition of approx.
570 frames, 20°/s

(8) Image processing

The following image processing operations can be performed for
radiographic images in the control or examination room.

• Spatial filter processing

• Gray-scale processing
• Scattered radiation correction processing (*1)
• Negative/positive reversal
• Display gamma function (monitor correction/several non-linear gamma
functions selectable by the user) (*1)
• Image magnification (magnification ratio: 1.0× to 5.0×), panning
• Summed average (mask/live addition for up to 64 frames (maximum))
• Subtraction
• Landmark
• Scanned image inversion (*2)
• Image inversion (lateral inversion, vertical inversion) (*2)
• Image rotation (An image can be rotated to the desired angle during
fluoroscopy or radiography. It is also possible to automatically rotate an
image so that the head end of the tabletop always comes to the top of the
monitor regardless of the C-arm insertion direction.)
• Auto-windowing
• Auto pixel shift (The amount of shift (mismatch) between mask images and
live images caused by motion artifacts is detected and is automatically
corrected or is corrected in the specified ROI.)
• Manual pixel shift (*2)
• Annotation (characters, arrows, segments, rectangles, circles) (*2)

No. 2B308-309EN
504
 • Shutter display
The shutter can be displayed manually or automatically. In automatic mode,
the shutter is applied to the beam limiting device blade position of the last
frame. Note that shutter display is temporarily canceled while a dynamic
image is being played back on the system monitor.
• Storage of processed images
The image is displayed with the previous processing function applied. In
addition, it is possible to return the processed image to the original (the
image at the time of acquisition) (*3).
• Peak/Bottom trace function (*2)
• Panoramic view (*2)
• SNRF processing
This is a digital image processing filter that can reduce noise from a dynamic
image without afterimage. This function is useful not only for fluoroscopic
images but also radiographic images.

*1) These parameters are preset in the examination protocols.

They cannot be changed in units of image.

*2) These image processing operations can only be performed from the control
room.

*3) The applicable image processing functions depend on the software version.

(9) Analysis functions

(a) Distance measurement

(b) Simplified stenosis ratio measurement (comparison calculation using two

measured lengths)

(c) Calibration

• Automatic calibration : Automatic calculation is performed based on the

support unit and table location information.
Calculation is performed assuming that the object is
located at the isocenter.

• Manual calibration : Calculation is performed by using a calibration

object or by entering the PID.

No. 2B308-309EN
505
(10) Parallel processing
While fluoroscopy or fluorography/radiography is being performed in the
examination room, the following processing operations can be performed
independently in the control room. Note, however, that there are some
limitations.

(a) Image selection, image playback, and image processing for a desired patient

(b) Reference image recording

(c) Photo image recording

(d) Image analysis

(e) Imager output (*1)

(f) Recording on external media (*1)

(g) Network transfer/receive (*1)

*1) Imager output, media recording, and network transfer/receive can be

performed in the background.

(11) Vital sign data

(a) Display channel : The two channels for the electrocardiogram
and the blood-pressure waveform are
displayed independently.

(b) Acquisition : Acquired at the same time as the

radiographic images (saved with the
corresponding images)

(c) Transfer : DICOM transfer is possible as image related

information. Recording on external media is
possible in the DICOM format.

No. 2B308-309EN
506
(12) Image storage
(a) CD-R recording

• Images to be recorded : Dynamic images, still images

• Related information : Patient information, study information, vital

sign data

• Recording method : Compliance with DICOM 3.0. (5122 or

10242, 8/12 bits, JPEG lossless
compression)

• Recording image frames : Approximately 4800 images maximum

(5122, 8 bits)

• Recording operation : Manual or automatic background recording

can be performed after completing a study
(Finish Study).

(b) DVD±R recording (optional)

• Images to be recorded : Dynamic images, still images

• Related information : Patient information, study information, vital

sign data

• Recording method : Compliance with DICOM 3.0. (5122 or

10242, 8/12 bits, JPEG lossless
compression)

• Recording operation : Manual or automatic background recording

can be performed after completing an
examination.

No. 2B308-309EN
507
(13) Study appointments
(a) Number of appointments : 200 or more

(b) Appointment items : Patient ID, patient name, sex, date of birth,
study protocols, examining physician, other

* The scheduled study date is registered at the time of patient information

registration and the appointment information can be retrieved and managed.

(c) Appointment method

• Keyboard entry

• DICOM MWM

For a previously examined patient, a new appointment can be made after

retrieving the existing patient information and study information. (Up to
10000 study histories can be stored.)

(d) Previous image reference ("Prevision")

• Previous images to be referred to during a study (DICOM XA images) can be

set at the time of making an appointment.

• The previous images can be imported from the following locations to the
image disk.

• CD-R/DVD RAM (optional)

• Network server

* This function will be limited depending on the specifications of the connected

dynamic image PACS and those of the stored images.

(14) Imager output

• DICOM print (imager connection)

No. 2B308-309EN
508
(15) Function for supporting personal information protection
and security countermeasures

• User authentication

Identification and authentication by user ID and password

• User management/user's right management

Restriction of usable functions according to user's eligibility

• Audit trace (audit log)

Recording event logs related to personal information lifecycle, system

operation, and security

• Urgent user

For the user who is not registered in the system, it is possible to use the
minimal functions required for performing examination.

• Screen lock

When the system is not used for a given length of time, it is possible to
automatically lock the screen. Note that if the system is being used in
examination, the screen is not locked.

(16) Dose management (optional)

The ionization chamber of the area dose meter is installed on the front
surface of the beam limiting device (inside the X-ray tube cover). Dose
management can be performed during examination.

(a) Display of the dose rate during fluoroscopy and radiography (fluoroscopic
monitor and system monitor)

(b) The cumulative dose is displayed while fluoroscopy/radiography is not in

progress.

(c) Recording of the dose as related information in each study (Each of the
doses on the frontal and lateral sides is recorded.)

(d) DICOM MPPS or DICOM RDSR output of the total dose on the frontal and
lateral sides for each study as a study result
(The dose information can also be stored as image data.)

No. 2B308-309EN
509
(17) Network function
The following network functions are supported. (A connection check is
required at the time of actual connection.)

For the conformity specifications, refer to DICOM Conformance Statement.

(a) DICOM Storage (Storage SCU) : Image transfer

(b) DICOM Storage Commitment : Check of image storage

(Storage Commitment SCU)

(c) DICOM Query/Retrieve SCU, Storage SCP : Image search and image
retrieval

*) XA images can be handled. This function will be limited depending on

the specifications of the connected dynamic image PACS and those of
the stored images.

(d) DICOM Modality Worklist Management : Retrieval of patient and

examination information

(e) DICOM Modality Performed Procedure Step : Examination result response

(f) DICOM Radiation Dose Structured Report : Output of the structured

report concerning the dose

(18) External signal input (optional)

Video signals of one of the following types can be selected and input. In
addition, the signals can be output and displayed on the external display
monitor (option).

(a) 1280 × 1024 (SXGA) or 1600 × 1200 (UXGA)

(b) NTSC or PAL

No. 2B308-309EN
510
 19.11 Power Requirements
(1) Rating of the circuit breaker
(a) Three-phase power supply

Line voltage 380/400/415/440/480 V 200 V (*1)

Rated current 100 A 150 A
Circuit breaker • Must not trip at 200 A for 10 seconds. • Must not trip at 400 A for 10 seconds.
characteristics
• Must not trip at 400 A for 1 second. • Must not trip at 800 A for 1 second.
• Must not trip at 1000 A for 0.01 second. • Must not trip at 1600 A for 0.01 second.

(2) Permissible power impedance

(Three-phase) : 380 V 0.08 Ω or less
400 V 0.09 Ω or less
415 V 0.09 Ω or less
440 V 0.10 Ω or less
480 V 0.12 Ω or less
200 V (*1) 0.043 Ω or less

(3) Recommended capacity of the

three-phase distribution
transformer : 100 kVA or more

Line Line voltage

Line voltage Line capacity
frequency fluctuation
XTP-8100XG Three-phase 400 V 50-60 Hz Max. 160 kVA ±10% or less
(When ST-7008 is used: 220 V) (nominal maximum
Single-phase 100 V power output)
Max. 10 kVA
(long-term rated output)
DFP-8000C/A2 Three-phase 50-60 Hz Max. 170 kVA ±10% or less
• 380/400/415/440/480 VAC
• 200 VAC (*1)
CAS-880A Three-phase 220 VAC 50-60 Hz 5 kVA ±10% or less
CAS-820B Three-phase 220 VAC 50-60 Hz 5 kVA ±10% or less
CAT-850B Three-phase 220 VAC 50-60 Hz 1.5 kVA ±10% or less
Single-phase 220 VAC
CAT-880B Three-phase 220 VAC 50-60 Hz 3 kVA ±10% or less
Single-phase 220 VAC
BLA-900A 24 VDC – Max. 48 W ±10% or less
BLA-900A/R1
BLA-900C

NOTE: Since the system requires the large-capacity power supply, the system
cannot be used using the independent power plant.

No. 2B308-309EN
511
(4) Earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
It is recommended that an ELCB be used to protect the power-supply circuit
from an earth fault.
Install an ELCB as described below:

• Trip current : 100 mA

• Antinoise characteristics : To prevent unintended operation, a high-

frequency-resistant type (inverter-compatible
type) must be used.

• Recommended models : NV100-SW-3P-100A manufactured by

Mitsubishi Electric
NV225-CW-3P-150A manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric
NV-ZH (leak current relay) manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric

*1) The XSDT-100C must be used in combination.

No. 2B308-309EN
512
19.12 Weights of the Accessories and Options
The maximum total weight of the accessories and options that can be used
in combination with the catheterization table is 20 kg. Calculate the total
weight referring to the table below.

(1) Accessories

Part name Weight (kg)

Tabletop mat (*1) 2.0
Tabletop mat (*2) 5.0
Drip infusion stand 1.0
Leg fixing band (*2) 0.3
Patient fixing band (*2) 0.3
Tabletop operating box (*2) 4.2
Tableside console 4.2

*1) Provided with CAT-850B

*2) Provided with CAT-880B

(2) Options

Part name Model name Weight (kg)

Tabletop mat XBTM-001A 5.0
Arm support XBAS-001A 2.0
Handgrip (for one arm) XBAR-001A 1.0
Handgrip (for two arms) XBAR110A 3.0
Arm holder (for CAT-850B) XBHG-001A 5.2
Arm holder (for CAT-880B) XBHG-002A 5.0
Arm cover XBAC-001A 1.9
Auxiliary tabletop kit XBET-001A 2.0
Head-end tabletop operating XBHR-001A 5.0
switch kit
Tabletop control switch XBFG-001A 5.0
Drape holder XBDB-001A 0.7
Extension rails XBER-001A 8.0
Tableside console XGCP-880BA 4.2
XGCP-882BA

No. 2B308-309EN
513
19.13 Materials Used in Patient Contact Sections
(1) Accessories

Part name Material

Tabletop mat (*1) Polyurethane
Tabletop mat (*2) Polyurethane

*1) Provided with CAT-850B

*2) Provided with CAT-880B

(2) Options

Part name Model name Material

Tabletop mat XBTM-001A Polyurethane
Arm support XBAS-001A Acrylic
Armrest (for one arm) XBAR-001A C-CFP
Armrest (for two arms) XBAR110A C-CFP
Handgrip (for CAT-850B) XBHG-001A Aluminum,
polyvinyl chloride
Handgrip (for CAT-880B) XBHG-002A Aluminum,
polyvinyl chloride
Tabletop control switch XBFG-001A Aluminum, iron

No. 2B308-309EN
514
19.14 Applicable Standards (IEC)
• IEC 60601-1: 2005 +A1: 2012
• IEC 60601-1-2: 2014
• IEC 60601-1-3: 2008 +A1: 2013
• IEC 60601-1-6: 2010 +A1: 2013
• IEC 60601-1-9: 2007 +A1: 2013
• IEC 60601-2-28: 2010
• IEC 60601-2-28: 2017
• IEC 60601-2-43: 2010 +A1: 2017
• IEC 62304: 2006 +A1: 2015
• IEC 62366: 2007 +A1: 2014
• IEC 60627: 2001
• IEC 60580: 2000

NOTE: The applicable standards (IEC) above are applicable to newly installed
systems. If this operation manual is supplied because of upgrade of the
installed product, the standards before the upgrade are applicable to your
system. In this case, check the applicable standards using the operation
manual supplied with the system. Alternatively, contact your service
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
515
No. 2B308-309EN
516
20. Technical Data
Contents 20.1 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-2-43
20.2 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-2
20.3 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-3
20.4 Technical Data Required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020
20.5 Information Sources Related to Pediatric Imaging

No. 2B308-309EN
517
20.1 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-2-43
The technical data required by IEC 60601-2-43 is given below.

(1) Power supply

• Line voltage, phase, and frequency : Described in subsection 19.11

• Line impedance : Described in subsection 19.11

• Explanation of connection of the

power supply : Described in subsection 3.1

• Characteristics of the overcurrent

breaker : Described in subsection 19.11

(2) Electrical output data and combination of X-ray conditions

• Radiography

Nominal maximum tube voltage : 125 kV (at 800 mA)

Nominal maximum tube current : 1000 mA (at 100 kV)
Nominal electrical power : 100 kW (100 kV, 1000 mA, 0.1 s)

• Fluoroscopy

Nominal maximum tube voltage : 125 kV (at 4 mA)

Nominal maximum tube current : 4 mA (at 125 kV)

(3) X-ray conditions and operating modes

• Radiography

Tube voltage : 50 kV to 125 kV

Tube current : 20 mA to 1000 mA

Acquisition time : 1.0 to 100 ms

(when kV and mAs are controlled)

• Fluoroscopy

Tube voltage : 50 kV to 125 kV

Tube current : 0.5 mA to 4.0 mA

• Operating mode

Continuously connected to the power supply in the standby status

Compliant with the specified load (nominal maximum power consumption:
100 kW)

(4) Class of protection against electric shock

• Class I

No. 2B308-309EN
518
 (5) Tests
This unit meets test items required by IEC 60601-2-43 in the ranges
described below.

• Reproducibility : Range ≥ 0.5 mAs

• Linearity : Range ≥ 0.5 mAs

• The test conditions (representative example) for reproducibility/linearity are

shown in the table below.

Test conditions A B C D E F
Tube voltage (kV) 50 125 62 100 62 100
Tube current (mA) 630 20 80 32 100 50
Acquisition time (ms) 40 40 40 40 40 40
Reproducibility (R) R R R R
Linearity (L) L L L L
Thickness of aluminum (mm) 10 45 21 34 21 34
Beam hardening filter F3

• Accuracy

Radiographic tube voltage (±10%) : All combinations which can be set

Radiographic tube current (±20%) : All combinations which can be set
Acquisition time (±10% +1 ms) : All combinations which can be set
Fluoroscopic tube voltage (±10%) : All combinations which can be set
Fluoroscopic tube current (±20%) : All combinations which can be set

(6) Measurement method

• Tube voltage : Measured in the high-voltage circuit

using a high-voltage divider

• Tube current : Measured at the neutral point of the

rectified high-voltage circuit of the
X-ray high-voltage generator

• Acquisition time : The interval between when the tube

voltage rises to 75% of the peak value
and when the tube voltage falls to 75%
of the peak value is measured.

(7) Appropriate X-ray tubes to be combined for tests

Described in subsection 2.2.

No. 2B308-309EN
519
 (8) Patient entrance reference point
In this system, the following point is specified as the patient entrance
reference point.

The distance between the X-ray focus and the patient entrance reference
point is regarded as the average focus-to-skin distance.

• Patient entrance reference point : A point 15 cm from the isocenter

towards the X-ray tube on the central
axis of the X-ray beam.

NOTE: For the reference air kerma rate, the influence of backscatter radiation is not
included in accordance with the measurement method described in IEC
60601-2-43. The reference value may vary depending on the settings.

No. 2B308-309EN
520
 (9) Radiation data
Reference air kerma data is provided for the patient exposure reference
point specified by IEC 60601-2-43. The tube voltage, tube current, pulse
width, and additional filter are automatically selected according to the
selected program.

NOTE: The reference air kerma data of the C-arm plane is provided for single-plane
systems and biplane systems. The reference air kerma data of the Ω-arm
plane for biplane systems can be obtained by multiplying the data of the
C-arm plane by the following conversion factor.

Conversion factor = 0.84

(9.1) Available settings

The skin dose level varies according to the conditions, and a risk of radiation
exposure is present even in normal use. The settings that affect the skin
dose level and the available settings are described below.

• Study protocol : An appropriate study protocol is selected

according to the purpose of the examination.
Fluoroscopic and radiographic conditions
are registered in each protocol.

• Acquisition program : Several programs are preset in each study

protocol. The desired acquisition program
can be selected.

• Fluoroscopy mode : Up to four fluoroscopy modes (low, middle,

normal, high) are registered in each study
protocol. When the mode is switched, the
FPD incident dose, pulse rate, additional
filter, dose limit, and ABC tube voltage
settings are changed accordingly.

• Pulse rate

Fluoroscopy : Continuous, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 fps

(Only preset rates are displayed.)
DA : 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 30, 60 fps
DSA : 1/3, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 15, 30 fps

• Beam hardening filter : The additional filter is automatically selected

from the following filters or the preset filter is
selected.

F3 : Al 1.8 mm (Al 2.0 mm)

F1 : Cu 0.2mm
F2 : Cu 0.3 mm
F4 : Cu 0.5 mm
F5 : Cu 0.9 mm (Al 2.0 mm and/or Cu 0.9 mm
may not be available in some systems.)

• FOV : The FOV changes according to the

reference incident dose set for each FOV.

No. 2B308-309EN
521
 • Dose setting

Fluoroscopy : The dose mode (low, normal, high, auto) is

switched automatically according to the
fluoroscopy mode selected. It is not possible
to change the dose mode directly.
DA : Dose mode (low, normal, high, auto)
DSA : The dose setting is selected in the
acquisition program.
Focus size : The following options are available for the
focus size for radiography.
• L (large)/M (middle)/Auto
• L (large)/M (middle)/S (small)/Auto
For Auto, either "L-M-S" or "M-S" can be
selected.

• ABC brightness : For fluoroscopy and DA, the image

brightness can be adjusted using this
function. If the brightness is changed by one
step, the dose changes by about 15%.

• HLC : High-dose rate fluoroscopy mode can be

selected using the HLC footswitch. The
dose limit is set to 125 mGy/min in this mode
(176 mGy/min for sites outside Japan).

(9.2) Measurement conditions

Phantom Rectangular PMMA (acrylic), thickness: 20 cm,

sides: 25 cm or more
SID 120 cm
Distance between X-ray focus and 94 cm to 96 cm (with the phantom is set in
phantom contact with the FPD)
Distance between X-ray focus and 70 cm (CAS-880A), 75 cm (CAS-820B)
isocenter
Distance between X-ray focus and 55 cm (CAS-880A), 60 cm (CAS-820B)
patient exposure reference point
Dose measurement point Patient exposure reference point (*)
X-ray grid IN
Tabletop of the catheterization table OUT
X-ray beam direction LAO 90°/CRA 0° (a lateral position at which
the tabletop of the catheterization table is not
included in the exposure field)
Exposure field size Each FOV
Radiography Radiography is performed after completion of
fluoroscopy.

*) The patient exposure reference point is 15 cm toward the X-ray tube

assembly from the isocenter.

No. 2B308-309EN
522
 (10) Dose data for systems with the TFP-800A
(10.1) Cardiac protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 19.6 28.4 34.2 39.9
Normal 15 28.6 35.3 40.0 43.8
Middle 15 18.7 24.8 30.7 33.4
Low 10 6.5 8.6 11.0 12.6
DT fluoroscopy Middle 15 22.0 22.5 25.3 35.5
Fluoroscopy roadmap Middle 15 27.0 36.1 40.6 44.5
HLC fluoroscopy Middle 15 12.3 13.1 15.1 24.3

(Unit: mGy/min)

*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".

*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

• Fluoroscopic mode setting at the time of dose measurement

Beam hardening
Dose Rate (f/s) Dose limit kV
filter
High Auto 15 Auto High High
Normal High 15 Auto Normal Low
Middle Normal 15 Auto Normal Low
Low Low 10 F4 Normal High

*) The dose values specified above may not be obtained, depending on

fluoroscopy mode setting.

• Frame Rate : The dose rate (default) per frame in

fluoroscopy is specified below.

15 fps
30 fps 20 fps
or less
Ratio 0.67 0.83 1.0

*) The doses for other frame rates can be

calculated based on the above ratios.

No. 2B308-309EN
523
• Beam hardening filter : When Auto is selected, the filter is
automatically selected according to the
object to be examined.

• Focus size : Small focus is set (initial setting).

• Dose limit : Maximum air kerma at 30 cm from the FPD

accessible surface during fluoroscopy. The
maximum fluoroscopic dose is limited to this
value.

High
Low Normal
(HLC)
Japan 25 50 125
USA, etc. 44 87 175

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) Dose limit setting for Normal and HLC
mode is performed in accordance with
the applicable regulations in each country
or region.

• Fluoroscopic tube voltage : ABC reference tube voltage setting

(High: 80 kV, Low: 70 kV)

• DT : Selection of Dynamic Trace program (DT)

• HLC fluoroscopy : The HLC footswitch is used.

No. 2B308-309EN
524
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.11 0.17 0.20 0.22
LV15 15 0.11 0.17 0.20 0.22
DT DA 15 0.12 0.15 0.17 0.18
One shot One shot 1.54 1.68 1.80 1.86
DSA DSA10fps 10 2.91 3.03 3.38 3.58

(Unit: mGy/f)

<Measurement conditions>

• DA dose : Dose for normal dose mode (default)

The values in the table below are the initial
dose ratios for each dose mode of DA.

Low Normal High

Ratio 0.6 1.0 1.0

*) The dose in Low mode should be

calculated using the above ratio.

• Beam hardening filter : When Auto is selected for DA, the beam
filter is automatically selected according to
the radiographic conditions.

• Frame rate : The dose per frame in radiography is

independent of the frame rate setting.

• Focus size : Automatically selected in Auto mode.

• DT DA : Selection of Dynamic Trace program (DT)

• DSA : 400 µR/f (103.2 nC/kg)/82 kV/BF:F3/focus:

Auto
: The DSA dose values that can be set by the
user and the corresponding incident dose
rate are provided in the table below.
(Unit: µR/f)

DSA dose 100 150 200 250 300 400 500

Ratio 0.25 0.375 0.5 0.625 0.75 1.0 1.25

*) In addition to the dose setting, the tube

voltage and acquisition rate can also be
changed.

No. 2B308-309EN
525
 (10.2) Angio protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (10.1) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
DSA DSA3fps 3 2.03 2.16 2.26 2.29
DSA6fps 6 1.33 1.44 1.56 1.68
DA DA15fps 15 0.11 0.17 0.20 0.22
DT DA 15 0.12 0.15 0.17 0.18
One shot One shot 1.54 1.68 1.80 1.86
3D 3D 25 1.46
AlphaCT Middle AlphaCT 30 0.88

(Unit: mGy/f)

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.2) (b).

• DSA3fps : 400 µR/f (103.2 nC/kg)/92 kV/BF:F3/Focus:

Auto
• DSA6fps : 400 µR/f (103.2 nC/kg)/88 kV/BF:F1/Focus:
Auto

No. 2B308-309EN
526
 (10.3) EP protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Frontal Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 18.6 25.3 30.8 33.3
Normal 7.5 7.2 9.8 12.6 13.6
Middle 7.5 4.7 6.6 8.5 9.2
Low 5 2.5 3.5 4.6 5.1
HLC
Low 5 10.5 13.9 16.2 18.3
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Low".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (a).

• Fluoroscopic mode setting at the time of dose measurement

Beam hardening
Dose Rate(f/s) Dose limit kV
filter
High Normal 15 Auto Normal Low
Normal Normal 7.5 Auto Normal High
Middle Low 7.5 Auto Normal High
Low Low 5 F5 (F4) Normal High

*) The dose values specified above may not be obtained, depending on

fluoroscopy mode setting.

No. 2B308-309EN
527
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.08 0.11 0.14 0.15
LV15 15 0.09 0.13 0.14 0.15
One shot One shot 0.71 0.84 0.92 0.95
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.55 2.48 2.69 3.09

(Unit: mGy/f)

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

• Beam hardening filter : F1 for DA, Auto for DSA

• DSA dose : Dose delivered under the conditions of

300 µR/f (77.46 nC/kg)/82 kV, focus: Auto
: The DSA dose values that can be set by the
user and the corresponding incident dose
rate are provided in the table below.
(Unit: µR/f)

DSA dose 100 150 200 250 300 400 500

Ratio 0.33 0.5 0.67 0.83 1.0 1.33 1.67

*) In addition to the dose setting, the tube

voltage and acquisition rate can also be
changed.

No. 2B308-309EN
528
 (10.4) Pediatric protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 20 20.6 27.9 33.6 35.4
Normal 15 18.8 25.0 31.2 33.4
Middle 15 13.5 19.1 23.2 26.7
Low 7.5 3.9 5.3 6.9 7.6
DT
Middle 15 15.3 22.2 27.2 27.9
fluoroscopy
HLC
Middle 15 27.0 38.5 46.3 53.9
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (a).

• Fluoroscopic mode setting at the time of dose measurement

Beam hardening
Dose Rate (f/s) Dose limit kV
filter
High Normal 20 Auto Normal Low
Normal Normal 15 Auto Normal Low
Middle Normal 15 Auto Low High
Low Low 7.5 F5 (F4) Low High

*) The dose values specified above may not be obtained, depending on

fluoroscopy mode setting.

The maximum fluoroscopic dose is limited by the dose limit setting. The
dose in Low mode is limited to 50% of that in Normal mode.

No. 2B308-309EN
529
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.11 0.17 0.20 0.22
LV30 30 0.11 0.17 0.20 0.22
DT DA 15 0.13 0.16 0.18 0.19
One shot One shot 1.57 1.70 1.82 1.84
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.48 1.49 1.50 1.44

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

• Beam hardening filter : For acquisition programs other than DT

DA, "Auto" is selected and the beam
hardening filter is automatically selected
according to the conditions.

(10.5) Cardiac-Low, Angio-Low, and Pediatric-Low protocols

The dose values when image acquisition is performed with the low dose
setting using the EP protocol are specified below.

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (10.3) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

Refer to (10.3) (b).

No. 2B308-309EN
530
 (11) Dose data for systems with the TFP-1200A or TFP-1200C
(11.1) Cardiac protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

(a.1) Standard mode

• FPD: TFP-1200A or TFP-1200C

• FOV: 12 inches, 10 inches, 8 inches, 6 inches

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 18.9 19.4 23.1 36.1
Normal 15 26.0 28.1 30.1 40.2
Middle 15 16.8 18.3 20.5 30.7
Low 10 5.4 5.8 6.9 10.7
DT
Middle 15 21.7 29.8 34.0 35.2
fluoroscopy
Fluoroscopy
Middle 15 26.8 27.2 30.6 40.0
roadmap
HLC
Middle 15 12.9 18.9 22.5 27.1
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.1) (a).

No. 2B308-309EN
531
(a.2) High-definition mode

• FPD: TFP-1200C
• FOV: 3.0 inches, 2.3 inches, 1.5 inches

(a.2.1) Constant dose mode

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 40.6 46.1 50.0
Normal 15 35.6 37.9 40.7
Middle 15 27.9 29.8 33.4
Low 10 11.7 13.1 14.8
DT
Middle 15 27.9 31.0 35.2
fluoroscopy
Fluoroscopy
Middle 15 34.1 38.7 40.7
roadmap
HLC
Middle 15 28.8 32.1 33.4
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)

(a.2.2) Standard dose mode

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 74.9 84.2 113.5
Normal 15 50.3 60.2 74
Middle 15 40.3 48 69.8
Low 10 21.4 25.4 36.5
DT
Middle 15 41 49 68
fluoroscopy
Fluoroscopy
Middle 15 51.4 62.2 75
roadmap
HLC
Middle 15 40.7 48.5 68
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)

No. 2B308-309EN
532
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

(b.1) Standard mode

• FPD: TFP-1200A or TFP-1200C

• FOV: 12 inches, 10 inches, 8 inches, 6 inches

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.21
LV15 15 014 0.14 0.15 0.21
DT DA 15 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.18
One shot One shot 1.84 1.83 1.99 2.09
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.90 1.96 3.30 3.33

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

• DSA : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

No. 2B308-309EN
533
(b.2) High-definition mode

• FPD: TFP-1200C
• FOV: 3.0 inches, 2.3 inches, 1.5 inches

(b.2.1) Constant dose mode

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
program
CAG15 15 0.25 0.25 0.26
DA LV15 15 0.25 0.25 0.26
DT DA 15 0.16 0.17 0.19
One shot One shot 1.94 2.00 2.19
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.21 0.92 1.04

(Unit: mGy/f)

(b.2.2) Standard dose mode

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
program
CAG15 15 0.32 0.57 0.70
DA LV15 15 0.32 0.57 0.70
DT DA 15 0.22 0.26 0.42
One shot One shot 2.05 2.27 4.19
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.45 1.33 1.68

(Unit: mGy/f)

No. 2B308-309EN
534
 (11.2) Angio protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (11.1) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

For the acquisition programs other than those specified below, refer to (11.1)
(b).

(b.1) Standard mode

• FPD: TFP-1200A or TFP-1200C

• FOV: 12 inches, 10 inches, 8 inches, 6 inches

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DSA DSA3fps 3 1.30 1.96 2.40 2.92
DSA6fps 6 0.89 1.31 1.65 1.86
DA DA15fps 15 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.21
DT DA 15 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.18
One shot One shot 1.84 1.83 1.99 2.09
3D 3D 25 1.17 1.46
AlphaCT Middle AlphaCT 30 0.81 0.88

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.2) (b).

• DSA3fps : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

• DSA6fps : Focus setting: "Auto (M-S)"

No. 2B308-309EN
535
(b.2) High-definition mode

• FPD: TFP-1200C
• FOV: 3.0 inches, 2.3 inches, 1.5 inches

(b.2.1) Constant dose mode

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
program
DSA3fps 3 2.77 3.44 3.86
DSA
DSA6fps 6 1.93 1.54 1.44
DA15fps 15 0.25 0.25 0.26
DA
DT DA 15 0.16 0.17 0.19
One shot One shot 1.94 2.00 2.19

(Unit: mGy/f)

(b.2.2) Standard dose mode

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
program
DSA3fps 3 3.31 5.14 5.80
DSA
DSA6fps 6 2.25 2.22 1.95
DA15fps 15 0.32 0.57 0.70
DA
DT DA 15 0.22 0.26 0.42
One shot One shot 2.05 2.27 4.19

(Unit: mGy/f)

No. 2B308-309EN
536
 (11.3) EP protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

(a.1) Standard mode

• FPD: TFP-1200A or TFP-1200C

• FOV: 12 inches, 10 inches, 8 inches, 6 inches

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Frontal Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 17.5 18.3 21.0 31.4
Normal 7.5 6.1 6.6 7.7 12.0
Middle 7.5 4.1 4.5 5.2 8.2
Low 5 2.7 2.9 3.5 5.5
HLC
Middle 5 9.6 10.3 11.7 16.8
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Low".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.3) (a).

No. 2B308-309EN
537
(a.2) High-definition mode

• FPD: TFP-1200C
• FOV: 3.0 inches, 2.3 inches, 1.5 inches

(a.2.1) Constant dose mode

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Frontal Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 28.4 30.2 35.2
Normal 7.5 14.4 15.9 18.5
Middle 7.5 9.5 10.3 13.0
Low 5 6.3 6.4 7.4
HLC
Middle 5 6.3 6.4 7.4
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)

(a.2.2) Standard dose mode

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Frontal Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 39.6 47.5 69.8
Normal 7.5 20.3 24.5 34
Middle 7.5 16.4 19.6 26
Low 5 11.4 13.7 18
HLC
Middle 5 10.7 13.2 18.8
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)

No. 2B308-309EN
538
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

(b.1) Standard mode

• FPD: TFP-1200A or TFP-1200C

• FOV: 12 inches, 10 inches, 8 inches, 6 inches

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.08 0.08 0.09 0.14
LV15 15 0.10 0.10 0.11 0.14
One shot One shot 0.78 0.77 0.87 1.08
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.88 1.85 1.95 2.99

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.3) (b).

• DSA : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

No. 2B308-309EN
539
(b.2) High-definition mode

• FPD: TFP-1200C
• FOV: 3.0 inches, 2.3 inches, 1.5 inches

(b.2.1) Constant dose mode

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
program
CAG15 15 0.17 0.18 0.21
DA
LV15 15 0.16 0.18 0.20
One shot One shot 0.99 1.06 1.11
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.22 0.94 1.08

(Unit: mGy/f)

(b.2.2) Standard dose mode

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
program
CAG15 15 0.26 0.29 0.38
DA
LV15 15 0.22 0.25 0.34
One shot One shot 1.17 1.27 2.10
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.47 1.37 1.67

(Unit: mGy/f)

No. 2B308-309EN
540
 (11.4) Pediatric protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

(a.1) Standard mode

• FPD: TFP-1200A or TFP-1200C

• FOV: 12 inches, 10 inches, 8 inches, 6 inches

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 20 19.4 19.7 23.6 32.7
Normal 15 17.0 18.0 21.8 31.0
Middle 15 12.2 12.6 15.3 23.6
Low 7.5 4.1 4.5 5.2 8.3
DT
Middle 15 14.8 16.0 18.3 28.9
fluoroscopy
HLC
Middle 15 27.7 29.2 34.0 53.3
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.4) (a).

No. 2B308-309EN
541
(a.2) High-definition mode

• FPD: TFP-1200C
• FOV: 3.0 inches, 2.3 inches, 1.5 inches

(a.2.1) Constant dose mode

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 20 32.0 34.1 38.9
Normal 15 28.8 31.0 35.2
Middle 15 27.9 30.2 35.2
Low 7.5 9.5 10.3 13.0
DT 28.8 31.0 35.2
Middle 15
fluoroscopy
HLC 30.2 31.7 35.2
Middle 15
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)

(a.2.2) Standard dose mode

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 20 45 53.4 74.0
Normal 15 41 49 69.0
Middle 15 40.7 49 67.0
Low 7.5 16.1 19.6 27.0
DT 42.1 49 70.0
Middle 15
fluoroscopy
HLC 41.4 48.5 68.0
Middle 15
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)

No. 2B308-309EN
542
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

(b.1) Standard mode

• FPD: TFP-1200A or TFP-1200C

• FOV: 12 inches, 10 inches, 8 inches, 6 inches

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.21
LV30 30 0.14 0.14 0.15 0.21
DT DA 15 0.13 0.14 0.14 0.18
One shot One shot 1.85 1.89 1.99 2.18
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.99 2.07 1.95 1.83

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

• DSA : Focus setting: "Auto (M-S)"

No. 2B308-309EN
543
(b.2) High-definition mode

• FPD: TFP-1200C
• FOV: 3.0 inches, 2.3 inches, 1.5 inches

(b.2.1) Constant dose mode

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.25 0.25 0.26
LV30 30 0.25 0.25 0.26
DT DA 15 0.16 0.17 0.20
One shot One shot 1.96 2.03 2.29
DSA DSA10fps 10 0.83 0.86 0.95

(Unit: mGy/f)

(b.2.2) Standard dose mode

FOV
Acquisition
Rate (f/s) 3.0-inch 2.3-inch 1.5-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.32 0.57 0.70
LV30 30 0.32 0.57 0.70
DT DA 15 0.22 0.28 0.38
One shot One shot 2.14 2.22 4.05
DSA DSA10fps 10 0.87 0.90 0.95

(Unit: mGy/f)

(11.5) Cardiac-Low, Angio-Low, and Pediatric-Low protocols

The dose values when image acquisition is performed with the low dose
setting using the EP protocol are specified below.

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (11.3) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

Refer to (11.3) (b).

No. 2B308-309EN
544
 (12) Dose data for systems with the TFP-1216A
(12.1) Cardiac protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode 16-inch
Fluoroscopy High 15 12.2 16.8 29.1 39.8
Normal 15 17.6 22.3 33.3 41.6
Middle 15 11.3 16.1 26.0 31.5
Low 10 3.8 5.2 8.6 12.0
DT
Middle 15 13.7 20.3 30.3 35.1
fluoroscopy
Fluoroscopy
Middle 15 17.5 22.4 34.7 40.8
roadmap
HLC
Middle 15 8.3 11.3 20.2 25.8
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.1) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Acquisition 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DA CAG15 15 0.06 0.08 0.14 0.22
LV15 15 0.06 0.08 0.14 0.22
DT DA 15 0.10 0.10 0.12 0.17
One shot One shot 1.84 1.83 1.99 2.09
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.90 1.96 3.30 3.33

(Unit: mGy/f)

No. 2B308-309EN
545
 <Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

• DA dose : Dose for normal dose mode (default)

The values in the table below are the initial
dose ratios for each dose mode of DA.

Low Normal High

Ratio 0.6 1.0 1.5

*) The dose in each dose mode should be

calculated based on the above ratios.

• DSA : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

(12.2) Angio protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (12.1) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

For the acquisition programs other than those specified below, refer to (12.1)
(b).

FOV
Acquisition 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DSA DSA3fps 3 1.26 1.87 2.46 2.88
DSA6fps 6 0.76 0.81 1.62 1.81
DA DA15fps 15 0.06 0.08 0.14 0.22
DT DA 15 0.10 0.10 0.12 0.17
One shot One shot 1.84 1.83 1.99 2.09
3D 3D 25 1.17 1.46
AlphaCT Middle AlphaCT 30 0.81 0.88

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.2) (b).

• DSA3fps : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

• DSA6fps : Focus setting: "Auto (M-S)"

No. 2B308-309EN
546
 (12.3) EP protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy 12-inch ×
Frontal Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode 16-inch
Fluoroscopy High 15 11.9 15.8 27.8 33.3
Normal 7.5 4.1 5.7 10.0 13.1
Middle 7.5 2.7 3.9 6.8 9.3
Low 5 1.9 2.6 4.5 6.1
HLC
Low 5 6.3 8.6 14.6 18.5
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Low".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.3) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Acquisition 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DA CAG15 15 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.13
LV15 15 0.06 0.07 0.10 0.14
One shot One shot 0.78 0.77 0.87 1.08
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.88 1.85 1.95 2.99

(Unit: mGy/f)

No. 2B308-309EN
547
 <Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.3) (b).

• DA dose : Dose for normal dose mode (default)

The values in the table below are the initial
dose ratios for each dose mode of DA.

Low Normal High

Ratio 0.6 1.0 1.5

*) The dose in each dose mode should be

calculated based on the above ratios.

• DSA : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

(12.4) Pediatric protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode 16-inch
Fluoroscopy High 20 12.2 16.6 29.0 34.0
Normal 15 11.9 16.2 27.9 32.8
Middle 15 8.2 11.4 19.2 26.5
Low 7.5 2.9 3.9 6.8 9.4
DT
Middle 15 10.7 13.5 23.3 32.3
fluoroscopy
HLC
Middle 15 19.0 25.8 44.2 58.0
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.4) (a).

No. 2B308-309EN
548
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Acquisition 12-inch ×
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DA CAG15 15 0.06 0.08 0.14 0.22
LV30 30 0.06 0.08 0.14 0.22
DT DA 15 0.11 0.11 0.13 0.18
One shot One shot 1.02 1.69 1.85 1.96
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.97 1.91 1.93 1.72

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

• DA dose : Dose for normal dose mode (default)

The values in the table below are the initial
dose ratios for each dose mode of DA.

Low Normal High

Ratio 0.6 1.0 1.5

*) The dose in each dose mode should be

calculated based on the above ratios.

• DA : Focus setting: "Auto (M-S)"

(12.5) Cardiac-Low, Angio-Low, and Pediatric-Low protocols

The dose values when image acquisition is performed with the low dose
setting using the EP protocol are specified below.

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (12.3) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

Refer to (12.3) (b).

No. 2B308-309EN
549
(13) Distribution of stray radiation
The distribution maps of stray radiation required by IEC 60601-2-43 are
shown below.

(13.1) For C-arm configuration (frontal position)

(a) C-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°, 1 m above the floor

Unit: μGy/(Gycm2)

(b) C-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°, 1.5 m above the floor

Unit: μGy/(Gycm2)

No. 2B308-309EN
550
(13.2) For C-arm configuration (lateral position)

(a) C-arm rotation angle LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°, 1 m above the floor

Unit: μGy/(Gycm2)

(b) C-arm rotation angle LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°, 1.5 m above the floor

Unit: μGy/(Gycm2)

No. 2B308-309EN
551
(13.3) For Ω-arm configuration (frontal position)

(a) Ω-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°, 1 m above the floor

Unit: μGy/(Gycm2)

(b) Ω-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°, 1. 5 m above the floor

Unit: μGy/(Gycm2)

No. 2B308-309EN
552
(13.4) For biplane configuration

(a) C-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°,

Ω-arm rotation angle LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°, 1 m above the floor

Unit: μGy/(Gycm2)

(b) C-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°,

Ω-arm rotation angle LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°, 1.5 m above the floor

Unit: μGy/(Gycm2)

No. 2B308-309EN
553
(14) Measurement conditions
(a) Fluoroscopic tube voltage: 125 kV

(b) Beam hardening filter: Cu 0.5 mm

(c) Measurement position

No. 2B308-309EN
554
20.2 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-2
The technical data required by IEC 60601-1-2 is provided below.

NOTE: The technical data in this subsection is applicable to newly installed systems.
If this operation manual is supplied because of upgrade of the installed
product, the information provided in the operation manual supplied with the
system before the upgrade is applicable to your system.
In this case, check the technical data using the operation manual supplied
with the system. Alternatively, contact your service representative.

20.2.1 Operating environment

This X-ray interventional angiography system is suitable for use in industrial
areas and healthcare facilities.

20.2.2 Essential performance

The essential performance of this X-ray interventional angiography system is
maintained by ensuring that fluoroscopy, radiography, image processing,
image display, support unit operation, and catheterization table operation are
performed normally.

20.2.3 Contents of the attachment

The contents of this attachment are described below.

(1) Classification and applicable standards

(2) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
(3) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic emissions -
(4) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic immunity -
(5) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic immunity -
for EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not LIFE-
SUPPORTING
(6) Recommended separation distances between portable and
mobile RF communications equipment and the Alphenix for
EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not LIFE-SUPPORTING

No. 2B308-309EN
555
20.2.4 Technical data
(1) Classification and applicable standards
• Classification

The classification of the Alphenix is group 1, class A.

• Applicable standards

For the "applicable standards" item, application of IEC 60601-1-2 is

described.

(2) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration

The use of the Alphenix system requires special attention to the EMC
standards. Specifically, it is necessary to install and operate the Alphenix
system according to the EMC standards provided in this manual. Using the
system in environments other than those specified below may make it
difficult to ensure compliance with the requirements for the electromagnetic
environment.

(3) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration

- electromagnetic emissions -
(a) Alphenix

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions

The Alphenix is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of the Alphenix should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
The Alphenix uses RF energy only for its internal function.
RF emissions
Group 1 Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to
CISPR 11
cause an interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions
Class A
CISPR 11 The Alphenix system is suitable for use in all establishments
other than domestic establishments and directly connected
Harmonic emissions
Not applicable to a public low-voltage power supply network that supplies
IEC 61000-3-2
buildings used for domestic purposes. The Alphenix system
Voltage fluctuations/ must be separated by a distance of at least 30 m from third-
flicker emissions Not applicable party high-sensitivity wireless services.
IEC 61000-3-3
Do not use cables and parts other than those provided with this system.
If other cables or parts are used, the emission performance may be affected.

NOTE If this system is used in a residential environment (for which a rating of CISPR
11 class B is normally required), it may not offer adequate protection against
radio-frequency communication services. The user may need to take mitigation
measures, such as relocating or reorienting the system.

No. 2B308-309EN
556
 (4) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic immunity -
(a) Alphenix

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The Alphenix is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of the Alphenix should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IEC 60601-1 Electromagnetic
Immunity test Compliance level
test level environment - guidance
Floors should be wood,
concrete, or ceramic tile. If
Electrostatic ±8 kV contact ±8 kV contact floors are covered with
discharge (ESD)
±15 kV air ±15 kV air synthetic material, the relative
IEC 61000-4-2
humidity should be at least
30%.
±2 kV for power supply ±2 kV for power supply
Electrical fast lines lines Mains power quality should be
transient/burst that of a typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output hospital environment.
lines lines

±1 kV differential mode ±1 kV differential mode Mains power quality should be

Surge
that of a typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode hospital environment.
0% UT Not applicable
(100% dip in UT)
0.5/1 cycle The quality of the power supply
should be equivalent to that of
Voltage dips, 40% UT Not applicable the standard commercial
short interruptions (60% dip in UT) power supply or the power
and voltage 5/6 cycles supply within the hospital. If
variations on the Alphenix is to be used even
power supply 70% UT Not applicable in the event of a power failure,
input lines (30% dip in UT) power should be supplied to
IEC 61000-4-11 25/30 cycles the Alphenix from an
uninterruptible power supply
0% UT 0% UT (: 2014) unit or batteries.
(100% dip in UT) (100% dip in UT)
5 seconds 5 seconds
Power frequency magnetic
Power frequency
fields should be at levels
(50/60 Hz)
30 A/m 30 A/m characteristic of a typical
magnetic field
location in a typical commercial
IEC 61000-4-8
or hospital environment.
UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Do not use cables and parts other than those used for the current system.
NOTE
If cables and parts other than those used for the current system are used, the
immunity may be affected.

No. 2B308-309EN
557
 (5) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic immunity -
for EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not
LIFE-SUPPORTING

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The Alphenix is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the
user of the Alphenix should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Compliance
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any part
of the Alphenix, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation applicable to the frequency of
the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80 MHz : d = 1.2 P
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
80 MHz to 800 MHz : d = 1.2 P
6 Vrms 6 Vrms
ISM band 800 MHz to 2.7 GHz : d = 2.3 P
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz
27 V/m 27 V/m where P is the maximum output power rating of
385 MHz the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is the
28 V/m 28 V/m
recommended separation distance in meters (m).
450 MHz Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
9 V/m 9 V/m determined by an electromagnetic site survey,a
Proximity fields
710, 745, 780 MHz should be less than the compliance level in each
from RF
frequency range. b
wireless 28 V/m 28 V/m Interference may occur in the vicinity of
communications 810, 870, 930 MHz
equipment marked with the following symbol.
equipment
28 V/m 28 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3
1720, 1845, 1970 MHz
28 V/m 28 V/m
2450 MHz
9 V/m 9 V/m
5240, 5500, 5785 MHz
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
NOTE 3: Do not use cables and parts other than those used for the current system.
If cables and parts other than those used for the current system are used, the immunity may be
affected.
a: Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which
the Alphenix is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the Alphenix should be
observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be
necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the Alphenix.
b: Within the frequency range from 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

No. 2B308-309EN
558
 (6) Recommended separation distances between portable and
mobile RF communications equipment and the Alphenix for
EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not LIFE-SUPPORTING

Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment

and the Alphenix
The Alphenix is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled.
The customer or the user of the Alphenix can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining
a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and
the Alphenix as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)
Rated maximum output power 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.7 GHz
of transmitter (W)
d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected
by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
NOTE 3: Do not use cables and parts other than those used for the current system.
If cables and parts other than those used for the current system are used, the immunity
may be affected.

No. 2B308-309EN
559
20.3 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-3
The technical data required by IEC 60601-1-3 is given below.

(1) Accuracy of the automatic control system

Change in the brightness data controlled by ABC with respect to the mean
value in DA and fluoroscopy (with a fixed subject thickness):
The maximum value is within +20% of the minimum value (maximum value /
minimum value < 1.2).

(2) Distribution of scattered radiation in the vertical direction

The distribution of the scattered radiation in the vertical direction in the
significant zone of occupancy is shown in the figure below.

(Unit: mm)

<Measurement conditions> Fluoroscopic conditions: Beam hardening filter: F3 (Al)

125 kV/3 mA
SID: 100 cm Tabletop height: 100 cm

The graph is normalized by long-time rating 2.2 kW (conversion

at 125 kV/18 mA).

No. 2B308-309EN
560
No. 2B308-309EN
561
20.4 Technical Data Required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020
The technical data required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020 is given below.

20.4.1 Required items for HHS standards

(1) Reproducibility
CV ≤ 0.045 (CV: Coefficient of variation)

(2) Linearity

X1 − X 2
≤0.09
X1 + X 2

(3) Maximum entrance dose limit

88 mGy/min (10 R/min)
176 mGy/min (HLC) (20 R/min)

(4) Maximum product of mA and seconds

600 mAs in automatic exposure control

20.4.2 System accuracy

(1) Technique factors during radiography and pulsed

fluoroscopy
(1.1) mA value indication

The following are the maximum deviations from the indicated mA setting.

The maximum deviation from the indicated mA setting is equal to:

±[ 15 + (Test instrumentation error)] %

Generator design Refer to table 1.
←→

(1.2) kV value indication

The maximum deviation from the indicated kV setting is equal to:

±[ 7 + (Test instrumentation error)] %

Generator design Refer to table 1.
←→

No. 2B308-309EN
562
(1.3) Exposure time value indication

The maximum deviation from the indicated exposure time setting and
following exposure in automatic exposure control is as follows.

(a) Time range of 0.001 to 0.009 s

[ ±1 + (Test instrumentation error)] ms

Generator design Refer to table 1.
←→

(b) Time range of 0.010 s or more

[ ±10 + (Test instrumentation error)] %

Generator design Refer to table 1.
←→

RADIOGRAPHY

The exposure time is defined as the interval between the time (A) that the
tube potential reaches 75% of the observed tube voltage crest value and the
time (B) that it falls back to the 75% level.

PULSED FLUOROSCOPY

The exposure time is defined based on the signal from the PC2 board in the
power cabinet of X-ray high-voltage generator XTP-8100XG.
Measurement location: Between TP28 and TP33

No. 2B308-309EN
563
(2) Technique factors during fluoroscopy
(2.1) mA value indication (Continuous fluoroscopy only)

The maximum deviations from the indicated mA values are as follows.

(a) From 0.5 mA to 0.9 mA

±[ ±0.2 + (Test instrumentation error)] mA

Generator design Refer to table 1.
←→

(b) From 1 mA to 4 mA

±[ 15 + (Test instrumentation error)] %

Generator design Refer to table 1.
←→

(2.2) kV value indication (Continuous fluoroscopy only)

The maximum deviation from the indicated kV value is as follows.

±[ 7 + (Test instrumentation error)] %

Generator design Refer to table 1.
←→

(2.3) Time value indication

The maximum deviation from the indicated time setting is as follows.

5 minutes +0%
− 5%

(2.4) F. total time indication

The maximum deviation from the indicated time setting is as follows.

+0%
− 5%

No. 2B308-309EN
564
 Table 1 Test instrumentation errors

Test instrument
Item Error
MFG Type
Radiographic mA Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. MA-1201DC or ±0.5%
MA-2000
Unfors RaySafe RaySafe X2 1%
Radiographic kV Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. KV-201D ±2%
Unfors RaySafe RaySafe X2 with 2%
R/F
Radiographic Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. TD-3A ±0.5%±1 dgt
time
Unfors RaySafe RaySafe X2 with 0.5%
R/F
Fluoroscopic kV Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. KV-201D ±2%
Unfors RaySafe RaySafe X2 with 2%
R/F
Fluoroscopic mA Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. MA-1201DC or ±0.5%
MA-2000
Unfors RaySafe RaySafe X2 1%

No. 2B308-309EN
565
20.4.3 Reference location
In this system, the reference location for which the AKR (air kerma rate) and
cumulative air kerma are displayed is specified as below.

• Calculation procedure based on the isocenter

A location 150 mm toward the X-ray tube assembly from the isocenter is
specified as the reference location.

• Calculation procedure based on a point a specified distance from the

tabletop
The reference location is specified as a location 50 mm toward the X-ray
tube assembly from a point in the center of the X-ray beam (reference
point (*1)) that is a specified distance (default: 100 mm) above the
tabletop.

Refer to the following figure.

X-ray center axis

X-ray detector
100 mm (*1)

Patient
50 mm

Reference point
Reference location

Tabletop mat

Tabletop

X-ray tube assembly

LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°

*1) The reference point is a point in the region of interest for fluoroscopy/
radiography and is on the X-ray center axis.
This point can be set in the range of 0 mm to 500 mm from the upper surface
of the tabletop of the catheterization table. 100 mm is set at the time of
shipment.

No. 2B308-309EN
566
 X-ray center axis

X-ray detector

100 mm (*1)
Patient
Reference point
Reference location

Tabletop mat

Tabletop

50 mm X-ray tube assembly

Conceptual figure after tilting in the LAO/RAO direction (CRA/CAU = 0°)

*1) The reference point is a point in the region of interest for fluoroscopy/
radiography and is on the X-ray center axis.
This point can be set in the range of 0 mm to 500 mm from the upper surface
of the tabletop of the catheterization table. 100 mm is set at the time of
shipment.

No. 2B308-309EN
567
20.4.4 Modes of operation

(1) Modes
(1.1) Fluoroscopy

(a) Pulsed fluoroscopy

(b) Continuous fluoroscopy

(1.2) Radiography

(a) Digital angiography (DA)

(b) One-shot radiography

(c) Digital subtraction angiography (DSA) function

(d) Rotational DA

(e) Rotational DSA

(f) Stepping DSA

(g) 3D-DSA

(2) Selection procedures, indications, and technique factors in

each mode
(2.1) Fluoroscopy

(a) Select a study protocol and start a study. Fluoroscopy is enabled.

(b) Select pulsed fluoroscopy or continuous fluoroscopy on the Fluoroscopic

conditions setting screen in Acquisition mode at the system console.

(c) It is possible to select automatic control or manual setting as the fluoroscopic

X-ray condition setting procedure.

(d) In automatic control, X-ray conditions are determined by video signals sent
from the FPD.

(e) Check the fluoroscopy control parameters in Acquisition mode.

(f) For detailed specifications, refer to subsection 19.9 (3) "Fluoroscopy" and
subsection 19.10 (4) "Fluoroscopy".

(g) For detailed operating procedures, refer to section 11

"Fluoroscopy/Radiography (Acquisition Mode)".

No. 2B308-309EN
568
(2.2) Radiography

(a) Select a study protocol and start a study.

(b) Select an acquisition program in Acquisition mode at the system console. It

is possible to switch the type of radiography and to select automatic control
or manual setting.

(c) In automatic control, the X-ray condition setting procedure differs according
to the type of radiography.

• Digital angiography (DA), rotational DA

The X-ray conditions when radiography is started are determined by
fluoroscopy performed immediately before radiography. During
radiography, the X-ray conditions are determined by video signals sent
from the FPD.

• Other types of radiography

The X-ray conditions are determined by fluoroscopy performed
immediately before radiography.

(d) Check the radiography control parameters in Acquisition mode.

(e) For detailed specifications, refer to subsection 19.9 (2) "Radiographic

condition ranges" and subsection 19.10 (7) "Radiography".

(f) For detailed operating procedures, refer to section 11

"Fluoroscopy/Radiography (Acquisition Mode)".

No. 2B308-309EN
569
20.5 Information Sources Related to Pediatric Imaging
This information is only for the U.S.A.

Use special care when imaging patients outside the typical adult size range.

As the awareness of the administration of ionizing radiation continues to

flourish new sources of information are becoming available. Users of this
equipment should continue to educate themselves in the area of pediatric
imaging. Some sources for this information are:

The FDA website "Radiation Emitting Products" has information, current

news and safety alerts related to ionizing radiation imaging. This area of the
website also contains links to various websites that include current
information.

http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/RadiationEmitting
ProductsandProcedures/MedicalImaging/ucm298899.htm

Canon Education Center – Canon hosts a website that allows access to a

variety of training. This includes computer based training modules, onsite
support, classroom training and sponsored CME course work.

https://us.medical.canon/education/institute-advanced-imaging/

Image Gently Website – is a website that contains links to information and

educational modules related to pediatric imaging. This site includes links to
various manufacturer websites for training modules.

http://www.pedrad.org/associations/5364/ig/?page=664

AAPM website – Contains educational material related to all types of ionizing

radiation training and measurement methodologies.

http://www.aapm.org/default.asp

American Society of Radiologic Technologists – the website has training and

is source for current information related to ionizing radiation.

http://www.asrt.org/

No. 2B308-309EN
570
21. System Message Display
In this system, a message may be displayed on the monitor to notify the user
of the system status.

Contents 21.1 Message Display Section

21.2 Message Types
21.3 Corrective Actions

No. 2B308-309EN
571
21.1 Message Display Section
Depending on the message type and status, the message may be displayed
on the reference monitor, fluoroscopy monitor, or system monitor. Take
appropriate measures according to the displayed message.

Note that the message display section may differ depending on the setting at
the time of system installation. Check the message display section.

No. 2B308-309EN
572
21.2 Message Types
There are four types of messages.

Status messages Messages that indicate the system status

Example: (Frontal tube) LM frozen. X-ray disabled. Please wait.
Guide messages Messages that guide operation
Example: Move tabletop to 1st position. Then select [1st Stage].
Error messages Messages that indicate the contents of the error when the system does not
operate normally due to a system failure, software error, or operational error
An error code may be displayed.
Example: System disk error. Call service.
Message icons Icons displaying message notification

Example:

No. 2B308-309EN
573
21.3 Corrective Actions
When a message is displayed, take appropriate corrective action according
to the message. If it not clear what action should be taken, check the table
on the following pages.

NOTE: 1. If the error cannot be reset or the same error occurs repeatedly, contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative for inspection and repair.

2. If the corrective action for the error is not clear, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.

3. If a status message that indicates processing is in progress in the system is

displayed, wait until the processing is completed. On completion of
processing, the message is cleared.

4. Some terms have been abbreviated in the messages.

SC : Service center
SW : Switch
Trig SW : C-arm/tabletop operation start lever or the auto-positioning start
button of the tableside console.
BP : Biplane

No. 2B308-309EN
574
 Message Action
The beam limiting device blades are closed.
Open the blades.

An error for which error reset can be executed or system

operation can be switched to reduced operation has
occurred.
Check the error message displayed on the monitor for the
corrective action.
Press table SW 5 s after Press the Emergency stop button.
After waiting for 5 seconds, press the Power reset button on
SW. System may the operating panel of the catheterization table.
If the system is not recovered, contact your Canon Medical
recover. Systems service representative.
1 1st stage set out of range. SM0478 The first-stage setting is disabled. Adjust the longitudinal
SM0377
Adjust table long. position. position of the table.
SM0493

3 3D WS error. SM0394 Check the cause at the 3D WS.

A Acq. Program change failed. SM0096 Try to change the study program again using the function
button in the menu display area or using Acquisition mode.
If the study program still cannot be changed, abort the
current study and start a new study, or contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
Adjust gain/move arm to end & SM0532 Adjust the gain or press the Set End button after moving the
select [Set End]. C-arm to the end position of rotational DSA.
Adjust gain/press trigSW. SM0524 Adjust the gain. Alternatively, press the auto-positioning
Arm moves to end position. start button on the tableside console or press the
Arm/tabletop movement start lever of the tableside console.
Check the console configured in the system.
Adjust table long/lateral pos. & SM0528 Adjust the longitudinal position and the lateral position of the
SM1021
select [Confirm Cond.] tabletop and then press the Confirm Cond. button.
Adjustment data is incorrect. SM0584 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Call service. representative.
Analysis result error (numeric SM0920 The target image was acquired with DDCF. It is
val.) may be larger. recommended that an image acquired without DDCF be
analyzed.
Angle is outside range. SM0864 Use an image with the appropriate angle information.
(CRA/CAU)
Angle is outside range. (CRA) SM0861 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Angle is outside range. (LAO) SM0860 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Angle is outside range. SM0863 Use an image with the appropriate angle information.
(RAO/LAO)
Angle is outside range. (RAO) SM0859 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Another analysis app started in SM0909 Terminate the analysis in progress and then start a new
Current Case. analysis.
Another analysis app started in SM0910 Terminate the analysis in progress and then start a new
exam room. analysis.
Another analysis app started in SM0908 Terminate the analysis in progress and then start a new
Post Process. analysis.

No. 2B308-309EN
575
 Message Action
A Apex and positions of both SM0829 Set a longer distance between the valve and the cardiac
valves too close. apex and then perform tracing again.
Arm cannot be moved to the SM1552 The selected position cannot be set as the radiographic
selected position. region due to system movement restrictions. Select another
position.
Arm could not move to preset SM0522 The C-arm cannot be moved to the preset position.
position.
Arm pos. not specified. SM0425 Set the support unit to a position where rotational DA is
Perform setting again. SM0427 possible.
SM0995

Arm rotation speed was SM0544 The C-arm operational speed for rotational DSA is
automatically adjusted. SM1040 automatically set.
Auto-detect of spherical SM0787 Detect the contour of the steel ball again.
phantom failed.
Auto Photo has failed. SM1650 The auto-photo function could not be executed. Try again.
If auto-photo still cannot be started, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
Auto-pos. impossible with SM0078 Auto-positioning cannot be executed with the selected
selected No. SM0982 number. Select another auto-positioning number.
Auto-pos. STORE disabled SM0070 This auto-positioning cannot be executed before the start of
before study start. a study. Try again after the study is started.
AUTO MAP disabled during SM0042 Auto-mapping is not possible during continuous playback.
continuous playback.
AUTO MAP failed. SM0012 The auto-map function could not be executed. Try again. If
auto-mapping still cannot be started, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
Authorization is required to SM1064 This processing cannot be executed with the authority level
perform processing. of the user currently logged in to the system. The system
must be logged in to by a person with the authority level for
this processing to execute this processing.
Avg. process umber exceeded SM0786 The number of segments exceeded the upper limit during
upper limit. distance calibration.
B Backup failed. HP0034 If this message is displayed even after retry, contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
C Cannot reach the specified SM0436 If this message is displayed when the Ω-arm is switched to
position. SM1212
the RL orientation or LL orientation, set the C-arm floor
SM1213
base rotation angle to within the range of ±45°. If the same
SM1214
message is displayed again after the angle is changed,
SM1215
perform auto-positioning as shown below.
• When the Ω-arm is switched to the RL orientation : No. 71
• When the Ω-arm is switched to the LL orientation : No. 70
Can't switch system. Move SM0264 System switching has failed. Return the system to the
arm/tabletop to original pos. original system and then use the system.
• 0° layout system
Reset the CAS-810A support column rotation angle to its
original angle.
• 90° layout system
Reset the catheterization tabletop rotation angle to its
original angle.

No. 2B308-309EN
576
 Message Action
C Communication error with SM1538 Contact the CARTO 3 information desk. For information
CARTO. Check CARTO. concerning the CARTO 3 information desk, refer to the
operation manual provided with CARTO 3.
Centerline analysis is not SM0878 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
possible. recommended that tracing be performed again.
Centerline analysis with heart SM0830 The cardiac centerlines for ED and ES may differ
contour not possible. significantly.
Confirm that the correct analysis target image is used and
that tracing is performed appropriately.
Check arm status. SM0363 The C-arm is not at the set position. Move the C-arm to the
Reset arm to the set position. set position.
Check each stage view. SM0368 Perform fluoroscopy and check the field from the first stage
to the last stage.
Check each stage view. SM0365 Perform fluoroscopy and check all the fields. After all the
Then select [Fix View]. fields are checked, set [Fix View] to ON.
Collimator is operating. SM0060 Release the operating switch and stop the X-ray beam
SM0063 limiting device. (Frontal)
Comm with in-room con soles SM1210 An error related to the X-ray beam limiting device has
failed. Ltd functions occurred. The X-ray beam limiting device cannot be used.
The support unit can be operated as usual.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(Collimator) Commun. failed. SM0059 Communication with the X-ray beam limiting device is
Auto-pos. is limited. SM0062 broken. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Connection to the backup file HP0066 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
transfer destination failed. representative.
(Console unit) Commun. failed. SM0118 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Console disabled. representative.
Creation of mask image failed. SM0016 The system has failed in mask image creation. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Creation of F-MASK failed. SM0015 The system has failed in mask image creation. The display
Change to normal fluoro. will change to normal fluoroscopic images. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Correction line crosses edge on SM0782 Of the two lines drawn by vessel contour detection, select
opposite side. one line as the correction target.
D Data transfer error. SM0037 The system has failed in data transfer. The data transfer
Node/Device name not destination name or device name may be set incorrectly.
recognized. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative. Check the setting in Utility mode.
Data transfer failed. SM0039 The system has failed in data transfer. Try again. If data
transfer fails again, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
DB is abnormal. Reset SM1078 Perform system reset.
software. SM1173 To perform full reset of the software, select Restart.
SM1174 To perform partial reset of the software, select Partial
SM1175 Reset.
DC power supply error. SM0126 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Call service. SM0127 representative. The DC power supply of the SYSIO is
defective.

No. 2B308-309EN
577
 Message Action
D DDS image transfer failed. SM1448 Transfer the image after fluoroscopy/radiography is
completed. If the error is not resolved, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
DICOM file does not exist or SM0874 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
may be damaged. Systems service representative.
Disk write error. SM1182 System local processing failed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
Display image differs from SM0922 Use images selected from the same dynamic image.
registered ED or ES image.
Dose meter abnormal. Dose SM0081 The system has failed in concurrent display of normal
info. disabled. fluoroscopic images and processed fluoroscopic images
(zoomed fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images/landmark images). The display will change to
normal fluoroscopic images. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Do Test Shot or press [Cond. SM0344 Perform test exposure or press the Cond. Setting button
setting] to skip test.
Do test shot or move to next SM0379 Perform test exposure or move the tabletop to the next
stage. SM0480 stage.
Do test shot, set Mask/Cont SM0372 Perform test exposure. Alternatively, press the Mask →
button ON, or step tabletop. SM0481 Contrast button or move the tabletop to the next stage.
Do test shot or set Mask/Cont SM0373
Perform test exposure or press the Mask → Contrast
button ON. SM0482 button.
Do Test Shot or select trigger SM0525 Perform test exposure. Alternatively, press the auto-
SW. positioning start button on the tableside console or press
the Arm/tabletop movement start lever of the tableside
console. Check the console configured in the system.
Do Test Shot or select [Confirm SM0526 Perform test exposure or press the Confirm Cond. button.
Cond.].
Do Test Shot/move arm to end SM0533 Perform test exposure or press the Set End button after
& select [Set End]. moving the C-arm to the end position of rotational DSA.
E Emergency SW pressed. SM0158 Eliminate the cause of the emergency stop and press the
Movement is limited. reset switch. If the cause cannot be eliminated, contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Emergency SW pressed. SM0551 The settings are cleared because the emergency stop
Start setting from 1st step. SM0553 button was pressed. Perform setting again.
SM1059

Error detected during acquisition SM0155 An error has been detected during preparation for
preparation. SM0156 fluoroscopic processing at the start of fluoroscopic image
recording. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Error detected during image SM0140 The system recovers automatically. If this error occurs
processing. again after system recovery, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Error in collimator. SM0061 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
SM0064
representative.
Error in communication with SM1188 Printing processing failed. Contact your Canon Medical
imager. Systems service representative.
Error found in SNRF PWB. SM1545 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Switching to bckup fluoro. representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
578
 Message Action
E Error in image transfer to server. SM1183 Network processing failed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Error in RTC-SIO. SM1542 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
X-ray exp prohibited. representative.
Error in support unit. SM0045 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
SM0053
representative.
Error in table. SM0067 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
SM1347
representative.
When the operating table is used in combination: An error
has occurred in the operating table. If the brake for column
rotation of the table is released or loose, securely fix the
table with the brake. If the error cannot be cleared, contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Exam room door is open. X-ray SM0380 Close the examination room door.
SM0402
disabled.
Exam room door is open. SM0466 Close the examination room door.
Radiography disabled.
Exam room door is open. SM0467 Close the examination room door.
F File already exists. SM0809 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
File not found. SM0808 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
File read error SM0812 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
File write error SM0811 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Fluoroscopy could not be SM0757 Retry start of fluoroscopy.
started. Retry.
Fluoroscopy could not be SM0758 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
started. Call service. representative.
For HSBP fluoro, only normal SM0505 Perform normal fluoroscopy during the operation of high-
fluoro. is enabled speed biplane fluoroscopy.
FOV size different. SM1567 Different FOVs are used for the mask image and for the
Switched to normal fluoro. contrast image.
(F OPTI/F) Communication SM0144 Communication with the frontal OPTI/F is disabled.
error. Reboot system. Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(Frontal) Do fluoroscopy before SM0255 Execute fluoroscopy for approximately 2 seconds for the
radiography. radiographic region before executing radiography.
(Frontal) Perform fluoroscopy. SM0138 Perform fluoroscopy on the frontal side.
(Frontal Tube) Housing SM0134 Immediately terminate X-ray generation and wait until the
overheating probable. X-ray tube cools. Check the air conditioning of the room
where the water cooling unit is installed. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(Frontal tube) LM frozen. X-ray SM0100 The frozen liquid bearing is being unfrozen. Wait for some
disabled. Please wait. time and try again. If X-rays still cannot be generated,
contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(F CCDIF) Test pattern SM0464 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
abnormal. Call service. representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
579
 Message Action
F (F CCD camera) SM0098 Communication with the frontal CCD camera is disabled.
Communication failed. Reboot SM0142 Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system. Contact
system. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F HV-GEN.) Communication SM0113 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
failed. X-ray disabled.
F Fluoro is interrupted. (10min. SM0698 Set the fluoroscopy switch to OFF. To continue fluoroscopy,
timer) Restart fluoro. set the fluoroscopy switch to ON.
(FPD) Abnormal images Call SM0962 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
service.
(FPD) Preparation error. Call SM0966 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
service.
(FPD) Temp. error. Power was SM0969 The power of the FPD was turned OFF due to detection of
turned OFF. abnormal FPD temperature.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
For the biplane system, use the other FPD and terminate the
examination.
(FPD) Temp. error. Power will SM0968 The power of the FPD will be turned OFF after five minutes
be OFF in 5 min. due to detection of abnormal FPD temperature.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(FPD) Temp. error. Shut down SM0581 The system power supply is shut down automatically in five
starts in 5 min. minutes. Discontinue the examination after confirming safety
and save the data. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
(F FPD) Communication error. SM0561 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is disabled.
X-ray disabled. SM1159 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) Control impossible. SM0569 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is disabled.
X-ray disabled. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) error If fluoro/rad SM0515 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
disabled, call service.
(F FPD) Image processing PWB SM0563 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error.
(F FPD) preparation mode. SM0513 After completion of the radiographic preparations of the FPD
X-ray disabled. for the frontal plane, start radiography for the frontal plane.
(F FPD) Power supply error. SM0559 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is disabled.
X-ray disabled. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD I/F) PWB is not installed. SM0509 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
X-ray disabled.
(F FPD I/F) PWB control is SM0511 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
impossible. X-ray disabled.
(F FPD I/F) PWB image size SM0517 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error.
(F FPD I/F) PWB error. SM0519 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) I/F PWB ver. SM1436 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
correction impossible.
(F FPD I/F) Test pattern error. SM0565 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Call service.
(FPD) Temp. error. Shutdown SM0577 Stop using the system and contact your Canon Medical
system & call service. Systems service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
580
 Message Action
F (FPD) Version error Call service. SM0964 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) Temperature high. Call SM0578 Reduce the temperature in the examination room. If the error
service. occurs after the room temperature has been reduced, contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) Temperature low. Call SM0580 Increase the temperature in the examination room. If the
service. error occurs after the room temperature has been increased,
contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(F FPD) Temperature sensor SM0585 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error. Call service.
(F FPD) Temperature detect SM0586 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error. Call service.
(F FPD) Test pattern error. Call SM0587 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
service.
For the password, enter 8 or HP0043 Enter the password again following the instructions. For
more characters including 1 or details for the password, refer to section 9 of the reference
more special symbols. manual.
F-side fluoro. is performed with SM0261 Set a lower dose and perform fluoroscopy.
lower X-ray cond.
F-REC error. Decrease pulse SM0157 A fluoroscopic image recording error occurred. Reduce the
rate or create storage space. fluoroscopic pulse rate (e/s) or delete unnecessary data using
the Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. There is insufficient free space for
fluorography in the RAID.
F-side fluoro. is performed with SM0261 The X-ray conditions on the frontal side are automatically
lower X-ray cond. lowered in fluoroscopy.
F-Rec canceled. Disabled SM0083 Fluoroscopic image recording has been canceled.
during F-MASK/F-SUB. Fluoroscopic image recording is not possible during mask
generation, fluoroscopic subtraction, or fluoroscopic landmark
image display. Wait until these processing operations are
completed and then try again.
G GCM PWB is not installed SM1131 System check is required. Contact your Canon Medical
Fluoro and rad enabled. SM1132 Systems service representative.
The system can be operated as usual even if this message is
displayed.
Generator & tube prep mode. SM0263 The X-ray high-voltage generator and the X-ray tube
Please wait. assembly are getting ready. Wait until they are ready.
GPU PWB not mounted. SM1550 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Backup fluoro continued.
Graph display in centerline SM0879 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
analysis is not possible. recommended that tracing be performed again.
H H11 A01 Hardware error. SM0189 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H12 A02 Hardware error. SM0190 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H13 A03 Hardware error. SM0191 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H14 A04 Hardware error. SM0192 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
581
 Message Action
H H18 M.C. PWB hardware err. SM1375 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H19 A.C. PWB hardware err. SM1376 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H1D tableside console PWB SM1377 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
initialize error
H1E Satellite console PWB SM1378 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
initialize error
H20 A01 Support unit battery SM0194 The battery power resource for memory backup is running
voltage low. short. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H21 A01 Software error. SM0195 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H21 Console Control PWB SM0182 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
initialize err. Cons
disabled.
H21 Table PWB initialize err. SM0159 The table vertical movement axis and tabletop longitudinal
Operation is limited. movement axis do not operate. Linked operations such as
auto-positioning and stepping DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H22 A02 Software error. SM0196 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H22 Table PCL5014 init. error. SM0160 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven by
Operation is limited the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H23 A03 Software error. SM0197 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H23 Tableside console PWB SM0161 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
initialize error.
H24 A04 Software error. SM0198 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H24 Satellite console PWB SM0162 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
initialize error.
H25 CAN error. Support unit SM0199 Linked operations such as support unit auto-positioning and
set to single operation rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
mode. Medical Systems service representative.
H25 CAN error Table switched SM0163 Linked operations such as table auto-positioning and stepping
to single oper. mode. DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H25 Console Control CAN SM0183 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
commun. error Cons
disabled.
H26 BU Memory abnormal. SM0164 Linked operations such as table auto-positioning and stepping
Table operation is limited. DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H26 CAN error. Support unit SM0200 Linked operations such as support unit auto-positioning and
set to single operation rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
mode. Medical Systems service representative.
H28 M. Net error. Support unit SM1379 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
op. limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
582
 Message Action
H H29 M. Net error. Support unit SM1380 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
op. limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H2A BBM data abnormal. SM0202 Linked operations such as support unit auto-positioning and
Support unit op. is limited rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
H2B M.C. PWB battery voltage SM1381 The memory backup battery level is low. Contact your
is low. Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H30 M. Net err. Table- side SM1391 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
console disabled. representative.
H31 Table U/D backup sensor SM0165 Backup sensor error for the table vertical movement axis.
error. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative. Operations are not restricted.
H31 M. Net err. Table- side SM1392 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
console disabled. representative.
H32 M. Net err. Satel- lite SM1393 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
console disabled. representative.
H33 M. Net err. Satel- lite SM1394 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
console disabled. representative.
H35 Tabletop tilt backup SM0441 Tabletop tilt axis backup sensor error. Contact your Canon
sensor error. Medical Systems representative.
H41 Table U/D driver error. SM0166 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
Vertical op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H42 Table long. driver error. SM0167 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven
Long. op. disabled. by the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H43 Rotation motor driver SM0203 The C-arm rotation axis does not operate. Linked
failure. Rot. op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H44 Slide motor driver failure. SM0204 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations
Slide op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H45 Detector near/away motor SM0205 The FPD near/away movement axis does not operate.
failure. Op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H45 Table tilt driver error. Tilt SM0442 Tabletop tilting is disabled. Contact your Canon Medical
operation is disabled. Systems representative.
H46 Ceiling long. motor driver SM0206 The ceiling longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
failure. Op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H47 Ceiling lateral motor driver SM0207 The ceiling lateral movement axis does not operate. Linked
failure. Op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
583
 Message Action
H H48 Ceiling rotation motor SM0208 The ceiling rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
driver failure. Op. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
disabled. performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H49 Collimator rotation motor SM0927 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
driver failure Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H4A FPD rotation motor driver SM0928 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
failure Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H4B Floor base rotation motor SM0929 Floor base rotation of the support unit cannot be performed.
driver failure Op. disabled. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H4E Support col. rot. mot. SM0930 Support column rotation of the support unit cannot be
driver failure Op. disabled. performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H4F Col slide motor driver SM1384 The column sliding axis does not operate. Linked operation
failed. Slide disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H53 Rotation axis limit sw SM0210 The C-arm rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
actuated. Op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H54 Slide axis limit sw SM0211 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations such
actuated. Op. disabled. as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H55 Detector N/A axis limit sw SM0212 The I.I. near/away movement axis does not operate. Linked
actuated. Op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot
be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H55 Table tilt sensor error. SM0443 There are some limitations in tabletop tilting. Contact your
Table op. is limited. Canon Medical Systems representative.
H61 Table U/D sensor error. SM0168 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
Auto operation disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA cannot
be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H62 Table long. sensor error. SM0169 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
Auto op. disabled. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
H63 Rotation sensor error. SM0213 The main rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
Axis operation disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H64 Slide sensor error. Axis SM0214 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations such
operation disabled. as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H64 Table rot. sensor error. SM0170 Linked operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
Auto operation disabled. cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
584
 Message Action
H H65 Detector N/A sensor error. SM0215 The FPD near/away movement axis does not operate. Linked
Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot
be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H65 Table tilt sensor error. SM0444 Tabletop tilting and AUTO operation are disabled. Contact
Auto operation is disabled. your Canon Medical Systems representative.
H66 Ceiling long. sensor error. SM0216 The ceiling longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
Axis op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
H67 Ceiling lateral sensor SM0217 The ceiling lateral movement axis does not operate. Linked
error. Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot
be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H68 Ceiling rot. sensor error. SM0218 The ceiling rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
Axis op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H69 Collimator rotation axis SM0931 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H6A FPD rotation axis sensor SM0932 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H6B Floor base rotation axis SM0933 Floor base rotation of the support unit cannot be performed.
sensor error. Op. disabled. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H6E Support column rotation SM0219 Support column rotation axis sensor error. Linked operations
sensor error. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H6F Column slide sensor error. SM1385 The column sliding axis does not operate. Linked operation
Slide op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H71 Table U/D sensor error. SM0171 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
Auto operation disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA cannot
be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H72 Table long. sensor error. SM0172 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven by
Auto op. disabled. the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H73 Rotation sensor error. SM0220 The C-arm rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
Axis operation disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H74 Slide sensor error. Axis SM0221 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations
operation disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
585
 Message Action
H H75 Detector N/A sensor error. SM0222 The FPD near/away movement axis does not operate.
Axis op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H75 Table tilt sensor error. SM0445 Tabletop tilting and AUTO operation are disabled. Contact
Auto operation is disabled. your Canon Medical Systems representative.
H76 Ceiling long. sensor error. SM0223 The ceiling longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
Axis op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H77 Ceiling lateral sensor SM0224 The ceiling lateral movement axis does not operate. Linked
error. Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H78 Ceiling rot. sensor error. SM0225 The ceiling rotation axis does not operate. Linked
Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H79 Collimator rotation axis SM0934 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H7A FPD rotation axis sensor SM0935 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H7B Floor base rotation axis SM0936 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H7E Support column rotation SM0226 Support column rotation axis sensor error. Linked
sensor error. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H7F Column slide sensor error. SM1386 The column sliding axis does not operate. Linked operation
Slide op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H81 Tabletop vertical axis SM0173 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
backup sensor error. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H82 Table long. sensor error. SM0174 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven
Auto op. disabled. by the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H83 Rotation backup sensor SM0227 C-arm rotation axis backup sensor error. Contact your
error. Canon Medical Systems service representative. Operations
are not restricted.

No. 2B308-309EN
586
 Message Action
H H83 Table lat. sensor error. SM0175 Linked operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
Auto operation disabled. cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
H84 Slide backup sensor error. SM0228 C-arm slide axis backup sensor error. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative. Operations are not
restricted.
H84 Table rot. sensor error. SM0176 Linked operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
Auto operation disabled. cannot be performed. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
H85 Detector N/A backup SM0229 The FPD near-away movement axis backup sensor error.
sensor error. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Operations are not restricted.
H85 Tabletop tilt axis backup SM0446 Tabletop tilting and AUTO operation are disabled. Contact
sensor error. your Canon Medical Systems representative.
H86 Ceiling longitudinal backup SM0230 Ceiling longitudinal movement axis backup sensor error.
sensor error. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Operations are not restricted.
H87 Ceiling lateral backup SM0231 Ceiling lateral movement axis backup sensor error. Contact
sensor error. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Operations are not restricted.
H88 Ceiling rotational backup SM0232 Ceiling rotation axis backup sensor error. Contact your Canon
sensor error. Medical Systems service representative. Operations are not
restricted.
H89 Collimator rotation axis SM0937 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
backup sensor error cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H8A FPD rotation axis backup SM0938 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy or
radiography will be rotated. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H8B Floor base rotation axis SM0939 Floor base rotation of the support unit cannot be performed.
backup sensor error Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H8C Detector U/D backup SM0234 The X-ray beam up/down movement mechanism section of
sensor error. the Ω-arm does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-
positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H8D Tube U/D backup sensor SM0233 The X-ray beam up/down movement mechanism section of
error. the Ω-arm does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-
positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H8E Support column rot. SM0235 Backup sensor error for the support column rotation
backup sensor error. mechanism section. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative. Operations are not restricted.
H8F Comp. filter sensor error. SM0236 Compensation filter sensor error. The support unit can be
Filter op. disabled. operated normally. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
H92 Main console switch error. SM0184 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
587
 Message Action
H H92 Short mode. Support unit SM0237 The operating switch is shorted and the corresponding axis
op. is limited. does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-positioning
and rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
H92 Table U/D Movement SM0177 The operating switch is shorted and the corresponding axis
sw/Trigger sw error. does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-positioning
and stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
H93 Collimator error. SM1211 An error related to the X-ray beam limiting device has
Collimator op. is limited. occurred. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
H93 Main console switch error. SM0185 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H93 Table step-slide SM0178 The operating switch is shorted and the corresponding axis
test/Override switch error. does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-positioning
and stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
H94 Collimator error. SM0238 Error related to the X-ray beam limiting device. The operation
Collimator op. is limited. of the X-ray beam limiting device is disabled. The support unit
can be operated normally. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H94 Image console switch SM0186 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error.
H94 MAG switch error. SM0179 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H95 A04 PWB error. SM0239 Error related to the X-ray beam limiting device. The operation
Collimator op. is limited. of the X-ray beam limiting device is disabled. The support unit
can be operated normally. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
H95 Table control switch error. SM0447 The Step-sliding test button or the Override button is
defective.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems representative.
H96 MCPWB err Support unit SM1387 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
& collimator op. Limited your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H97 A01 PWB error. Support SM0240 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
unit op. is limited. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H97 Console Control PWB SM0187 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
hardware err. Cons
disabled.
H97 Table PWB hardware SM0180 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
error. Operation is limited. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H98 VME bus error. Support SM0241 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
unit op. is limited. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H99 Console Control PWB SM0188 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
hardware err. Cons
disabled.
H99 Support unit fatal error. SM0242 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
Op. is limited. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
H99 Table PWB hardware SM0181 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted. Contact
error. Operation is limited. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
588
 Message Action
H HA1 In-room console relay SM1201 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
PWB error.Ltd functions examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
HA2 In-room console relay SM1202 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
PWB error.Ltd functions examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
HA3 tableside console switch SM1203 Image operations cannot be performed from the tableside
error console. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
HA4 satellite console switch SM1204 Image operations cannot be performed from the satellite
error console. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
HA5 In-room console CAN SM1205 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
error.Ltd functions examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
HA6 In-room console relay SM1206 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
PWB memory error. examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
HB4 MAG switch error. SM1207 Image FOV size switching error. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
HB7 In-room console relay SM1208 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
PWB error.Ltd functions examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
HB9 In-room console relay SM1209 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in the
PWB error.Ltd functions examination room. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
Heart apex is not found on heart SM0815 Perform tracing again.
contours.
Heart apex is not found on SM0817 Confirm that the image is the correct analysis target.
L-side image.
Heart contour reached borders SM0876 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
of image. recommended that tracing be performed again.
Heart contour too small for SM0834 Perform tracing again so that a larger contour can be
centerline analysis. obtained.
Heart contour too small for SM0835 Perform tracing so that a large contour can be obtained.
radial analysis.
Heart wall motion result cannot SM0890 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
be calculated. recommended that tracing be performed again.
HSIP error. Switching to backup SM0102 Data cannot be stored in or read from the RAID. Immediately
fluoroscopy. contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
HSBP fluoro. in progress. Other SM0501 After completion of high-speed biplane fluoroscopy, continue
ops. interrupted. the interrupted process.
HSBP fluoro. in progress. SM0503 After completion of high-speed biplane fluoroscopy, operate
Operation disabled. the system.
HSBP fluoro. in progress. SM0508 The fluoroscopic image cannot be displayed simultaneously
Simultaneous disp. disabled. during high-speed biplane fluoroscopy.
HSBP rad. disabled. Mode SM0506 High-speed biplane radiography is disabled. The mode
switched to normal rad. switches to normal biplane radiography.
HV GEN. error. Use continuous SM0251 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
fluoro. Call service.

No. 2B308-309EN
589
 Message Action
H HV GEN. error. Use continuous SM0249 Continuous fluoroscopy or radiography is possible. Contact
fluoro/radio. Call service. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
HV GEN. error. Radiography SM0247 Use continuous fluoroscopy or pulse fluoroscopy. Contact
disabled. Call service. your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
HV GEN. temp. high. Select SM0248 Wait for some time or select reduced operation mode.
reduced op. or wait. SM0253

HV GEN. error. Call service. SM0254 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
HV GEN. error. Change focus. SM0246 Use another focus. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
Call service. service representative.
HV GEN. error. Reset error. SM0245 Turn the system power OFF and the ON again.
I Images acq'd from another SM0891 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
plane not calibrated. recommended that tracing be performed again.
Image has no CF values set SM0918 Select a calibrated image.
Calibration is required.
Image info for ED differs from SM0854 Image information may have been overwritten during analysis.
that for ES. Do not perform simultaneous operations on the same image.
Image Proc. PWB abnormal. SM0151 If this message is displayed constantly and disturbs system
Switching to backup fluoro. operation, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Image process parameter SM0583 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
download error. Call service.
Images for 3D reconstruction do SM0387 Select the 3D reconstruction image.
not exist.
Image transfer failed. SM1194 Image transfer failed. Recheck the Auto Transfer setting in
Utility mode.
Image used in control room. SM0014 After the processing in the control room is terminated, try
Processing can't be saved. again.
Image γ curve is incorrect or SM0871 Perform analysis using another image.
does not exist.
Inappropriate radiographic SM0773 Confirm that the image is the correct analysis target.
conditions for analysis.
Incorrect data exists in normals SM0831 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
file. Systems service representative.
Incorrect FPD adjustment data SM1071 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
One-shot rad. is disabled. SM1072

Information for displaying the CU0068 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
detailed parameters of the
transfer destination does not
exist.
Insufficient free space in DB. No SM0913 Delete unnecessary photo images and then perform analysis
startup. again.
Injector is not ready. SM0137 Check the status of the injector.
Insufficient work area in local SM0912 Delete unnecessary panoramic view images or terminate
disk. No startup. printing. Then perform analysis again.
Internal error. (Code=22) SM0785 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Internal error. SM1453 Reset the hardware. For the reset procedure, refer to
Press reset SW on Console PC subsection 5.8 "System Reset".
front.

No. 2B308-309EN
590
 Message Action
I Initialization of the disk failed. HP0031 Replace the disk and retry.
Insufficient space for images. SM0150 The free space in the RAID is insufficient. Take appropriate
Create space. measures such as deleting unnecessary data using the
Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. (There is insufficient free space for
radiography in the RAID.)
Insufficient space. Delete SM0005 The free space in the RAID is insufficient. Take appropriate
unnecessary data. Retry. measures such as deleting unnecessary data using the
Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. (There is insufficient free space for map
images and photo images in the RAID.)
Insufficient space. Delete SM0007 The free space in the RAID is insufficient. Take appropriate
unnecessary images. Retry. measures such as deleting unnecessary data using the
Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. (There is insufficient free space for map
images and photo images in the RAID.)
Internal error. SM0767 Restart the system.
Internal error. Do Partial Reset. SM0980 Perform Partial Reset.
L LIH cannot be used. SM0019 The LIH (Last Image Hold) function cannot be used.
L-side fluoro. is performed with SM0262 The X-ray conditions on the lateral side are automatically
lower X-ray cond. lowered in fluoroscopy.
(Lateral Tube) Housing SM0135 Wait until the X-ray tube cools.
overheating probable.
(Lateral tube) LM frozen. X-ray SM0101 The frozen liquid bearing is being unfrozen. Wait for some
disabled. Please wait. time and try again. If X-rays still cannot be generated,
contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(Lateral) Do fluoroscopy before SM0256 Execute fluoroscopy for approximately 2 seconds for the
radiography. radiographic region before executing radiography.
(Lateral) Perform fluoroscopy. SM0139 Perform fluoroscopy on the lateral side.
(L CCD camera) SM0099 Communication with the lateral CCD camera is disabled.
Communication failed. Reboot SM0143 Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system.
system. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(L CCDIF) Test pattern SM0465 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
abnormal. Call service. representative.
(L FPD) error If fluoro/rad SM0516 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
disabled, call service. representative.
(L FPD) Temperature high. Call SM0588 FPD temperature error. Contact your Canon Medical
service. Systems service representative.
If the FPD is continuously used, the power of the FPD may
be turned OFF.
(L FPD) Temperature low. Call SM0589 FPD temperature error. Contact your Canon Medical
service. Systems service representative.
(L FPD I/F) PWB is not installed. SM0510 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
X-ray disabled. representative.
(L FPD I/F) PWB control is SM0512 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
impossible. X-ray disabled. representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
591
 Message Action
L (L FPD I/F) PWB image size SM0518 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
error.
(L FPD I/F) PWB error. SM0520 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(L FPD I/F) Test pattern error. SM0566 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Call service.
(L FPD) I/F PWB ver. SM1437 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
correction impossible.
(L OPTI/F) Communication SM0145 Communication with the lateral OPTI/F is disabled.
error. Reboot system. Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system. Contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(L HV-GEN.) Communication SM0114 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
failed. X-ray disabled.
M MAP SAVE failed. SM0010 Map images could not be saved.
SM0024
1) Select the map images and then try again.
2) Delete unnecessary map images and then try again.
3) If map images cannot be saved even after the above
steps, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
MAP images cannot be SM0004 Map images cannot be transferred. Select an image other
transferred. than a map image and try image transfer again.
MAP → RUN failed. SM0009 The Map → Run function could not be executed.
1) Select and display the map image and then try again.
2) Confirm that the original image for the map image exists.
3) If the Map → Run function cannot be executed even after
the above steps, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
Mask-record DSA. Operation SM0094 Mask images are acquired during DSA. Wait until DSA is
disabled. completed and then try again.
MASK SELECT failed. Select SM0026 Only map images can be specified as masks. Save the
Map image. image to be used as a mask as a map image. Select this
map image and then try again.
Matrix size different. SM1568 Different matrix sizes are used for the mask image and for the
Switched to normal fluoro. contrast image.
Measurement application has SM1089 Wait until the application has started up.
started in control room.
Mode switched to HSBP SM0507 The mode switches to high-speed biplane fluoroscopy.
fluoroscopy.
Move arm to set position. SM0523 Move the C-arm to the set position.
SM0555
SM0999

Move arm to end position. Then SM0534 Move the C-arm to the end position of rotational DSA and
select [Set End]. SM0537 then press the Set End button.
SM0547
SM1025

Move arm to start pos. Then SM0535 Move the C-arm to the start position of rotational DSA and
select [Set Start]. SM1026 then press the Set Start button.
Move tabletop to 1st position. SM0359 Move the tabletop to the first stage and then press the [1st
Then select [1st Stage]. SM0472 Stage] button.
Move tabletop to trifurc. ROI SM0358 Move the tabletop of the catheterization table to the ROI and
Then select [Main Stage]. press the [Main Stage] button.

No. 2B308-309EN
592
 Message Action
M Move table to CPR pos and shut SM1453 To prepare for CPR, set the tabletop of the catheterization
down the system. table to the horizontal position and shut down the system.
N No data in the calibration table. SM0395 Create calibration images.
No DDS trans data found. SM1451 Perform fluoroscopy/radiography again and then transfer
DDS image not sent. the image. If the error is not resolved, contact your Canon
Medical Systems service representative.
No images transferred to recon SM0391 Perform transfer again. If transfer is disabled, check the
PC. cause at the reconstruction PC.
Normals file could not be read. SM0832 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Normals file format is incorrect. SM0836 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Normals file name is incorrect. SM0819 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Normals file version is incorrect. SM0833 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
No more photo images can be SM1660 The maximum number of photo images that can be saved
created for the current study. has been reached. To save a photo image, end the study in
progress and start a new study.
No transfer. Other images SM0385 After transfer is completed, perform transfer again.
being sent to 3D WS.
No transfer. Try again after 3D SM0388 After calibration is completed, perform transfer again.
calibration.
No transfer. Try again after SM0393 After reconstruction processing for the image being
recon processing. transferred is completed, transfer the next 3D reconstruction
image.
No transfer. Currently SM0392 After reconstruction processing for the image being
transferring other images. transferred is completed, transfer the next 3D reconstruction
image.
No transfer. Try again after SM0390 After processing at the reconstruction PC is completed,
processing at recon PC. perform transfer again.
Not analysis target. Cannot SM0919 Use images selected from the same dynamic image.
start analysis. SM0926

O Offset data error. Change SM0571 Change the pulse rate for the frontal plane.
F-side fluoro pulse rate.
Offset data error. Change SM0573 Change the acquisition rate for the frontal plane.
F-side acquisition rate.
Offset data error. F-side SM0575 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is
radio/fluoro disabled. disabled. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Only normal fluoro enabled. SM0557 The mode automatically switches to normal fluoroscopy.
Switched to normal fluoro.
Operation disabled during SM0085 Operation is disabled during concurrent display of normal
simultaneous display. fluoroscopic images and processed fluoroscopic images
(zoomed fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images/landmark images). Try again when concurrent
display is not being performed.
Operation disabled during SM0087 Operation is disabled during fluoroscopic peak tracing. Wait
PEAK-trace. until fluoroscopic peak tracing is completed and then try
again.

No. 2B308-309EN
593
 Message Action
O Operation interrupted during SM0088 Operation is disabled during fluoroscopic peak tracing. Wait
PEAK-trace. until fluoroscopic peak tracing is completed and then try
again.
Operation interrupted during SM0086 Operation is disabled during concurrent display of normal
simultaneous display. fluoroscopic images and processed fluoroscopic images
(zoomed fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images/landmark images). Try again when concurrent
display is not being performed.
Operation disabled during SM0089 Stop image playback on the system monitor and then try
F-MASK/F-SUB(ADD). again.
Operation limited. Operating SM0943 The tableside console has come off the mounting rail or is not
panel disengaged. SM0954 mounted securely. Mount it to the rail securely.
OR table comm error. SM1346 A communication error with the operating table has occurred.
Operation is limited. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
OVERLOAD Exposure disabled. SM0119 This error message is displayed in either of the following
Check technique. cases.
1) The radiographic conditions entered in manual setting
mode are not appropriate (*1) and radiography is not
possible. Correct the conditions.
*1) kV, mA, msec, focal size, acquisition rate, acquisition
time
2) The HU of the X-ray tube unit has reached 90%. The
action differs before and after radiography.
Before radiography : Radiography cannot be started with
HU90% or more. Wait until the HU
decreases to the proper level.
During radiography : Radiography can be continued to
HU100% even if this message is
displayed. After radiography is
completed, wait until the HU decreases
to the proper level.
Override button pressed. Start SM0556 The settings are cleared because the override button was
setting from 1st step. pressed. Perform setting again.
P Path not found. SM0810 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Perform fluoroscopy to SM0370 Perform fluoroscopy. The radiographic conditions are
determine rad. conds. automatically set.
Photo → Run has failed. SM1649 The Photo→ Run function could not be executed.
1) Select and display the photo image and then try again.
2) Confirm that the original image for the photo image exists.
3) If the Photo → Run function cannot be executed even after
the above steps, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
PHOTO SAVE failed. SM0011 Photo images could not be saved.
SM0025
1) Select an image other than a photo image and then try
again.
2) Delete unnecessary photo images and then try again.
3) If photo images cannot be saved even after the above
steps, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
594
 Message Action
P Pixel size is outside range. SM0771 Perform calibration again.
Pixel Shift failed. SM0462 Pixel shift processing failed.
Playback disabled during SM0084 Wait until fluoroscopy/radiography is completed and then try
fluoro./radiography. again.
Playback on system monitor. SM0095 Stop image playback on the system monitor and try again.
Playback interrupted.
Preset information related to the CU0067 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
detailed parameters of the transfer representative.
destination could not be acquired.
Preset information related to the CU0069 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
detailed parameters of the transfer representative.
destination could not be saved.
Press Trigger SW. SM0531 Press the auto-positioning start button on the tableside
console or press the Arm/tabletop operation start lever of
the tableside console. Confirm that the console is
configured for the system.
Press trigSW. Arm moves to SM0521 Press the auto-positioning start button on the tableside
preset position. SM1017 console or press the Arm/tabletop operation start lever of
the tableside console. Confirm that the console is
configured for the system.
Processing failed. Change to SM0017 Fluoroscopic processing has failed. Normal fluoroscopy
normal fluoro. mode is entered. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
Q Quality may fall if rad. performed SM0756 Check the status of halation on the monitor and perform
with a lower gain. gain adjustment. It is recommended that the image quality
be checked by test shot after gain adjustment is performed.
R Rad. disabled. Confirm SM0496 Confirm that preparation for radiography is completed.
preparation completed.
Radial analysis is not possible. SM0882 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
recommended that tracing be performed again.
Regional analysis is not possible. SM0885 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
recommended that tracing be performed again.
Radiography could not be SM0759 Retry start of radiography.
started.
Retry.
Radiography could not be SM0760 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
started. representative.
Call service.
Radiography in progress. SM0090 Operation is disabled during rotational DSA. Wait until
Operation disabled. rotational DSA is completed and then try again.
Radiography in progress. SM0091 Operation is disabled during rotational DSA. Wait until
Operation interrupted. rotational DSA is completed and then try again.
Radiography is disabled. Adjust SM0548 Adjust the SID and FOV again. (*This message is displayed
SID/FOV again. when the SID or FOV is reset to a setting suitable for 3D
radiography. If the value is correct, subsequent operations
are possible.)
Radiography is performed with SM0259 The dose on the frontal side is automatically increased in
higher F-side dose. radiography.
Radiography is performed with SM0260 The dose on the lateral side is automatically increased in
higher L-side dose. radiography.

No. 2B308-309EN
595
 Message Action
R Radiography is performed with SM0257 The dose on the frontal side is automatically decreased in
lower F-side dose. radiography.
Radiography is performed with SM0258 The dose on the lateral side is automatically decreased in
lower L-side dose. radiography.
Radioscopie L interrompue (minu. SM0699 Turn OFF the fluoroscopy switch.
10 mn) Red. radiosc. To resume fluoroscopy, turn ON the fluoroscopy switch.
RAID error. NONREDUNDANT SM0154 Although radiography, fluoroscopy, and playback are
possible, the RAID is highly likely to be faulty. Immediately
archive the data to external storage media. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
RAID error. Radiography and SM0152 Writing to or reading from the RAID is not possible. Contact
F-REC disabled. your Canon Medical Systems service representative
immediately.
Recon PC may not be booted. SM0389 Confirm that the reconstruction PC has been booted.
Check status.
Reference file is damaged. SM0843 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Report cannot be created. No SM0921 Set all the trace lines and then perform saving.
analysis result.
Restriction line crosses SM0766 Draw the restriction line again so that it does not cross the
centerline. traced vessel centerline.
Return arm to rotation start SM0529 Move the C-arm to the start position for rotational DSA.
position.
Return tabletop to rotation start SM0530 The tabletop position has shifted. Adjust the tabletop
position. SM1053 position.
ROI filter operation error. SM1400 ROI filter operation error. Reset the power. If the same
Call service. error message is displayed even after the power is reset,
contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
<Power resetting procedure>
1. Press the [Emergency Stop] button.
2. Wait for 5 seconds and then press the [Power Reset]
button on the control panel of the catheterization table.
ROI set out of range. Adjust SM0376 The ROI cannot be set. Adjust the tabletop longitudinal
table long. position. SM0476 position.
RTS com error. SM1576 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Switch to backup fluoroscopy. representative.
S Save/transfer destination not set. SM0040 The storage destination or transfer destination may not be
set. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative. Check the settings in Utility mode.
Saving is not possible after radio. SM0605 Saving is disabled before the radiographic conditions are
conds. are set. set. Perform operation again after completing the current
operation.
Saving of mask image failed. SM0018 The system has failed to register the generated mask image
as the map image. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
S-DSA in progress. Operation SM0092 The operation is disabled during stepping DSA. Wait until
disabled. stepping DSA is completed and then try again.
S-DSA in progress. Operation SM0093

interrupted.

No. 2B308-309EN
596
 Message Action
S Select [Confirm Cond.]. SM0527 Press the Confirm Cond. button.
SM1019

Selection function invalid. SM1653 The Auto Table function cannot be executed using this
Cannot execute the function. system.
Set arm ceiling rot. to preset SM0351 Set the support column rotation angle of the CAS-830B to
angle of 0 or +90. the preset position and perform the operations again.
Set arm ceiling rotation angle to SM0549 Set the support column rotation angle of the CAS-830B to
preset position. SM0550 the preset position.
SM1000
SM1001

Set arm ceiling rot. angle to SM0604 Set the support column rotation angle of the CAS-830B to
preset rot. start pos. SM1002 the same angle as the end position setting for rotational
DSA.
Set arm main rotation angle SM0473 Operate the system after setting the C-arm rotational angle
SM1136
within ±30°. in the range of ±30 degrees.
Set arm slide angle within ±30°. SM0474 Operate the system after setting the C-arm sliding angle in
SM1137
the range of ±30 degrees.
Set arm within ±120°. Then SM0536 Set the C-arm operation angle for rotational DSA in the
SM1038
select [Set End]. range of ±120 degrees and then press the Set End button.
Set arm within ±120°. Then SM0542 Set the C-arm operation angle for rotational DSA in the
SM1037
select [Set Start]. range of ±120 degrees and then press the Set Start button.
Set arm column to 0/±90° or use SM0270 Set the C-arm support column rotation angle to 0°, 90°, or
SM0307 -90° and then tilt the tabletop.
anatomical angle control.
Alternatively, switch to anatomical angle control and then tilt
the tabletop.
Set ceiling long/lateral pos. to rot. SM0540 The longitudinal position or lateral position of the ceiling
end position. SM1029 support unit has been changed. Adjust the setting so that
the longitudinal and lateral positions of the ceiling-
suspended support column at the start position and end
position of rotational DSA/DA acquisition are the same.
Set floorbase rot angle outside SM1139 Set the floor base rotation angle in the range between 90°
-90° to +90° range and -90°.
Set rot. Start pos. on rot. orbit SM0492 Set the start position for rotational DSA on the C-arm
including ROI. rotational orbit that passes through the radiographic position
of the ROI.
Set rotation speed again. Then SM0546 Set the C-arm movement speed for rotational DSA again.
perform radiography.
Set SID to rotation end position. SM0538 The SID has been changed. Set the SID values at the start
SM1027 position and end position of rotational DSA/DA acquisition
so that they are the same.
Set so that start & end pos. are SM0543 Set both the Start and End positions on the C-arm orbit that
same rotation orbit. SM1031 can reproduce the movement of either C-arm rotation or
C-arm sliding.
Set support column rotation angle SM0541 The support column rotation angle of the support unit has
to rot. end pos. angle. SM1105 been changed. Adjust the setting so that the support
SM1030
column rotation angles at the start position and end position
SM1124
of rotational DSA/DA acquisition are the same.
Set tabletop long/lateral pos. to SM0539 The longitudinal position or lateral position of the
rot. end position. SM1028 catheterization tabletop has been changed. Adjust the
setting so that the longitudinal and lateral positions of the
catheterization tabletop at the start position and end position
of rotational DSA/DA acquisition are the same.

No. 2B308-309EN
597
 Message Action
S Set tabletop lateral movement to SM0298 Set the tabletop lateral movement to the center position.
center.
Set the C-arm rotation angle to 0° SM0607 Set the C-arm rotation angle to 0°.
SM1141

Set the C-arm slide angle to 0° SM0608 Set the C-arm slide angle to 0°.
SM1142

SETUP has started in Utility. SM0911 Terminate setup and then start a new analysis.
Set SID/FOV to orig pos. SM0471 Set the SID/FOV to the original position and then press the
Then press radiog. SW. SM0489 radiography switch.
SM0998

Set table sup. column rot. angle SM0297 Set the tabletop column rotation to 0°.
to 0°.
Simultaneous display failed. SM0082 Simultaneous display of the fluoroscopic image and
Switching to normal fluoro. processed fluoroscopic image (magnified fluoroscopic
image, fluoroscopic subtraction image, landmark image) has
failed. The system switches to normal fluoroscopy mode.
Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
Slager analysis is not possible. SM0893 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
recommended that tracing be performed again.
Specified restriction line is SM0774 Draw the restriction line again.
incorrect.
Specified valve position is SM0816 Perform tracing again to specify the correct valve position.
incorrect.
Specifying corrected edge is not SM0781 Of the two lines drawn by vessel contour detection, select
possible. one line as the correction target.
Support unit is operating. SM0044 Release the operation switch to stop the support unit.
SM0052

Start of analysis application SM0902 The file may be damaged. Contact your Canon Medical
failed. Systems service representative.
In LVA (BP) analysis, analysis for an inappropriate image
may have been attempted. Switch to an appropriate image.
Still image saving failed. SM0021 The system has failed to save the still image and the LIH
image during fluoroscopy. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Storage error. No image SM0020 The system has failed to register the fluoroscopic dynamic
recorded. image. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
SUB/UNSUB disabled for SM0013 The system has failed to generate a mask image. Normal
selected image. fluoroscopy mode is entered. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
Support unit is parked. SM0122 The arm is at the park position. Some operations are
SM0123 restricted.
(Support unit) Commun. failed. SM0043 Communication with the support unit is broken. Contact
Auto-pos. is limited. SM0051 your Canon Medical Systems service representative.

(Support unit) Commun. failed. SM0554 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
S-DSA disabled. representative.
(Support unit/table) Comm failed. SM0552 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Rad disabled. representative.
Switching to backup study SM0080 The study protocol was switched to the backup study
protocol protocol. Use the system as is.

No. 2B308-309EN
598
 Message Action
S System startup error. Call SM0495 System startup error. Contact your Canon Medical Systems
service. service representative.
System disk error. Call service. SM0459 The system disk is abnormal. Contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
System start abnormal. Call SM0132 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
service.
System start failed. Backup SM0097 The system has failed to start up. Restart the system.
fluoro. continued. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(System cont.) Humidity error. SM0128 Adjust the air conditioning.
Adjust air conditioning.
(System cont.) Temp. error. SM0129 Adjust the air conditioning.
Adjust air conditioning. SM0130

(System cont.) Temp. error. Sys SM0131 Adjust the air conditioning. Contact your Canon Medical
will shut down in 5 min. Systems service representative.
(SysIO) abnormal. HLC warning SM0147 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
not generated.
(SysIO) abnormal. Reboot SM0146 Reboot the system. If this message is displayed again,
system. contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
SysIO control impossible. SM1570 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
X-ray disabled. SM1571

T Target blood vessel bends too SM0777 Perform tracing again in another section of the vessel.
much.
Target blood vessel diameter is SM0772 Check the detection result.
too large.
Target images for 3D SM0386 Acquire 3D reconstruction images.
reconstruction do not exist.
Transfer of filming image failed. SM0041 The system has failed in the transfer of the printing image
(image transfer to Printing mode). Try again. If the transfer
fails again, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
(Table) Commun. failed. SM0065 Communication with the table is broken. Contact your Canon
Auto-pos. is limited. Medical Systems service representative.
The backup files could not be HP0064 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
transferred.
The backup files transfer HP0065 Confirm that the destination system has been started up
destination cannot be found. normally and then retry. If this message is displayed even
after retry, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.
The disk is not ready. HP0032 Confirm that the disk is inserted correctly. If disk mounting is
being performed, wait until the disk mounting process is
completed before retry.
The free space for user account HP0059 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
management is insufficient.
The preset information related to PB0114 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
the (auto server) could not be
acquired.
There is no license. SM0901 Restart the system.
There are no applicable images. SM0006 There is no applicable image for this function. Wait until an
applicable image is generated and then try again.

No. 2B308-309EN
599
 Message Action
T Tilt abnormal. Set tabletop tilt to SM0456 Set tilt angle of the tabletop to 0 degrees.
0°. SM0457
SM0485

Tilt disabled. Set ceiling long. to SM0455 Set the ceiling longitudinal position to a value of 30 cm or
30 cm or more. more and perform the tabletop tilting operation.
Tilt disabled. Set tabletop long. SM0453 Set the tabletop longitudinal position to 50 cm or more and
to 50 cm or more. then tilt the tabletop.
Tilt disabled. Set tabletop SM0451 Set the tabletop rotation angle to 0° and then tilt the
column rot. to 0°. tabletop.
Too few dots that specify SM0783 Draw a trace line with more vessel centerline specification
centerline. points.
Too many dots that specify SM0784 Too many vessel centerline specification points. Draw the
centerline. trace line again.
Too many segments on SM0765 Draw a trace line with fewer specification points.
centerline.
Trans in prog for 3D recon. SM0558 Perform playback after image transmission has been
Playback is interrupted. completed.
Tube bearing lube solid. SM0252 Wait for some time or select reduced operation mode.
Select reduced op. or wait.
Tube switching error. SM0458 The X-ray tube switching circuit is abnormal. Switch to the
Select other C-arm. other arm.
(Tube 1 FPD) Humidity high Call SM0751 Adjust humidity in the examination room so that it is
service. between 35% and 70%. If the error message is displayed
(Tube 1 FPD) Humidity low Call SM0752 when humidity of the examination room is within the
service. specified range, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
(Tube 1 FPD) Temp. error. SM0592 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Shutdown after study. representative.
(Tube 1 FPD) Temp. high. End SM0745 Terminate the examination and contact your Canon Medical
study and call service. Systems service representative.
(Tube 1 FPD) Temperature low. SM0746 Adjust temperature in the examination room so that it is
Call service. within the range specified in the operating requirements.
If the error message is displayed when the temperature of
the examination room is within the specified range, contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Humidity high SM0753 Adjust humidity in the examination room so that it is
Call service. between 35% and 70%. If the error message is displayed
(Tube 2 FPD) Humidity low Call SM0754 when humidity of the examination room is within the
service. specified range, contact your Canon Medical Systems
service representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Temp. error. SM0597 Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
Shutdown after study. representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Temp. high. End SM0747 Terminate the examination and contact your Canon Medical
study and call service. Systems service representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Temperature low. SM0748 Adjust temperature in the examination room so that it is
Call service. within the range specified in the operating requirements.
If the error message is displayed when the temperature of
the examination room is within the specified range, contact
your Canon Medical Systems service representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
600
 Message Action
W W01 Set table column rotation SM0448 Set the tabletop rotation angle to 0°.
to center.
W02 Step-slide set incorrectly SM0449 Move the tabletop toward the foot-end in the longitudinal
Move tabletop to long. direction and then set step-sliding.
Center
W05 Release the step-slide SM0450 Release the Step-sliding test button.
switch.
W10 Sup. col. not at rot. set SM0265 Set the support column rotation position to the set position
pos. Op is limited. to operate the support unit.
W11 Parking. Manual SM0266 When the support unit is at the park position, the operations
operation is not possible. SM0303 are disabled in order to ensure safety. To operate the
support unit, move it to the set position.
W12 Tube not at set position or SM0267 Move the X-ray tube assembly to the set position or park
park position. SM0304 position.
W12 Interference with floor. SM0452 The catheterization table cannot be operated in the
Op. is limited. direction toward the floor. Operate the table in the direction
away from the floor.
W13 Outside isocenter area. SM0268 Carefully operate the support unit to avoid contact.
Avoid interference. SM0305

W14 Head end outside long. SM0269

The Ω-arm approaches the C-arm. Move the Ω-arm to the
operation range. SM0306 patient foot end.
W14 Tilt disabled. Step-slide SM0454 During step-sliding setting, tabletop tilting is disabled.
being set.
W18 Other arm not in Park pos. SM0273 Move the other support unit to the park position.
Operation is limited. SM0308

W20 Detector front touch SM0274 The support unit and catheterization table are automatically
sensor actuated. SM0309 stopped and their movements are limited. Press the
override switch, gently move the touch sensor away from
the point of contact, and correct the cause.
W21 Tube touch sensor SM0275 The support unit and catheterization table are automatically
actuated. SM0310 stopped and their movements are limited. Press the
override switch, gently move the touch sensor away from
the point of contact, and correct the cause.
W22 Arm touch sensor SM0276 Movements of the main rotation axis and slide axis of the
actuated. SM0331 support unit stop immediately. Press the override switch,
gently retract the section that is in contact, and eliminate the
cause.
W27 Touch sensor invalid. SM0281 The touch sensor signal is set as invalid. Contact your
Call service. SM0312 Canon Medical Systems service representative to set it as
valid for safety.
W30 Interfer. with tabletop. SM0282 The tabletop and the support unit are in the interference
Support unit op. is slow. SM0313 area.
W31 Interfer. with table col. SM0283 The C-arm cannot be moved in the direction toward the
Support unit op. is limited. SM0314 table support column. Move the C-arm in the opposite
direction.
W32 Interfer. with floor. SM0284 The C-arm cannot be moved in the direction toward the
Operation is limited. SM0315 floor. Move the C-arm in the opposite direction.
W33 Interfer. with wall. SM0285 The C-arm cannot be moved in the direction toward the
Operation is limited. SM0316 room wall. Move the C-arm in the opposite direction.

No. 2B308-309EN
601
 Message Action
W W34 Interfer. with tabletop end. SM0286 The tabletop and the support unit are in the interference
Support unit op. slow. SM0317 area.
W35 Interfer. with other arm. SM0287 An interference warning is actuated. Move the support unit
Op. is limited. SM0318 outside the interference range and then perform operation.
For biplane systems, the support unit automatically stops
and cannot be operated in the direction in which contact
occurs. In this case, release hands from the operation
switch once to enable operation. Be extremely careful to
avoid contact.
W35 Colum rot brake released SM1292 Support column rotation is in progress. Be careful to avoid
watch step. catching your foot between the floor and the support unit.
W39 Tilt abnormal. Set SM0602 Set the tilt angle of the tabletop to 0 degrees.
tabletop tilt to 0°. SM0603

W3B Table operation is limited. SM1348 Movement of the operating table is restricted.
W40 Data out of range. SM0072 This position is outside the auto-positioning data save
Check position. SM0289 range. Check the position.
SM0319

W41 Unable to STORE SM0071 An attempt was made to save the data to a number for
position. Select another SM0290 which auto-positioning setting is not permitted. Specify
No. SM0320 another number.
W42 Unable to STORE SM0049
The biplane position can be saved only when the Ω-arm is
position. Move Ω-arm to SM0291 positioned within the isocenter permissible range. Move the
isocenter area. SM0321
Ω-arm into the isocenter permissible range.
W43 Unable to STORE SM0047 Auto-positioning data can be saved only when C-arm
position. Set column to SM0055 support column rotation is at the set position. Move the
90/0/-90. SM0292 support column to the set position.
SM0322

W44 Unable to STORE SM0050 The position cannot be saved when the X-ray tube
position. Move X-ray tube SM0058 assembly of the Ω-arm is not at the set position. Move the
to set position SM0293 X-ray tube assembly to the set position.
SM0323

W45 Unable to STORE SM0048 Set the support units apart and save the data again.
position. Interference area SM0056

for BP. SM0294

SM0324

W46 Unable to STORE SM0046 Auto-positioning data in the interference area cannot be
position. Interference SM0054 saved. Move the C-arm to the appropriate position.
area. SM0295
SM0325

W55 Push collimator lever to SM0948 Automatic control for FPD rotation is cancelled. Push the
display head-up image. SM0959 collimator lever on the tableside console. The system re-
enters automatic control mode.

No. 2B308-309EN
602
 Message Action
W W92 Error in op. panel. SM1435 Failure of the tableside console or satellite console (option).
Support unit operable. Contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative to arrange for repair.
<Failure of the tableside console>
The arm rotation/sliding joystick is faulty. The joystick
remains tilted and does not return to the center position. As
a result, the arm is moved by simply pulling the arm/tabletop
operation start lever.
Use the optional satellite console to operate the arm until
the tableside console has been repaired.
It is still possible to operate the arm using the tableside
console, but in this case, be sure to follow the instructions
below.
If the arm starts moving by simply pulling the arm/tabletop
operation start lever, immediately tilt the arm rotation/sliding
joystick in the intended direction or release the lever to stop
arm movement.
<Failure of the satellite console (option)>
The C-arm operating lever on the satellite console is faulty.
The lever remains tilted and does not return to the center
position. As a result, the arm is moved by simply pressing
the button at the top of the lever.
Use the tableside console to operate the arm until the
satellite console has been repaired.
It is still possible to operate the arm using the satellite
console, but in this case, be sure to follow the instructions
below.
If the arm starts moving by simply pressing the button at the
top of the lever, immediately tilt the lever in the intended
direction or release the lever to stop arm movement.
W99 Service mode interlock SM0296 The system is in service mode and interlocks are
released. SM0326 overridden. This condition is dangerous. Contact your
Canon Medical Systems service representative.
Watch flow of contrast med. SM0375 Acquisition of contrast image is started. Start tabletop
Step tabletop to follow med. stepping operation when contrast medium reaches the
second stage.
Writing to the disk failed. HP0033 Confirm that the disk is not write-protected.
X X10 HV GEN. error. SM0246 The medium focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X11 HV GEN. error. SM0246 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Change focus. defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
X12 HV GEN. error. SM0246
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small or large focus
Change focus. become possible (automatic focus selection).
Call service. After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X13 HV GEN. error. SM0246 Systems representative.
Change focus.
Call service.

No. 2B308-309EN
603
 Message Action
X X14 HV GEN. error. SM0246 The large focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X15 HV GEN. error. SM0246 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Change focus. defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
X16 HV GEN. error. SM0246
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small or medium focus
Change focus. become possible (automatic focus selection).
Call service. After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X17 HV GEN. error. SM0246 Systems representative.
Change focus.
Call service.
X1D HV GEN. error. SM0246 The medium focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small or large focus
become possible (automatic focus selection).
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X1E HV GEN. error. SM0246 The medium and large focuses cannot be used.
Change focus. Fluoroscopy and radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X1F HV GEN. error. SM0246 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Change focus. defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small focus become
possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
604
 Message Action
X20 HV GEN. error. SM0246 The small focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X21 HV GEN. error. SM0246 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Change focus. defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
X22 HV GEN. error. SM0246
fluoroscopy and radiography with the medium or large focus
Change focus. become possible (automatic focus selection).
Call service. After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X27 HV GEN. error. SM0246 Systems representative.
Change focus.
Call service.
X2D HV GEN. error. SM0246

Change focus.
Call service.
X2E HV GEN. error. SM0246

Change focus.
Call service.
X2F HV GEN. error. SM0246

Change focus.
Call service.

No. 2B308-309EN
605
 Message Action
X X30 HV GEN. error. SM0247 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
Radio. Disabled disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X31 HV GEN. error. SM0247 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Radio. Disabled defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
X32 HV GEN. error. SM0247
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
Radio. Disabled After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Call service. Systems representative.
X33 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X34 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X38 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X39 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3A HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3C HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3D HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3E HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3F HV GEN. SM0248 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
temp. high. SM0253 disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
606
 Message Action
X X40 HV GEN. error. SM0247 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
Radio. Disabled disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X41 HV GEN. error. SM0247 If the system does not recover, the system may be
Radio. Disabled defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
X42 HV GEN. error. SM0247
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
Radio. Disabled After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Call service. Systems representative.
X43 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X44 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X48 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X49 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4A HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4C HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4D HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4E HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4F HV GEN. SM0248 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
temp. high. SM0253 disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
607
 Message Action
X X52 HV GEN. SM0249 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
error. Use cont disabled to ensure safety.
fluoro./radio. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X53 HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
temp. high. SM0253 fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
Select reduced safety.
op. or wait. If the system does not recover even after several minutes
have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X54 HV GEN. SM0249 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
error. Use cont fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
fluoro./radio. safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
X62 HV GEN. SM0249 If the system does not recover, the system may be
error. Use cont defective.
fluoro./radio. Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
Call service. The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X63 HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
temp. high. SM0253 fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
Select reduced safety.
op. or wait. If the system does not recover even after several minutes
have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
608
 Message Action
X X64 HV GEN. SM0249 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
error. Use cont fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
fluoro./radio. safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X70 HV GEN. SM0249 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use cont Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
fluoro./radio. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
X71 HV GEN. SM0249 defective.
error. Use cont Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
fluoro./radio. The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
Call service. fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X72 HV GEN. SM0251
Systems representative.
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X74 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X75 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X76 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X77 Tube bear- SM0252 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
ing lube solid. Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Use reduced If the system does not start up after 15 minutes, press
op. or wait. [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
609
 Message Action
X X79 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
X7B HV GEN. SM0251 defective.
error. Use Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
cont. fluoro. The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
Call service. fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X7C HV GEN. SM0251
Systems representative.
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X7D HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
temp. high. SM0253 Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X7E HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
X80 HV GEN. SM0251 defective.
error. Use Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
cont. fluoro. The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
Call service. fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X81 HV GEN. SM0251
Systems representative.
error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X82 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X84 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X85 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X86 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.

No. 2B308-309EN
610
 Message Action
X X87 Tube bear- SM0252 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
ing lube solid. Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Use reduced If the system does not start up after 15 minutes, press
op. or wait. [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X89 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X8B HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery. If the
Call service. system does not recover, insufficient cooling water is a
likely possibility.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
X8C HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X8D HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
temp. high. SM0253 Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
611
 Message Action
X X8E HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.
X92 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery. If the
Call service. system does not recover, insufficient cooling water is a
likely possibility.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems service representative.
X96 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
612
 Message Action
X X99 HV GEN. error. SM0254 Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
X9A HV GEN. error. SM0254 defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] and then complete the study.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
X9B HV GEN. error. SM0254
Systems representative.
Call service.
X9D HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA0 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA1 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA3 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA4 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA7 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA8 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA9 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XAF HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XB0 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XB1 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XB3 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XB5 HV GEN. error. SM0247 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
Call service. disabled to ensure safety.
Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
Systems representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
613
 Message Action
XB8 HV GEN. error. SM0254 Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
XBB HV GEN. error. SM0254 defective.
Call service. Press [Reduce] and then complete the study.
After the study is completed, contact your Canon Medical
XBC HV GEN. error. SM0254
Systems representative.
Call service.
XBE HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XBF HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XC0 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XC1 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XC2 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XC3 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XC4 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XC5 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XC6 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
X-ray exposure sw error in exam SM0383 Turn OFF the X-ray exposure switch for radiography and
room. Reboot system. fluoroscopy and reboot the system.
X-ray exposure sw error in SM0384 If the same message is displayed again after the system is
control room. Reboot system. rebooted, contact your Canon Medical Systems service
representative.

No. 2B308-309EN
614
 Pre-operational check table for the INFX-8000V/B, 8000V/Y, 8000V/P SP Cardiac / Vascular systems MM/DD Examination room No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Name of person performing the checks
Confirm that the operating environmental conditions are satisfied.
Confirm that each unit has been cleaned and sterilized.
Confirm that the control switches are not stained.
Confirm that the cables are not cut, caught, bent, or twisted.
Confirm that there is no object that may cause interference within the
operation ranges of the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor
suspension unit.
Confirm that the TV monitor is fixed to the monitor suspension unit.
Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or temperature
increase.
Confirm that no error message is displayed on the system console monitor.
Confirm that communication with the patient in the examination room is
possible using the intercom microphone.
Confirm that the tableside console is located at the registered position.
Confirm that the drive power of the support unit and catheterization table is
turned OFF when the Emergency stop button is pressed.
No. 2B308-309EN

In the emergency stop status, confirm that the drive power can be turned ON
using the Power reset button of the catheterization table.
Confirm that the FPD touch sensor operates normally.
615

Confirm that the X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor operates normally.
Confirm that the floor base rotation touch sensor operates normally.
Confirm that the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor-suspension
unit operate normally, that operation is smooth, and that there is no
backlash, abnormal sound, or unusual smell.
Confirm that fluoroscopy and radiography can be performed (with an
absorbing object positioned on the catheterization table).
Confirm that the LEDs of the X-ray tube assembly Ready indicator and the
X-ray ON indicator light at the correct timings.
Confirm that an appropriate brightness is set by the ABC function.
Confirm that the FOV size can be switched during fluoroscopy.
Confirm that no abnormal sound is generated during X-ray exposure (such
as a rotation sound from the X-ray tube assembly).
Confirm that X-ray generation can be stopped at any given point in time.
Confirm that the functions assigned to the function buttons of the footswitch
can be performed.
Confirm that the emergency power supply cable is prepared. (*1)
Confirm that the battery of the wireless footswitch is charged. (*1)
Confirm that the green LED of the wireless footswitch lights. (*1)
Confirm that the orange LED or red LED of the wireless footswitch does not
light. (*1)

*1) When the wireless footswitch (option) is used.

 Pre-operational check table for the INFX-8000V/B, 8000V/Y, 8000V/P BP Cardiac / Vascular systems MM/DD Examination room No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Name of person performing the checks
Confirm that the operating environmental conditions are satisfied.
Confirm that each unit has been cleaned and sterilized.
Confirm that the control switches are not stained.
Confirm that the cables are not cut, caught, bent, or twisted.
Confirm that there is no object that may cause interference within the operation
ranges of the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor suspension unit.
Confirm that the TV monitor is fixed to the monitor suspension unit.
Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or temperature
increase.
Confirm that no error message is displayed on the system console monitor.
Confirm that communication with the patient in the examination room is
possible using the intercom microphone.
Confirm that the tableside console is located at the registered position.
Confirm that the drive power of the support unit and catheterization table is
turned OFF when the Emergency stop button is pressed.
In the emergency stop status, confirm that the drive power can be turned ON
No. 2B308-309EN

using the Power reset button of the catheterization table.

Confirm that the FPD touch sensor of the C-arm operates normally.
Confirm that the X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor of the C-arm
616

operates normally.
Confirm that the floor base rotation touch sensor operates normally.
Confirm that the FPD touch sensor of the Ω-arm operates normally.
Confirm that the X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor of the Ω-arm
operates normally.
Confirm that the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor-suspension
unit operate normally, that operation is smooth, and that there is no backlash,
abnormal sound, or unusual smell.
Confirm that fluoroscopy and radiography can be performed (with an absorbing
object positioned on the catheterization table).
Confirm that the LEDs of the X-ray tube assembly, Ready indicator, and X-ray
ON indicator light at the correct timings.
Confirm that an appropriate brightness is set by the ABC function.
Confirm that the FOV size can be switched during fluoroscopy.
Confirm that no abnormal sound is generated during X-ray exposure (such as
a rotation sound from the X-ray tube assembly).
Confirm that X-ray generation can be stopped at any given point in time.
Confirm that the functions assigned to the function buttons of the footswitch
can be performed.
 Pre-operational check table for the INFX-8000V/B, 8000V/Y, 8000V/P BP Cardiac / Vascular systems MM/DD Examination room No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Name of person performing the checks
Confirm that the emergency power supply cable is prepared. (*1)
Confirm that the battery of the wireless footswitch is charged. (*1)
Confirm that the green LED of the wireless footswitch lights. (*1)
Confirm that the orange LED or red LED of the wireless footswitch does not
light. (*1)

*1) When the wireless footswitch (option) is used.

No. 2B308-309EN
617
LEGAL MANUFACTURER

1385, SHIMOISHIGAMI, OTAWARA-SHI, TOCHIGI 324-8550, JAPAN